Class Series II

Programmer’s Manual

Cov er s t he f ol l ow i ng model s:
A-Class / A-Class Mark II
MP Compact4 Mark II
M-Class Mark II
E-Class Mark II
H-Class
I-Class
Ex2







CG Times (based upon Times New Roman), CG Triumvirate, MicroType, and TrueType are
trademarks of the AGFA Monotype Corporation.
PCL, Intellifont, and HP Laser JetII are trademarks of the Hewlett Packard Corporation.
Macintosh is a trademark of the Apple Corporation.
Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation.
All other brand and product names are trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks,
or registered service marks of their respective companies.

Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on the part of Datamax-O’Neil Corporation. No part of this manual may be
reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, for any purpose other than the
purchaser’s personal use, without the expressed written permission of Datamax-O’Neil
Corporation.


All rights reserved

Copyright © 2010, Datamax-O’Neil

Part Number 88-2341-01

Revision K


i
Cont ent s


1 Over vi ew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Who Should Use this Manual ............................................................................... 1
The Scope of this Manual ..................................................................................... 1
General Conventions............................................................................................ 3
Computer Entry and Display Conventions............................................................ 3
Important Safety Instructions................................................................................ 3
Special Instructions .............................................................................................. 4
Typical Data Flow Sequence................................................................................ 4

2 Cont r ol Code Command Funct i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Introduction........................................................................................... 9
Attention-Getters .................................................................................................. 9
Alternate Control Code Modes ........................................................................... 10


3 I mmedi at e Command Funct i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Introduction......................................................................................... 11
SOH # Reset ................................................................................................... 11
SOH * Reset ................................................................................................... 11
SOH A Send ASCII Status String..................................................................... 12
SOH a Send ASCII Extended Status String..................................................... 12
SOH B Toggle Pause....................................................................................... 13
SOH C Stop/Cancel ......................................................................................... 14
SOH D SOH Shutdown.................................................................................... 14
SOH E Send Batch Remaining Quantity.......................................................... 14
SOH e Send Batch Printed Quantity................................................................ 15
SOH F Send Status Byte................................................................................. 15

ii
4 Sy st em- Level Command Funct i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Introduction......................................................................................... 17
STX A Set Time and Date............................................................................... 17
STX a Enable Feedback Characters .............................................................. 18
STX B Get Printer Time and Date Information................................................ 18
STX c Set Continuous Paper Length.............................................................. 19
STX E Set Quantity for Stored Label............................................................... 19
STX e Select Edge Sensor ............................................................................. 20
STX F Form Feed ........................................................................................... 20
STX f Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed)...................................................... 20
STX G Print Last Label Format........................................................................ 21
STX I Input Image Data ................................................................................. 21
STX i Scalable Font Downloading................................................................. 22
STX J Set Pause for Each Label .................................................................... 23
STX K Extended System-Level Commands.................................................... 23
STX k Test RS-232 Port ................................................................................. 23
STX L Enter Label Formatting Command Mode............................................. 23
STX M Set Maximum Label Length................................................................. 24
STX m Set Printer to Metric Mode................................................................... 24
STX n Set Printer to Imperial Mode ................................................................ 24
STX O Set Start of Print Position..................................................................... 25
STX o Cycle Cutter ......................................................................................... 26
STX P Set Hex Dump Mode............................................................................ 26
STX p Controlled Pause ................................................................................. 26
STX Q Clear All Modules................................................................................. 27
STX q Clear Module ....................................................................................... 27
STX R Ribbon Saver Control........................................................................... 27
STX r Select Reflective Sensor...................................................................... 28
STX S Set Feed Speed................................................................................... 28
STX T Print Quality Label................................................................................ 28
STX t Test DRAM Memory Module................................................................ 29
STX U Label Format String Replacement Field............................................... 29
STX V Software Switch Settings ..................................................................... 31
STX v Request Firmware Version .................................................................. 32
STX W Request Memory Module Information.................................................. 32


iii
STX w Test Flash Memory Module ................................................................. 33
STX X Set Default Module .............................................................................. 33
STX x Delete File from Module....................................................................... 34
STX Y Output Sensor Values.......................................................................... 35
STX y Select Font Symbol Set ....................................................................... 35
STX Z Print Configuration Label ..................................................................... 36
STX z Pack Module........................................................................................ 36

5 Ex t ended Sy st em- Level Command Funct i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Introduction......................................................................................... 37
STX K Memory Configuration ......................................................................... 37
STX K}E Empty Sensor Calibration.................................................................... 38
STX K}M Manual Media Calibration................................................................... 39
STX K}Q Quick Media Calibration...................................................................... 39
STX KaR Read Data from RFID Tag.................................................................. 40
STX KaW Write Data to RFID Tag ..................................................................... 41
STX Kb Backfeed Time Delay........................................................................... 41
STX KC Get Configuration................................................................................. 42
STX Kc Configuration Set ................................................................................. 43
STX KD Database Configuration..................................................................... 102
STX Kd Set File as Factory Default................................................................. 103
STX KE Character Encoding........................................................................... 103
STX KF Select Factory Defaults...................................................................... 105
STX Kf Set Present Distance......................................................................... 105
STX KH Dot Check.......................................................................................... 106
STX KJ Assign Communication Port (MCL).................................................... 107
STX KI GPIO Input......................................................................................... 108
STX Kn NIC Reset .......................................................................................... 108
STX KO GPIO Output ...................................................................................... 109
STX Kp Module Protection.............................................................................. 110
STX KQ Query Memory Configuration ........................................................... 111
STX Kq Query Memory Configuration............................................................. 113
STX KR Reset Memory Configuration............................................................. 114
STX Kr Resettable Counter Reset.................................................................. 114
STX KS Memory Configuration, Scalable Font Cache .................................... 114

iv
STX KtA Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag.................................. 115
STX KtD Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag........................ 115
STX KtE Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit................................... 116
STX KtH Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host .................................... 116
STX KtR Read Data from RFID Tag................................................................. 117
STX KtW Write Data to RFID Tag .................................................................... 119
STX KuB Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section................................................... 120
STX KuF Send RFID Device Firmware Version............................................... 120
STX KuJ Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section....................................................... 120
STX KuR Read Data from RFID Tag................................................................ 121
STX KuW Write Data to RFID Tag ................................................................... 122
STX KV Verifier Enable/Disable ...................................................................... 122
STX KW Memory Configuration, Printable Label Width.................................... 122
STX Kx Delete Configuration File ................................................................... 123
STX KZ Immediately Set Parameter ............................................................... 123

6 Label For mat t i ng Command Funct i ons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Introduction........................................................................................125
: Set Cut by Amount............................................................................. 125
A Set Format Attribute........................................................................... 126
B Bar Code Magnification...................................................................... 127
C Set Column Offset Amount ................................................................ 127
c Set Cut by Amount............................................................................. 128
D Set Dot Size Width and Height .......................................................... 128
E Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label ............................ 129
e Recall Printer Configuration............................................................... 129
F Advanced Format Attributes .............................................................. 129
f Set Present Speed............................................................................. 130
G Place Data in Global Register............................................................ 130
H Enter Heat Setting ............................................................................. 131
J Justification........................................................................................ 131
M Select Mirror Mode............................................................................. 132
m Set Metric Mode................................................................................. 132
n Set Inch (Imperial) Mode.................................................................... 132
P Set Print Speed.................................................................................. 133


v
p Set Backfeed Speed.......................................................................... 133
Q Set Quantity of Labels to Print ........................................................... 134
R Set Row Offset Amount ..................................................................... 134
r Recall Stored Label Format ............................................................... 135
S Set Feed Speed................................................................................. 136
s Store Label Format in Module............................................................ 136
T Set Field Data Line Terminator .......................................................... 137
U Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field .......................... 137
X Terminate Label Formatting Mode..................................................... 138
y Select Font Symbol Set ..................................................................... 138
z Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”................................................................. 139
+ (>)(() Make Last Field Entered Increment ................................................. 139
– (<)()) Make Last Field Entered Decrement................................................ 140
^ Set Count by Amount......................................................................... 141
Special Label Formatting Command Functions ..........................................142
STX S Recall Global Data and Place in Field................................................ 142
STX T Print Time and Date........................................................................... 142

7 Font Loadi ng Command Funct i ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Introduction........................................................................................145
*c###D Assign Font ID Number ..................................................................... 145
)s###W Font Descriptor .................................................................................. 146
*c###E Character Code ................................................................................. 146
(s#W Character Download Data.................................................................. 146

8 Gener at i ng Label For mat s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Introduction........................................................................................147
Format Record Commands .............................................................................. 147
Generating Records ......................................................................................... 148
The Structure of a Record ................................................................................ 148
Record Structure Types.................................................................................... 152
Advanced Format Attributes............................................................................. 161


vi
Appendi x A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
ASCII Control Chart..............................................................................165

Appendi x B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Sample Programs.................................................................................167

Appendi x C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Available Fonts – Sizes, References, and Samples .....................................177

Appendi x D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Reset Codes........................................................................................183

Appendi x E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Single Byte Symbol Sets .......................................................................185

Appendi x F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Bar Code Summary Data.......................................................................197
Bar Code Default Widths and Heights ......................................................200

Appendi x G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Bar Code Details..................................................................................203

Appendi x H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping .......................................249



vii
Appendi x I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Symbol Sets and Character Maps ...........................................................251
Double-Byte Symbols, Chinese, Kanji, and Korean ....................................254

Appendi x J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port Applications..............................255

Appendi x K. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Maximum Field & Character Values .........................................................269
Print Resolutions and Maximum Width & Record Column Values...................270
Column, Present, & Row Adjust Fine Tune Range ......................................271
Memory Module Identifiers and Allocations...............................................272

Appendi x L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Speed Ranges .....................................................................................273

Appendi x M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Commands by Function.........................................................................275

Appendi x N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Image Loading ....................................................................................277

Appendi x O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes.................................279

Appendi x P. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples.........281

viii
Appendi x Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Plug and Play IDs.................................................................................291

Appendi x R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Line Mode...........................................................................................293

Appendi x S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
RFID Overview ....................................................................................297

Appendi x T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
WiFi Region Country Codes....................................................................303

Appendi x U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Graphics Display Icon Key .....................................................................309
Control Panel Button Sequences.............................................................310

Appendi x V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Bar Code Symbology Information Resources ............................................313

Gl ossar y . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 1

1
Over vi ew


Who Shoul d Use t hi s Manual

This manual is intended for programmers who wish to create their own label production
software.


The Scope of t hi s Manual

This manual, arranged alphabetically by command, explains Datamax-O’Neil Programming
Language (DPL) and its related uses in the writing, loading and storing of programs for the
control and production of label formats (designs) for the following printers at, or above, the
listed firmware version below:

Printer Firmware Version
A-Class 11.08
A-Class Mark II 12.07
E-Class Mark II 12.01
EX2 11.08
H-Class 12.071
I-Class 11.08
M-Class Mark II 12.071
MP Compact4 Mark II 14.02

Model distinctions, including configurations (i.e., Display or Non-Display) and equipment
types (e.g., GPIO-1, graphics display, RFID, etc.), will be indicated in this text to
differentiate command compatibility. The appendices of this manual also contain details that
cannot be ignored; the use of any command will require checking for possible exclusionary
conditions.

E

• See the <STX>KC command for information regarding attainment of the printer’s firmware
version; and then, if necessary, upgrade that firmware. Upgrades are available at
http://www.datamax-oneil.com.

• Programming information for Class Series printers (or firmware versions for Class Series
printers) not found in this manual can be found in the Class Series Programmer’s Manual
(part number 88-2316-01), except the S-Class printer and the legacy model printers which
can be found in the DPL Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2051-01); and, for the E-
3202 see the E-3202 Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2257-01). All manuals can be
downloaded from our web site at http://www.datamax-oneil.com.

• References to “Menu Settings” refer either to the set-up menu or to the system menu of
the printer; consult to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for details.

• Where applicable, printer responses to a host device will depend upon the communication
port, port settings, and cabling.
Overview
2 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
This manual contains the following sections and appendices:

¡ OVERVIEW on page 1
Contents, organization, and conventions used in this manual; also includes a
typical data flow sequence for the printer.


¡ CONTROL CODE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 9
Description of the attention-getter characters necessary for the printer to receive a
command sequence, and available alternate characters and line terminators.


¡ IMMEDIATE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 11
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that perform status queries and
printer control commands.


¡ SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 17
Description of the commands, listed alphabetically, that control the printer and
allow scalable font and image downloads.


¡ EXTENDED SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 37
Description of the commands (listed alphabetically) that control the printer.


¡ LABEL FORMATTING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 125
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, that control the position of text and
images on the media, print or store, and end the formatting process.


¡ FONT LOADING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 145
Description of commands, listed alphabetically, used when downloading font data
in PCL-4 compatible bitmaps.


¡ GENERATING LABEL FORMATS on page 147
Description of the structure of records, the different types, and their use in
generating label formats.


¡ APPENDICES on pages 165 – 313
These contain details that cannot be ignored including various tables, programming
examples, printer default values, and bar code symbology details. See the Table of
Contents for specific content information.


¡ GLOSSARY on page 315
Definitions of words, abbreviations, and acronyms used in this manual.

Overview

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 3
Gener al Convent i ons

These are some of the conventions followed in this manual:

º On the header of each page, the name of the section.

º On the footer of each page, the page number and the title of the manual.

º Names of other manuals referenced are in I t al i cs.

º Notes are added to bring your attention to important considerations, tips or helpful
suggestions.

º Boldface is also used to bring your attention to important information.

º This manual refers to IBM-PC based keyboard command characters for access to the
ASCII character set. Systems based on different formats (e.g., Apple’s Macintosh )
should use the appropriate keyboard command to access the desired ASCII
character. See Appendix A for the ASCII character set.


Comput er Ent r y and Di spl ay Convent i ons

Command syntax and samples are formatted as follows:

º The Courier font in boldface indicates the DPL command syntax, and I t al i cs are
used to indicate the command syntax parameters.

º Regular Courier font indicates sample commands, files and printer responses.

º Square brackets ([ ]) indicate that the item is optional.

º <CR> is used to identify the line termination character. Other strings placed
between < > in this manual represent the character of the same ASCII name, and
are single-byte hexadecimal values (e.g., <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> equal 02, 0D,
and 0D, respectively).

º Hexadecimal values are often displayed in “C” programming language conventions
(e.g., 0x02 = 02 hex, 0x41 = 41 hex, etc.)


I mpor t ant Saf et y I nst r uct i ons


The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the
user to the presence of important operating and maintenance instructions.


Overview
4 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Speci al I nst r uct i ons

E

The green check box is intended to alert the user to conventions used within this
text or to notable operating details of the printer.



Ty pi cal Dat a Fl ow Sequence

The typical data flow sequence is summarized in the following bullets and detailed in the
table below. Printer Commands data is transmitted to the printer as shown in the table from
left to right, top to bottom.

º Status commands
º Configuration commands
º Download commands
º Label format
º Status commands
º Label reprint commands
º Memory cleanup

Printer Commands Description Notes
<SOH>A
<STX>WG
“Status” commands: Get
Status, Request Memory
Module Storage
Information…
Optional,
bidirectional
communication
required for these
commands.
<STX>O220
<STX>n
<STX>V0
“Configuration”
commands, download
image…
See <STX>Kc to
reduce configuration
commands
transferred
<SOH>D
<STX>IApImagename<CR>image data...data
<CR>
“Download” commands,
image, fonts…
RAM (temporary) or
Flash (semi-
permanent)
memory.
<STX>L Begin label
D11 Label Header record
131100000500050Typical text field 01
Label Formatting Data
record –
Object type, orientation,
position, data
Q0001 Label Quantity
E Label Terminate record
Existing label
formats may be
recalled. Label
header records are
not required.
Overview

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 5

Printer Commands Description Notes
<SOH>A Status command
Optional,
bidirectional
communication
required for these
commands.
<STX>U01new data for field 01
<STX>E0005
<STX>G
Reprint with New Data
Records
Used for fast
reprints.
<STX>xImagename<CR>
<STX>zA
Memory cleanup
Typically used for
temporary storage.


Commands are available for retrieving stored label formats, updating data, and adding new
data. These techniques are used for increasing throughput; see <STX>G, Label Recall
Command “r”, and Label Save Command “s”.

Typical commands used in the various stages shown above are listed in the tables that
follow.




Conf i gur at i on Commands

The following table lists some commands useful in controlling printer configuration.
These commands are generally effective only for the current power-up session; toggling
power restores the default configuration. See <STX>Kc for changes to the default power-
up configuration. Changing the default power-up configuration and saving objects in
printer Flash memory can reduce the data transmitted for each label and therefore
improve throughput.

Configuration
Command
Name Function
<STX>A Set Date and Time Sets Date and Time.
<STX>c Set Continuous Paper Length
Must be 0000 for gap media; not used
for reflective media.
<STX>e Set Edge Sensor
Sets sensing for gap or registration hole
type stock.

Overview
6 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Configuration
Command
Name Function
<STX>Kf Set Present Distance
Determines label stop position, head
relative. <STX>f edge sensor relative
equivalent command, older models.
<STX>Kc Configuration Set
Determines default power-up
configuration.
<STX>F Send Form Feed
Sets the stop position of the printed
label.
<STX>M Set Maximum Label Length
Length to search for next gap or
reflective mark; not used with
continuous media.
<STX>m Set to Metric Mode
Subsequent measurements interpreted
in metric (most units, mm/10). Label
equivalent command can be used.
<STX>n Set to Inch Mode
Subsequent measurements interpreted
in inches (most units in/100) label
equivalent command can be used.
<STX>O Set Start of Print Position
Effect is not on the label immediately
following command since media position
is at Start of Print between labels;
<STX>K default position relative 64
in/100 maximum deviation.
<STX>S Set Feed Rate Sets blank label movement speed.
<STX>V Software Switch
Enables optional hardware, cutter, and
present sensor.

Overview

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 7
Dow nl oad Commands

Download
Command
Name Function
<STX>I Download Image
Downloads Image to selected memory
module.
<STX>i Download Scalable Font
Downloads Scalable Font to selected
memory module.
<ESC> Download Bitmapped Font
Downloads Bitmapped Font to selected
memory module.






Label Header Commands

These commands determine how the label formatting occurs, the print quality and
quantity. They are typically issued immediately following the <STX>L start of the label
format. The Format Attribute (A) and the Offset (C, R) commands can be changed at
any point between format records to achieve desired effects.

Label Header Command Name
A Set Format Attribute
C Column Offset
D Set Width and Dot Size
H Set Heat Setting
M Set Mirror Mode
P Set Print Speed
P Set Backup Speed
Q Set Quantity
R Set Row Offset
S Set Feed Speed



Overview
8 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 9
2
Cont r ol Code Command Funct i ons


I nt r odu ct i on

The printer requires a special “attention-getter” character in order to receive a command
sequence, informing the printer that it is about to receive a command and the type of
command it will be. Control Commands, System-Level Commands, and Font Loading
Commands have their own unique attention-getter, followed by a command character that
directs printer action.


At t ent i on- Get t er s

The attention-getters (e.g., “SOH”) are standard ASCII control labels that represent a one
character control code (i.e., ^A or Ctrl A). Appendix A contains the entire ASCII Control
Code Chart.

Attention-Getter ASCII Character Decimal Value HEX Value
Immediate Commands SOH 1 01
System-Level Commands STX 2 02
Font Loading Commands ESC 27 1B

Table 2-1: Attention Getter Listings


Easy Cont r ol Codes

DPL has been enhanced to accept a 3-character SOH and STX sequence. Easy Control Codes
are always enabled, whether in Standard, Alternate, Alternate 2, or Custom Control Code
Mode. Two types of sequences have been created to meet any application’s requirements.
Use these sequences where you normally would use a single SOH or STX character.

Control Character
3 “%” Character
Sequence
3 “^”Character
Sequence
Command Type
SOH %01 ^01 Control
STX %02 ^02 System

Table 2-2: Easy Control Code Listings


Control Code Command Functions

10 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Al t er nat e Cont r ol Code Modes

For systems unable to transmit certain control codes, Alternate Control Code Modes are
available. Configuring the printer to operate in an Alternate Control Code Mode (selected via
the Setup Menu, the <STX>Kc command or, where applicable, the <STX>KD command)
requires the substitution of Standard Control Characters with Alternate Control Characters in
what is otherwise a normal data stream.

Control
Character
Standard Alternate Alternate 2 Custom
Command
Type
SOH 0x01 0x5E 0x5E Control
STX 0x02 0x7E 0x7E System
CR 0x0D 0x0D 0x7C Line Termination
ESC 0x1B 0x1B 0x1B Font Loading
“Count By”
[1]
0x5E 0x40 0x40
User Defined

Label Formatting
[1]
See Label Formatting Commands, ^ set count by amount.

Table 2-3: Alternate Control Code Listings


E

Throughout this manual <SOH>, <STX>, <CR>, <ESC>, and ^ will be used to indicate control
codes. The actual values will depend on whether standard or alternate control codes are
enabled for the particular application.


Alternate Line Terminator Example: Alternate Control Codes provide for substitution of
the line terminator, as well as the control characters listed above. For example using
Alternate 2, the line terminator <CR> (0x0D) is replaced by | (0x7C). The following is a
sample label format data stream for a printer configured for Alternate-2 Control Codes:

~L|1911A10001000101234560|X|~UT01ABCDE|~G|








Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 11

3
I mmedi at e Command Funct i ons


I nt r odu ct i on

When the printer receives an Immediate Command, its current operation will be
momentarily interrupted to respond to the command. Immediate Commands may be issued
before or after System-Level commands; however, they may not be issued among Label
Formatting Commands or during font or image downloading. Immediate Commands consist
of:

1. Attention-Getter, 0x01 or 0x5E; see Control Code Command Functions.

2. Command Character





SOH # Reset

This command resets the printer. Resetting the printer returns all settings to default and
clears both the communications and printing buffers. The command also clears DRAM
memory.

Syntax:
<SOH>#

Printer Response: The printer will reset.
<XON> T (The T may come before the <XON>)






SOH * Reset (Display-Equipped Models only)

This command forces a soft reset of the microprocessor, resetting the printer, returning
all factory default values, and clearing the communication and print buffers.

Syntax:
<SOH>*

Printer Response: The printer will reset.
<XON> R (The R may come before the <XON>)
Immediate Command Functions

12 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
SOH A Send ASCI I St at us St r i ng

This command allows the host computer to check the current printer status. The printer
returns a string of eight characters, followed by a carriage return. Each character (see
below) indicates an associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte 1 is
transmitted first. See <SOH>F.

Syntax:
<SOH>A

Sample:
<SOH>A

Printer Response:
abcdefgh<CR>

Where:
Possible
Values
Interpretation
Transmit
Sequence
a
-
Y/N Y = Interpreter busy (imaging) 1
b
-
Y/N Y = Paper out or fault 2
c
-
Y/N Y = Ribbon out or fault 3
d
-
Y/N Y = Printing batch 4
e
-
Y/N Y = Busy printing 5
f
-
Y/N Y = Printer paused 6
g
-
Y/N Y = Label presented 7
h
-
Y/N Y = (Internal) Rewinder out or fault 8

Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes






SOH a Send ASCI I Ex t ended St at us St r i ng

This command allows the host computer to check an extended current printer status.
The printer returns a string of seventeen characters, followed by a carriage return. Most
characters (see below) indicate an associated condition, either true (Y) or false (N). Byte
1 is transmitted first. See <SOH>F.

Syntax:
<SOH>a

Sample:
<SOH>a

Printer Response:
abcdefgh:ijklmnop<CR>

Immediate Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 13
Where:

Possible
Values
Interpretation
Transmit
Sequence
a - Y/N Y = Interpreter busy (imaging) 1
b - Y/N Y = Paper out or fault 2
c - Y/N Y = Ribbon out or fault 3
d - Y/N Y = Printing batch 4
e - Y/N Y = Busy printing 5
f - Y/N Y = Printer paused 6
g - Y/N Y = Label presented 7
h - Y/N Y = Rewinder out or fault 8
- : : = Always : 9
i - Y/N Y = Cutter Fault 10
j - Y/N Y = Paper Out 11
k - Y/N Y = Ribbon Saver Fault 12
l - Y/N Y = Print Head Up 13
m - Y/N Y = Top of Form Fault 14
n - Y/N Y = Ribbon Low 15
o - Y/N Y = N (reserved for future) 16
p - Y/N Y = N (reserved for future) 17
- : : = Always : 18
q - Y/N Y = Ready (no data or signal) 19
r - Y/N Y = Waitng for Signal 20
s - Y/N Y = Waitng for Data 21
t - Y/N Y = Com1 has data not parsed 22
u - Y/N Y = N (reserved for future) 23
v - Y/N Y = N (reserved for future) 24
w - Y/N Y = N (reserved for future) 25
x - Y/N Y = N (reserved for future) 26
<CR> 27

Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes

SOH B Toggl e Pause

This command toggles the printer’s paused state between “On” and “Off.” (This is the
same function achieved by pressing the PAUSE Key.)

Syntax:
<SOH>B

Sample:
<SOH>B

Printer Response: This command will illuminate the Paused/Stop Indicator and/or
indicate PAUSED on the LCD or graphics display panel, suspend
printing, and wait until one of the following occurs:

• The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer.
• The PAUSE Key is pressed.

Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator “Off”
and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display, then
resume operation from the point of interruption. (If the Receive
Buffer is not full, an <XON> character will be transmitted from
the printer.)
Immediate Command Functions

14 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
SOH C St op/ Cancel

This command performs the same function as pressing the STOP/CANCEL Key (i.e., it
clears the current format from the print buffer, pauses the printer, and illuminates the
Paused/Stop Indicator). (The pause condition is terminated as described under <SOH>B.)

Syntax:
<SOH>C

Sample:
<SOH>C

Printer Response: The print buffer is cleared and the Paused/Stop Indicator is
illuminated (and/or PAUSED is displayed on the LCD or graphics
display) as operations are suspended, until one of the following
occurs:

• The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer; or
• The PAUSE Key is pressed.

Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator
“Off” and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics
display. (If the Receive Buffer is not full, an <XON> character
will be transmitted from the printer.)

SOH D SOH Shut dow n

This command is ignored by the printer.





SOH E Send Bat ch Remai ni ng Quant i t y

This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of
labels that remain to be printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return.
Communications latency may cause this value to be higher than actual on some printers.

Syntax:
<SOH>E

Printer response:
nnnn<CR>

Where:
nnnn -
Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.



Immediate Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 15
SOH e Send Bat ch Pr i nt ed Quant i t y

This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of
labels that have been printed in the current batch, followed by a carriage return.
Communications latency may cause this value to be lower than actual on some printers.

Syntax:
<SOH>e

Printer response:
nnnn<CR>

Where:
nnnn -
Are four decimal digits, 0-9999.






SOH F Send St at us By t e

This command instructs the printer to send a single status byte where each bit (1 or 0)
represents one of the printer’s status flags, followed by a carriage return (see below). If
an option is unavailable for the printer, the single bit will always be zero. See <SOH>A.

Syntax:
<SOH>F

Response format:

X<CR>
Where: “X” is 0 through 0xef with bits as indicated in the “Condition”
column below:

Bit
*
Value Condition
8 1 or 0 (Internal) Rewinder out or fault
7 1 or 0 Label presented
6 1 or 0 Printer paused
5 1 or 0 Busy printing
4 1 or 0 Printing batch
3 1 or 0 Ribbon out or Fault
2 1 or 0 Paper out or Fault
1 1 or 0 Command interpreter busy (imaging)
*
One is the least significant bit.
Immediate Command Functions

16 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 17

4
Syst em- Level Command Funct i ons


I nt r odu ct i on

The most commonly used commands are the System-Level Commands. These are used to
load and store graphics information, in addition to printer control. System-Level Commands
are used to override default parameter values (fixed and selectable) and may be used
before or after Immediate Commands but cannot be issued among Label Formatting
Commands. System-Level Commands consist of:

1. Attention-Getter, 0x02 or 0x7E; see Control Code Command Functions.
2. Command Character
3. Parameters (if any).


STX A Set Ti me and Dat e

This command sets the time and date. The initial setting of the date will be stored in the
printer’s internal inch counter. This date can be verified by printing a Configuration
Label.

Syntax:
<STX>AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj

Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday; 7 = Sunday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant; see notes below.


Sample:
<STX>A1020319960855034

Printed response:
Mon. Feb 3, 1996, 8:55AM, 034

E

• When set to 000, the Julian date is automatically calculated; otherwise, the Julian
date will print as entered, without daily increments. If factory defaults are restored
the actual Julian date will also be restored.

• Printers without the Real Time Clock option lose the set time/date when power is
removed.

• Response format is variable; see the Special Label Formatting Command <STX>T.

System-Level Command Functions

18 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX a Enabl e Feedback Char act er s

This command enables the feedback ASCII hex characters to be returned from the
printer following specific events after each completed batch of labels when using serial
communications. The default value is ”OFF”.

Syntax:
<STX>a

Printer response: Event dependent. (Also see Appendix D for error codes.)

Where:
Event Return Characters
Invalid character
0x07 ( BEL )
Label printed
0x1E ( RS )
End of batch
0x1F ( US )









STX B Get Pr i nt er Ti me and Dat e I nf or mat i on

This command instructs the printer to retrieve its internal time and date information.

Syntax:
<STX>B

Sample:
<STX>B

Response format:

wmmddyyyyhhMMjjj<CR>
Where:
w
1 digit for day of week; 1 = Monday
mm
2 digits for month
dd
2 digits for day
yyyy
4 digits for year
hh
2 digits for hour in 24 hour format
MM
2 digits for minutes
jjj
3 digits for Julian date / constant*
* See <STX>A for details and restrictions.

Response sample:
1020319960855034<CR>




System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 19
STX c Set Cont i nuous Paper Lengt h

This command sets the label size for applications using continuous media. It disables the
top-of-form function performed by the Media Sensor. The sensor, however, continues to
monitor paper-out conditions. See <STX>M.

Syntax:
<STX>cnnnn

Where:
nnnn -
Specifies the length of the media feed for each label
format, in inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m).

Sample:
<STX>c0100

The sample above sets a label length of 100, which equals 1.00
inch (assuming Imperial Mode is selected).

E

This command must be reset to zero for edge or reflective sensing operation.








STX E Set Quant i t y f or St or ed Label

This command sets the number of labels for printing using the format currently in the
print buffer. (The printer automatically stores the most recent format received in the
buffer until the printer is reset or power is removed.) When used in conjunction with the
<STX>G command, this will print the format.

Syntax:
<STX>Ennnnn<CR>

Where:
nnnnn -
A five-digit quantity, including leading zeros.


<CR> -
0x0d terminates the name.

Sample:
<STX>E00025<CR>
<STX>G

Printer response: 25 labels of the current format in memory will be printed.

E

If no <CR> terminates the command, a four-digit quantity (nnnn) can be entered; and,
specifying 9999 will cause continuous printing.
System-Level Command Functions

20 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual


STX e Sel ect Edge Sensor

This command enables transmissive (see-through) sensing for top-of-form detection of
die-cut and holed (notched) media. This sensor will detect a minimum gap of 0.1 inches
(2.5 mm) between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). This is
the default setting.

Syntax:
<STX>e

E

This command is ignored when <STX>cnnnn is issued with a non-zero value for nnnn.




STX F For m Feed

This commands the printer to form feed to the next start of print.

Syntax:
<STX>F

Printer response: The printer will form feed.



STX f Set For m St op Posi t i on ( Back f eed Command)

This sets the stop position of the printed label, allowing the label to stop at a point past
the start-of-print position. When the next label format is sent, the printer motor
reverses direction to retract the media to the start-of-print position. If quantities of more
than one label are requested, the printer will operate without backfeeding. Backfeed will
then only occur when printing has stopped for a few seconds.

Non-Display Models: Option Control must be set via the printer menu to “Host” for this
command to have effect.

Display-Equipped Models: This command is not honored; see <STX>Kf and <STX>Kc.

Syntax:
<STX>fnnn

Where:
nnn -
Is a three-digit distance from the Media Sensor, in
inches/100 or mm/10. This distance is independent of
the start-of-print position (<STX>O), yet it must be
greater than the start-of-print position to take effect.

Sample:
<STX>f230

The sample above sets a stop position distance of 230 (2.3 inches
from the Media Sensor’s eye).

System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 21

STX G Pr i nt Last Label For mat

This command prints a previously formatted label and restarts a canceled batch job
following the last processed label. This is used when there is a label format in the buffer.
The <STX>E command is used to enter the quantity. (Without the <STX>E command, one
label will print.)

Syntax:
<STX>G


STX I I nput I mage Dat a

This command must precede image downloading from the host to the printer. The data
that immediately follows the command string will be image data. If any of the 8-bit
input formats are to be used, it is necessary to disable the Immediate Command
interpreter by executing an <SOH>D command before issuing the <STX>I command. See
Appendix N for more information. To print an image, refer to Generating Label Formats.

A- Cl ass ( and l ar ge di spl ay H–Cl ass model s) : A “ready mode” logo image can be
input using this command. The image must be stored on a Flash module. The image
name must be “logolab” (lowercase only) in the following DPL command. Also, printer
power must be cycled for the new image to appear. The available display area is 312
pixels wide by 94 pixels high. Images larger than this specified width or height will be
clipped along the right and/or bottom edges.

E

The native format for storing downloaded PCX and BMP images is RLE-2, which results
in a better compression ratio for less module space usage when downloading gray-scale
images and images with large black or white areas.

Syntax:
<STX>Iabfnn…n<CR>data

Where:
a -
Memory Module Bank Select (see Appendix K).


b -
Data Type (optional), A or omit:

b Value: Image Data Value Range:
A ASCII Characters 0-9, A-F, (7 bit)
omit 00-FF, (8 bit)


f -
Format Designator:

f Designator: Format Type:
F
7-bit D-O image load file
B
.BMP 8-bit format, flipped, black
and white (B&W)
b
.BMP 8-bit format, B&W
I
.IMG 8-bit format, flipped, B&W
i
.IMG 8-bit format, B&W
P
.PCX 8-bit format, flipped, B&W
p
.PCX 8-bit format, B&W
System-Level Command Functions

22 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual


nn…n -
Up to 16 characters used as an image name.


<CR> -
0x0d terminates the name.


data -
Image data

Sample:
<SOH>D
<STX>IDpTest <CR>
data...data <CR>

The sample above instructs the printer to (1) receive an 8-bit PCX
image sent by the host in an 8-bit data format, (2) name the
image “Test”, and (3) store it in Module D (with a .dim file
extension).







STX i Scal abl e Font Dow nl oadi ng

The command structure for downloading TrueType (.TTF) scalable fonts (files may be
single-byte or double-byte character systems) is as follows:

Syntax:
<STX>imtnnName<CR>xx…xdata…

Where:
m -
The designator of the module where the font is to be
saved; see Appendix K.


t -
Type of scalable font being downloaded:
T = TrueType


nn -
Two-digit font reference ID. Valid range is 50-99,
9A-9Z, 9a-9z (base 62 numbers).


Name -
The title, up to 16 characters, for this font.


<CR> -
0x0d terminates the Name.


xx…x -
Eight-digit size of the font data, number of bytes,
hexadecimal, padded with leading zeros.


data -
The scalable font data.

Sample:
<STX>iDT52Tree Frog<CR>000087C2data...

The sample above downloads a TrueType font to Module D, and
assigns it the Font ID of 52 with the name “Tree Frog” and file
extension .dtt. The size of the font data is 0x87C2 bytes long.
System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 23
STX J Set Pause f or Each Label

This command causes the printer to pause after printing each label. It is intended for
use with the peel mechanism or tear bar when the Present Sensor option is not installed.
After removing the printed label, the PAUSE Key must be pushed in order to print the
next label. (The printer must be reset to clear the <STX>J command.)

Syntax:
<STX>J






STX K Ex t ended Sy st em- Level Commands

This is an expansion of the System-Level Command structure; see Extended System-
Level Commands for more information.






STX k Test RS- 232 Por t

This command instructs the printer to transmit the Y character from the printer’s RS-232
port. (Failure to receive Y could indicate an interfacing problem.)

Syntax:
<STX>k

Printer response:
Y






STX L Ent er Label For mat t i ng Command Mode

This command switches the printer to the Label Formatting Command Mode, where the
printer expects to receive only Record Structures and Label Formatting Commands.
Immediate, System-Level, and Font Loading commands will be ignored until the label
formatting mode is terminated with E, s, or X, (see Label Formatting Commands for
additional information).

Syntax:
<STX>L




System-Level Command Functions

24 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX M Set Max i mum Label Lengt h

This command instructs the printer move media this distance in search of the top-of-
form (label edge, notch, black mark, etc.) before declaring a paper fault. A paper fault
condition can occur if this setting is too close (within 0.1 inch [2.54 mm]) to the physical
length of the label. Therefore, it is a good practice to set this command to 2.5 to 3 times
the actual label length used. The minimum value should be at least 5” (127 mm).

Syntax:
<STX>Mnnnn

Where:
nnnn -
Is a four-digit length, 0000-9999, in/100 or mm/10.
Maximum setting is 9999 (99.99 inches or 2540
mm). The default setting is 16 inches/ 406.4 mm.

Sample:
<STX>M0500

The sample above sets a maximum travel distance of 5 inches
(unless the printer is in metric mode; see <STX>m).









STX m Set Pr i nt er t o Met r i c Mode

This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as metric values (e.g.,
<STX>c0100 will equal 10.0 mm). The default is Imperial (see <STX>n).

Syntax:
<STX>m









STX n Set Pr i nt er t o I mper i al Mode

This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as inch values (e.g.,
<STX>c0100 will equal 1.00 inch), and is the default mode.

Syntax:
<STX>n




System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 25
STX O Set St ar t of Pr i nt ( SOP) Posi t i on

This command sets the point to begin printing relative to the top-of-form (the label’s
edge as detected by the Media Sensor). The printer will feed from the top-of-form to the
value specified in this command to begin printing.

This value operates independently of the <STX>f command.

Non-Display Models: The printer Options Control must be set (via the menu) to “Host”
for this command to have effect.

Display-Equipped Models: If SOP Emulation is set to “enabled” (via the menu), this
command sets the point where printing starts, emulating the selected legacy printer’s
distance, as measured between the media sensor and the print head burn line. In
addition, regardless of the SOP Emulation setting, the start of print position can be fine-
tuned via the menu: Menu Mode / Print Control / Custom Adjustments / Row Adjust.

Syntax:
<STX>Onnnn

Where:
nnnn -
Is a four-digit offset value in inches/100 or mm/10.
The “zero” setting is the default value, and settings
below 50 are adjusted back to the default value.

Non-Display: The default setting is 0220 in Imperial
Mode (0559 in Metric Mode).

Display-Equipped: The default setting is “Off” and the
printer assumes the natural SOP position.

Sample
(Non-Display
models):



<STX>O0300

The sample above sets a start of print position of 3.0 inches
(unless in Metric Mode; see <STX>m).

Sample
(Display-Equipped
models):


<STX>O0210

The sample above will begin printing 0.1 inch closer to the leading
edge of the label if the 220 (Allegro) SOP Emulation was selected,
or 1.0 inch farther away from the leading edge if 110 (ProdPlus)
SOP Emulation was selected.

System-Level Command Functions

26 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX o Cy cl e Cut t er

This command will cause the optional cutter mechanism to immediately perform a cut
after all previously received commands are executed. The cutter must be installed,
enabled and the interlock(s) closed for operation.

Syntax:
<STX>o






STX P Set Hex Dump Mode

This command instructs the printer to assume Hex Dump Mode. Instead of a formatted
product, data sent following this command will be printed in its raw ASCII format. To
capture all data, labels should be at least four inches (102 mm) long and as wide as the
maximum print width. This command has the same effect as turning “On” the printer
while depressing the FEED Key (return normal operation by manual reset).

Syntax:
<STX>P

Printer response is
data dependent
(layout may vary):









STX p Cont r ol l ed Pause

This command will cause the printer to pause only after all previously received
commands are executed, often useful between label batches. (This command will not
clear the pause condition; see <SOH>B).

Syntax:
<STX>p


System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 27
STX Q Cl ear Al l Modul es

This command instructs the printer to clear all Flash and DRAM modules (except as
noted); see the corresponding Operator’s Manual for applicable module options. All
stored data will be destroyed.

Syntax:
<STX>Q

E

Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module.



STX q Cl ear Modul e

This command clears the selected Flash or DRAM module. During normal operations if a
module becomes corrupted (identifiable when the printer responds with a “No Modules
Available” message to a <STX>W command) it must be cleared. All stored data will be
destroyed.

Syntax:
<STX>qa

Where:

a -
Memory module designator; see Appendix K.
Sample:
<STX>qA

The sample above clears memory Module A.

E

Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module.


STX R Ri bbon Saver Cont r ol

This command enables the operation of the optional Ribbon Saver. It is the only
command used to control the Ribbon Saver. Its operation is continuous when enabled.
The printer must be set to thermal transfer (ribbon) printing mode then, during
operation, the Ribbon Saver engages automatically, lifting when the minimum amount of
label white space is exceeded.

Syntax:
<STX>Rx

Where:

x -
Y - Enabled (Default = Menu selection.)
N - Disabled

Sample:
<STX>RY

The sample above will turn the ribbon saver on.

E

This command is ignored on non-equipped printers.
System-Level Command Functions

28 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX r Sel ect Ref l ect i ve Sensor

This command enables reflective (black mark) sensing for top-of-form detection of rolled
butt-cut, and fan-fold or tag stocks with reflective marks on the underside. This Media
Sensor will detect a minimum mark of 0.1 inches (2.54 mm) between labels (see the
Operator’s Manual for media requirements). The end of the black mark determines the
top of form. Use the <STX>O command to adjust the print position.

Syntax:
<STX>r

Default setting: Edge sensing






STX S Set Feed Speed

This command controls the output rate of the media when the FEED Key is pressed.

Syntax:
<STX>Sn

Where:
n -
Is a letter value (see Appendix L).






STX T Pr i nt Qual i t y Label

This command instructs the printer to produce a Print Quality label, a format comprised
of different patterns and bar codes useful in printer setup. To capture all printed
information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see Appendix K) and at
least four inches (102 mm) long.

Syntax:
<STX>T

Printer response
(dot patterns may
vary):




System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 29
STX t Test DRAM Memor y Modul e

This command tests the DRAM module. The printer returns a one-line message stating
the module condition (no message is returned if a module is unavailable). The printer
must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function. Feedback
Characters can be enabled via the menu (see the Operator’s Manual for additional
information).

Syntax:
<STX>t

3
Response format:
Module D: xxxxK RAM Tested results <CR>
Where:
xxxx
- Module size in Kbytes.


results
- Test results given as “Good” or “Bad”.




STX U Label For mat St r i ng Repl acement Fi el d

This command places new label data into format fields to build a label. Two options are
available: Exact Length and Truncated Length.

To easily keep track of fields, place all of the fields to be updated with the command at
the beginning of the label format. A maximum of 99 format fields can be updated. Fields
are numbered consecutively 01 to 99 in the order received.

Exact Length Replacement Field Functions – The new data string must equal the
original string length and contain valid data. When the dynamic data is shorter than the
length of the originally defined data field, then field will be padded with blanks (or zero
when the Format Record header specifies a numeric bar code).

Syntax:
<STX>Unnss…s<CR>

Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.


ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>

Exact Length
Sample:

<STX>L
1A1100001000100data field 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G


System-Level Command Functions

30 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

The sample above produces three labels. The first is formatted
with the commands between <STX>L and E. The next two labels
print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U
commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is the same
length: 3 digits and nine spaces.


Truncated Length Replacement Field Functions – A variant of the <STX>U command
includes the truncate option “T”, where dynamic data shorter than the originally defined
field length will not be padded and the original maximum field length is maintained for
subsequent replacements.

Syntax:
<STX>UTnnss…s<CR>

Where:
nn
- Is the format field number, 2 digits.


T
- Truncate option


ss…s
- Is the new string data, followed by a <CR>.

Truncated Sample:
<STX>L
1A1100001000100data field 1<CR>
161100001100110data field 2<CR>
161100001200120data field 3<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>UT01123<CR>
<STX>U02New data F2<CR>
<STX>E0002
<STX>G

The sample above produces three labels. The first is formatted
with the commands between <STX>L and E. The next two labels
print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U
commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). The bar code is shortened;
it only has three digits (and no spaces).



System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 31
STX V Sof t w ar e Sw i t ch Set t i ngs

This command controls the printer options, where the appropriate value allows the
option(s) to be “On” or “Off.” Each option has a corresponding bit whose value is “1”
when enabled. The tables below indicate the bit assignments and corresponding
command value needed to enable the desired option(s). Printer options are set by
entering selections through the menu. The software setting command allows two of
these option settings to be modified without returning to the menu.

Syntax:
<STX>Vn

Where:
n
- Is a single digit ASCII numeric value from 0-F. The
value of n is used to override the power-up option
settings. Reset or power-up returns the printer to the
original settings.

Sample:
<STX>V5

The sample above corresponds to setting Bits 0 and 2, creating a
command value of 5. When applied, this enables the Present
Sensor and Cutter options.

Bit Assignment Printer Option
0 Cutter
1 N/A
2 Present Sensor
3 N/A

Table 4-1: Software Switch Bit Assignment

Use the bit assignment table above to determine the command value n in the binary
table below (e.g., the command value 5 sets the bits 0 and 2 to “1”).

Command Values for Bits Assigned
Bit
n Value
3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1
4 0 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1

Table 4-2: Software Switch Binary


System-Level Command Functions

32 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX v Request Fi r mw ar e Ver si on

This command causes the printer to send its version string (same as printed on the
configuration label). The version may be different from printer to printer.

Syntax:
<STX>v

Printer Response:
VER: H-4212–11.04 01/01/2008<CR>





STX W Request Memor y Modul e I nf or mat i on

This command requests a memory module directory listing. Results may vary depending
on printer class, model, or firmware version.

Syntax:
<STX>W[b][c]a

Where:
b s
optional – list file size also


c e
optional – list file extension also


a -
Data type:



F
G
L
C
X
N
M
f
p
*
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Downloaded fonts
Graphics (Image)
Label formats
Configuration files
Menu language files
Plug-ins
Miscellaneous type files
Resident fonts
Entire module contents
All types

Sample:

<STX>WF

Printer response
(using an H-Class):


MODULE: D<CR>
S50 92244ttf50<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 945152<CR>
MODULE: G<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: X<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
MODULE: Y<CR>
AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR>
System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 33
STX w Test Fl ash Memor y Modul e

This command tests the Flash module. The time for each test will vary from 20 to 120
seconds, depending upon the size of the module. All stored data will be destroyed. If
no module is present, there will be no printer response.

Syntax:
<STX>wa

Where:
a
- Module designator; see Appendix K.

Response format:

Module A: xxxxK results

Where:
A
- Module tested.


xxxx
- Module size in Kbytes.

results - Test results given as “Good” or “Bad”.













STX X Set Def aul t Modul e

This command, typically used prior to the loading of PCL-4 bitmapped fonts (see Font
Loading Commands), is designed to allow the user to select between modules when
downloading information. The default module is one of the following:

1. The first alpha designator of the existing modules if item 2 has not occurred.

2. The module selected by this command.

Syntax:
<STX>Xa

Where:
a
- Module designator; See Appendix K.

Sample:
<STX>XB

The sample above sets “B” as the default module.


System-Level Command Functions

34 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX x Del et e Fi l e f r om Modul e

This command removes a specific file from the specified module. The file name is
removed from the module directory and thus the file cannot be accessed. The actual
storage space occupied by the file is not released. To reclaim deleted file storage space
use <STX>z to pack the module.

Syntax:
<STX>xmtnn…n<CR>

Where:
m
- Module designator; see Appendix K.


t
- The file type identification code:


G
L
F
S
C
X
N
M
u
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=

Image file
Label format file
Downloaded bitmapped font file
Downloaded scalable font file
Configuration file
Language file
Plug-in file
Miscellaneous file type
Unknown type – must use extension if
applicable


nn…n -
The file to delete, where:

• Font (bitmapped), three character font identifier;
• Font (scalable), two character font identifier;
• Graphic name, up to sixteen alphanumeric
characters; or,
• Label format name, up to sixteen alphanumeric
characters.

Sample:
<STX>xDS50<CR>

The sample above deletes a downloaded scalable font with ID 50
from Module D.



System-Level Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 35
STX Y Out put Sensor Val ues

This command causes a sensor value response. When <STX>Y is received, the printer will
respond with the digitally converted values of the internal analog sensors (see below).
To repeat the display of values, send the printer a “SPACE” character (20 hexadecimal);
or, send <ESC> to terminate this function.

The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function.
(Feedback Mode [Characters] can be enabled via command or menu setting; see the
<STX>KcFM command or the Operator’s Manual for additional information).

Syntax:
<STX>Y

Printer response:

Thermistor ADC: 0048 Reflective ADC: 0000
Transmissive ADC: 0204 Paperout ADC: 0000 24 Volt ADC:
0217 Contrast ADC: 0093 TOF Adjust ADC: 0170 Ribbon
ADC: 0125 Battery Level: Good <CR>

Where: Paperout ADC: 0225 indicates paper is present;
0000 indicates paper is not present.

Battery level: Good indicates a sufficient battery charge;
Low indicates an insufficient charge.

E

• Equipped sensors vary with printer, model, and options;

• Some readings require printer-controlled paper movement to produce a meaningful
value; and,

• Media Sensor readings require the appropriate sensor selection, transmissive
(<STX>e) or reflective (<STX>r), and label stock placed in the sensor.




STX y Sel ect Font Symbol Set

This command selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set remains
active until another symbol set is selected. See the <STX>KS command and Appendices
E, I, and H for more information. Option dependent and not all symbol sets can be used
with all fonts.

Syntax:
<STX>ySxx

Where:
S
- Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets.
U = Double byte symbol sets.


xx
- Symbol set selection.

Sample:
<STX>ySPM

The sample above selects the PC-850 multilingual set.
System-Level Command Functions

36 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX Z Pr i nt Conf i gur at i on Label

This command causes the printer to produce a Database Configuration Label. To capture
all printed information, use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see
Appendix K) and at least four inches (102 mm) long.

Syntax:
<STX>Z

Printer response:




MODE:
DISABLED
BACKUP DELAY (1/50s):
0
FONT EMULATION:
STANDARD FONTS
LABEL STORE:
STATE & FIELDS
MENU LANGUAGE:
ENGLISH
FAULT HANDLING:
LEVEL:
STANDARD
VOID DISTANCE:
0.50 in.
RETRY COUNT:
1
BACKFEED ON CLEAR:
DISABLED
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORT A:
BAUD RATE:
9600 BPS
PROTOCOL:
BOTH
PARITY:
NONE
DATA BITS:
8
SYSTEM INFORMATION
PRINT BUFFER SIZE:
100 in.
FLASH SIZE:
8 MB
RAM TEST:
PASS
CONFIGURATION
TUE 09:09 AM 10FEB2009
PRINTER KEY:
4212-HE25-060224-090
APPLICATION VERSION:
83-2541-11H3 11.083 12/22/2008
MCL Version: 1.00.06-072
BOOT LOADER:
83-2539-11A 11.01 10/02/2007
UNLOCKED:
CG TIMES
FPGA:
HP10
iPH:
5x-00289 #163
MACM:
00-0d-70-03-8b-b9
MACO:
NOT SET
MACR:
00-90-c9-01-D0-64


E

Printed information will vary according to printer, model, firmware version, and options.






STX z Pack Modul e

This command causes the printer to reclaim all storage space associated with all deleted
files on the specified module (see <STX>X and <STX>x).

Syntax:
<STX>zm

Where:
m
- The module identification character; see Appendix K.

E

Valid for I-Class and A-Class only, ignored by all others.


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 37
5
Ex t ended Sy st em- Level Command Funct i ons


I nt r odu ct i on

Issued in the same context as System-Level Commands, the Extended System-Level
Commands expand certain System-Level Commands to provide an extra degree of printer
control.



STX K Memor y Conf i gur at i on

This command configures the available DRAM (including any installed optional DRAM) as
a method for managing printer memory. Memory can be assigned to specific entities or
functions in units of 4KB blocks. The allocation(s) set by this command, draw from the
same memory pool, affecting maximum print length and label throughput (see note
below). The printer executes the memory configuration specified by the command during
the next idle period following its receipt, and is stored in Flash memory then reinstated
upon a power-up or reset. If the total requested memory allocation exceeds the
configurable memory available, contains no fields, or for configurations not specified, the
command will be rejected and the printer will assume its previous configuration. Any of
the three fields are optional, and are separated by the colon. Brackets indicate optional
fields.

Syntax:
<STX>Kix[:jy][:kz]<CR>

Sample:
<STX>KM0020:S0015<CR>

The sample above allocates 20*4*1024 bytes for module space and
15*4*1024 bytes for the scalable cache.


Where,

i, j, k are M, S, or W; x, y, z are four-digit maximum numbers of 4K byte blocks or
inches/100 or (mm/10) as described below.

M Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns memory to
an Internal Module. If this field does not appear, then the Internal Module is not
affected. If no Internal Module exists, it will be created and formatted. Existing
Internal Modules will be erased, re-sized and formatted. The number that follows
the M is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the size in 4KB blocks of
memory to assign to the Internal Module. A value of “0000” will delete the Internal
Module (see Appendix J for additional information).

S Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns the amount
of internal memory allocated to the smooth scalable font processor. This field is
optional; if it does not appear, the current amount of memory assigned to the
Extended System-Level Command Functions

38 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
smooth scalable font processor will remain unchanged. The allocation must be at
least 15 (60KB) to print scalable fonts, and at least 30 for double-byte fonts. The
number that follows the S is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the
size in 4 KB blocks to assign to the smooth scalable font processor. Any value less
than the minimum requirement results in the amount assigned to be zero (0),
thereby disabling the printing of smooth scalable fonts. The recommended value is
0025 (100KB).

W Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that sets the printable
label width. Setting a width smaller than the natural (maximum) width of the printer
effectively extends printable label length. This field is optional; if it does not appear,
the current printable label width is left unchanged. The number that follows the W is
a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the printable label width in either
100
ths
of an inch or in millimeters, depending on the current units setting of the
printer (imperial or metric). If the value specified exceeds the printable width of the
printer, the printable label width is set to the maximum. If the value specified is less
than the minimum value allowed (200) then the printable label width is set to the
minimum allowed value.


E

• Label printing requirements may be computed as bytes (label print length times
width allocation times print head resolution divided by 8). For maximum throughput,
the memory allocated should allow for a minimum of three times the computed
requirement, or the available label length (as determined by <STX>KQ command)
should be three times the label print length; and,

• These commands will result in a system reset for the EX2.








STX K} E Empt y Sensor Cal i br at i on (Non-Display Models only)

This command causes the printer to determine and save the calibration value for an
empty media sensor condition. This calibration function should be performed when no
material is installed in the media sensor. Depending upon the printer model, different
front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration
progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash
sequences details.

Printer Response Alternate
REMOVE STOCK[CR] N/A
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR] N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR] FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]

Extended System-Level Command Functions
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 39
STX K} M Manual Medi a Cal i br at i on (Non-Display Models only)

This command causes the printer to save the sampled calibration values as an operator
places different portions of label stock within the media sensor. Depending upon the
printer model, different front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below)
will indicate calibration progress and outcome; see the corresponding printer operator
manual for LED flash sequences details. Sending <ESC> to the printer instead of <CR>
will terminate the process and leave the TOF Sensor values unchanged.

Printer Response Alternate
LOAD STOCK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
LOAD MARK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
LOAD GAP[CR]
REMOVE STOCK[CR]
ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR] FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]








STX K} Q Qui ck Medi a Cal i br at i on (Non-Display Models only)

This command causes the printer to move media, sample, and then save sensor samples
as calibration values. This calibration function should be performed with media installed
in the printer. Depending upon the printer model, different front panel LED flash
sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration progress and outcome;
see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash sequences details.

Printer Response Alternate
FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]
ADJUST GAIN SETTING[CR]
N/A
PASSED CALIBRATION[CR] FAILED CALIBRATION[CR]


Extended System-Level Command Functions

40 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX KaR Read Dat a f r om RFI D Tag

(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)

This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the
read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed
in the text or bar code label field.

Syntax:
<STX>KaRAaaabbbcdee<CR>

Where:
A
- Optional – for data in the ASCII format.


aaa
- The number of bytes to read.


bbb
- HF - Starting block number (000 ¬ maximum block
number, which is dependent upon the
transponder manufacturer).

UHF – Should be 000.


c
- Command 1. Reserved. Should be 0.


d
- Command 2. Reserved. Should be 0.


ee
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command U.

E
The 00 value will send read data to the host with no
printing.

Sample:
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KaR0000010001
<STX>G

The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls data
from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block), and prints
the data in the location specified by the replaceable field. Since
there are two digits per each hex value, replaceable fields should be
twice as long than if using ASCII data (e.g., the character “A” would
be returned as “41”).
Extended System-Level Command Functions
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 41

STX KaW Wr i t e Dat a t o RFI D Tag

(Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface)

This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.

Syntax:
<STX>KaWAaaabbbcdee…e<CR>

Where:
Aaaa
- Optional – for data in the ASCII format, followed by
the byte count (000-999).


bbb
- HF – Starting block number (000 ¬ maximum block
number, which is dependent upon the
transponder manufacturer).

UHF – Should be 000.


c
- Command 1. Reserved for Future (should be 0)


d
- Command 2. Reserved for Future (should be 0)


ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag (HF – the last used
block will be null-padded, if necessary).

E
UHF ASCII formats must be 8 or 12 characters; and,
UHF Hexadecimal formats must be 16 or 24
character pairs.

Sample:
<STX>KaW0000054455354[CR]

The sample above writes the data “TEST” at block zero.








STX Kb Back f eed Ti me Del ay

This command controls the time a printed label is allowed to remain “presented” before
being retracted to the start of print position.

Syntax:
<STX>Kbnnn<CR>

Where:
nnn
- Seconds/10
Extended System-Level Command Functions

42 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX KC Get Conf i gur at i on

This command returns the configuration of the printer. The form of the returned data is
similar to that of a printed Configuration Label. This command should be parsed by
KEYWORDS, not character positions. Each line is terminated by a CR (0x0d) & LF
(0x0a).

Syntax:
<STX>KC<CR>

Printer response:


CONFIGURATION
TUE 02:01PM 01AUG2005
PRINTER KEY:
4308-TB10-010327-494
APPLICATION VERSION:
83-2284-06E
06.06 07/09/2001
BOOT LOADER:
83-2269-03D 03.04 10/30/2000
SYSTEM INFORMATION
PRINT BUFFER SIZE:
280 in.
FLASH SIZE:
4 MB
RAM TEST:
PASS
OPTIONAL LANGUAGES:
FRANCAIS
ITALIANO
DEUTSCH
ESPAÑOL
CONFIGURATION FILE:
NONE
MEDIA SETTINGS
MEDIA TYPE
THERMAL TRANSFER
SENSOR TYPE
GAP
LABEL LENGTH
04.00 in.
MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
•30.00 in.
PAPER OUT DISTANCE
00.25 in.
LABEL WIDTH
4.16 in.
SENSOR CALIBRATION
PAPER SENSOR LEVEL
144
GAP SENSOR LEVEL
30
EMPTY SENSOR LEVEL
0

SENSOR GAIN
10
PRINT CONTROL
HEAT
10
PRINT SPEED
6.0in/sec
FEED SPEED
6.0in/sec
REVERSE SPEED
4.0in/sec
ROW OFFSET
00.00 in.
COLUMN OFFSET
00.00 in.
PRESENT DISTANCE
0.00 in.
CUSTOM ADJUSTMENTS:
DARKNESS
32
ROW ADJUST
64 DOTS
COLUMN ADJUST
0 DOTS
PRESENT ADJUST
64 DOTS
PRINTER OPTIONS
MODULES
A: NOT INSTALLED
B: NOT INSTALLED
D: FORMATTED
F: NOT INSTALLED
G: FORMATTED
X: FORMATTED
Y: 83-2296-01C
Z: NOT INSTALLED
PRESENT SENSOR
NOT INSTALLED
CUTTER
NOT INSTALLED
GPIO PORT:
NOT INSTALLED
SYSTEM SETTINGS

FACTORY SETTING FILE
NONE
INTERNAL MODULE
1024 KB
DEFAULT MODULE
D
SCALEABLE FONT CACHE
312 KB
SINGLE BYTE SYMBOLS
PC-850 MULTILINGUAL
DOUBLE BYTE SYMBOLS
UNICODE
ABSOLUTE COUNTER
3782 in.
27MAR2001
RESETTABLE COUNTER
205 in.
27MAR2001
FORMAT ATTRIBUTES
XOR
IMAGING MODE
MULTIPLE LABEL
PAUSE MODE
DISABLED
SELECT SECURITY
DISABLED
PEEL MODE
DISABLED
UNITS OF MEASURE
IMPERIAL
SOP EMULATION
DISABLED
BACK AFTER PRINT
DISABLED
MENU LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORT A:
BAUD RATE
9600 BPS
PROTOCOL
BOTH
PARITY
NONE

DATA BITS
8
STOP BITS
1
SERIAL PORT B:
NOT INSTALLED
PARALLEL PORT A:
PORT DIRECTION
UNI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
PARALLEL PORT B:
PORT DIRECTION
BI-DIRECTIONAL
PORT STATUS
DISABLED
NIC ADAPTER:
DMXNET INACTIVE
HOST SETTINGS:
HOST TIMEOUT
10 SEC
CONTROL CODES
STANDARD CODES
FEEDBACK
CHARACTERS
DISABLED
ESC SEQUENCES
ENABLED
HEAT COMMAND
ENABLED
SPEED COMMANDS
ENABLED
DIAGNOSTICS
HEX DUMP MODE
DISABLED
PRINT TEST
RATE(min)
0
SENSOR READINGS
THR TRAN RIBM 24V
132 141 159 178
PS HD RANK
000 254 000
RIBBON SENSOR
LIMITS
RIBBON ADC LOW
105
RIBBON ADC HIGH
182
END OF LIST



E

The format of the displayed information will vary with printer, model, firmware version,
and equipped options.

Extended System-Level Command Functions
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 43
STX Kc Conf i gur at i on Set

This command specifies the Power-up Configuration parameter values for the printer and
is equivalent to using other system commands followed by the <SOH>U. This command
is intended for easily configuring a custom setup, but NOT for dynamic
configuration changes. Configuration commands are examined for differences
relative to the current configuration, and have no impact when no differences exist.
Display-equipped models will reset upon completion of a command stream containing
parameter value changes, while non-display models reset only for certain functions,
such as memory allocation. In any case, no commands should be sent to the printer
until this reset is complete. Other command highlights include the following:

• These parameter values are equivalent to changing the respective menu settings and
do not affect the factory default settings of the printer.

• If separated by a semi-colon (;), multiple parameter values may be sent in a single
command stream; see sample below.

• All values are stored in Flash memory and remain in effect until new values are
received or until factory defaults are restored.

• If system commands are sent that override the Power-up Configuration value(s), the
Power-up Configuration value(s) will be restored the next time the printer is powered
“On” or is reset.

• These parameters are the same as those found in the Setup Menu (non-display
models), or as those found in the Menu System (display-equipped models). The
respective functions are documented in the appropriate Operator’s or Maintenance
Manual. Not all commands are effective on all Class printers.

E

Illegal or out of range parameter values may have unpredictable results. In addition,
media sensing scaling values, TOF Bias, etc. may not be effective on other same-type
printers due to hardware tolerances.

Syntax:
<STX>Kcaa
1
val
1
[;aa
I
val
I
][;aa
n
val
n
]<CR>

Where:
aa
1,
aa
I
, aa
n

- Are two letter parameter names.


val
1,
val
I,
val
n

- Are parameter values, with ranges
appropriate for the associated parameter.

Sample:
<STX>KcPA120;CL600;STC<CR>

The sample above sets the Present Adjust to 120 dots, and the
Sensor Type to Continuous with a label length of six inches.

The following table summarizes (alphabetically by name) different Configuration Set
command parameters, value ranges, command equivalents and applicability. If no
command equivalent is given, or where clarification is required, descriptions immediately
follow the table.
Extended System-Level Command Functions




44 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Configuration Set Commands
<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Alignment Length AL 0 – 999 1/100 inch (18) N/A
Backup After Print BA Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
System Settings N/A
Backup Delay BD 0 – 255 1/50 second System Settings N/A
Backup Label BL 0, 3, 4
0 = Disabled,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Printer Options N/A
Backup (Reverse) Speed BS or bS alpha character
Model specific
ranges; see
Appendix L.
Print Control pa
British Pound BP Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A N/A
Buzzer Enable BZ Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
System Settings N/A

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 45

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Column Adjust
[1]
CA xxx dots
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K,
and Column Adjust
Fine Tune
Print Control (7) N/A
Column Adjust Fine
Tune
CF + / – dots
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K.
Print Control N/A
Column Offset CO 0 – 9999 1/100 in.
Print Control

Cnnnn
Comm Heat Commands CH
Y, N

1, 0
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled

1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
Communications (25)
(E-Class - 24)
N/A
Comm Speed Commands CS
Y, N

1, 0
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled

1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
Communications (26)
(E-Class - 24)
N/A

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




46 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Comm TOF Commands CT Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Communications N/A
Continuous Label Length CL 0 – 9999 1/100 in. Media Settings (12) <STX>c
Control Codes CC S, 1, 2
S = Standard,
1 = Alternate,
2 = Alternate-2
Communications (11)

N/A

Cut Behind CB 0 – 9 Queued label count Printer Options N/A
Cutter Equipped CE
A/Y, E, N/D

A, E/Y, N
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled

A = Auto,
E or Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Printer Options

<STX>V

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 47


<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Darkness DK 1 – 64 N/A Print Control N/A
Default Module DM
D, G
A, B
Module Letter System Settings <STX>X
Delay Rate
(Test Labels)
DR 0 – 120 Seconds Diagnostics N/A
Disable Symbol Set
Selection
NS Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A N/A
Display Mode GD S, E
S = Standard,
E = Enhanced
System Settings N/A
Double Byte Symbol Set DS
2-Byte alpha
character
AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
System Settings
<STX>y,
ySxx
DPI Emulation DE
200, 300,
400, 600
Dots per inch System Settings N/A
Empty Sensor Level EV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




48 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
End Character EN D N/A N/A N/A
End Of Print EP 1, 2, 3, 4
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Printer Options N/A
ESC Sequences ES Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Communications N/A
Fault Handling FH L, D, R, B See Table 5-2.
System Settings (24)

N/A
Feed Speed SS or sS Alpha character
Model specific
ranges;
see Appendix L.
Print Control Sa

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 49

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Feedback Mode FM Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Communications <STX>a
Font Emulation FE 0, 1, 2
0 = No Substitution
1 = Sub CG Times
SA0
2 = Sub User S50
N/A N/A
Format Attributes FA X, O, T
X = XOR,
O = Opaque,
T = Transparent
System Settings An
Gain Reflective Value GR 0 – 31 N/A Media Settings N/A
Gap / Mark Value GM 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A
Gap Sensor Location
(MP Comapct4 Mark II only)
GL 0 or 1
0 = Outer sensor,
default

1 = Inner sensor

N/A <STX>KcGL
GPIO Equipped GE A, V, N, 2
A = Applicator,
V = Verifier,
N = Disabled,
A = Applicator2
Printer Options (23)

N/A

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




50 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
GPIO Error Pause GP E, D
E = Enabled,
D = Disabled
Printer Options N/A
GPIO Slew GS 0 – 4
0 = Standard,
1 = Low Pulse,
2 = High Pulse,
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Printer Options N/A
Head Bias HB L, R
L = Leftmost dot is
zero,
R = Rightmost dot is
zero
System Settings N/A
Head Cleaning HC 0 – 9999
Inches (or
centimeters)
multiplied by 1000
Media Settings N/A
Heat HE 0 – 30 N/A
Print Control (21)

Hnn
Host Timeout HT 1 – 60 Seconds Communications N/A

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 51

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Ignore Control Codes IC
Y, N

1, 0
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled

1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
Communications
N/A

Ignore Distances IE 1, 0
1 = Enabled,
0 = Disabled
N/A N/A
Imaging Mode IL M, S
M = Multiple label,
S = Single label
System Settings (22)

N/A
Input Mode EM 0, 1, 3, 7, 9
0 = DPL,
1 = Line,
3 = PL-Z,
7 = PL-B,
9 = Auto
System Settings (19)

N/A
Internal Module IM
100 – up to max.
available; see
Appendix K
Kbytes System Settings (15) N/A

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




52 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Label Alignment LA N, A, Y See Table 5-3. 17 N/A
Label Rotation LR Y, N
Y = Rotate 180
N = None
System Settings N/A
Label Store LM F, S
F = Fields,
S = States & Fields
System Settings N/A
Label Width LW
0075 – head width;
see Appendix K
1/100 inch Media Settings (13) <STX>KW
Language Select LS String Language Name System Settings N/A
Legacy Emulation LE
N, A, P, L

N, A, P, L, M
N = None,
A = Allegro,
P = Prodigy,
L = Prodigy Plus,
M = Prodigy Max
X = XL
System Settings (20)

N/A
Mark Value MV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 53

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Maximum Length Ignore SM 0, 1
0 =
Normal processing,
1 = Ignore
Communications N/A
Maximum Length ML 0 – 9999 1/100 inch Media Settings <STX>M
Media Type MT D, T
D = Direct,
T = Thermal Transfer
Media Settings (1) N/A
Menu Mode MM U, A
U = User,
A = Advanced
System Settings N/A
Module Command MCC
Z, G

B
See Table 5-4. N/A N/A
Network Configuration
(for firmware versions
14.00 and later)
NE
G, WE, WIFI, DV1,
DV2, SV1
See command
(NE) Network
Configuration
N/A N/A
Network Setup
(for firmware versions
13.99 and earlier)
NT
A, B, C, D, E, F, G,
I, m, N, P, S, T, U,
W, w, X, Y, Z, $
See Table 5-5. N/A N/A
No Reprint NR Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A N/A
Option Feedback OF D, Rx, S See Table 5-6. Communications N/A

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




54 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual


<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Paper Empty PO 0 – 9999 1/100 inch Media Settings N/A
Paper Value PV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A
Parallel Direction PP xz See Table 5-7. Communications N/A
Password Set PW
A – Z,
0 – 9
Four characters
(or, if security is
enabled then eight
characters).
System Settings N/A
Pause Mode PM Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
System Settings <STX>J
Peel Mode PE Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
System Settings N/A

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 55

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Present Adjust
[1]
PA xxx dots
Model specific;
see Appendix K,
and Present Adjust
Fine Tune.
Print Control (8) N/A
Present Adjust Fine
Tune
PJ + / – dots
Dots (model
specific),
see Appendix K.
Print Control N/A
Present Distance PD 0 – 400 1/100 inch Print Control <STX>Kf
Present Sensor
Equipped
PS A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Printer Options (3) <STX>V
Print Contrast PC 0 – 64 N/A Print Control N/A
Printer Level PL 000000 – FFFFFF Hex Codes System Settings N/A

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




56 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Print Speed pS Alpha character
Model specific
ranges; see
Appendix L.
Print Control Pa
Query Configuration QQ Q, K N/A Configuration Label N/A
Reflective Paper Value RV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A
Retract Delay RW 1 – 255
Specified value times
ten milliseconds
Printer Options N/A
Rewinder Adjust RR -xx, +yy
Applied torque,
where -30 to +15 is
the valid range.
Printer Options N/A
Rewinder Equipped RM A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Printer Options N/A
RFID Configuration RI
A, B, D, E, L, M, N,
P, R, S, T, U, V, W
See Table 5-8. Printer Options N/A
Ribbon Low Diameter RL 100 – 200 1/100 in. Media Settings N/A

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 57

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Ribbon Low Pause RP Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
Media Settings N/A
Ribbon Low Signal RS 3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Print Options N/A
Ribbon Saver Enable RE A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Printer Options <STX>R
Row Adjust
[1]
RA xxxx dots
Model specific; see
Appendix K,
and Row Adjust Fine
Tune
Print Control (6) N/A
Row Adjust Fine Tune RF + / – dots
Resolution specific;
see Appendix K.
Printer Control N/A
Row Offset RO 0 – 9999 1/100 in. Print Control Rnnnn
SOP Adjust
[1]
SA
0 – 255
(128 nominal)
N/A,
see Row Adjust Fine
Tune
N/A <STX>O
SOP Emulation SE A, L, P, D
A = Allegro,
L = Prodigy Plus,
P = Prodigy,
D = Disable
System Settings N/A

(continued)


Extended System-Level Command Functions




58 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual


<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Save As Filename SF
Alphanumeric
string
Up to 16 characters System Settings N/A
Scalable Font Bolding FB 1 – 36 N/A System Settings N/A
Scalable Font Cache SC 100 – 8192 Kbytes System Settings (14) N/A
Scalable Heap SH 0 – 9999 Kbytes N/A N/A
Scanner Configuration SN
C, H, M,
D, B, V
See Table 5-11. Printer Options N/A
Security Lock Sl N, Y, T See Table 5-9. System Settings N/A
Sensor Gain Value SG 0 – 32 N/A Media Settings N/A

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 59

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Sensor Type ST G, C, R
G = Gap (edge),
C = Continuous,
R = Reflective
Media Settings (2)

<STX>e,
<STX>r,
<STX>c
Serial Port SP xyz See Table 5-12.
Communications
9 & 10
N/A
Single Byte Symbol Set AS
2-Byte alpha
character
AA – ZZ, printer
resident symbol set
System Settings
<STX>y,
ySxx
Slew Speed FS Alpha character
Model specific
ranges; see
Appendix L.
Print Control <STX>KZSx
Software Switch SV Y, N
Y = Processed
N = Ignored
Communications N/A

(continued)


Extended System-Level Command Functions




60 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Start of Print EQ 3, 4
3 = Active Low,
4 = Active High
Printer Options N/A
Stop Location SL
A, H, P,
C, T, N
See Table 5-10. 16 N/A
TOF Precedence TP Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
N/A N/A
User Label Mode UD Y, N
Y = Enabled,
N = Disabled
System Settings N/A
Unit of Measure UM M, I
M = Metric,
I = Imperial
System Settings (5)
<STX>m,
<STX>n
User Terminator UT ON N/A N/A N/A

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 61


<STX>Kc
Parameter Name
Parameter
Pneumonic
Value /
Range
Units /
Interpretation
Menu Item (or Number)
( i f avai l ab l e)
Command
Equivalent
Verifier Equipped VE A/Y, E, N/D
A or Y = Auto,
E = Enabled,
N or D = Disabled
Printer Options <STX>KV
Verifier Type VT A, B, C, D
Reserved for future
use
N/A N/A
WiFi Security
(for firmware versions
13.99 and earlier. For
firmware versions 14.00
and later see Network
Setup parameter NE)
WS
A, K, S,
L, P, U
See Table 5-14. N/A N/A
WiFi Setup
(for firmware versions
13.99 and earlier. For
firmware versions 14.00
and later see Network
Setup parameter NE)
WE
A, C, F, I, L, M, N,
P, R, T, V, X

See Table 5-13. N/A N/A

1. Commands are provided for backward compatibility on EX2. The KcQQQ command will respond with the new command equivalent; see
associated new commands.
2. The EX2 will accept display-equipped module IDs (D & G) as command parameters for upward compatibility; query commands will result in
printer responses with module IDs that are non-display compatible, providing backward compatibility.
3. Present distance changes for EX2 will only be accepted if the Stop Location (SL) is set to “Host.”
Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands


Extended System-Level Command Functions



62 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
< STX> Kc Par amet er Over vi ew s

( AL) Al i gnment Lengt h – This command, critical for small labels when Label
Alignment is set to YES, allows a length (measured from leading edge to leading
edge of two successive labels) to be entered. The measured length must be provided
to the nearest hundredth of an inch. For very small labels, errors of 0.01” can result
in noticeable print variations on the labels between the media sensor and the print
head. The number of labels that can be fit between the Media Sensor and the print
head will magnify any error in label alignment length. Errors in measurement are
more favorable on the low side rather than the high side.

Non-Display models: The printer will verify the label position using the provided
Alignment Length before printing the first label after power-up.



( AS) Si ngl e Byt e Symbol Set – This command allows for a default single-byte
symbol set. See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.



( BA) Backup Af t er Pr i nt – This command determines the timing of the label back
up positioning when the present distance is set and the GPIO option or Present
Sensor option (including Peel and Present) is enabled. When enabled, the printer
immediately backs up the label after the applicator-issued start of print signal is
received or the label is removed, resulting in faster throughput. If disabled, the
printer will not initiate repositioning until the next label is ready to print (may help
prevent the curling of the label edge).



( BD) Back up Del ay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a
presented label in one-fiftieth (1/50) of a second increments.



( BL) Back up Label – This command determines the timing of reverse label motion
when the GPIO option is installed and enabled; see Appendix J for details.



( BP) Br i t i sh Pound – This command, when enabled, will automatically switch from
the Number symbol (#) found at 0x23 (default PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set) to
the British Pound symbol (£) at 0x9C.



( BS or bS) Back up Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement
during backup positioning for start of print, cutting or present distance; see Appendix
C for available speed ranges.
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 63
( BZ) Buzzer Enabl e – This command controls the audible signaling device that
acknowledges User Interface entries and, if enabled, sounds printer warning and
fault conditions.



( CA) Col umn Adj ust – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset setting by
shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width termination
point to the right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight mechanical
differences sometimes evident when multiple printers share label formats. Note that
the EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only, limited in range (28-
228). The <STX>KcQQQ response will show the Column Adjust Fine Tune (CF)
equivalent value.



( CB) Cut Behi nd – This command allows the printer to queue a specified number of
small labels before a cut is performed to increase throughput.



( CC) Cont r ol Codes – This command, depending upon printer type, allows a
change to the prefix of the software commands interpreted by the printer:

Value
Units /
Interpretation
Control Code Definition
S Standard Codes
Hex 01 = SOH command; Hex 02 = STX command; count-
by = ^; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
1 Alternate Codes
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; count-
by = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return
2 Alternate Codes 2
Hex 5E = SOH command; Hex 7E = STX command; count-
by = @; Hex 1B = ESC; Hex 0x7C = Carriage Return



( CE) Cut t er Equi pped – This command allows the printer to sense the cutter option.
“A” - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no error is generated. “E” -
enables the device, where its presence must be detected; otherwise, a fault is
generated. “N” - disables device detection. One of these values is returned in
response to <STX>KcQQQ. Note that alternate values are accepted for backward
compatibility as follows: For display-equipped models “Y” is equivalent to “A”; and,
for non-display models “Y” is equivalent to “E”.



( CF) Col umn Adj ust Fi ne Tune – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset
setting by shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width
termination point to the right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight
mechanical differences sometimes evident when multiple printers share label
formats.
Extended System-Level Command Functions



64 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
( CH) Communi cat ed Heat Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL Heat commands; instead, the Heat value is controlled via the menu
setting.




( CL) Cont i nuous Label Lengt h – See <STX>c for command details.




( CO) Col umn Of f set – See Cnnnn for command details.




( CS) Communi cat ed Speed Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL speed commands; instead, speed values are controlled via the menu
setting.





( CT) Communi cat ed TOF Commands – This command causes the printer to
ignore DPL TOF (Gap, Continuous, and Reflective) commands; instead, the sensor
type is controlled via the menu setting.




( DE) DPI Emul at i on – This command allows printers with higher resolutions to
emulate lower print resolutions, as follows:

• 600 DPI can emulate 300 and 203 DPI resolutions; and,
• 400 DPI can emulate a 203 DPI resolution.




( DK) Dar k ness – This command adjusts the length of the print head strobe to fine-
tune the HEAT setting.




( DM) Def aul t Modul e – See <STX>X for command details.
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 65
( DR) Del ay Rat e – This command sets the number of minutes to delay between
multiple batch printings of Quick Test Labels.





( DS) Doubl e Byt e Symbol Set – See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.





( EM) I nput Mode – This command determines the data processing mode:

Value Interpretation Input Mode Interpretation
0 DPL Character strings are parsed for standard DPL processing.
1 Line
No parsing occurs; instead, each carriage return (<CR>)
terminated data line is printed according to a stored template
(see Appendix S).
3 PL-Z
Character strings are parsed for PL-Z processing, applicable
only if the appropriate firmware is installed, as indicated by a
“Z” in the version string (except for H-Class and M-Class
Mark II, which is standard).

E

For RFID, the hardware option, tag type and size
should be preselected, and a tag calibration performed.
Also, if possible, driver / software options to use
“Printer Defaults” should be chosen to minimize
potential conflicts.
7 PL-B
Character strings are parsed for PL-B processing, applicable
only if the appropriate firmware is installed, as indicated by a
“B” in the version string.
9 Auto
Character strings are automatically parsed and processed
according to the identified language.

E

A clean file is required, where extra leading characters
may cause the language to be unrecognizable;
otherwise, the appropriate Input Mode must be
selected.





( EN) End Char act er – This command terminates a <STX>Kc string.



Extended System-Level Command Functions



66 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
( EP) End of Pr i nt – This command defines the signal output used to signify the End
of Print (EOP) process:

Value Units End of Print Interpretation
1 Low Pulse
Outputs a low pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long)
following printing.
2 High Pulse
Outputs a high pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long)
following printing.
3 Active Low Outputs a logic low (zero) following printing.
4 Active High Outputs a logic high (one) following printing.



( EQ) St ar t of Pr i nt – This command defines the type of signal input required to
control the Start of Print (SOP) process:

Value Units Start of Print Interpretation
3 Active Low
SOP signal must go low for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate
printing.
4 Active High
SOP signal must go high for at least 50 milliseconds to
initiate printing.



( ES) ESC Sequences – This command allows data containing invalid ESC control
code sequences to be processed (helpful because some systems send a “banner” to
the printer). When set to “Disabled,” ESC sequences are ignored and the data is
processed. Bitmapped font downloads are disabled in this mode.



( EV) Empt y Sensor Level – This command sets threshold value for the “Empty”
media sensor parameter.



( FA) For mat At t r i but e – See the “An” command for details (Label Formatting
Command Functions).



( FB) Scal abl e Font Bol di ng – This command sets a bolding factor to fine tune
scalable fonts, where one causes the least amount of bolding and thirty-six the most
(default value is 8).

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 67
( FE) Font Emul at i on –This command allows font substitution for all internal fonts,
allowing a new default font to be defined without changing the host DPL data
streams. Selecting a default font that supports a desired character set could match
with third party software to print native characters without modifying the PC drivers.
In other words, match the PC font with the Printer Font then no interpretation would
be required by driver or printer. Depending on host drivers, the user may have to
disable Symbol Set commands and modify the Default Symbol set.





( FH) Faul t Handl i ng – This command determines the level of user intervention and
the disposition of the label being printed when a fault condition (ribbon out, media
out, etc.) occurs.

Value
Units /
Interpretation
Selection / Definition
0 = No Reprint
Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. After the
problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to
clear the fault. The label in process is not reprinted.
1 = Standard
Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. After the
problem is corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to
clear the fault. The label in process is reprinted.
L
2 = Void and
Retry
Depending upon the RETRY COUNT, one of the following
actions when faulted:

• If the Retry Count has not been exceeded, “VOID” is
printed on the label in process and reprinting occurs
automatically;

• If the Retry Count has been exceeded, printing stops and
a fault message is displayed. After the problem is
corrected, the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the
fault. The label in process is reprinted; or,

• If the CANCEL Key is pressed, the operator now has the
option of canceling the reprint. To allow reprinting, press
the ESCAPE Key; or, to cancel reprinting, press the
ENTER Key (and, the entire label batch will be cancelled
by pressing the ENTER Key again).

E

VOID will not be printed when insufficient text space
exists (see VOID DISTANCE, below) or if the fault
occurs after the label reaches its Present Distance
at, or above, the TOF.


(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions



68 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Value
Units /
Interpretation
Selection / Definition
3 = Delayed
Scan Fault
Increases throughput when bar codes reside near the
trailing edge of the label (in the direction of FEED).

E

• If unreadable, the fault will occur after the next
label prints.
• The label immediately following a faulted label is
not scanned for errors.
• VOID AND RETRY and REPRINT are automatically
disabled; the job can only be cancelled.
L
4 = Void Retry
& Cont.
VOID is printed on a faulted label, with reprint attempts
occurring automatically, until the RETRY COUNT has been
exceeded and then that label will be skipped (discarded)
and printing will continue to the next label in queue.
D
Void Distance
(.10 - 2.00)
Sets the distance (.10 - 2.00) to backup the faulted label to
print “VOID” on its trailing edge, which also indirectly
establishes the font size of the void message.
R
Retry Count
(0 – 3)
Establishes the number of times a reprint will be attempted
when using the RFID or Scanner option; if the last label
printed in this count has been voided, a fault will be
declared.
B
Enable / Disable
Y, N
Retract from presented distance prior to feed-clear motion.
This option is intended for use with applicator equipment
that may require certain GPIO signals for proper operation.



Table 5-2: Fault Handling Command

Example: <STX>KcFHD112<CR>

The example above configures the printer to back up and print a one-inch tall “VOID”
message on a faulted label; if two successive faults occur during the printing of that
label, then the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault.



( FM) Feedback Mode – See <STX>a for command details.



( FS) Sl ew Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement between
printing areas when the GPIO port is used; see Appendix L for ranges.



( GD) Di spl ay Mode – This command controls the size of displayed menu
characters, where Enhanced makes them larger.
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 69
( GE) GPI O Equi pped – This command is used to interface the printer to external
controlling devices (see Appendix J):

Value
Units /
Interpretation
GPIO Enable Definition
A Applicator
Enables the standard applicator mode, de-asserting DRDY
as soon as last label starts printing, allowing FEED any
time, and not de-asserting DRDY when PAUSED.
N Disabled Disables the GPIO Port.
V Verifier Enables the GPIO Port for a bar code verifier.
2 Applicator2
Enables the alternate applicator mode, where Data Ready
(DRDY) is extended to overlap the End Of Print (EOP) signal
by about 1 msec when printing the last label; and, where
PAUSE or FAULT de-asserts the DRDY signal and inhibits
the FEED operation.


( GL) Gap Sensor Locat i on (MP Compact4 Mark II only) – This command will tell the
printer which sensor to use when GAP mode is selected either by the <STX>KcSTG;
or by <STX>e. Outer Gap sensor is defined as the sensor 6.3mm from the edge of
the media, (Outer is default). Inner Gap sensor is defined as the sensor 17.2mm
from the edge of the media


( GM) Gap / Mar k Val ue – This command sets threshold value for the media
sensor’s “gap” or “mark” parameter.


( GP) GPI O Er r or Pause – This command enables or disables the printer from
sending a service required fault to the GPIO output (Applicator Interface CCA, Type 2
only).


( GR) Gai n Ref l ect i ve Val ue – This command sets the sensitivity of the reflective
media sensor.


( GS) GPI O Sl ew – This command sets the GPIO slew function and control:

Value Slew Interpretation
0 Standard (Active Low)
1 Low Pulse *
2 High Pulse *
3 Slews while low (Active Low)
4 Slews while high (Active High)
* Pulse must be at least 60 milliseconds in length; functions as if pressing the Feed Key,
clearing alarms and advancing media.
Extended System-Level Command Functions



70 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

( HB) Head Bi as – This command instructs the printer to switch the dot zero
position, as viewed from the label exit. When dot zero occupies the left-most location
on the print head then printing is left justified; and, when dot zero occupies the
right-most location, printing is right justified.





( HC) Head Cl eani ng – This command controls the print head cleaning routine. The
entered value specifies the inch (or centimeter) count to reach before prompting a
print head cleaning. If the number specified is exceeded three times, the printer will
fault until cleaning is initiated.

E

The number specified is multiplied by one thousand, and zero disables this function.





( HE) Heat – See Hnn for command details.





( HT) Host Ti meout – This command controls the number of seconds a
communications port must be idle before the printer will process data from a
different port or use a different parsing method. The value is also used to “timeout”
an image / label format download (i.e., if, at any time, data flow stops before a
complete label format is received, the data will be ignored).





( I C) I gnor e Cont r ol Codes – This command allows the user to remove control
codes (< 20 Hex) in the data field. The selected line terminator is processed. When
enabled, DPL Control Code (SOH, STX, CR, ESC, and ^) characters are removed
from the data string. (Note that some fonts do have printable characters in this
range and they will not be printed when enabled.)





( I E) I gnor e Di st ances – This command, when enabled, prevents <STX>O
processing that will change the start of print position.

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 71
( I L) I magi ng Mode – This command instructs the printer whether to pre-image the
label format:

Value
Units /
Interpretation
Imaging Mode Definition
M Multiple Label
The printer images multiple labels as memory
permits, achieving the fastest throughput; however,
if time-stamping, the time will reflect the moment
the label is imaged rather than when actually
printed.
S Single Label
The printer images the next label only after the
previous label has been successfully printed. Single
processing provides time-stamps that are more
accurate, but it slows label throughput time.


( I M) I nt er nal Modul e – This command sets the number of 1K blocks (or 4K blocks
for Non-Display models; see the <STX>KM command) allocated for Module D.


( LA) Label Al i gnment – This command prevents labels with lengths that are less
than the distance between the print head and the Media Sensor from being wasted at
power-up. See the appropriate Operator’s Manual for specific information. Unless
otherwise noted, the following information pertains to all Non-Display models:

Value &
Mode
Media Type Description / Operation
N =
Disabled
6.5-inch and greater
(≥ 16.51 cm) die-cut,
notched, reflective,
continuous, and
multiple form lengths.
When disabled, Non-Display models begin printing
at the current location, unless equipped with RTC
(Real Time Clock); see note below. The EX2
assumes the label position has not moved while
power was “Off” and that no system changes have
occurred.
A =
Auto
In auto mode, the printer will verify the label
position using the provided Alignment Length
before printing the first label after power-up. Press
and hold the FEED Key four seconds so the printer
will measure the length of the label. The EX2 will
only measure the label length when new label stock
is loaded.
Y =
Enabled
6.5-inch or less
(≤16.51 cm)
die-cut, notched, and
reflective
When enabled, the printer will verify the label
position using the provided Alignment Length
before printing the first label after power-up.
Specify the Label Alignment Length using the
<STX>KcAL command, or the Setup Menu.

Table 5-3: Label Alignment Command

E

The Real Time Clock (RTC) option allows the position-state of the label to be stored,
thus eliminating the need for an alignment prior to first label printing (assuming the
label has not moved during power off). If the stock has been changed then a Forced
Alignment (press and hold FEED 4 seconds) is recommended.

Extended System-Level Command Functions



72 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

( LE) Legacy Emul at i on – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print
positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats that were
designed for the Allegro
®
Prodigy
®
, and Prodigy Plus
®
(If the printer is Display-
Equipped, also Prodigy Max
®
emulation).

E

Use causes the printer to ignore Label commands A, M, n, and T.




( LR) Label Rot at i on – This command sets label rotation, allowing formats to be
flipped 180 degrees.





( LS) Language Sel ect – This command selects the language for the menu system
messages and configuration label. Only languages that are resident will be available.

E

Language name limited to a twenty character maximum.





( LM) Label St or e – This command selects the level of stored format recall to
include the label-formatting command fields, or the label-formatting command fields
and the printer state.





( LW) Label Wi dt h – This command sets the maximum limit for the printable width.
Objects extending beyond this limit will NOT print; see Appendix K. (For Non-Display
models also see the <STX>KW command.)

E

The EX2 requires this command prior to the start of the label format command
(<STX>L).



Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 73

( MCC) Modul e Command – This command adjusts the size of Flash module on the
optional Expansion Card according to the table below (see Appendix K for
appropriate module details):

Value Module Command Units / Interpretation
Zxx Where xx =
Size: 1 – 7 Mbytes. This is the amount to be allocated to
Module Z; any remaining memory will be allocated to Module F.
Gxx Where xx =
Size: 1 – 56, in 128 Kbytes blocks. This is the amount to be
allocated to Module G; any remaining memory will be allocated
to Module X.

Table 5-4: Module Command




( ML) Max i mum ( Label ) Lengt h – See <STX>M for command details.





( MM) Menu Mode – This command sets the menu access level of the printer –
where User is a basic listing of menu settings and controls, and Advanced is a full
menu listing.





( MT) Medi a Type – This command selects the printing method: Direct Thermal for
use with heat sensitive media or Thermal Transfer for use with media requiring a
ribbon to create an image. (For Non-Display models also see the <STX>KD
command.)





( MV) Mar k Val ue – This command sets threshold value for the reflective media
sensor’s “mark” parameter.




Extended System-Level Command Functions



74 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
( NE) Net w or k Conf i gur at i on – (for firmware version 14.00 and later) This
command configures the printer for an wired or wireless Ethernet connection.

Syntax is:

aa
i
[nnn
1
,vvvv
1
:nnn
2
,vvvv
2
:…,nnn
n
,vvvv
n
:XX[…]YY[…] ];

where:

aa
i
Configuration Group Identifier
[ ] Group Scope Delimiters
, Item – Value Delimiter
: Item – Value Pair Delimiter

nnn
i
,vvvv
i
: Configuration Item – Value pairs
nnn
i
Decimal Item Numbers from 1 to 9999
, Decimal Item Number Delimiter
vvvv
i
Item Value (syntax defined later)
: Item Value Delimiter

XX[…] Nested Configuration Sub-Group data stream
XX Sub-Group Identifier (1 – N alpha characters)
[ ] Sub-Group Scope Delimiters

; Configuration Group Terminator


The value fields can be represented as one of the following types:

Decimal Value
A decimal value string consisting of an optional leading ‘+-‘ character and followed by
decimal numeric characters 0 – 9.
Scientific Notation Value
A numeric value in scientific notation: (+-)nnnn.mmmmE+-XXX.
Hexadecimal Value
A hexadecimal value expressed like ‘0xb9E23c’.
Binary Bit Value
A binary bit value expressed like ‘0b011011’
Boolean Value
A single character from the following set: ‘Y, N, T, F, 0, 1’
String Value
A string of characters delimited by quotes, ‘…’. The ‘\’ acts as the escape character
permitting the following escaped character sequences:
o \nnewline (0x0a)
o \rcarriage return (0x0d)
o \bbackspace
o \ttab
o \fform feed
o \backslash
o \’quote
o \dddddd consists of 3 OCTAL DIGITS
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 75
Ex ampl e:

<STX>KcNE[G[1,0:2,’sysadm’:]WE[1,N:2,’192.168.10.26’:]WIFI[1,Y::DV1[1,0:]]]; <CR>

<STX>Kc This is the beginning of command
NE Network Ethernet group
G General Network sub-group
1,0 1 = Primary Interface Item, 0 = Wired Ethernet Value
2,’sysadm’ 2 = Network Password, followed by string password value
WE Wired Ethernet (802.3) sub-group
1,N 1 = DHCP Enabled, N = Boolean Value for Not Enabled
2,’192.168.10.26’ 2 = Static IP Address, followed by IP address string
WIFI Wireless Ethernet (802.11) sub-group
1,Y 1 = DHCP Enabled, Y = Boolean Value for Enabled
DV1 DPAC Version 1 sub-group defined for WLS sub-group
1,0 1 = DPAC Version 1 Network Type, 0 = Value for Infrastructure


Network Configuration Parameters

The two character identifier for the Network Configuration Parameters is ‘NE’. No
Item-Value pairs are defined for ‘NE’ but there is the following sub-groups:

General Network Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’
802.3 Wired Ethernet Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘WE’
802.11 Wireless Ethernet (WIFI) Configuration Parameters – Identifier
‘WIFI’. This sub group consits of 4 addtional sub-groups:
· General WIFI Configuration Parameters - Identifier ‘G’
· DPAC Version 1 - Identifier ‘DV1’
· DPAC Version 2 - Identifier ‘DV2’
· Silex Version 1 - Identifier ‘SV1’

The configuration data stream for the network configuration parameters has the
following structure:

NE[G[…]WE[…]WIFI[..]];

Extended System-Level Command Functions



76 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
General Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’

The ‘G’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply ‘globally’ or
‘generally’ to any ethernet interface used. No sub-groups are currently defined for
the ‘G’ sub-group of configuration parameters, only item-value pairs. The ‘Item-
Value’ pairs within the ‘G’ sub-group are defined by the following table:

Item
Number
Name Available
to User
(Y/N)
Value Type Description
1 Primary Interface Y Decimal Indicates the primary or used
ethernet interface type. Interface
types are Wired Ethernet (802.3) and
Wireless Ethernet (802.11). It is
called ‘Primary’ since, in the future if
multiple ethernet interfaces would be
supported, it would be the PRIMARY
interface used.
2 Network Password Y String Provides the network password used
for WEB and TELNET sessions.
3 SNMP Enable Y Boolean Enables or Disables the SNMP
services.
4 Telnet Enable Y Boolean Enables or Disables the TELNET
services.
5 FTP Enable Y Boolean Enables or Disables the FTP Server.
6 HTTP Enable Y Boolean Enables or Disables the HTTP (WEB
Pages) Server.
7 LPD Enable Y Boolean Enables or Disables the LPD (Line
Printer Daemon) services.
8 NetBIOS Enable Y Boolean Enables or Disables the NetBIOS
services.
9 Netcenter Enable Y Boolean Enables or Disables the Netcenter
services.
10 Gratuitous ARP
Period
Y Decimal Value of the Gratuitous ARP Period in
seconds. 0 = Disabled.
11 Printer TCP Port Y Decimal Value of the TCP Port for Print
Services.
12 Default MTU N Decimal Provides a Default MTU Size (used
internally).
13 Static Primary WINS
Server IP Address
Y String Static Primary WINS Server IP
Address in dotted decimal notation.
14 Static Secondary
WINS Server IP
Address
Y String Static Secondary WINS Server IP
Address in dotted decimal notation.
15 Static Primary DNS
Server IP Address
Y String Static Primary DNS Server IP Address
in dotted decimal notation.
16 Static Secondary
DNS Server IP
Address
Y String Static Secondary DNS Server IP
Address in dotted decimal notation.
17 SNMP TRAP IP
Address
Y String SNMP TRAP IP Address in dotted
decimal notation.
18 SNMP Server
Address
Y String SNMP Server IP Address in dotted
decimal notation.
19 NetBIOS Name Y String NetBIOS Name for the Printer.
20 Domain Name N String Domain Name – Not currently used.
21 Email Address N String Email Address – Not currently used.

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 77
802.3 – Wired Ethernet Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘WE’

The ‘WE’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply only to the
Wired Ethernet (802.3 Specification) ethernet interface. No sub-groups are currently
defined for the ‘WE’ sub-group of configuration parameters, only item-value pairs.
The ‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘WE’ sub-group are defined by the following table:

Item
Number
Name Available
to User
(Y/N)
Value Type Description
1 DHCP Enable Y Boolean Indicates if the DHCP Protocol is to
be used to automatically obtain all
required network addresses.
Formally known as IP Discovery.
2 Static Printer IP
Address
Y String Static IP Address for the Printer in
dotted decimal notation.
3 Static Printer
Subnet Mask
Y String Static Subnet Mask for the Printer in
dotted decimal notation.
4 Static Printer
Default Gateway or
Router
Y String Static Default Gateway (Router) IP
Address in dotted decimal notation.
5 PHY Mode Y Decimal Defines the ethernet PHY Mode
(Auto, 10BaseT HD, etc.)
Auto-Negotiate = 0
10BaseT Half Duplex = 1
10BaseT Full Duplex = 2
100BaseT Half Duplex = 3
100BaseT Full Duplex = 4
6 PHY Advertise Mode Y Decimal Defines the ethernet PHY Advertise
mode.
Auto = 0
All Capabilities = 1
7 PHY Capabilities to
Advertise
Y Decimal Defines the ethernet PHY capabilities
to advertise.
Always = 0
8 MTU Y Decimal Defines the Maximum Transmission
Unit size for the wired interface.
Defaults to the DEFAULT MTU from
the ‘G’ sub-group.

802.11 – Wireless Ethernet - WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘WIFI’

The ‘WIFI’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply only to the Wireless Ethernet
(802.11 Specification) ethernet interface. Four (4) sub-groups are currently defined for the ‘WIFI’ sub-
group of configuration parameters and are as follows:

General WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’
DPAC Version 1 – Identifier ‘DV1’
DPAC Version 2 (Veyron) – Identifier ‘DV2’
SILEX Version 1 – Identifier ‘SV1’



Extended System-Level Command Functions



78 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
General WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’

The ‘G’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are generally common to ALL WIFI
radio modules used by Datamax-O’Neil. These configuration parameters are universally standard within
the WIFI realm and are interpreted commonly by the various WIFI radio modules. The ‘Item-Value’ pairs
within the ‘G’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the following table:

Item
Number
Name Available
to User
(Y/N)
Value Type Description
1 DHCP Enable Y Boolean Indicates if the DHCP Protocol is to
be used to automatically obtain all
required network addresses.
Formally known as IP Discovery.
2 Static Printer IP
Address
Y String Static IP Address for the Printer in
dotted decimal notation.
3 Static Printer
Subnet Mask
Y String Static Subnet Mask for the Printer in
dotted decimal notation.
4 Static Printer
Default Gateway or
Router
Y String Static Default Gateway (Router) IP
Address in dotted decimal notation.
5 MTU Y Decimal Defines the Maximum Transmission
Unit size for the wired interface.
Defaults to the DEFAULT MTU from
the ‘G’ sub-group. Cannot exceed
the maximum ethernet packet size!!!
6 Ad-Hoc Channel Y Decimal WIFI Channel Number used when
operating in Peer-Peer (Ad-Hoc)
mode.
7 Region Code Y String Two (2) character zero terminate
Region Code string, such as “US”.
8 WEP Key Used Y Decimal A decimal number from 1 to 4 that
designates the WEP key used.
9 WEP Key 1 Y String 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 1
10 WEP Key 2 Y String 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 2
11 WEP Key 3 Y String 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 3
12 WEP Key 4 Y String 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 4
13 Pre-Shared Key or
PSK
Y String 8 to 64 character Pre-Shared Key
used by WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK
14 LEAP Used ID Y String User ID String for LEAP (Cisco) EAP
Protocol.
15 LEAP Password Y String Password String for LEAP (Cisco) EAP
Protocol.
16 EAP User ID Y String User ID String for other EAP
Protocols.
17 EAP Password Y String Password String for other EAP
Protocols
18 EAP Realm Y String Realm String for EAP Protocols that
utilize a Realm.
19 SSID Y String String that represents the SSID if in
Infrastructure mode.
20 WIFI Type Y Decimal WIFI Module type (DPAC1=1,
SILEX=2, DPAC2=3)

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 79
DPAC Version 1 WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘DV1’

The ‘DV1’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are specific to
the DPAC Version 1 WIFI radio module used by Datamax-O’Neil. The ‘Item-Value’
pairs within the ‘DV1’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the following
table:

Item
Number
Name Available
to User
(Y/N)
Value Type Description
1 Network Type Y Decimal Value that represents a Valid
Network Type for the DPAC Version 1
module.
AD-HOC = 0
Infrastructure = 1
2 WIFI Security Type Y Decimal Value that represents the DPAC
Version 1 Security Codes supported.
Security Disabled = 0
WEP, 64 Bit Key = 1
WEP, 128 Bit Key = 2
WPA-PSK = 3
WPA CISCO LEAP = 4
TKIP+40Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 5
TKIP+128Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 6
TKIP+40Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 7
TKIP+128Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 8
3 WIFI Authentication
Type
Y Decimal Value that represents the DPAC
Version 1 Authentication Types
supported (Auto, Open, Shared Key).
Automatic = 0
Open = 1
Shared Key = 2
4 Static Radio IP
Address
Y String Static IP Address for the DPAC
Version 1 radio module in dotted
decimal notation.
5 Static Radio Subnet
Mask
Y String Static Subnet Mask for the DPAC
Version 1 radio module in dotted
decimal notation.


Extended System-Level Command Functions



80 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
DPAC Version 2 WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘DV2’

The ‘DV2’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are specific to
the DPAC Version 2 (Veyron) WIFI radio module used by Datamax-O’Neil. The ‘Item-
Value’ pairs within the ‘DV2’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the
following table:

Item
Number
Name Available
to User
(Y/N)
Value Type Description
1 Network Type Y Decimal Value that represents a Valid
Network Type for the DPAC Version 2
module.
AD-HOC = 0
Infrastructure = 1
2 WIFI Security Type Y Decimal Value that represents the DPAC
Version 2 Security Codes supported.
Security Disabled = 0
WEP, 64 Bit Key = 1
WEP, 128 Bit Key = 2
WPA-PSK = 3
WPA CISCO LEAP = 4
TKIP+40Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 5
TKIP+128Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 6
TKIP+40Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 7
TKIP+128Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 8
WPA2-PSK = 9
WPA/WPA2 TLS = 10
WPA/WPA2 PEAP = 11
WPA/WPA2 TTLS = 12
3 WIFI Authentication
Type
Y Decimal Value that represents the DPAC
Version 2 Authentication Types
supported (Auto, Open, Shared
Key, EAP, etc.).
Automatic = 0
Open = 1
Shared Key = 2

Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 81
SILEX Version 1 WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘SV1’

The ‘SV1’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are specific to
the SILEX Version 1 WIFI radio module used by Datamax-O’Neil. The ‘Item-Value’
pairs within the ‘SV1’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the following
table:

Item
Number
Name Available
to User
(Y/N)
Value Type Description
1 Network Type Y Decimal Value that represents a Valid Network
Type for the SILEX Version 1 module.
AD-HOC = 0
Infrastructure = 1
2 Encryption Type Y Decimal Value that represents the SILEX Version
1 Encryption Types supported.
Security disabled = 0
WEP64 = 1
WEP128 = 2
WPA = 3
WPA2 = 4
3 Authentication Type Y Decimal Value that represents the SILEX Version
1 Authentication Types supported (Auto,
Open, Pre-Shared Key, EAP, etc.).
Open System = 0
Shared Key = 1
Pre-Shared Key = 2
TTLS = 3
LEAP = 4
PEAP = 5
EAP-FAST = 6
TLS = 7
4 Inner
Authentication Type
Y Decimal Value that represents the Inner
Authentication Type used if a Tunneled
EAP method is specified.
None = 0
PAP = 1
MSCHAP_V2 = 2
5 Use WPA Group Key Y Boolean Enables or Disables use of the WPA
Group Key.


Extended System-Level Command Functions



82 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
( NT) Net w or k Set up – (for firmware version 13.99 and earlier) This command
configures the printer for an Ethernet connection.

Value Parameter Interpretation Default Value
*

A x
Is the transmission interval for
Gratuitous ARP, where:

x = The interval, 0 – 2048, in minutes
0
B y
Is Network Bios Name, where:

y = Up to 16 alphanumeric characters,
no spaces
DMX_[and the last
3 octets (in
hexadecimal) of
the MACM (or
MACO) Address]
C x
Transmits the printer’s Wired network
communication capability, where x:

0 = Advertises the DUPLEX CAPABILITY
set value.

1 = Advertises all possibilities for
DUPLEX CAPABILITY.
0
D a
Is Discovery (DHCP or Bootp), where a:

Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
E x
Is the communication capability for the
Wired network, where x:

0 = Auto-Negotiate
1 = 10Base-T, Half Duplex
2 = 10Base-T, Full Duplex
3 = 100Base-T, Half Duplex
4 = 100Base-T, Full Duplex
0
F a
Is FTP enable, where a:

Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
G xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the Gateway Address, where:

x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 83

Value Parameter Interpretation Default Value
*

I xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the IP Address, where:

x = 0 to 9
192.168.010.026
m x
Is MTU packet size, where:

x = a range, 512 – 65515, in bytes
1500
N xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the SNMP Trap Address, where:

x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
P xxxx
Is the destination Port Number, where:

x = 0 to 9
9100
S xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the Subnet Mask, where:

x = 0 to 9
255.255.255.000
T a
Is SNMP enable, where a:

Y = Enable
N = Disable
Y
U xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the WINS2 Address, where:

x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
w a
Is WiFi enable, where a:

Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
W xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the WINS1 Address, where:

x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
X a
Is Telnet enable, where a:

Y = Enable
N = Disable
N
Y xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the DNS1 Address, where:

x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
K a
Is TCP Keep Alive enable, where a:

Y = Enable
N = Disable
N

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions



84 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Value Parameter Interpretation Default Value
*

Z xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the DNS2 Address, where:

x = 0 to 9
000.000.000.000
$ xxxxxx
Sets the webpage password, where:

x = alphanumeric characters
sysadm

* Prior to the introduction of WiFi, 192.0.0.192 was the IP default value and the Subnet
Mask was 0.0.0.0.
Table 5-5: Network Setup

E

Each octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e.g., an IP Address of
10.12.0.243 must be sent to the printer as 010.012.000.243).



Example:

<STX>KcNTI010.012.000.243;NTS255.255.000.000;NTG010.012.254.254;NTDN;<CR>

The command string above is typical of a network setup string (where the values
meanings are shown in the following table). This configuration setup command string
may be included with any other Kc sub-commands.

Sub-commands and Values Interpretation
NTI010.012.000.243 IP Address: 10.12.0.243
NTS255.255.000.000 Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
NTG010.012.254.254 Gateway Address: 10.12.254.254
NTDN DHCP is disabled


( NR) No Repr i nt – This command controls the label reprint function following the
correction of a fault condition. Upon detection of a fault (ribbon out, paper out, etc.),
printing stops and a fault indicator is illuminated. After the problem is corrected, the
FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault and resume normal operation. When
enabled, the label in process is not reprinted.


Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 85
( NS) Di sabl e Symbol Set Sel ect i on – This command prevents the <STX>y and y
commands from changing the default single-byte symbol set. When enabled, DPL
Symbol Set commands are ignored.

E

When enabled, the only way to change the current symbol set is with the <STX>KcAS
command.










( OF) Opt i on Feedback Mode – This command configures the printer to output the
status of the RFID or Scanner option to the active port, as follows.

Value Option Feedback Mode Units / Interpretation
D = Disable

Rx

=

RFID Enable, where x is the response format:
A = ASCII
H = Hexadecimal
D, Rx, S

S = Scanner Enable

Table 5-6: Option Feedback Command


E

Not supported on the I-4208 printer.


Once enabled, the printer will report information about the results of the last label
printed. One response per label is returned to the host (this includes each voided and
retried label). The format and contents of the returned information is as follows:

Extended System-Level Command Functions



86 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Response format:

<A;B;C;D;E;F>[CR]

A
- Device type:
R = RFID
S = Scanner

B
- Resulting status:
C = entire label complete
F = faulted (failed) label
U = unknown

C
- The number of expected reads for bar codes or tags,
given in two characters.

D
- The number of good reads for bar codes or tags, given in
two characters.

E
- The printer’s internal Job Identifier and Sub Job
Identifier, given in four characters each.

Where:
F
- The data read, delimited with semicolons (;) if multiple
reads.

RFID response sample differences: Since RFID commands vary in operation, the
data returned also differs. Write commands return entire tag data; Write/Verify
commands return the data written; and, Read commands return data and length
requested in the specified format. (See Appendix S for a listing of commands.)

Write response example:
<R;C;00;00;0013:0001>[CR]

Write/Verify hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>
[CR]

Read hexadecimal response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001;446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374>
[CR]

Write/Verify ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0012:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]

Read ASCII response example:
<R;C;01;01;0013:0001; Datamax writes RFID best >[CR]


Scanner response samples:

A successfully read label example:
<S;C;03;03;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2;DATA3>[CR]

A failed label, successfully retried:
<S;F;02;01;0002:0001;DATA1>[CR]
<S;C;02;02;0002:0001;DATA1;DATA2>[CR]
Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 87

( PA) Pr esent Adj ust – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance setting in
dots to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple
printers share label formats. The EX2 accepts this command for backward
compatibility only, limited in range (28-228). <STX>KcQQQ response shows the
Present Adjust Fine Tune (PJ) equivalent value.





( PC) Pr i nt Cont r ast – This command adjusts the relative print edge (gray)
component of the print quality, which allows fine-tuning for specific media/ribbon
mix.





( PD) Pr esent Di st ance – This command sets the label stop position past the start
of print. When the next label format is received, the printer will automatically
backfeed to the start position. If the present distance is set to zero, the printer will
operate without reversing. (See Stop Location, below).





( PE) Peel Mode – This command, when enabled, specifies that a Feed operation be
prevented when the label is presented and not removed, or if the printer is to wait
for the GPIO start of print signal.





( PJ) Pr esent Adj ust Fi ne Tune – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance
setting in dots to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if
multiple printers share label formats.





( PL) Pr i nt er Level – This command is used to upgrade the software feature level of
the printer.





( PM) Pause Mode – See <STX>J for command details.
Extended System-Level Command Functions



88 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
( PO) Paper Empt y – This command sets the length of travel before an out of stock
condition is declared.





( PP) Par al l el Di r ect i on – This command controls the parallel port communications
settings:

Value Parallel Direction Units / Interpretation
xz
x = Port ID: A or B

z = Direction: U (unidirectional – one-way communication); or,
B (bidirectional – IEEE 1284 back-channel operation).

Table 5-7: Parallel Communications Configuration Command





( PS) Pr esent Sensor Equi pped – This command allows the printer to sense the
present sensor option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if
undetected, no error will be generated. E - enables the device, where its presence
must be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.
See <STX>V for command details. (Note that the value range for Non-Display models
is only Y, or N. Also see the <STX>KD command.)





( pS) Pr i nt Speed – See Label Formatting Command Function P for details.





( PT) Tear Posi t i on – This command sets the label stopping location at the tear
plate on the printer’s cover.

E

Not recommended for use with non-display models, instead see Stop Location (SL).


Extended System-Level Command Functions




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 89
( PV) Paper Val ue – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s
“paper” parameter.




( PW) Passw or d Set – This command modifies the numeric password required to
access the menu when security is enabled. If security is enabled, enter the new
password followed by the old password (with no spaces) in this form: XXXXXXXX

E

To be activated, the default password (0000) must be changed.




( QQ) Conf i gur at i on Quer y – This command requires a parameter of either K or Q.
K causes the printer to respond with the Printer Key, used for generating Upgrade
Codes. A parameter value of Q causes the printer to respond with the current
configuration settings. The <STX>Kc response command stream format is sent to the
host computer via the same port as the query containing all parameters controlled
by the <STX>Kc command, and may be used for restoring the printer’s configuration
or for configuring other printers.




( RA) Row Adj ust – This command shifts the vertical start of print position (in
dots). Note that the EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only,
limited in range (28-228). <STX>KcQQQ response shows the Row Adjust Fine Tune
(RF) equivalent value.




( RE) Ri bbon Saver Equi pped – This command allows the printer to sense the
ribbon saver option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if undetected,
no error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must be detected;
otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection. See <STX>R for
command details.




( RF) Row Adj ust Fi ne Tune – This command shifts the vertical start of print
position in dots (see Appendix K) upward or downward.




Extended System-Level Command Functions


90 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
( RI ) RFI D Conf i gur at i on – This command configures the optional RFID interface module, as follows:


Value Units / Interpretation RFID Configuration Definition / Function
AIhh where hh: 2-Chararacter Hex ID Sets the Application Family Identifier (AFI), HF only.
ALn and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows locking the AFI after writing (HF only).
D = Disable
Disables padding or truncating of data (EPC only).

E

Nulls are represented as “00”.
For Hex EPC data a 96-bit tag size is 24 characters and 64-bit is 16.
For ASCII EPC data a 96-bit tag size is 12 characters and 64-bit is 8.

1 = Leading
If the data is less than the selected EPC tag data size, nulls will be added to the
front (left); or, if too much data is given, the data will be cut.
Bn where n:
2 = Trailing
If the data is less than the selected EPC tag data size, nulls will be added to the
back (right); or, if too much data is given, the data will be cut.
DIhh where hh: 2-Chararacter Hex ID Sets the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID), HF only.
DLn and where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows locking the DSFID after writing (HF only).
En where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows erasures of the tag on error (HF only).
Lhh where hh: 2-Chararacter Hex ID Sets the Lock Code (Alien UHF only).
D = Disable Disables the RFID module. (“N” is also a valid disabler.)
H = HF Enables the RFID module for HF (Securakey).
U = UHF Enables the RFID module for UHF Class 1 (Alien).
Mn where n:
M = UHF Enables the RFID module for UHF Multiprotocol.

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 91

Value Units / Interpretation RFID Configuration Definition / Function
Nn where n:
64 = 64-bit
96 = 96-bit
Sets the UHF tag data size (Multiprotocol UHF only).
Pxxx where xxx: 3-Digit Value
Sets the tag encoding position: A value of 0.00 causes the print position to be
used; or, a value greater than 0 causes the presented position to be used.
(Subject to change.)
Rn where n: 0 – 9 Sets the number of retries for RFID functions.
Shh where hh: 2-Chararacter Hex ID
Sets the Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) set, representing the
manufacturer’s code (HF only).
Tn where n:
0 = ISO 15693,
1 = Texas Instruments,
2 = Philips,
3 = ST Micro LRI 512,
4 = ST Micro LRI 64
Establishes the tag type (HF only).
Un where n:
0 = EPC 0
1 = EPC 0+ Matrics
2 = EPC 0+ Impinj
3 = EPC 1
6 = UCODE EPC 1.19*
7 = EM 4022/4222
8 = Gen 2
Sets the UHF tag type (Multiprotocol UHF only).
Vn where n: -4 to +4 Adjusts the power, in dBmn (Multiprotocol UHF only).
Wn where n:
E = Enable,
D = Disable
Allows locking the tag after writing.

*Unavailable for A-Class printers.
Table 5-8: RFID Configuration Set Commands

Example: <STX>KcRIMH;RIA11E;RID22E;RIS04;RIR3;RIWE;RIEE;RIP000<CR>

The above example sets the printer to HF, protect after write AFI 11, protect after write DFSID 22, set EAS Bit (Mfg. Code
0x04), allow 3 tries for each read or write attempt, lock after writing, erase the tag if there is an error, and use a position of
0.00.
Extended System-Level Command Functions


92 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

( RL) Ri bbon Low Di amet er – This command sets the threshold for a low ribbon
indication, where nnnn is the diameter in hundredths of inches.




( RM) Rew i nder Equi pped – This command allows the printer to sense the powered
internal rewind option. A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if
undetected, no error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must
be detected; otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.




( RO) Row Of f set – See Rnnnn (in Label Formatting Command Functions) for
command details.




( RP) Ri bbon Low Pause – This command (when enabled) pauses the printer when
a Ribbon Low Diameter warning is declared; the PAUSE Button must be pressed to
continue printing.




( RR) Rew i nder Adj ust – This command changes the torque applied by the
powered rewinder, in percentage points of the nominal force, to minimize TOF
registration drift (sometimes evident when using small or narrow media).




( RS) Ri bbon Low Si gnal – This command sets the signal output type for the
Ribbon Low Diameter condition when using the optional GPIO (see Appendix J).




( RV) Ref l ect i ve Paper Val ue – This command sets the threshold value for the
reflective media sensor’s paper parameter.




( RW) Ret r act Del ay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a
presented label, where the time specified is multiplied by ten milliseconds.



Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 93
( SA) SOP Adj ust – This command sets the start of print (SOP) location, relative to
the top of form. See <STX>O for command details. The EX2 accepts this command for
backward compatibility only, limited in range (28-228).






( SC) Scal abl e Cache – This command sets the number of 1K blocks allocated for
the scaleable font engine. Available memory dependent upon model; see Appendix
K. (For non-display models see the <STX>KS command.)






( SE) SOP Emul at i on – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print
positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats designed
for other printers.






( SF) Save As Fi l ename – This command, which may be sent separately or included
as the last command in an <STX>Kc command string, saves the effective printer
configuration to a file in Flash memory with a .dcm file extension.






( SG) Sensor Gai n Val ue – This command sets the control of the voltage to the LED
emitter of the Media Sensor.






( SH) Scal abl e Heap – This command sets a working “scratch pad space” in DRAM
for scalable font construction.



Extended System-Level Command Functions


94 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
( Sl ) Secur i t y Lock – This command provides the ability to password-protect the
User Interface, as follows:

Value Security Function
Nxxxx Where xxxx is the current password, this disables Menu protection.
Yxxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection and sets a new
password.
Txxxx
Where xxxx is a new password, this enables Menu protection, disables Test
functions, and sets a new password.

Table 5-9: Security Lock Command

E

To be activated, the default password (0000) must be changed.




( SL) St op Locat i on – This command sets the label stopping (and in certain cases
the starting) location, as follows:

Value Stop Location
A
Automatically sets the stop location. Installed options will be “auto-sensed”
and the appropriate stop position will automatically be set. Host commands
are ignored.
H
Sets stop position according to options installed. If no options are installed the
printer sets stop location to the next label’s start of print. Host commands will
override. The stop location (present distance) may be controlled dynamically
by the host using the <STX>f or <STX>Kf commands. This selection has the
same effect as <STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 0.
P
Sets the stop location at approximately two millimeters behind the peel bar
edge, a nominal peel position. The Present Sensor status and this setting are
independent.
C
Sets the stop location to a nominal cut position. For die-cut media, the
position is just following the end of the label. The cutter status and this setting
are independent.
T Sets the stop location at the tear bar.
N
Sets the stop location to the start of the next label, equivalent to setting the
<STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 1.

Table 5-10: Stop Location Command

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 95
( SM) Max i mum ( Label ) Lengt h I gnor e – This command controls recognition of
the <STX>M command.


( SN) Scanner Conf i gur at i on – This command configures the linear scanner, as
follows:

Values Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation
Bar Code Type – Specifies the bar code, using two digits, followed by “Y” (to
enable) or “N” (to disable) the code, where:
01 = CODE 39
02 = IATA
03 = CODABAR
04 = INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5
05 = INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5
06 = CODE 93
07 = CODE 128
08 = MSI/PLESSEY
09 = EAN(13/8)
10 = EAN(13/8)+2
11 = EAN(13/8)+5
12 = UPC(A/E)
13 = UPC(A/E)+2
14 = UPC(A/E)+5
B
E

To maximize throughput and decoding integrity, enable only those
symbologies that will be read.
C
Bar Code Count – Specifies the number of codes to be read, where:

00 – 99 (00 = Auto [variable] mode, counting those codes present)


E

Do not use Auto Mode with bitmapped codes or codes with certain
addendums; see Appendix F.
H
Min Readable Height – Sets the vertical distance of the code that must have
identical reads to pass, where:

1 = 1/16
2 = 2/16
3 = 3/16
4 = 1/4
5 = 1/2
0 = Disabled (defaults to Redundancy Level, 2x)

E

The specified distance should not exceed 50% of the measured bar
code height.
M
Mode – Enables detection of the scanner by the printer, where:

A = Auto (automatically senses presence); Y is also a valid enabler.
E = Enabled (if not detected a fault is generated).
D = Disabled (the scanner is disabled); (N is also a valid disabler.)

(continued)
Extended System-Level Command Functions


96 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Values Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation
Redundancy Level – An alternative data integrity method, where the selected
level sets the number of consecutive, identical decodes required to pass the
bar code. If differing values are read, the count is restarted, where:
0 = Auto Mode
1 = read code 1X
2 = read code 2X
3 = read code 3X
4 = read code 4X
5 = read code 5X
6 = read code 6X
7 = read code 8X
8 = read code 10X
9 = read code 12X
A = read code 15X
B = read code 20X
C = read code 25X
D = read code 30X
E = read code 35X
F = read code 40X
G = read code 45X
V

E

Depending upon the print speed, higher Redundancy Levels may
cause erroneous failures when scanning multiple or small bar codes.

Table 5-11: Scanner Configuration Set Command

Example: <STX>KcSNC00H4MAB12YV0<CR>

The example above sets the printer to sense the scanner automatically, to read a
variable number of UPC bar codes, and to pass only those codes where a ¼ inch
zone has identical reads.
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 97

( SP) Ser i al Por t – This command configures the serial communication port(s) as
follows:


Table 5-12: Serial Port Configuration Set Command

E

For EX2 models the data length, parity, and stop bits are fixed at 8, N, and 1
respectively. And, for Applicator Interface Card-equipped models, this command is
also used to configure the GPIO Auxiliary port (ID always “B”).

Example: <STX>KcSPAPB;SPApN;SPAD8;SPAS1;SPAB19<CR>

The example above configures Serial Port A to use hardware and software
handshaking, an eight-bit word, with no parity and one stop bit at 19,200 bits per
second.


Value Serial Port Range / Interpretation
xyz Where: x = Port Identifier: y = Function: z = Setting
P - Handshaking
Protocol

B - both
H - hardware
N - none
S – software

p - Parity E - even
N - none
O – odd

D - Data Length 7 - eight bits
8 - seven bits


A - Serial A
B - Serial B
S - Stop Bits 1 - one bit
2 - two bits


xyzz Where: x = Port Identifier: y = Function: zz = Setting:
A - Serial A
B - Serial B
B - Baud Rate 12 - 1200
24 - 2400
48 - 4800
96 - 9600
19 - 19200
28 - 28800
38 - 38400
Extended System-Level Command Functions


98 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

( SS or sS) Feed Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement
between printing areas; see Appendix L.




( ST) Sensor Type – See <STX>e (edge) or <STX>r (reflective) for command details.
(For non-display models also see the <STX>KD command.)




( SV) Sw i t ch Set t i ngs – This command controls recognition of the software switch
setting command <STX>V.




( TB) TOF Bi as – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to
recognize a label “gap” or “mark”.




( TD) TOF Del t a – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to
recognize a label “gap” or “mark”.




( TG) TOF Gai n – This command controls the voltage to the LED emitter of the
Media Sensor.




( TN) No Paper Mi n – This command sets the media sensor level for the Out of
Stock (OOS) condition.




( TP) TOF Pr ecedence – This command instructs the firmware to stop printing at
the first top of form mark it detects. The default (“No”) prints all of the data
(traversing the top of form as necessary) then slews to the next TOF.




( UD) User Label Mode – This command places the printer in standalone operation,
which provides menu-driven processes to print user defined files, including .dlb,
.dpl, .prn, .txt formats.
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 99
( UM) Uni t s of Measur e – See <STX>m (metric) or <STX>n (imperial) for command
details.



( UT) User Ter mi nat or – This command allows word wrapping of long character
strings of commands to the next line in a file, for the purposes of readability only. In
the <STX>Kc string, the command UTON must fall somewhere before the first line
terminator. The last command needs to be END, followed by a line terminator (see
the <STX>KcEN command for details).


( VE) Ver i f i er Equi pped – This command enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier
(see Appendix J). A (or Y) - automatically senses device presence; if undetected, no
error is generated. E - enables the device, where its presence must be detected;
otherwise, a fault is generated. N or D - disables device detection.


( VT) Ver i f i er Type – This command is reserved for future use.


( WE) Wi Fi Set up – This command configures the printer for a WiFi connection, as
follows:

Value Parameter WiFi Interpretation Default Value
A y
Is the SSID (Access Point name),
where:

y = Up to 31 characters, no spaces
MACR
C x
Is the Channel number (Adhoc only,
country dependent), where:

x = 1 to 14
1
F x
Is Enable DHCP Fixed Interval
Transmission, where x:

1 = Fixed
0 = Exponential
0
I xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Is the IP Address*, where:

x = 0 to 9
192.168.010.001
L x
Is the DHCP Acquire Time Limit, where:

x = 0 to 255 seconds
150

(continued)

Extended System-Level Command Functions


100 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Value Parameter WiFi Interpretation Default Value
M x
Is the maximum transmission rate,
where x:

0 = 1 Mbps
1 = 2 Mbps
2 = 5.5 Mbps
3 = 11 Mbps
2
N y
Is the client name, where:

y = Up to 31 characters, no spaces
N/A
P x
Is the WEP Access Point Density, where
x:

0 = Low
1= Medium
2 = High
0
R y
Is the Region, where:

y = Two-character code; see Appendix T.
US
T x
Is the Mode, where x:

0 = Adhoc
1 = Infrastructure
2 = Unique (SSID = MAC address; and,
WiFi type = Adhoc)
2
V x
Is the DHCP Retransmit Interval, where:

x = 1 to 64 seconds
15
X a
Is MAC Cloning, where a:

0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0
* Each octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e.g., an IP Address of
10.12.0.243 must be sent to the printer as 010.012.000.243).

Table 5-13 WiFi Setup


Example 1:

<STX>KcNTDN;NTwN;WEI010.012.000.248;WEAEngWAN1;NTI010.012.000.245;NTS25
5.255.000.000;NTG010.012.254.254<CR>
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 101
( WS) Wi Fi Secur i t y – This command configures WiFi security.

Value Parameter WiFi Interpretation Default Value
xy
Is the WEP Key, where x:

1 = WEP Key 1
2 = WEP Key 2
3 = WEP Key 3
4 = WEP Key 4

And where y:

Is the Key, up to 26 characters with no spaces.
1

(See Note 1)
A x
Is the Security Authentication, where x:

0 = Auto
1 = Open
2 = Shared
0
K x
Is the WEP Default Key, where x:

1 = WEP Key 1
2 = WEP Key 2
3 = WEP Key 3
4 = WEP Key 4
1
S x
Is the Security setting, where x:

0 = Disabled
1 = WEP 64 Bit
2 = WEP 128 Bit
3 = WPA PSK
4 = WPA LEAP
5 = WPA LEAP 64
6 = WPA LEAP 128
7 = WPA PSK+TKIP 64
8 = WPA PSK+TKIP 128
0
L y
Is the LEAP Password, where y:

Is up to 32 characters.
See Note 2
P y
Is the WPA Passphrase (Preshared Key), where
y:

Is 8 to 63 characters with no spaces; or, 64 hex
characters.
See Note 3
U y
Is the LEAP User ID, where y:

Is up to 32 characters.
See Note 4
1. Default values for WEP Keys are all zeros (whether 10 digit or 26 digits).
2. The LEAP password is 1 to 32 characters and must match the LEAP password assigned
to the LEAP user on the LEAP server. The password cannot contain spaces.
3. The WPA passphrase must match the passphrase on the Access Point.
4. The User ID cannot contain spaces.

Table 5-14 WiFi Security

Extended System-Level Command Functions


102 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

STX KD Dat abase Conf i gur at i on (Non-Display Models only)


This command, stored in Flash memory for future power-ups, controls the printer’s
environment and operates as a pseudo DIP switch. The <STX>Kc command is
recommended for use over <STX>KD.

Syntax:
<STX>KDwxyz<CR>

Where: w, x, y, and z are binary values with respective bit settings as
defined in the following table. (Bit 0 is least significant.)

Sample:
<STX>KD@H@@<CR>

The sample above configures 9600 baud, 8-bit words, no parity,
with direct thermal printing, gap sensing, standard control
characters, and a cutter.

E

• Ignore Host Distance (see below) disregards <STX>O and <STX>f commands (in case
host software sends values that may be inappropriate). Use the <STX>KD command or
the Setup Menu to enable this feature.

• This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.

<STX>KD
Parameter
Bit
Number
Function Value(s)
0 – 2 BAUD Rate / Set Test Mode
0 = 9600, 1 = 600, 2 = 2400,
3 = 19200, 4 = 4800, 5 = 38400,
6 = 1200, 7 = 9600 Test Mode
3 Word Length and Parity
0 = 8 bits, no parity;
1 = 7 bits, even parity
4 & 5 Unused Set to 0
6 Always 1 Set to 1
w
7 Always 0 Set to 0
0 Print Method 0 = direct thermal, 1 = thermal transfer
1 Present Sensor 0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
2 Control Character
[1]
0 = standard, 1 = Alternate characters
3 Cutter 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled
4 Ignore Host Distance
0 = disabled,
1 = enabled (see note above)
5 Alt-2 Control Codes
[1]

0 = disabled,
1 = Alternate-2 characters
6 Always 1 Set to 1
x
7 Always 0 Set to 0
0 & 1 Sensor Type 0 = gap, 1 = reflective, 2 = continuous
2 Linerless 0 = not equipped, 1 = equipped
3 – 5 Unused Set to 0
6 Always 1 Set to 1
y
7 Always 0 Set to 0
0 & 1 Reserved Set to 0
2 Reserved Set to 0
3 – 5 Unused Set to 0
6 Always 1 Set to 1
z
7 Always 0 Set to 0
[1]
Selects the values of the control characters; see Control Code Command Functions.


Table 5-15: Database Configuration Command
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 103
STX Kd Set Fi l e as Fact or y Def aul t

This command selects the specified file name as the “factory default” configuration. After
execution, subsequent “Select Factory Default” commands will configure the printer to
this file’s configuration using one of the following methods:

• <STX>KF command;
• Power-up the printer while pressing the PAUSE and CANCEL Keys; or,
• Via the menu SYSTEM SETTINGS / SET FACTORY DEFAULTS entry.

Syntax:
<STX>KdName<CR>

Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the file.

Where:
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.

Sample:
<STX>KdPlant1<CR>

The sample above selects the configuration file Plant1 as the
default factory configuration.



STX KE Char act er Encodi ng

This command is provided primarily as a means for users of 7-bit communication and to
embed control characters and extended ASCII characters in their data streams. Any
character in the DPL data stream may be substituted with a delimited two-character
ASCII hexadecimal numeric equivalent. The command allows the delimiting character to
be selected, and the encoding to be enabled or disabled. When character encoding is
enabled, the printer will decode any ASCII hexadecimal numeric pairs following the
delimiter as single-byte values. Character encoding is used where control characters
cannot be transmitted or where control characters within data may prematurely
terminate a label format record. Although the delimiter may be changed at any time
(except within a label format definition), there cannot be more than one defined
delimiter, and character encoding must be disabled with <STX>KEN prior to re-enabling
regardless of any change in the delimiter.

Syntax:
<STX>KEex<CR>

e
- Y – character encoding enabled
N – character encoding disabled

Where:
x
- Delimiter: one ASCII character (Do not include when e = N)

Sample:
<STX>KEN
<STX>KEY\
<STX>L<CR>
1u0000001200120[)>E###BOT_TEXT###1D\...###BOT_TEXT###4###BOT_TEXT###lt;CR>
E<CR>
Extended System-Level Command Functions


104 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

The sample above disables, and then enables character encoding
with the backslash (\) as the delimiter. A UPS MaxiCode will be
formatted using a data string interpreted as follows: [)>
R
S
01
G
S
...

E
O
T
<CR> then formatting is terminated.


Char act er Encodi ng Synt ax : This syntax requires at least two hexadecimal ASCII
digits (0-9, A-F) delimited by the character specified in the <STX>KE command. The
number of hexadecimal digits between the delimiter pair must be even; see notes below.

Syntax:
xaa[bbcc…nn]x

x
- One byte delimiter, 0 to ff
16
, leading and trailing.

aa
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F

bb
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F (optional)

cc
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each
character – 0-9, A-F (optional)

Where:
nn
- 2 bytes, ASCII, hexadecimal encoded, range each byte –
0-9, A-F (optional)

E

• A delimiter pair with no ASCII hexadecimal pairs between (e.g., \) will be
interpreted as one byte whose value is that of the delimiting character, allowing the
assigned delimiter to be interpreted as itself rather than as the delimiter.

• A delimited string that contains either a non-valid hexadecimal character (e.g., FX) or
an odd number of bytes will be treated as an illegal string and, therefore, not
correctly decoded.


Char act er Encodi ng Ex ampl es: In the following partial datastreams it is assumed that
character encoding is enabled and that the selected delimiter, a backslash (\), has been
transmitted to the printer (i.e., <STX>KEY\). In each example, the printer has not
received an unpaired delimiter prior the example.

Partial Sample Data Stream Interpretation
AB\CE
5 bytes AB\CE with values 41
16
, 42
16
, 5C
16
, 43
16
, 44
16

\ABCDEF\
3 bytes with values AB
16
, CD
16
, and EF
16

1AAA
5 bytes 1A<SUB>1A with values 31
16
, 41
16
, 1A
16
,
31
16
, 41
16
. <SUB> represents a single-byte ASCII
control character with value 1A
16

Al t er nat e Cont r ol Codes w i t h an Al t er nat e Li ne Ter mi nat or : Character Encoding
can also be used with the Alternate Control Character set. Alternate Control Characters
are enabled, depending upon the model, via a Setup Menu or the <STX>KD / <STX>Kc
commands; see Control Code Command Functions.
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 105
STX KF Sel ect Fact or y Def aul t s

This command restores the configuration of the printer to the factory default settings.
These settings may be default values or the values previously specified by a
configuration file (see <STX>Kd).

Syntax:
<STX>KFn<CR>

n
- 2 = Returns the factory default settings (and, if saved,
restoring the Factory Setting File).

Where:

- 3 = Returns the factory default settings, and clears
Calibration and Custom Adjustments.

E
Calibration will be required.










STX Kf Set Pr esent Di st ance

This command specifies an additional amount to advance the label after printing. This
command has the same effect as the <STX>f command, but specifies a distance to
advance relative to the start of print (<STX>O command) of the next label.

Non-Display Models: The printer Option Control must be set (via the menu) to HOST for
this command to have effect.

Display-Equipped Models: SOP Emulation selection has no effect on this command.

Syntax:
<STX>Kfnnnn<CR>

Where:
nnnn
- A four-digit present distance in inches/100 or mm/10.

Sample:
<STX>Kf0100

The sample above represents a one-inch label advance unless in
metric mode (see <STX>m).



Extended System-Level Command Functions


106 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

STX KH Dot Check (H-Class & M-Class Mark II only)

This command specifies dot check operations for the printhead elements.

Syntax:
<STX>KHx<CR>

Where:
x
- Specifies the operation, where:

P = Performs dot check;
A = Returns the most recent dot check and dot
resistance results; and,
B = Returns the most recent dot check failed dot
results.

Sample:
<STX>KHP<CR>

The sample above performs dot check with DOTCHECK and a
progress bar displayed.

Sample:
<STX>KHA<CR>

The sample above returns results from the last dot check for
every element and its resistance up to 1350 ohms [with out of
range (bad or suspect) values indicates as ******], the number
of dots tested, the total number of bad or suspect dots detected
and, the minimum, maximum, and average resistance
and variance:


DOTCHECK RESULTS

DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832
DOT OHMS
0 1148
1 1148
2 1140
.
.
.
142 1199
143 *****
144 *****
145 1050
.
.
.
830 1116
831 1116
832 1116

TOTAL BAD DOTS: 2

MIN MAX AVG VAR
921 1640 1125 719



Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 107


Sample:
<STX>KHB<CR>

The sample above returns results from the last dot check for
the number of elements tested, the number of the bad or
suspect dot(s), the total number of bad or suspect dots, and the
minimum, maximum, and average resistance and variance:


DOTCHECK RESULTS

DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832
BAD DOT LIST
143
144

TOTAL BAD DOTS: 2

MIN MAX AVG VAR
921 1640 1125 719


E

The process normally adds a few seconds to the power-up sequence; however, if the
printhead is invalid or extremely damaged, it could take a minute to complete.






STX KJ Assi gn Communi cat i on Por t (MCL Command)

This command assigns a communication port for specific use. When activating MCL, all
ports are assigned to MCL; this command allows changes to that assignment.

Syntax:
<STX>KJpf<CR>

p
- Port ID: P = Parallel
S = Serial (A)
U = USB
N = Ethernet
L = Wireless
A = Serial (B)

Where:

f
- Flag: 1 = DPL
0 = MCL

Sample:
<STX>KJN1

The sample above forces the Ethernet port to bypass MCL and
go directly to DPL.



Extended System-Level Command Functions


108 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX KI GPI O I nput

This command configures the GPIO input channels of the Applicator Interface Card; see
Appendix J for details.

Syntax:
<STX>KIffnspwww<CR>

ff
- 2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., PS [Print
Start], I1 [User Input 1], etc).

n
- Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.

s
- Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse;
and N = Negative Pulse

p
- Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High

Where:
www
- 3 character filter pulse width, in milliseconds.









STX Kn NI C Reset

This command resets the NIC to factory defaults.

Syntax:
<STX>Knx

Where:
x
- Specifies the action, where:

F = Returns the NIC to the factory default settings; or,

H = Reports settings to host (wireless, only).

Address
Default Values
Wired Ethernet*
Default Values
Wireless Ethernet
IP
192.168.010.026 192.168.010.001
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.000 255.255.255.000
Gateway
000.000.000.000 000.000.000.000
* Prior to introduction of the Wireless Ethernet, 192.0.0.192
was the IP default value and the Subnet Mask was 0.0.0.0.

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 109
STX KO GPI O Out put

This command configures the GPIO outputs of the Applicator Interface Card; see
Appendix J for details.

Syntax:
<STX>KOffnsptd0pw0td1pw1<CR>

ff
- 2 character function name abbreviation (e.g., LC [Label
Complete], LM [Label Movement], etc).

n
- Pin number, where 1 – 8 is the valid range.

s
- Signal type, where: L = Level; P = Positive Pulse; and N
= Negative Pulse

p
- Polarity, where: 0 = Active Low; and 1 = Active High

td0
- 3 character delay time from function condition “true” to
output signal.

pw0
- 3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “true”. (Ignored for level-type
signals.)

td0
- 3 character delay time from function condition “false” to
output signal.

Where:
pw0
- 3 character pulse width corresponding to the function
condition becoming “false”. (Ignored for level-type
signals.)
Extended System-Level Command Functions


110 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX Kp Modul e Pr ot ect i on

This command controls memory module protection. When “protected”, a module will
ignore format, downloads and delete commands. This command can be useful to add
data to reserved modules (see Appendix K for a listing of the memory modules). There
are two module types: RAM (volatile) and Flash (non-volatile).

• RAM - When protected and if power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module
state resets to unprotected.

• Flash - When protected, the module can be temporarily unprotected; however, if
power is cycled or if the printer is reset, the module state resets to protected.

Syntax:
<STX>Kpmf

m

-

Module ID – Range A to Z (See Appendix K).

Where:

f

-

Flag specifying Enable or Disable protection, where:

0 = disable protection; and,

1 = enable protection.

Sample:
<STX>KpY0

The sample above disables protection for Module Y; graphics may
now be downloaded to the module and, on subsequent resets,
these graphics will be protected.




Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 111
STX KQ Quer y Memor y Conf i gur at i on

This command causes the printer to transmit, in a model-dependent format, its memory
configuration (i.e., total amount installed, amount available for configuration, and
amount currently assigned to specific functions or entities) to the host device.

Syntax:
<STX>KQ<CR>

Non-Display model
response format:

INTERNAL MEMORY<CR>
VER: aa-cdd.ee mm/dd/yy<CR>
INSTALLED: iiii<CR>
AVAILABLE: vvvv<CR>
MODULE: X:xxxx<CR>
SCALABLE: ssss<CR>
LABEL MEM: LLLL<CR>
LABEL SIZE: wwww:gggg:oo<CR>

<CR>
- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) delimiter.

aa-cdd.ee mm/dd/yy
- ASCII string sequence that represents
the firmware version number string.

iiii
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
memory.

vvvv
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
available for configuration.

X:
- ASCII character identifying a DRAM
module followed by an ASCII colon (:). If
no Internal Module is present, this field
and its associated legend will not appear.

xxxx
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
allocated as an Internal Module.

ssss
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
assigned to the smooth scalable font
processor cache.

LLLL
- The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM
assigned to label print buffer.

wwww
- Current maximum printable label width
(in 100
ths
of an inch or millimeters).

gggg
- Current printable length (in 100
ths
of an
inch or millimeters), 200 min. / 640 max.

Where:
oo
- Current label dimension unit’s
designation: “IN” for inches or “MM” for
millimeters.
Extended System-Level Command Functions


112 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Display-Equipped
model response
format:


Product: I4208 – 01.01 05/21/1999
Installed RAM: 8 MB
Label Width: 4.09 IN
Print Buffer Size: 272 IN
Allocation RAM: 6389 KB
Internal Files: 512 KB
Font Cache: 232 KB

Where:
Product
- Printer model, type, and firmware version.

Installed RAM

- Total amount of RAM.

Label Width
- Size in inches/millimeters of the print
head.

Print Buffer Size
- Total number of inches/millimeters of Print
Dot Buffers available. (This is not the
maximum size of a label, which is limited
to 99.99 inches.)

Allocation RAM
- Amount of RAM that can be configured for
the Internal Files, Font Cache and the
remainder going to the Print Buffer Size.

Internal Files
- Size of the Internal Module used to store
downloaded fonts, graphics and label
formats.

Font Cache
- Size of the Font Buffer used to temporarily
store characters. Increasing this buffer
will increase performance if labels have a
large variety of font sizes and characters.

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 113
STX Kq Quer y Memor y Conf i gur at i on

This command causes the printer to transmit its internal DRAM memory configuration to
the host device. The transmitted data provides information regarding the total amount
of internal DRAM installed, the amount available for configuration, and the amount
currently assigned to specific functions or entities.

Syntax:
<STX>Kq<CR>

Response format:

Memory Configuration<CR>
Product: aaaacdd.ee mm/dd/yy<CR>
Installed RAM: iiiiMB<CR>
Label Width: vvvvoo<CR>
Print Buffer Size: :xxxxoo<CR>
Allocation RAM: ssssKB<CR>
Internal Files LLLLKB<CR>
Font Cache wwww:KB<CR>

<CR>
- ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record
delimiter.

aaaacdd.ee mm/dd/yy
- ASCII string sequence that represents the
firmware version number string.

iiii
- The number of megabytes of installed
internal DRAM memory.

vvvv
- The length of the Label Width.

xxxx
- The length of the Print Buffer.

ssss
- The number of kilobytes of internal
memory assigned to the label Print Buffer.

LLLL
- The number of kilobytes assigned to the
internal memory module.

wwww
- The number of kilobytes assigned to the
Scalable Cache.

Where:
oo
- Current label dimension unit’s
designation. “IN” for inches and “MM” for
millimeters.


Extended System-Level Command Functions


114 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX KR Reset Memor y Conf i gur at i on

This command resets the printer’s DRAM configuration to the default settings; see
<STX>KM.

Syntax:
<STX>KR<CR>


E

This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.









STX Kr Reset t abl e Count er Reset

This command resets the internal counters. Follow this command with an <SOH>U
command to retain the reset or the counters will revert to the previous values after
cycling power.

Syntax:
<STX>Kr<CR>










STX KS Memor y Conf i gur at i on, Scal abl e Fon t Cache

(Non-Display Models only)

See the <STX>K command.

E

This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.

Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 115
STX Kt A Wr i t e Appl i cat i on Fami l y I dent i f i er ( AFI ) t o Tag

(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)

This command writes the AFI data to the tag.

Syntax:
<STX>KtAabcc

a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.

b
- Lock the Application Family Identifier (AFI) after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect

Where:
cc
- Two character AFI value representing one byte.

Sample:
<STX>KtA91C3[CR]

The sample above writes 0xC3 AFI byte, locking value, retrying
nine times if necessary.








STX Kt D Wr i t e Dat a St or age For mat I dent i f i er ( DSFI D) t o Tag

(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)

This command writes the DSFID data to the tag.

Syntax:
<STX>KtDabcc

a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.

b
- Lock the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) after
writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect

Where:
cc
- Two character DFSID value representing one byte.

Sample:
<STX>KtD91C3[CR]

The sample above writes 0xC3 DSFID byte, locking value, retrying
nine times if necessary.
Extended System-Level Command Functions


116 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX Kt E Wr i t e El ect r oni c Ar t i cl e Sur vei l l ance ( EAS) Bi t

(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)

This command writes the EAS bit for Philips ISO tags.

Syntax:
<STX>KtEabcc

a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.

b
- Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) option:
0 = Set EAS
1 = Reset EAS
2 = Test EAS

Where:
cc
- Two character Manufacturer’s Code, representing one
byte.

Sample:
<STX>KtE9004[CR]

The sample above writes the EAS bit for Philips (0x04), retrying
nine times if necessary.








STX Kt H Read and Feedback Tag I nf or mat i on t o Host

(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)

This command returns the tag info to host.

E

This command only works when the Data Flag for the tag is 0x0F (i.e., when the tag
contains DSFID, AFI, VICC and IC data).

Syntax:
<STX>KtH

Sample Feedback:
DATA FLAG: 0x0F
TAG ID: E004010000751412
DSFID: 0xE3
AFI: 0x01
NUM BLK: 0x1B
BLK SIZ: 0x03
IC REF: 0x01
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 117
STX Kt R Read Dat a f r om RFI D Tag

(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)

This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then put that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the
read / write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed
in the text or bar code label field(s).

Syntax:
<STX>KtRUn
1…
n
16
Haaabbbcdee<CR>

Un
1
…n
16

- (Optional) Where n
1
…n
16
is the Unique Identifier (UID)
in hexadecimal format. Must be sixteen characters
long.

H
- (Optional) Hexadecimal data – “H” may be added
directly after “R” to return a two character hex value of
the data. Since there are two digits per hex value,
replaceable fields should be twice as long than if using
ASCII data (e.g., the character “A” would be returned
as “41”).

aaa
- Starting block number (000 ¬ maximum block
number). Transponder dependent.

bbb
- The number of blocks to read (001 ¬ maximum block
number). Transponder dependent.

c
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.

d
- Reserved. Should be 0.

Where:


ee
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.

E
A 00 value will send tag data to the host with no printing.

Sample:
<STX>L
1911A1802000010TEXT
U
X
<STX>KtRUE00700ABCDEF1234H0000015001
<STX>G

The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01), recalls
data from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block, which
is attempted nine times), and prints the data in the location
specified by replaceable field.

E

When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a
standard RFID read/write fault will be issued.
Extended System-Level Command Functions


118 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX Kt U Read Uni que Ser i al Number f r om RFI D Tag

(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)

This command instructs the RFID device to read the unique serial number data from the
tag and then place that data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag
transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s).

E

This is a sixteen character alphanumeric value; the replaceable field must have an
adequate length.

Syntax:
<STX>KtUabcc<CR>

a
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.

b
- Reserved. Should be 0.

Where:
cc
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.

E
A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no printing.



Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 119
STX Kt W Wr i t e Dat a t o RFI D Tag

(Direct Mode – HF [13.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface)

This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.

Syntax:
<STX>KtWUn
1
…n
16
Bn
c
n
c
n
c
aaabcdee…e<CR>

Un
1
…n
16

- (Optional) Where n
1
…n
16
is the Unique Identifier
(UID) in hexadecimal format, sixteen characters in
length.

Bn
c
n
c
n
c


- (Optional) Where n
c
n
c
n
c
is the data byte count, to
allow non-printable characters (i.e., characters with
hex values less than 0x20) to be encoded.

aaa
- Starting block number (000 ¬ maximum block
number). Transponder dependent.

b
- The number of retry attempts, 0-9.

c
- Lock block after writing:
0 = No Protection
1 = Write Protect

d
- Reserved. Should be 0.

Where:
ee…e
- Data to be encoded on RFID tag.


Sample 1:
<STX>KtWB004000900<0x00><0x01><0x02><0x03>[CR]

Sample 1, above, programs the hex values 0x00, 0x01, 0x02,
0x03 in block zero.

Sample 2:
<STX>KtWUE00700ABCDEF1234B004000510TEST[CR]

Sample 2, above, programs the data “TEST” to the tag with UID
“E00700ABCDEF1234” at block zero then write-protects block zero
(attempting to write five additional times if necessary). When
write protecting (locking) with UID, the separate lock command
will also use the addressed mode and the supplied UID.

E

When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found, a
standard RFID read/write fault will be issued.


Extended System-Level Command Functions


120 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

STX KuB Read Dat a f r om Gen2 Tag Sect i on

This command reads a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.

Syntax:

<STX>KuBaaabbb
aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access
section; 001 is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; and, 003 is
user memory.

Where:
bbb
- Data offset in word length.

Sample:
<STX>KuB001002

The sample above reads the block address 1 at offset word 2,
which is location of the EPC data.




STX KuF Send RFI D Devi ce Fi r mw ar e Ver si on

This command instructs the RFID device to return the firmware version.

Syntax:

<STX>KuF<CR>

Printer response:

DEVICE VERSION: XXX.XXX.XXX[CR]





STX KuJ Wr i t e Dat a t o Gen 2 Tag Sect i on

This command writes a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.

Syntax:

<STX>KuJaaabbb<data>

aaa
- Block address number, where: 000 is kill/access
section; 001 is EPC section; 002 is Tag ID; or, 003 is
user memory.

bbb
- Data offset in word length

Where:
<data>
- Hexadecimal data (must be length of multiples of 4)

Sample:
<STX>KuJ001002112233445566778899AABBCC

The sample above writes data “112233445566778899AABBCC” to
block address 1 at offset word 2, which is the EPC data.


Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 121
STX KuR Read Dat a f r om RFI D Tag

(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)

This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that
data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder is within the read /
write distance of the RFID programming device; otherwise, “Void” will be printed in the
text or bar code label field(s).

Syntax:
<STX>KuRaa<CR>

Where:
aa
- Field number in which to place the data (must be 01,
02, 03, etc.) matching the order of Label Formatting
command, U.

E
A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no
printing.

Sample:
<STX>L
D11
1911A1801000100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
1A31050002000200 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
U
X
<STX>KuR01
<STX>Kur02
<STX>G

The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01) and bar
code field (02) and then recalls the data from the tag and places it
into the specified fields.


E

Data should be at least 16 or 24 characters in length.

Extended System-Level Command Functions


122 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
STX KuW Wr i t e Dat a t o RFI D Tag

(Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only)

This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. It is expected that the
tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device;
otherwise, a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be
displayed.

Syntax:
<STX>KuWabcc…c<CR>

a
- The number of attempts to locate, erase and program
the tag (1 – 9).

b
- Reserved. Should be 0.

Where:
cc…c
- Data to be encoded in the ASCII format. Must be
sixteen characters in length. The valid characters are
0-9, A-F.

E
Must be 16 or 24 characters long.

Sample:
<STX>KuW10ABCDEF0102030405[CR]

The sample above programs the data
<0xAB><0xCD><0xEF><0x01><0x02><0x03><0x04><0x05> to the
tag, attempting to write one additional time if necessary.




STX KV Ver i f i er Enabl e/ Di sabl e

This command allows a verifier to be enabled and disabled.

Syntax:
<STX>KVa<CR>

Where:
a
- Y = verifier enable
N = verifier disable




STX KW Memor y Conf i gur at i on, Pr i nt abl e Label Wi dt h

See the <STX>K command for details.

E

This command will result in a system reset for the EX2.
Extended System-Level Command Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 123
STX Kx Del et e Conf i gur at i on Fi l e

This command deletes a configuration file.

Syntax:
<STX>KxmName<CR>

m
- Valid Module ID – Range A to Z.

Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration
file.

Where:
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.

Sample:
<STX>KxYPlant1

The sample above deletes the configuration file Plant1 from
Module Y. (Remember to prefix this command with the Module
(Un)Protect Command <STX>Kp.)






STX KZ I mmedi at el y Set Par amet er

This command immediately sets the specified parameter.

Syntax:
<STX>KZax<CR>

a
- Valid parameter identifier, as follows:

F = Feed Speed
P = Print Speed
S = Slew Speed
H = Heat Setting

x
- Speed Parameter Range – A to e (see Appendix L).
-or-
Where:
xx
- Heat Parameter Range – A two-digit value (00-30);
see the “H” Label Formatting Command.

Sample:
<STX>KZH22

The sample above causes the file currently being executed to
assume a Heat Value of 22.

Extended System-Level Command Functions


124 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual



Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 125

6
Label For mat t i ng Command Funct i ons


I nt r odu ct i on

The <STX>L command switches the printer from the System-Level Processor to the Label
Formatting Processor. All commands following the <STX>L are interpreted as label
formatting commands, and can be used to override default parameter values. Selectable
parameter value defaults may be also reassigned via the Setup Menu, as defined in the
corresponding Operator’s Manual. Label formats that contain no commands overriding
printer default values will assume those defaults.








: Set Cut by Amount

This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is
initiated. This feature is useful when it is necessary to print an uncut strip of labels.
Between 1 and 9999 labels may be printed before a cut is made. The amount must be
smaller than the quantity of labels printed.

Syntax:
:nnnn

Where:
nnnn
- Is a four digit decimal number indicating the number
of labels to be printed before a cut is performed.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
:0005<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above instructs the printer to make a cut after 5, 10,
and 20 labels have been printed. Label 21 will be cut at the start
of a subsequent label format (batch) unless a default (cut by
amount) greater than one has been entered.

E

The cutter must be enabled with all mechanism interlocks closed for operation.
Label Formatting Command Functions


126 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

A Set For mat At t r i but e

This command specifies the type of format operation and remains in effect until another
format command is specified or another label format has begun (<STX>L). Each label
format defaults to Attribute 2 (Transparent Mode).

Syntax:
An

Where:
n
- Is attribute mode 1, 2, 3, or 5; see table below. The
default is 1.

Sample:
<STX>L
A3
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>
141100001100110DATAMAX<CR>
E

The sample above sets the printer to Opaque Mode and produces
one label.


n Attribute Description Example
1
XOR
Mode
In this mode, the region where text strings,
images or bar codes intersect will not be
printed. (An odd number of overlapping
objects will print.)
2
Transparent
Mode
This is the default mode; the intersecting
regions of text strings, images, and bar codes
will print, allowing the user to print fields atop
one another.
3
Opaque
Mode
Interacting text is obliterated by the text
formatted last. Each character cell is treated
as opaque. This mode is effective only in
rotation 1. See Record Structure Types.
5
Inverse
Mode
This mode allows inverse (white on black)
printing (e.g., a proportionally sized border
and background are printed similar to
photographic negative). If text or image fields
overlap in this mode, the effect will be similar
to the XOR mode.


Table 6-1: Format Attributes



Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 127
B Bar Code Magni f i cat i on

This command provides a mechanism to specify bar codes greater than 36 dots (0 - 9, A
- Z in the field record). The value is reset to 1 at the start of every label and stays
active for the entire label or set to a new value.

Syntax:
Bnn

Where:
nn
- Is a two digit decimal number indicating the
magnification value.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11
B01
1a9305000100030ABCD<CR>
B03
1a3105000700030ABCD<CR>
Q0001
E

The sample above instructs the printer to print two bar codes,
each 9 dots by 3 dots.





C Set Col umn Of f set Amount

This command allows horizontal adjustment of the point where printing begins. The
printer is instructed to print label formats nnnn units to the right of the position that the
format specifies. This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels
containing preprinted information.

Syntax:
Cnnnn

Where:
nnnn
- Is a four-digit number for the column offset,
inches/100 or mm/10. The default is 0.

Sample:
<STX>L
C0050
141100001000100DATAMAX<CR>

The sample above shifts all format data 0.5 inches to the right,
unless the printer is in metric mode, (see Label Formatting
Command “m”).

E

If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to
label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.
Label Formatting Command Functions


128 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
c Set Cut by Amount

This command is the same as the “:” command except only a two-digit value can be
entered. This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a
cut is initiated. 1 to 99 labels may be printed before a cut is made.

Syntax:
cnn

Where:
nn
- Is a two-digit number indicating the number of labels
to be printed before a cut is performed. The default is
one.

Sample
<STX>L<CR>
c07<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
Q0021<CR>
E

The sample above instructs the printer to make cuts after labels
7, 14, and 21 have been printed. See Label Formatting Command
“:”.

E

The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation.










D Set Dot Si ze Wi dt h and Hei ght

This command is used to change the size of a printed dot, hence the print resolution –
dots per inch (DPI) of the print head. By changing the height of a dot, the maximum
length of a label can be increased or decreased. For the element sizes see Appendix K.

Syntax:
Dwh

Where:
w
- Is Dot Width multiplier 1 or 2.


h
- Is Dot Height multiplier 1, 2, or 3.

E

D11 is the default value for 300, 400 and 600 DPI printer models, while D22 is the
default value for all 203 DPI printer models.


Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 129

E Ter mi nat e Label For mat t i ng Mode and Pr i nt Label

This command causes the printer, when the processing Label Formatting commands, to
terminate the Label Formatting Mode then generate, print, and feed a label. The label
generated will be based on whatever data has been received to that point, even if no
printable data has been received. (Other termination commands are “X” and “s”.)
Commands sent to the printer after the Terminate Label command must be of the
Immediate, System-Level, or Font Download type.

Syntax:
E

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above will print one label.




e Recal l Pr i nt er Conf i gur at i on

This command recalls a previously stored printer configuration. It is highly
recommended that only one Recall Printer Configuration command be used per label,
and that it be used at the beginning of the label; otherwise, unpredictable results will
occur. (Printer configurations may be stored using the Extended System-Level
Commands or via the printer’s menu system.)

Syntax:
eName<CR>

Name
- The name, up to 16 characters, of the configuration
file.

Where:
<CR>
- 0x0d terminates the name.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
ePlant1<CR>
1A2210001000000Testing<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above recalls the stored printer configuration, Plant1.




F Advanced For mat At t r i but es

These commends extend the text presentation capabilities for Scalable Fonts. The
format attribute allows a set of label format records to select Bolding, Italicizing and
Underlining. Additional commands allow the specification of line rotation and font
changes within a label field. See “Advanced Format Attributes” (Section 8) for details.
Label Formatting Command Functions


130 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
f Set Pr esent Speed (Non-Display Models only)

This command controls the rate at which the present distance is positioned, allowing the
media movement to be slowed during “presentation” (the distance traveled after printing
is completed to the label stop position). This command is used only within the context of
a label format. The speed assigned is retained until another label format is received or
until power is removed; if a subsequent format does not contain a present speed
command then the present speed reverts to the feed speed.

Syntax:
fa

Where:
a
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed,
limited by the feed speed range; see Appendix L. The
default is the feed speed.

Sample:
<STX>LD11H30PGSG
fA
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E
<STX>L
191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1
E

The sample above prints two labels; the first label has present
speed of 1 inch per second, while the second reverts to the feed
speed of 4 inches per second.






G Pl ace Dat a i n Gl obal Regi st er

The “G” command saves the print data of a print format record in a global register
(temporary storage). This data may be retrieved and copied to another record in the
same label format using the special Label Formatting Command: <STX>S. Global
registers are named in the order received, beginning with Register A, ending at Register
P, and incrementing with each instance of the G command use.

Syntax:
G

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000Testing<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above stores, retrieves, and prints the data in global
register A. One label is printed with “Testing” in two locations.

Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 131

H Ent er Heat Set t i ng

This command changes the “on time” of elements of the print head. The default setting
is 10 (except in the case of printers with a menu, where the default setting can be
changed through the keypad). An increase or decrease in this value results in a change
of heat applied by the print head to the media, lightening or darkening the print contrast
accordingly. This is helpful when using different media types, each requiring a different
amount of heat to properly image the media. The host device can send this command
value to correct the heat setting per the application.

Syntax:
Hnn

Where:
nn
- Is a two-digit heat value (00-30).

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
H15<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E

The sample above sets the printer for a heat value of 15 and
prints one label.

E

Non-Display models – the “Darkness Potentiometer,” while providing subtle changes, is
intended to be used to match print contrast levels following print head replacements.


J Just i f i cat i on

This command changes the printing justification.

Syntax:
Ja

Where:
a
- Is a single-digit alpha character:
L = left justified (default)
R = right justified
C = center justified

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1911A1801001000TEST1
JR
1911A1801000100TEST2
JC
1911A1802000200TEST3
E

The sample above prints “TEST1” one inch up and one inch over
going right, “TEST2” one inch up and one inch over going left, and
“TEST3” two inches up and over.

E

Display-Equipped Models – This command is only valid for use with scalable fonts.
Label Formatting Command Functions


132 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
M Sel ect Mi r r or Mode

This command instructs the printer to “mirror” all subsequent print field records,
producing fields that are transposed visually.

Syntax:
M

Sample:
<STX>L
161100003200010 NOT MIRRORED<CR>
M<CR>
161100003000400 MIRRORED<CR>
E

Printed Result:







m Set Met r i c Mode

This command sets the printer to measure in metric. When this command is sent, all
measurements will be interpreted as metric values, (e.g., a column offset of 0010 will be
interpreted as 1.0 mm).

Syntax:
m

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
m
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E

The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at
location coordinates 10.0 mm, 10.0 mm.



n Set I nch ( I mper i al ) Mode

This command sets the printer to measure in inches. When this command is sent, all
measurements will change to inches. Default mode, and is menu selectable.

Syntax:
n

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
n
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E

The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at
location coordinates 1.0 inch, 1.0 inch.
Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 133
P Set Pr i nt Speed

This command sets a print speed for a label or batch of labels.

Syntax:
Pa

Where:
a
- Is a single character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.

Sample:
<STX>L
PC
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
141100001000100LABEL2<CR>
E

The sample above prints two labels, the first at a speed of 2
inches per second (51 mm per second) and the second at the
default setting.












p Set Back f eed Speed

This command, typically used in conjunction with the Cut or Peel and Present operations,
controls the rate at which the labels will reverse to align to the next start of print
position. The setting remains in effect until another backfeed speed command is
received or until the printer is reset.

Syntax:
pa

Where:
a
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.

Sample:
<STX>L
pF

The sample above sets the printer to a backup speed of 3.5 IPS.


Label Formatting Command Functions


134 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Q Set Quant i t y of Label s t o Pr i nt

This command sets the number of the label copies to be printed. A one to five digit value
is allowed, if the command is delimited by a carriage return <CR>. This permits host
applications to generate label quantity commands without the need to pad leading zeros.
(A four-digit command value does not need to be <CR> terminated.)

Syntax:
Qnnnnn

Where:
nnnnn
- Is a one to five-digit delimited value setting for the
number of labels to be printed. The default value is
one.

Sample:
<STX>L
121100000000000Testing<CR>
Q0020<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above will print a batch of 20 identical labels.

E

Specifying 9999 as the four-digit quantity results in continuous printing.




R Set Row Of f set Amount

This command allows vertical adjustment of the point where printing begins. The printer
is instructed to print label formats nnnn units above the position that the format
specifies. This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing
preprinted information.

Syntax:
Rnnnn

Where:
nnnn
- Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the row offset,
in inches/100 or millimeters/10. The default is 0.

Sample:
<STX>L
R0037<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR>
E

The sample above prints a label with a row offset amount of .37
inches, unless in metric mode.

E

• If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label
to label, the printed information may overlap the preprinted data.

• If printing near the TOF is important (i.e., on very small labels or in very tight
formats), it may be necessary to use the ROW ADJUST setting to shift the vertical
start of print position in the negative direction.
Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 135
r Recal l St or ed Label For mat

This command is used to retrieve label formats stored on a memory module. Embedding
recalled labels, up to 6 levels of nesting, within a recall label is also possible.

Syntax:
rnn...n

Where:
nn…n
- Is a label name, up to 16 characters in length.

The samples below explain different ways to recall and print a label
format. (Use <STX>W to view a memory module’s directory.)

String Sent: Printer Interpretation:
Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>

Begin label format
Retrieve format named TEST
Quantity requested = 2
Terminate formatting and print
Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
rTEST<CR>
X<CR>
<STX>G<CR>

Begin label format
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting
Print
Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
PO<CR>
SO<CR>
rTEST<CR>
E<CR>
Begin label format
Dot size = 1x1
Print speed O
Feed speed O
Retrieve format named test
Terminate formatting and print

The sample below explains recall embedding.

String Sent: Printer Interpretation:
Sample:
<STX>L
rLABEL1
191111111111LABEL1FIELD1
sGLabel1

Store label 1


<STX>L
rLABEL1
191111111111LABEL2FIELD1
sGLabel2

Store label 2


<STX>L
rLabel2
19111111111LABEL3FIELD1
E

Print label 3


What gets printed:

LABEL1 FIELD1
LABEL2 FIELD1
LABEL3 FIELD1

Label Formatting Command Functions


136 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

S Set Feed Speed

This command controls the rate at which the label is moved through non-printed areas.
The setting remains unchanged unless another feed speed command is received or until
the printer is reset.

Syntax:
Sa

Where:
a
- Is a single alpha character representing a speed; see
Appendix L for valid ranges.

Sample:
<STX>L
SE
141100001000100LABEL1<CR>
E
<STX>L
1411000010001000LABEL2<CR>
E

The sample above sets a 3 IPS feed speed and prints two labels,
with the same feed speed for both.



s St or e Label For mat i n Modul e

This command stores a label format to a specified module as a .dlb file. Supplying the
module name will store the label to that module; otherwise, using C will cause the label
format to be stored in the selected default module (see <STX>X). In addition, this
command terminates the Label Formatting Command.

Syntax:
sann…n

a
- Is the module designator representing a single
character module name; see Appendix K.

Where:
nn…n
- Represents the name of the label (maximum 16
characters).

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
D11<CR>
191100501000000123456789012<CR>
1911005020000001234567<CR>
191100500000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001<CR>
sATEST<CR>

The sample above stores a format in Memory Module A and
names it “TEST”. (To recall a label format from the module use
the “r” command.)
Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 137

T Set Fi el d Dat a Li ne Ter mi nat or

This command, intended for use with record types that accept binary data (e.g.,
PDF417), allows binary control codes (e.g., a carriage return) to be embedded in the
printed data by setting an alternate data line terminator. Valid only for the next format
record, the terminator then defaults back to the carriage return.

Syntax:
Tnn

Where:
nn
- Is an ASCII two-character representation of a HEX
code to be used for the end of data terminator.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
T00<CR>
191100200000000TEST<NULL>
141100001000100TERMIATOR<CR>
Q0001<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above sets the a NULL terminator (ASCII NULL: HEX
00) for the data line termination code. The terminator is
immediately restored to a carriage return <CR>, as seen in the
format record containing the text “TERMINATOR”.


U Mar k Pr evi ous Fi el d as a St r i ng Repl acement Fi el d

This command controls the formatting of replacement data. Specifying a field as a string
replacement for dynamic, not static, fields will optimize throughput. See <STX>U.

Syntax:
U

Sample:
<STX>L
D11
121100001000000123456789012<CR>
U<CR>
1211000020000001234567<CR>
U<CR>
161100000000000Sample<CR>
1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR>
Q0001
E
<STX>U01ABCDEFGHIJKL<CR>
<STX>U028901234<CR>
<STX>G

The sample above sets the format for register loading and prints
two labels. The first two of four format records have been
designated replacement fields. The second label is generated with
System-Level field-replacement commands and printed.
E

The length of the original string sets the data string length of any replacement; both
must be equal. The data being used when created must be valid for the font type being
selected.
Label Formatting Command Functions


138 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

X Ter mi nat e Label For mat t i ng Mode

This command causes the printer, when in label formatting mode, to immediately switch
to the system command mode and generate a label format based on the data received
at that point. However, unlike the “E” command, it will not print a label. (Other
termination commands are the “E” and “s”.)

Syntax:
X

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
141100001000100SAMPLE<CR>
X<CR>

The sample above will result in a label format, but no label will be
printed.









y Sel ect Font Symbol Set

This command, like the <STX>y, selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected
symbol set remains active until another symbol set is selected; see the <STX>y
command for details.

Syntax:
ySxx

S
- Byte-size designation; see Appendix H:
S = Single byte symbol sets; and,
U = Double byte symbol sets.

Where:
xx
- Symbol set selection.

Sample:
<STX>L
ySSW<CR>

The sample above selects the Swedish symbol set for use in
format records using scalable fonts.



Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 139
z Zer o ( Ø) Conver si on t o “ 0”

This command removes the slash zero in fonts 0 to 8, and in the human readable field
(if any) of the bar codes A to Z. The command applies only to format records containing
those fonts and bar codes, and is effective only for the label format in which it appears.

Syntax:
z

Sample:
<STX>L
z
121100000000000Test0000<CR>
E

E

None of the smooth fonts (i.e., Font 9) use the slash zero convention, and this
command will have no effect on scalable fonts.





+ ( > ) ( ( ) Mak e Last Fi el d Ent er ed I ncr ement

This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically
increment a field in a batch of labels. The numeric data in the field will increment by the
value assigned after the plus sign (+) each time a label is produced [or the greater than
symbol [>] can be substituted to make the field increment alphabetically, or the left
parenthesis [(] can be substituted to make the field increment hexadecimal data (valid
hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs)]. This command is effective only on the
label format record that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E, or
<STX>G commands.

Syntax:
*pii

*
- Is + for numeric increment, > for alphanumeric
increment, or (for hexadecimal increment.

p
- Is the fill character for the left-hand character of the
field.

Where:
ii
- Is the amount by which to increment the field.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
+01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above will generate a single field label format that
prints the initial label with a value of 12345, and then increments
that number by one for the next two labels.


Label Formatting Command Functions


140 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Embeddi ng

Numeric strings for incrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters
(e.g., when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or
suffixes).

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
161100000100010AB0001CD<CR>
+ 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above will print three labels, incrementing 0001 by 1
on each label with AB and CD remaining untouched: AB0001CD,
AB0002CD, AB0003CD. Note that the increment value has one
leading blank and two trailing zeros, while the blank is a pad
character and the trailing zeroes are placeholders that leave CD
unchanged.




– ( < ) ( ) ) Mak e Last Fi el d Ent er ed Decr ement

This command, useful in printing sequenced labels, causes the printer to automatically
decrement a field in a batch of labels. The numeric data in the field will decrement by
the value assigned after the minus (-) sign each time a label is produced [or the less
than character [<] can be substituted to make the field decrement alphabetically, or the
right parenthesis [)] can be substituted to make the field decrement hexadecimal data
(valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F, usually in pairs)]. This command is effective only
on the label format record that it follows, and is intended to be used with the Q, <STX>E
or <STX>G commands.

Syntax:
*pii

*
- Is – for numeric decrement, < for alphanumeric
decrement, or) for hexadecimal decrement.

p
- Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the
field.

Where:
ii
- Is the amount by which to decrement the field.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
132200000000000123AB<CR>
<01<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above will generate a single field label format that
prints the initial label with a value of 123AB, and then decrements
that number by one for the next two labels.

Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 141
Embeddi ng

Numeric strings for decrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters
(e.g., when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or
suffixes).

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
1611000001000101000CD<CR>
- 100<CR>
Q0003<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above will print three labels: 1000CD, 999CD, and
998CD. Note that the pad character is a placeholder for digits
removed from the left side in the subtraction process. When a
fixed pitch font is used, the justification of the rightmost character
is sustained regardless of the number of digits replaced by the pad
character on the left side.




^ Set Count by Amount

This command allows applications using the increment / decrement field command to
print more than one label with the same field value before the field data is updated. The
default is 1.

Syntax:
^nn

^
- May be 0x55 or 0x40; see note below.

Where:
nn
- Is a two-digit value that specifies the number of
labels to be generated before incrementing (or
decrementing) the field value.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
13220000000000012345<CR>
-01<CR>
^02<CR>
Q0006<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above prints two labels containing the same field
value before decrementing the field. Six labels are printed.


E

This command can only be issued once per label format. In addition, when alternate
Control Codes are enabled, the ^ character must be replaced by the @ character
(hexadecimal 0x40); see Control Code Command Functions.

Label Formatting Command Functions


142 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Speci al Label For mat t i ng Command Fu nct i on s


Two Special Label Formatting Commands, the <STX>S and the <STX>T, are entered directly
into the data field of label format records. (Do not confuse them with System-Level
Commands because the same control character is used.) If alternate control codes are
enabled the <STX> becomes “~” (hexadecimal 0x7E); see Control Code Command Functions.

Label Formatting Character Command Description
<STX>S Recall global data and place in field
<STX>T Print time and date

Table 6-2: Special Label Formatting Commands



STX S Recal l Gl obal Dat a and Pl ace i n Fi el d

This command, when in the format record data field, places data from a specified global
register into the data field. See the G command.

Syntax:
<STX>Sn

Where:
n
- Specifies the global register (A P) that contains the
data to place into the data field.

Sample:
<STX>L<CR>
121100000000000DMX<CR>
G<CR>
1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR>
E<CR>

The sample above places the string “DMX” into the next available
global register (A), and then line 4 is effectively replaced by the
data from global register A.



STX T Pr i nt Ti me and Dat e

This command, using string characters and markers, allows time and date data to be
selected and retrieved from the internal clock. In addition, the <STX>T may be preceded
by data to be printed/encoded, and/or the string may be terminated by an <STX>
command followed by more data then <CR> terminated. The string characters/markers
are not printed; instead, the label will show the corresponding print value.

Syntax:
<STX>Tstring<CR>

Where:
string
- Is any set of characters, A - Z and a – h; see the
table below.
Label Formatting Command Functions


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 143

String
Characters
Print Values
String
Markers
Print Values
A Week Day (Mon = 1, Sun = 7) VW 24-hour time format
BCD Day Name XY 12-hour time format
EF Month Number Za Minutes
GH...O Month Name gh Seconds
PQ Day bc AM or PM
RSTU Year def Julian Date

Table 6-3: Time and Date String Characters and Markers

E

When using substitution, you must ensure the converted string produces valid
characters for the selected bar code / font.


Sample 1:
<STX>L<CR>
121100001000100<STX>TBCD GHI PQ, TU<CR>
E<CR>

Sample 1 prints SUN DEC 21, 98.


Sample 2:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010<STX>TEF/PQ<CR>
E<CR>

Sample 2 prints 12/21.


Sample 3:
<STX>L<CR>
191100100100010ABC <STX>TEF/PQ<STX> DEF<CR>
E<CR>

Sample 3 prints ABC 12/21 DEF, and illustrates a method of
embedding the time string, where the string must be terminated
by <STX>.

E

The samples above assume a current printer date of December 21, 1998.


Label Formatting Command Functions


144 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual



Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 145



7
Font Loadi ng Command Funct i ons


I nt r odu ct i on

The commands used for font loading are usually generated by font creation software;
however, the assigned font ID number command must be sent to the printer before the font
file. All Font Loading Commands begin with <ESC> (ASCII control character 27 [decimal]).

The downloaded font will be stored in the default module (refer to the <STX>X command) as
file type .dbm. The commands in the table below are listed in their order of appearance, top
to bottom, during font downloading. The <SOH>D command must be sent prior to
downloading a font.

Command Description
*c###D
Assign Font ID Number
)s#Wnn…n
Font Descriptor
*c#E
Character Code
(s#W
Character Download Data

Table 7-1: Font Loading Commands








* c# # # D Assi gn Font I D Number

This command is the first command required for downloading a font to either RAM or
Flash Memory modules. ESC represents the ASCII control character 27.

Syntax:
<ESC>*c###D

Where:
###
- Is the font ID numbers 100-999 (000 – 099 are
reserved for resident fonts).


Font Loading Commands


146 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
) s# # # W Font Descr i pt or

This command (typically first data in a font file) contains all of the information about the
font contained in the file. Different font generation software will create different length
header information, but the initial 64 bytes will remain consistent with the PCL-4 (HP
LaserJet II) format.

Syntax:
<ESC>)s###Wddd…d

###
- Is the number of bytes of font descriptor data from 1
to 3 ASCII decimal digits.

Where:
dd…d
- Is the descriptor.







* c# # # E Char act er Code

This code is the ASCII decimal value corresponding to the next downloaded character.

Syntax:
<ESC>*c###E

Where:
###
- Is the ASCII value of the character, three digits
maximum, 0 to 999.







( s# W Char act er Dow nl oad Dat a

This command contains all of the information for one downloaded character.

Syntax:
<ESC>(s###Wnn…n

Where:
###
- Is the number of bytes of bitmapped data, three
digits maximum, from 1 to 999.


nn…n
- Is the bitmapped data.


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 147


8
Gener at i ng Label For mat s


I nt r odu ct i on

This section explains the use of the different fields in a print format record.


For mat Recor d Commands

Received label format data (see example below) is processed by the printer sequentially,
left to right and top to bottom.

String Sent Interpretation
<STX>L<CR> Begin label format
D11<CR> Set dot size
121100000050005Home Position<CR> Format text
191100602000200ROTATION 1<CR> Format text
291100602000200ROTATION 2<CR> Format text
391100602000200ROTATION 3<CR> Format text
491100602000200ROTATION 4<CR> Format text
1A3104003000260123456<CR> Format bar code with text
2A3104001400300123456<CR> Format bar code with text
3A3104001000140123456<CR> Format bar code with text
4A3104002600100123456<CR> Format bar code with text
1X1100000000000B400400003003<CR> Format box
1X1100002000000L400003<CR> Format line
1X1100000000200L003400<CR> Format line
121100004100010Printhead Location<CR> Format text
Q0001<CR> Label quantity
E<CR> End formatting, begin printing

Table 8-1: Sample Label Format

E

The sample above assumes that “inch” mode (<STX>n) is selected, with four inch media.







(print direction)


Figure 8-1: Formatted Sample Label
Generating Label Formats


148 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
The first line in the sample format (Table 8-1) is the System-Level Command directing
the printer to begin label formatting. (Other System-Level Commands may precede the
<STX>L for printer setup.) Lines 2, 14, and 15 are Label Formatting Commands. Line 15
is the exit and print command. The remaining lines (3-13) are print format records,
explained in this section.

A record is a data string that contains the information to be printed on the label(s).
Records are the building blocks of label formats. Every record must end with a
termination character (usually a carriage return, <CR>). Omitting termination
characters will result in the concatenation of records. Omitting the carriage return that
precedes the termination character E, which is necessary to complete the label
formatting and begin printing, will cause the printer to continue interpreting all
subsequent data as label print format records.


Gener at i ng Recor ds

Every record is made of three parts: (1) a header that is 15 bytes in length, (2) the data
to be printed, and (3) a termination character (e.g., <CR>) marking the end of the field.
The header is used to select the appearance of the data when printed by choosing
rotation, font type, size, and position options. Every header contains similar information,
but different types of records may use this information in different ways. The six record
types are:
1. Internal Bitmapped Font
2. Smooth Font (Simulated)
3. Scalable Font
4. Bar code
5. Images
6. Graphics


The St r uct ur e of a Recor d

The basic structure of the record is described below. For details regarding the various
interpretations of the six types see Record Structure Types.

The third line of the label format example in Table 8-1 consists of the following:

121100000050005HOME POSITION<CR>

This string comprises a complete record, shown below, divided into its three basic
component parts.

Header Data String Termination Character
121100000050005 HOME POSITION <CR>

Table 8-2: Record Structure Components

Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 149
The record (with spaces added for readability) conforms to the following fixed field
format. Identifying lower case letters have been placed below field values for reference
in the following sections:

1 2 1 1 000 0005 0005 HOME POSITION <CR>
a b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh iiii] jj…j Termination character



Record Type
Location
Within
Record
Internal
Bitmapped
Font
Smooth
Font
Scalable
Font
Bar
Code
Images Graphics
a Rotation Rotation Rotation Rotation Rotation 1
b Font ID 9 9 Bar Code Y X
c
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Width
Multiplier
Wide
Bar
Width
Multiplier
1
d
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Height
Multiplier
Narrow
Bar
Height
Multiplier
1
eee 000
Font Size/
ID
ID
Bar Code
Height
000 000
ffff
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
Row
Position
gggg
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
Column
Position
hhhh N/A N/A Font Height N/A N/A N/A
iiii N/A N/A Font Width N/A N/A N/A
jj…j
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Data
String
Image
Name
Graphics
Specifier

Table 8-3: Record Type Structure


In Table 8-3, the record structure is shown for each of the record types. The left-most
column shows the locations of all characters in the record, and corresponds to the
example above the table. Each record structure interprets the characters of the record
in its own way, though some of the interpretations of the characters are identical across
all record types. For example, the characters ffff are interpreted as Row Position in all
record types. While c is a Width Multiplier for Internal Bitmapped Font, Smooth Font,
Scalable Font, and Image record types, it has other interpretations for Bar Code and
Graphics record types.


Generating Label Formats


150 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
The Header Fi el ds

Each of the fields in the record header is generally described below. Please reference the
detailed descriptions under Record Structure Types for variations. The field name titles
of the following paragraphs are preceded with a reference letter from Table 8-3. All
characters sent to the printer within the header fields are ASCII, alphanumeric.


a: Rotation

The first field of a header is a single ASCII character that selects the clockwise
degree of rotation for the data to be printed on a label, where:

1 = 0º; 2 = 90º; 3 = 180º; and, 4 = 270º.

Figure 8-1 shows the direction and amount of rotation, relative to the print direction,
where the bottom left corner is the pivot point.


b: Fonts, Bar Codes, Graphics, and Images

The second field (b) determines how the rest of the fields are interpreted, as shown
in the table below.

• Values 0 through 9 select human-readable fonts. 0 through 8 will select standard
printer fonts; value 9 selects the CG Triumvirate smooth scalable font (internal)
or scalable fonts. When 9 is used to select a scalable font, the font size (font I.D.
number) is chosen by entering a value in the height field eee.

• Values A through z select bar codes. Values A through T (uppercase) will print bar
codes with human-readable interpretations. Values a through z (lowercase) will
print bar codes only.

• Value W requires two additional characters to specify the Bar Code/Font ID.

• A font field value X selects a drawing object (line, box, circle or polygon), and
field value Y is used to print an image stored in a module.

b Font Field Value Interpretation
0-9 Font
A-T Bar code with human readable text.
a-z Bar code without human readable text.
Wxx Bar code/Font expansion
X Line, box, polygon, circle
Y Image

Table 8-4: Font Field Interpretations
Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 151

c: Width Multiplier

Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z represent multiplication factors from 1 – 61, respectively.
For human-readable fonts, the width multiplier represents the number of times the
selected font dot tables are multiplied and has no effect on the character height. For
bar codes, this character specifies the wide bar width or ratio at a resolution that is
dependent upon the printer model. See Appendix F for default values.



d: Height Multiplier

The height multiplier has the same range and function as the width multiplier (c), but
vertical. When used in the context of bar codes, this field is the ratio denominator, or
the small bar (module) width. Values 1-9, A-Z, and a-z will give a narrow bar width
of one dot (dot size = 1/printhead resolution) to dots. The narrow bar width
resolution and range are dependent upon the print head resolution; see Appendix K.
A “dot multiplier” command can also be used to change the printed dot size (see
Label Formatting Command “D” and Appendix F).



eee: Bar Code Height (Font Size/Selection)

This field has interpretations dependent upon the value of the font b field, as shown
below.

b Font Field Value eee Field Range eee Field Interpretation
0-8 000 Not used – Internal bitmapped font
9
000-999, A04-A72,
S00-S9z, U00-U9z, u00-u9z
Font height; Font selection
A-T 000-999 Bar code height (with human readable)
a-z 000-999 Bar code height
Wxx 000-999 Bar code height (with human readable)
X,Y 000 Not used

Table 8-5: Bar Code Height Field Interpretations



ffff: Row Position

The lower left corner of a label is considered the “home position” (see Figure 8-1).
The row position field is a vertical coordinate that determines how far above the
home position the data is to be printed. Field data is interpreted in hundredths of an
inch or tenths of millimeters.


Generating Label Formats


152 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
gggg: Column Position

This field is a horizontal coordinate that determines how far to the right of “home
position” the data will be printed. Appendix G lists the maximum values of the gggg
field.


hhhh: Optional Scalable Font Height

The height of a scalable font can be specified in two ways: points or dots. To specify
the height in points the first character of the field is a “P” followed by the number of
points, 004 to 999. To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be numeric.
This field must be specified for scalable fonts. (See note below Optional Scalable Font
Width.)


iiii: Optional Scalable Font Width

The width of a scalable font can be specified in two ways, points or dots. To specify
the width in points, the first character of the field is a “P” followed by the number of
points, 004 to 999 points. To specify the size in dots, all four characters must be
numeric. This field must be specified for scalable fonts. See note below.



E

To ensure that the data stream is portable to other Datamax-O’Neil printers, specify
the font size in points. If the font is specified in dots, it will output differently on
printers with different DPI/MMPI resolutions. There are 72.307 points per 1 inch
(2.847 mm).


jj…j: Data Field

The final field contains the data that will actually be printed on the label. A string of
data can be up to 255 characters in length (except when using the PDF417 bar code,
which may be up to 3000 characters long), ending with a carriage return. Characters
placed in the data field will be printed as long as they fall within the physical range of
the print head. Consult Appendix K for a listing by printer.






Recor d St r uct ur e Ty pes

Each of the six record types has its own field structure and is described in the following
section. The record types allow quick reference to the field types and their valid data
inputs for the field. There are similar, but unique, record structures for each: internal,
bitmapped fonts, internal smooth fonts, downloaded bitmapped fonts, scalable fonts, bar
codes, images, and graphics. The field location identifiers in the tables that follow are
the same as those in Table 8-3.

Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 153

1: Internal Bitmapped Fonts

This record type is used for internal bitmapped fonts (see Appendix C, Tables C-1
through C-5).

When a 0 through 8 is entered in field b, then the height field eee is not used. The
bitmapped fonts include 8 different fonts (see Appendix C). The character mapping
for these fonts is shown in Appendix A, or a subset thereof.

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1, 2, 3 and 4 Rotation
b 0 to 8 (see Appendix C). Font
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Width Multiplier
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Height Multiplier
eee 000 N/A
ffff 0000 to 9999 Row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K. Column
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters, followed by
a termination character.
Data

Table 8-6: Internal Bitmapped Font Record Structure





2: Smooth Font, Font Modules, and Downloaded Bitmapped Fonts

This record type is used for internal smooth fonts (CG Triumvirate – see Table C-6)
or a bitmapped font downloaded to a memory module; see Font Loading Commands.

When a 9 is entered in field b, then the height field eee determines the font. The
internal smooth font has up to 13 font sizes (see Appendix C). Values 100 through
999 select individual fonts stored on DRAM, or Flash memory. These include
downloaded bitmapped fonts (see Table 8-5). Use eee values of 096 – 099 for Kanji
fonts, if equipped (see Appendix I). The character mapping is shown in Appendix A.

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1, 2, 3 and 4 Rotation
b 9 Fixed Value
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Width Multiplier
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Height Multiplier


(continued)
Generating Label Formats


154 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
eee
000 to 999 (000 to 099 Reserved), A04 to A72, x04 – x72,
Where x is an upper case letter; see Appendix H.
Font / Size
ffff 0000 to 9999 Row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K. Column
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
termination character.
Data

Table 8-7: Smooth Font Record Structure



3: Scalable Fonts

The Smooth Scalable Font Technology is licensed from AGFA. Both Microtype* and
TrueType (.TTF) Scalable Font file formats are supported. The eee field identifies
the scalable font, and data type – normal (binary) or Hex ASCII. Uppercase S or U
– binary, lowercase u – Hex ASCII (see Appendix H). Values S00 to S9z, and U00 to
U9z (u00 to u9z), select a scalable font. S00 and S01 are used for the standard
internal (resident) fonts on display-equipped models, while S01 is used for the
standard internal (resident) font on non-display models.

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1, 2, 3 and 4 Rotation
b 9 Fixed Value
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Width Multiplier
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Height Multiplier
eee S00 to Szz, U00-Uzz, u00-uzz Font Data Type
ffff 0000 to 9999 Row
gggg Dependent upon printer. See Appendix K. Column
hhhh P004-P999, 0016-4163**
Character Height;
points, dots
iiii P004-P999, 0014-4163**
Character Width;
points, dots
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a
termination character.
Data
* I-Class supports Intellifont.
**Character sizes are resolution dependent, as indicated in the following table.

Table 8-8: Scalable Font Record Structure

Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 155


Character size (dots)
Print head
Resolution (DPI)
Width Height
203 16-2817 16-2817
300 14-4163 16-4163
400 22-5550 22-5550
600 33-8325 33-8325

Table 8-9: Scalable Character Size Ranges

E

A scalable font cache must be allocated to print. Minimum cache size is 15. The
double byte fonts require five units of additional cache.


4: Bar Codes

Valid inputs for the bar code field b are letters: uppercase letters will print a human-
readable text below the bar code; lowercase letters will only print the bar code. For
example, entering a “p” in the b field selects the Postnet bar code. Because the
Postnet font does not provide human-readable data, the uppercase P is not valid.
Other bar codes without a human-readable counterpart include u (MaxiCode) and z
(PDF417) – for additional model-specific restrictions see Appendix F.

For module-based bar codes, field d is the narrow bar width in dots (bar code module
size). For consistent results in all rotations for bar codes of this type, field d and field
c must have the same value. For ratio-based bar codes field c is the wide bar width in
dots (the numerator); field d is the narrow bar width in dots (the denominator). See
Appendix G for specific bar code information and variations in record format field
usage.

The eee height field represents the bar code (symbol) height. The valid range (001 to
999) translates to bar heights ranging from .01 inch (.254 mm) to 9.99 inches (253.7
mm). For bar codes that require additional specified parameters, use the jj…j data
field as the location for these parameters. See the specific bar code for details in
Appendix G.


Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1, 2, 3 and 4 Rotation
b [bb]
A to Z and a to z (except P, u, v, z), or Wna where n is 1 to
9 and a is A to S and a to s. No n is an implied 1.
Bar Code
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Wide Bar
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Narrow Bar

(continued)
Generating Label Formats


156 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
eee 001 to 999 Symbol Height
ffff 0000 to 9999 Row
gggg See Appendix K. Column
jj…j
Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed
by a termination character.
Data

Table 8-10: Bar Code Record Structure

E

Placing 0 (zero) in both c and d will result in the default bar code ratio or module
size. Placing 000 (zero) in the symbol height field will result in the default bar code
height; see Appendix F for defaults.


5: Images

An image record is used to print an image that is stored in a memory module.
Images can be printed only in Rotation 1; see <STX>I.

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1 Fixed Value
b Y Image
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Width Multiplier
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Height Multiplier
eee 000 Fixed Value
ffff 0000 to 9999 Row
gggg See Appendix K. Column
jj…j
ASCII string, up to 16 characters followed by a termination
character.
Image Name

Table 8-11: Image Fields


6: Graphics

Using graphics, the printer can produce lines, boxes, polygons, and circles. This
function is selected by entering an X in field b. The values entered in the data field
determine the sizes and shapes of the objects to be drawn. Forms can be created
using shaded boxes, complex logos, or even a simple diagonal line without the need
to download a graphics file to the printer. Generate each kind of graphic as described
below.
Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 157

Lines and Boxes

Lines and boxes are drawn by values that determine column and row starting
position, length, width, and wall thickness of the line or box (see Appendix K).
Depending on the printer’s mode, all measurements are interpreted as inches/100
or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m). The data field jj…j is used to describe the line or
box dimensions.

Segment Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1 Fixed value
b X Line / Box
c 1 Fixed Value
d 1 Fixed Value
eee 000 Fixed Value
ffff 0000 to 9999 Row
gggg 0000-9999; see Appendix K. Column
jj…j
Lhhhvvv
lhhhhvvvv
Bhhhvvvbbbsss
bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss
Line*
Line**
Box***
Box****

Table 8-12: Line and Box Parameters

Line*:
Lhhhvvv

Where: L
hhh
vvv
=
=
=
“L” and specifies line drawing;
horizontal width of line; and,
vertical height of line.

Line**: lhhhhvvvv

Where: l
hhhh
vvvv
=
=
=
“l” and specifies line drawing;
horizontal width of line; and,
vertical height of line.
Box***: Bhhhvvvbbbsss

Where: B
hhh
vvv
bbb
sss
=
=
=
=
=
“B” and specifies box drawing;
horizontal width of box;
vertical height of box;
thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
thickness of box sides.
Box****: bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss

Where: b
hhhh
vvvv
bbbb
ssss
=
=
=
=
=
“b” and specifies box drawing;
horizontal width of box;
vertical height of box;
thickness of bottom and top box edges; and,
thickness of box sides.



E

Boxes are hollow, while lines can be understood as filled-in boxes.
Generating Label Formats


158 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Polygons

Polygons are created by defining the positions of the corners, specifying a
number of data points that represent the vertices of the object, which can range
from a simple line (two points), or a triangle (three points), to any free-form
outline. Polygons may be filled with a variety of different patterns. All row/column
specifiers are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10 depending on the
printer mode, (see <STX>m).

Record structure for a polygon (spaces added for readability):

1 X 11 ppp rrrr cccc P ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc … <CR>

Where:

1 Rotation (must be 1) ppp Fixed Value (001)
X Graphic field ID bbbb Fixed Value (0001)
1 Multiplier (must be 1) rrrr Row of point 2
1 Multiplier (must be 1) cccc Column of point 2
ppp Fill pattern # rrrr Row of point 3
rrrr Row of point 1 cccc Column of point 3
cccc Column of point 1 … Additional points
P Polygon ID (Fixed Value) <CR> Termination character

Table 8-13: Polygon Record Structure

E

The points must be specified in the order to be drawn; the last point specified is
automatically connected to the first point to close the polygon. If only two points
are specified, a single line will be drawn. See Label Formatting Command A.







Circles

A circle is created by defining by its center point and radius. Circles can be filled
with a variety of different patterns (see Table 8-15). Row, column, and radius are
interpreted as inches (100) or millimeters (10) depending on printer mode.

Record structure for a circle (spaces have been added for readability):

1 X 11 fff rrrr cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr <CR>

Where:
Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 159

1 Rotation (must be 1) cccc Column of the center point
X Graphic field C Circle ID (Fixed Value)
1 Multiplier (must be 1) ppp Fixed Value (001)
1 Multiplier (must be 1) bbbb Fixed Value (0001)
fff Fill pattern number rrrr Radius of the circle
rrrr Row of the center point <CR> Termination character

Table 8-14: Circle Record Structure


Fill Patterns
Pattern Number Description Example
0 No Pattern
1 Solid Black

2 6% Black

3 12% Black

4 25% Black

5 38% Black

6 50% Black

7 Diamonds

8 Circles

9 Right Diagonal Lines

10 Left Diagonal Lines

11 Grid


Table 8-15: Fill Patterns
Generating Label Formats


160 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Examples (with spaces added for readability):

1: Triangle

The record:

1 X 11 000 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0040 0025 0010 0040<CR>

Produces a triangle with no fill pattern:

(row 0040, column 0025)

(row 0010, column 0010) (row 0010, column 0040)

2: Rectangle with Fill

The record:

1 X 11 004 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0050 0010 0050 0200 0010 0200<CR>

Produces a rectangle filled with pattern 4 (25% Black):


(row 0010, column 0010) (row 0050, column 0200)

3: Circle

The record:

1 X 11 000 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>

Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and
no fill pattern:



4: Circle with Fill

The record:

1 X 11 009 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR>

Produces a circle centered at row 0100, column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and
filled with pattern 9 (right diagonal lines):


Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 161

Advanced For mat At t r i but es

Two different advanced formatting attributes extend the text presentation capabilities.
The first format attribute allows a set of label format records to make a state change
that modifies the font attributes of any following DPL text records. The second format
attribute provides a means of inserting text and font formatting commands directly into
the DPL data stream via a command delimiter structure. All label formats begin by
default with attributes disabled.

The table below represents the current list of font attributes available to the user. Note
that these commands are delimited by the ###BOT_TEXT###lt;xxx> sequence (where xxx is from the list
below).

Command Units Purpose Notes
FB +/- Turns on or off font boldfacing.
FI +/- Turns on or off font italicization.
FU +/- Turns on or off underlining of string.
minus “-” is disable; or,

plus “+” is enable
FPn Points
Specifies the vertical point size of the
following text relative to the base line.

FSn Points
Specifies the horizontal point size of the
following text relative to the base line.

FR[+/-]n Degrees
Specifies the rotation of the base line,
relative to the original print direction of the
record.
If a + or – precedes the
numeric value, then the
direction is relative to the
current print direction.

Table 8-16: Advanced Format Attributes


E

These commands are only valid for scalable fonts, such as Internal Font 9, S00, S01, or
downloaded TrueType scalable fonts. (Some models have limited standard font sets and
capabilities; see the notes below for applicability of commands and consult the
appropriate Operator’s Manual for available standard and optional font sets.)





For example, the first format attribute command can be illustrated as follows. The text
below and the resulting label (Figure 1) are examples of a current DPL format:

Generating Label Formats


162 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>L
D11
1911S0102600040P018P018Old DPL World
1911S0102000040P018P018Old DPL World
1911S0101400040P018P018Old DPL World
1911S0100800040P018P018Old DPL World
1911S0100200040P018P018Old DPL World
E


Figure 1




If the DPL format is modified as follows, the resulting label (Figure 2) is printed:

<STX>L
D11
FA+
FB+
1911S0102600040P018P018New DPL World
FU+I+
1911S0102000040P018P018New DPL World
FI-U+B-
1911S0101400040P018P018New DPL World
FU-B+
1911S0100800040P018P018New DPL World
FB+I+U+
1911S0100200040P018P018New DPL World
FB-U-I-
E


Figure 2


Note that if all format commands after the first FB+ were deleted the entire label would
have been printed with bold scalable fonts. This is what is meant by a state change.
Once invoked, that command is in affect until turned off or the label format is
terminated with the “E” “s” or the “X” command.

The second format attribute command is inserted into the text data stream and
delimited by the angle brackets “<>“ This structure takes the form of ###BOT_TEXT###lt;command>. An
example of this command is as follows:

Generating Label Formats

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 163

<STX>L
D11
A2
FA+
1911S0105000020P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FP36FS36>FONT###BOT_TEXT###lt;FS10FP10> sizes
###BOT_TEXT###lt;FS8FP12>in the string
1911S0103500100P018P018###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR80>D###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>P###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>L###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>l###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-
5>e###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR->t###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>s###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>y###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>o###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>u###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>w###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-
5>r###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>i###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>t###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>e###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>i###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>n###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>c###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-
5>i###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>r###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>c###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>l###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>e###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>s###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>t###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>o###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-
5>o###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>!
1911S0102400040P018P018###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR+45>DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>Rotations###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-FR-90> in
the string
1911S0102000040P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>BOLD###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-> in the string
FU+
1911S0101400040P018P012DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FI+>ITALICS###BOT_TEXT###lt;FI-> in the string
FI+U-
1911S0101000040P018P012DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+I+>COMBINATIONS###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-I-> in the
string
FB+I-
1911S0100600040P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>BOLD###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-> in the string
FU+I+
1911S0100200040P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>BOLD###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-> in the string
FB-U-I-
E


Figure 3 is an example of the output from this DPL command
stream. The user has the ability to change the point and set
size of the font within the DPL command record. In addition,
the angle of the baseline may be specified relative to the
current orientation of the record. (For example, the command
###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR+45> will rotate the baseline forty five degrees in the
positive direction from the default print direction.)

E
Refer to Section 8 for more information regarding the DPL
record format for a scalable font text string.


Figure 3

Generating Label Formats


164 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 165

Appendi x A


ASCI I Con t r ol Char t


Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex
Ctrl @ NUL 0 00 32 20 @ 64 40 ` 96 60
Ctrl A SOH 1 01 ! 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61
Ctrl B STX 2 02 “ 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62
Ctrl C EXT 3 03 # 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63
Ctrl D EOT 4 04 $ 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64
Ctrl E ENQ 5 05 % 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65
Ctrl F ACK 6 06 & 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66
Ctrl G BEL 7 07 Ô 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67
Ctrl H BS 8 08 ( 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68
Ctrl I HT 9 09 ) 41 29 I 73 49 i 105 69
Ctrl J LF 10 0A * 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A
Ctrl K VT 11 0B + 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B
Ctrl L FF 12 0C , 44 2C L 76 4C l 108 6C
Ctrl M CR 13 0D - 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D
Ctrl N SO 14 0E . 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E
Ctrl O SI 15 0F / 47 2F O 79 4F o 111 6F
Ctrl P DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70
Ctrl Q DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71
Ctrl R DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72
Ctrl S DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73
Ctrl T DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74
Ctrl U NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75
Ctrl V SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76
Ctrl W ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 w 119 77
Ctrl X CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78
Ctrl Y EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79
Ctrl Z SUB 26 1A : 58 3A Z 90 5A z 122 7A
Ctrl [ ESC 27 1B ; 59 3B [ 91 5B { 123 7B
Ctrl \ FS 28 1C < 60 3C \ 92 5C | 124 7C
Ctrl ] GS 29 1D = 61 3D ] 93 5D } 125 7D
Ctrl ^ RS 30 1E > 62 3E ^ 94 5E ~ 126 7E
Ctrl _ US 31 1F ? 63 3F _ 95 5F 127 7F

(continued)
Appendix A – ASCII Control Chart


166 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex
Ç 128 80 á 160 A0 192 C0 Ó 224 E0
ü 129 81 í 161 A1 193 C1 ß 225 E1
é 130 82 ó 162 A2 194 C2 Ô 226 E2
â 131 83 ú 163 A3 195 C3 Ò 227 E3
ä 132 84 ñ 164 A4 196 C4 õ 228 E4
à 133 85 Ñ 165 A5 197 C5 Õ 229 E5
å 134 86 ª 166 A6 ã 198 C6 µ 230 E6
ç 135 87 ° 167 A7 Ã 199 C7 þ 231 E7
ê 136 88 ¿ 168 A8 200 C8 Þ 232 E8
ë 137 89 ® 169 A9 201 C9 Ú 233 E9
è 138 8A 170 AA 202 CA Û 234 EA
ï 139 8B 1/2 171 AB 203 CB Ù 235 EB
î 140 8C 1/4 172 AC 204 CC ý 236 EC
ì 141 8D ¡ 173 AD 205 CD Ý 237 ED
Ä 142 8E 174 AE 206 CE 238 EE
Å 143 8F ¯ 175 AF 207 CF 239 EF
É 144 90 176 B0 ð 208 D0 240 F0
æ 145 91 177 B1 Ð 209 D1 ± 241 F1
Æ 146 92 ² 178 B2 Ê 210 D2 242 F2
ô 147 93 ³ 179 B3 Ë 211 D3 3/4 243 F3
ö 148 94 ´ 180 B4 È 212 D4 244 F4
ò 149 95 Á 181 B5 213 D5 245 F5
û 150 96 Â 182 B6 Í 214 D6 ÷ 246 F6
ù 151 97 À 183 B7 Î 215 D7 ¸ 247 F7
ÿ 152 98 © 184 B8 Ï 216 D8 º 248 F8
Ö 153 99 ¹ 185 B9 217 D9 ¨ 249 F9
Ü 154 9A 186 BA 218 DA · 250 FA
ø 155 9B » 187 BB 219 DB 251 FB
£ 156 9C 188 BC 220 DC 252 FC
Ø 157 9D ¢ 189 BD 221 DD 253 FD
x 158 9E ¥ 190 BE Ì 222 DE 254 FE
ƒ 159 9F 191 BF 223 DF

255 FF

Table A-1: ASCII Chart


E

• For hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
o XON =Ctrl Q (DC1)
o XOFF =Ctrl S (DC3)

• The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to the table above at 255 (FF) as a
Datamax-O’Neil standard for resident bitmapped fonts 0,1,2,3,4,5,6, and 9 (CG
Triumvirate).





Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 167
Appendi x B


Sampl e Pr ogr ams

“C” Language Program

The following sample “C” program is included for reference. Figure B-1 shows the output
generated by this program.


/
*
DMX SERIES Sample C program
*
/

# include <stdio.h>

main ()
{
char
*
pcs = “590”;
char
*
desc = “10K OHM 1/4 WATT”;

fputs (“DMX Printer Test Program\n”, stdout);

fputs (“\x02L\n”, stdaux); /
*
STX L – Enter Label
Formatting
*
/
fputs (“H07\n” stdaux); /
*
Enter Heat Setting of 7
*
/
fputs (“D11\n”, stdaux); /
*
Set Width and Height Dot
Size
*
/

fprintf (stdaux, “191108010000025%s\n”,desc);/
*
Select smooth Font
*
/

fprintf (stdaux, “1a6210000000050%sPCS\n”, pcs);/
*
Select Bar code
type ‘a’
*
/
fputs (“E\n”, stdaux); /
*
End Label format mode and
print
*
/
}



10K OHM 1/4 WATT

Figure B-1: Sample Label
Appendix B – Sample Programs

168 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

ASCII text file

The following ASCII text file will also generate the label shown in Figure B-1.

^BL
H07
D11
19110080100002510K OHM 1/4 WATT<CR>
1a6210000000050590PCS<CR>
E<CR>


VB Application Generating DPL

The following sample is a Visual Basic program that displays a database record on the
screen. A user can scroll through the records and then print a selected one. Five bar
codes are printed along with data fields and headings.

‘Printer DPL Controls
Dim CharSet As String‘<STX> byte
Const StartLabel = “L”
Const EndLabel = “E”
Const PrintDensity = “D11”

‘Printer DPL Data to position dynamic information on label
Const OrderTxt = “191100704150010”‘font 9, 24 pt
Const OrderBC = “1a6205004200120”
Const CustomerTxt = “191100603600010”

Const Item1NO = “191100403250010”
Const Item1BC = “1a6204002870010”
Const Item1Txt = “191100402690010”
Const Item1Qty = “191100603070260”

‘DPL Fixed Items on label
Const Itm1 = “191100303400010Item #”

Const Qty1 = “191100303400250Quantity”

Const Boxsize = “B065035002002”
Const BoxPos1 = “1X1100003050240”
Const Image1 = “1Y3300004750010SLANT1”

Dim Fixed As String

‘Item Variables
Dim Item1 As String
Dim PrintLabel As String
Dim OrderData As String

‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
Appendix B – Sample Programs

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 169
‘Concatenate all the dynamic data fields with the constant header
strings, terminated with <cr> Chr$(13)
OrderData = OrderTxt & txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & OrderBC &
txtOrderNo.Text & Chr$(13) & CustomerTxt & txtCustomer.Text

Item1 = Item1NO & txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1BC &
txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Txt & txtItem1Desc.Text & Chr$(13)
& Item1Qty & txtItem1Qty.Text

‘Concatinate entire label format and send out serial port
PrintLabel = CharSet & MaxLength & Chr$(13) & CharSet &
StartLabel & Chr$(13) & PrintDensity & Chr$(13) & Image1 & Chr$(13)
& OrderData & Chr$(13) & Item1 & Chr$(13) & Fixed & Chr$(13) &
EndLabel
Comm1.Output = PrintLabelEnd Sub

‘Display the record form on the screen
Private Sub Form_Load()
Fixed = Itm1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & Qty1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13)
& BoxPos1 & Boxsize & Chr$(13)
CharSet = Chr$(126) ‘Alternate <stx> character ~
MComm.PortOpen = 1‘Open the serial port
End Sub

‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
Comm1.PortOpen = 0‘Close down the serial port
End
End Sub






VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver

Create a form similar to the one shown here.



VERSION 5.00
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption = “Datamax Test Print”
ClientHeight = 1065
ClientLeft = 60
ClientTop = 345
ClientWidth = 2325
LinkTopic = “Form1”
MaxButton = 0 ‘False
MinButton = 0 ‘False
ScaleHeight = 1065
ScaleWidth = 2325
Appendix B – Sample Programs

170 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
StartUpPosition = 3 ‘Windows Default
Begin VB.ComboBox cmboFonts
Height = 315
Left = 90
TabIndex = 2
Text = “Font List”
Top = 45
Width = 2130
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdExit
Caption = “Quit”
Height = 465
Left = 1350
TabIndex = 1
Top = 495
Width = 825
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdPrint
Caption = “Print”
Height = 465
Left = 90
TabIndex = 0
Top = 495
Width = 870
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False

‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdPrint_Click()
‘font name as seen in application font list box
‘if not found, driver will inform GDI to generate an
‘image that will be downloaded
Printer.FontName = cmboFonts.Text

‘1,440 twips equals one inch
Printer.Height = 6480 ‘4.5 inches in twips
Printer.Width = 5760 ‘4 inches in twips
Printer.CurrentX = 1440 ‘1 inch (column position)
Printer.CurrentY = 2160 ‘2 inches (row position)
Printer.Print “0123456789”
Printer.EndDoc
End Sub
Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
Dim I As Integer ‘Used for the font list
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.DeviceName = “Datamax I-4206” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
Set Printer = X
For I = 0 To Printer.FontCount - 1 ‘ Determine number of fonts.
Appendix B – Sample Programs

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 171
cmboFonts.AddItem Printer.Fonts(I) ‘ Put each font into list
box.
Next I
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub
‘Exit the program and shut down the serial port
‘by clicking Exit button with the mouse
Private Sub cmdExit_Click()
End
End Sub

When the program is run, the combo box should be populated with the available fonts as shown
below.




VB Application to Send Raw Data via Printer Driver

This is a sample Visual Basic program that checks for any printer driver attached to
“LPT1”. If one is installed then a DPL file can be printed via the print driver. **Note that
this does not have to be a Datamax-O’Neil DPL print driver. DPL is created by the
application and sent to LPT1.

To begin, a global variable called SelPrinter must be defined as a string. Then use the
following code to create a .frm file.

VERSION 5.00
Object = “{F9043C88-F6F2-101A-A3C9-08002B2F49FB}#1.2#0”; “comdlg32.ocx”
Begin VB.Form Form1
Caption = “Form1”
ClientHeight = 1290
ClientLeft = 165
ClientTop = 735
ClientWidth = 3750
LinkTopic = “Form1”
MaxButton = 0 ‘False
MinButton = 0 ‘False
ScaleHeight = 1290
ScaleWidth = 3750
StartUpPosition = 3 ‘Windows Default
Begin MSComDlg.CommonDialog CommonDialog1
Appendix B – Sample Programs

172 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Left = 1635
Top = 765
_ExtentX = 847
_ExtentY = 847
_Version = 393216
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdClose
Cancel = -1 ‘True
Caption = “Close”
Height = 372
Left = 2400
TabIndex = 3
Top = 735
Width = 972
End
Begin VB.CommandButton cmdStoreImage
Caption = “Print”
Default = -1 ‘True
Height = 372
Left = 240
TabIndex = 2
Top = 735
Width = 972
End
Begin VB.TextBox txtFile
Height = 288
Left = 120
TabIndex = 1
Top = 360
Width = 3492
End
Begin VB.Label Label1
Caption = “File Name”
Height = 255
Left = 120
TabIndex = 0
Top = 135
Width = 1455
End
Begin VB.Menu File
Caption = “&File”
Begin VB.Menu open
Caption = “&Open”
End
Begin VB.Menu exit
Caption = “&Exit”
Shortcut = ^Q
End
End
End
Attribute VB_Name = “Form1”
Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False
Attribute VB_Creatable = False
Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True
Attribute VB_Exposed = False
Option Explicit
‘**********************************
Appendix B – Sample Programs

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 173
#If Win32 Then
Private Type DOC_INFO_1
pDocName As String
pOutputFile As String
pDatatype As String
End Type

#End If ‘WIN32 Types

‘**********************************
‘** Function Declarations:

#If Win32 Then
Private Declare Function OpenPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias “OpenPrinterA”
(ByVal pPrinterName As String, phPrinter As Long, ByVal pDefault As Long) ‘
Third param changed to long
Private Declare Function StartDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” Alias
“StartDocPrinterA” (ByVal hPrinter As Long, ByVal Level As Long, pDocInfo As
DOC_INFO_1)
Private Declare Function StartPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter
As Long)
Private Declare Function WritePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long, pBuf As Any, ByVal cdBuf As Long, pcWritten As Long)
Private Declare Function EndDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long)
Private Declare Function EndPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter
As Long)
Private Declare Function ClosePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As
Long)
#End If ‘WIN32

Dim ch As String * 1, f1 As Integer, loadfile As String
Private Sub cmdOpenFile_Click()
On Error GoTo ErrHandler
‘ Set Filters
CommonDialog1.Filter = “All Files (*.*)|*.*”
‘Specify Default Filter
CommonDialog1.FilterIndex = 1
‘Display Open dialog box
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
Label2.Caption = loadfile
Exit Sub

ErrHandler:
Exit Sub
End Sub
Private Sub cmdStoreImage_Click()
Dim hPrinter&
Dim jobid&
Dim res&
Dim written&
Dim printdata$
Dim docinfo As DOC_INFO_1

loadfile = Form1.txtFile.Text
If loadfile = ““ Then
Appendix B – Sample Programs

174 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
MsgBox “You must Open a file to send”, vbExclamation
Exit Sub
End If

‘ Open file.
f1 = FreeFile
Open loadfile For Binary As f1

‘ Open printer for printing
res& = OpenPrinter(SelPrinter, hPrinter, 0)
If res = 0 Then
MsgBox “Unable to open the printer”
Exit Sub
End If
docinfo.pDocName = “MyDoc”
docinfo.pOutputFile = vbNullString
docinfo.pDatatype = vbNullString
jobid = StartDocPrinter(hPrinter, 1, docinfo)
Call StartPagePrinter(hPrinter)

Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$), written)
While Not EOF(1)
Get #f1, , ch
printdata$ = ch
Call WritePrinter(hPrinter, ByVal printdata$, Len(printdata$),
written)
Wend
Call EndPagePrinter(hPrinter)
Call EndDocPrinter(hPrinter)
Call ClosePrinter(hPrinter) ‘ Close when done

‘ Close file
Close #1
MsgBox “File sent to print spooler.”, vbExclamation
End Sub
Private Sub cmdClose_Click()
Unload Me
End Sub

Private Sub exit_Click()
End
End Sub

Private Sub Form_Load()
Dim X As Printer
‘ search for printer queue name / driver name
For Each X In Printers
If X.Port = “LPT1:” Then ‘printer found
‘ Set printer as system default.
SelPrinter = X.DeviceName
Exit For
End If
Next
End Sub

Private Sub lpt2_Click()

Appendix B – Sample Programs

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 175
End Sub

Private Sub open_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowOpen
loadfile = CommonDialog1.FileName
txtFile.Text = loadfile
End Sub

Private Sub Printer_Click()
CommonDialog1.ShowPrinter
End Sub


This will create the form pictured below:





E

It may be necessary to remove and reinsert the common dialog control due to Windows
®

registry issues.


Appendix B – Sample Programs

176 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 177
Appendi x C


Av ai l abl e Font s – Si zes, Ref er ences, and Sampl es

All character bitmapped fonts available on the printers are described in this section. Each
font has a name (Font ID) associated with it for use in programming. Use the Font Number
(in the left column of Table C-1) in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer
to use the corresponding font.

Fonts 0 through 8 use the slash zero (Ø) conventions for distinguishing between the zero
and the alphabetic O. The slash can be removed with the label formatting command z.
These fonts are non-proportional (monospaced). Therefore, all of the characters take up the
same amount of space when printed. This is helpful when using variable data in a fixed
area. The sizes of these fonts are shown on the following pages.

The CG Triumvirate font number 9 is a proportional font. Each character will take up a
different amount of space when printed. For example, the letter W will be wider than the
letter I.

Font
Number
Valid ASCII Characters (decimal)
Use with Record
Structure Type
0 32-127, 255
1 32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
2 32-168, 171, 172, 225, 255
3
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
4
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
5
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
6
32, 35-38, 40-58, 65-90, 128, 142-144, 146, 153, 154, 156, 157,
165, 168, 225, 255
7 32-126
8 32, 48-57, 60, 62, 67, 69, 78, 83, 84, 88, 90
Internal
Bitmapped
Fonts
9 Dependent upon selected symbol set; see Appendix H. Scalable Font

Table C-1: Valid Human-Readable Font (Internal) ASCII Characters

Appendix C – Available Fonts

178 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Font sizes are dependent upon the print head resolution of the printer used. The tables
below contain a listing of the font sizes by resolution with dimensions given in dots.

Font Height Width Spacing Point Size
Font 0 7 5 1 2.5
Font 1 13 7 2 4.6
Font 2 18 10 2 6.4
Font 3 27 14 2 9.6
Font 4 36 18 3 12.8
Font 5 52 18 3 18.4
Font 6 64 32 4 22.7
Font 7 32 15 5 11.3
Font 8 28 15 5 9.9

Table C-2: Font Sizes @ 203 DPI Resolution



Font Height Width Spacing Point Size
Font 0 10 7 1 2.4
Font 1 19 10 3 4.6
Font 2 27 15 3 6.5
Font 3 40 21 3 9.6
Font 4 53 27 4 12.7
Font 5 77 27 4 18.5
Font 6 95 47 6 22.8
Font 7 47 22 7 11.3
Font 8 41 22 7 9.8

Table C-3: Font Sizes @ 300 DPI Resolution



Font Height Width Spacing Point Size
Font 0 14 10 2 2.5
Font 1 26 14 4 4.6
Font 2 36 20 4 6.4
Font 3 54 28 4 9.6
Font 4 72 36 6 12.8
Font 5 104 36 6 18.4
Font 6 128 64 8 22.7
Font 7 64 30 10 11.3
Font 8 56 30 10 9.9

Table C-4: Font Sizes @ 406 DPI Resolution

Appendix C – Available Fonts

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 179

Font Height Width Spacing Point Size
Font 0 20 14 2 2.4
Font 1 38 20 6 4.6
Font 2 54 30 6 6.5
Font 3 80 42 6 9.6
Font 4 106 54 8 12.7
Font 5 154 54 8 18.5
Font 6 190 94 12 22.8
Font 7 94 44 14 11.3
Font 8 82 44 14 9.8

Table C-5: Font Sizes @ 600 DPI Resolution


Internal Smooth Font 9 (Smooth Font) Point Size Specifiers

Label format records with font code 9 (in Format Record header field b) can specify any of
the font sizes in the leftmost column of the table below. The corresponding specification in
either column labeled Ann or 0nn is used in the font size/selection (eee height) field to
select the desired font size. Optional font sets may contain subsets of those described here.
For an optional font set that generates these fonts via scalable font technology, the
character mapping for this font is the selected scalable symbol set (see Appendix E).

In the sample format below, a 300 DPI printer will use 4-point smooth font to produce a
printed label with the words “four point font”. Sample format:

<STX>L<CR>
1911A0400100010four point font<CR>
E<CR>

Smooth Font 9 Font Size Specification Syntax
Ann
Point Size
203 DPI
[1]
300, 400, & 600 DPI
[2]

0nn
4 - A04

-
5 - A05

000
[3]

6 A06 A06 001
8 A08 A08 002
10 A10 A10 003
12 A12 A12 004
14 A14 A14 005
18 A18 A18 006
24 A24 A24 007
30 A30 A30

008
36 A36 A36

009
48 A48

A48

010
72 - A72

-
[1]
All fonts greater than A36 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
[2]
All fonts greater than A24 are created from multiples of smaller fonts, 2x or 3x, as available.
[3]
Available at 300 DPI and greater print resolutions only.


Table C-6: Internal Bitmapped (Smooth Font) 9 Size Chart
Appendix C – Available Fonts

180 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Internal Bitmapped and Smooth Font Samples

The identifying number is used in the Format Record header field b to cause the printer to
use the corresponding font.

E
The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to Fonts 0 – 6.


0: Identifies a 96-character alphanumeric font, uppercase and lowercase.



1: Identifies a 145-character uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric font that includes
desenders and ascenders.



2: Identifies a 138-character alphanumeric upper and lowercase font.



3: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.



4: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.

Appendix C – Available Fonts

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 181
5: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric upper case font.


6: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.



7: Identifies a font that prints OCR-A, size I.


8: Identifies a font that prints OCR-B, size III.


Appendix C – Available Fonts

182 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
9: Identifies the Internal CG Triumvirate font. Point sizes are selected by the number in the
Format Record header eee height field; see Table C-6.






Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 183

Appendi x D


Reset Codes

The most common transmitted error codes are:


Uppercase “R”

This code is sent every time the printer is turned “On,” signaling a hardware reset.


Uppercase “T”

This code signals a software reset. A software reset is made by sending the command
sequence to the printer or by performing a reset using the front panel keys.


Lowercase “v”

There is an input buffer overflow situation, caused when an overflow of data is sent to
the printer.


Appendix D – Reset Codes
184 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 185
Appendi x E


Si ngl e By t e Sy mbol Set s

The following tables include some of the sixty-six standard symbol sets. Not all of these
symbol sets can be used with every font. Symbol sets containing the Euro currency
character are W1, WE, WG, WL, WT, WR, and PM; see Appendix I, and the <STX>y
command.

E

The following sets were produced using a Windows

-based PC-compatible with a United
States keyboard properties layout. Results may vary if printing this document using a
different input locale.


(DN) ISO 60: Danish / Norwegian Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Æ Ø Å ^ _
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z æ ø å ¯





(DT) DeskTop Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ -
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80
90
A0 ¶ § † ‡ © ®

¢ – — … fi fl
B0 “ “ µ ‰ ¤ o

þ B ‘ ¬ ¦ =
C0 – ± × ¼ ½ ¾ ¹ ² ³ /
D0 ( ) « » ‚ „ ‘ ¡ ¿ Pt ℓ £ ¥ ¤ ƒ ß
E0 ª º æ Æ ð Ð ij IJ
t t œ Œ ø Ø þ Þ
F0 ‘ ‘ ˆ ¨ ˜ ˇ ˘
” ° ·
¯ , ˛ ' l


Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

186 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

(E1) ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ -
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80
90
A0 ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © ª « ¬ - ® ¯
B0 ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ ·
¸ ¸ ¹
» ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
C0 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
D0 Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß
E0 à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
F0 ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ




(E2) ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ -
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80
90
A0 ˘ Ł ¤ § ¨ Š · Z


B0 º ł ´ · ¸ ¹ š “ z


C0 Á Â Ä Ç É Ë Í Î
D0 Ð Ó Ô Ö × Ø Ú Ü Ý ß
E0 á â ä ç é ë í î
F0 ó ô ö ÷ ú ü ý

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 187

(E5) ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ -
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80
90
A0 ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ ª « ¬ - ¯
B0 º ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
C0 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
D0 Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü ß
E0 à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
F0 ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü I ÿ

(FR) ISO 69: French Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ £ $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 à A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z º ç § ^ _
60 µ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z é ù è ¨


(GR) ISO 21: German Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % &
̓
( ) * +
̗
- . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 § A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Ä Ö Ü ^ _
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z ä ö ü ß


(IT) ISO 15: Italian Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ £ $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 § A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z º ç é ^ _
60 ù a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z à ò è ì


Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

188 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

(LG) Legal Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; = ¢ ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ ] _
60 ° a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z § ¶ † ™



(MC) Macintosh Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
80 Ä Å Ç É Ñ Ö Ü á à â ä ã å ç é è
90 ê ë í ì î ï ñ ó ò ô ö õ ú ù û ü
A0 † º ¢ £ § • ¶ ß ® © ™ ´ ¨ Æ Ø
B0 ∞ ± ≤ ≥ ¥ µ Σ π ª ° Ω æ Ø
C0 ¿ ¡ ¬ √ f ≈ « » … À Ã Õ Œ œ
D0 – — “ “ ‘ ‘ ÷ ÿ Ÿ / ¤ < > fi fl
E0 ‡ ` ‚ „ ‰ Â Ê Á Ë È Í Î Ï Ì Ó Ô
F0 Ò Ú Û Ù ˆ ˜ ¯ ˘ ˙ º ¸ ¨ ˛ ˇ


(PC) PC-8 Code Page 437 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
©
¤


♂ ♀ ♫ ^
10

|
!! ¶ § ­ ↨


A Y
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ⌂
80 Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Å
90 É æ Æ ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü
¢
£ ¥ Pt ƒ
A0 á í ó ú ñ Ñ ª ° ¿ ⌐ ¬ ½ ¼ ¡ « »
B0
░ ▒ ▓ │
┤ ╡ ╢ ╖ ╕ ╣ ║ ╗ ╝ ╜ ╛ ┐
C0 └ ┴ ┬ ├ ─ ┼ ╞ ╟ ╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ ╠ ═ ╬ ╧
D0 ╨ ╤ ╥ ╙ ╘ ╒ ╓ ╫ ╪ ┘ ┌
█ ▄ ▌ ▐

E0 a ß └ π ∑ σ µ Τ ф Θ Ω δ ∞ ф є ∩
F0 ≡ ± ⌠ ⌡ ÷ ≈ ○ ▪ ▪ √
n 2


Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 189

(PD) PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
©
¤


♂ ♀ ♫ ^
10

|
!! ¶ § ▬



A Y
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ⌂
80 Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Å
90 É æ Æ ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ø £ Ø Ŀ ŀ
A0 á í ó ú ñ Ñ õ Õ ¿ ã Ã ℓ ʼn ¡ ³ ¤
B0
░ ▒ ▓ │
┤ ╡ ╢ ╖ ╕ ╣ ║ ╗ ╝ ╜ ╛ ┐
C0 └ ┴ ┬ ├ ─ ┼ ╞ ╟ ╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ ╠ ═ ╬ ╧
D0 ╨ ╤ ╥ ╙ ╘ ╒ ╓ ╫ ╪ ┘ ┌
█ ▄ ▌ ▐

E0 a ß └ π ∑ σ µ Τ ф Θ Ω δ ∞ ф є ∩
F0 ≡ ± ⌠ ⌡ ÷ ≈ ○ ▪ ▪ √
n 2



(PE) PC-852 Latin 2 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
©
¤


♂ ♀ ♫ ^
10

|
!! ¶ § ▬



A Y
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ⌂
80 Ç ü é â ä ç ł ë î Ä
90 É ô ö Ö Ü Ł ×
A0 á í ó ú Ž ž « »
B0
░ ▒ ▓ │
┤ Á Â ╣ ║ ╗ ╝

C0 └ ┴ ┬ ├ ─ ┼ ╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ ╠ ═ ╬ ¤
D0 ð Ð Ë Í Î ┘ ┌
█ ▄

E0 Ó ß Ô Š š Ú ý Ý ´
F0


ͅ ̌
˘ § ÷
̧
° ¨ ´ Þ


(PI) PI Font Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 „ ‚ “ “ ‘ ‘ ™




30 ¯ ˘
̌ ̇
7 × × N
  « § » ¶
40 :: f 


50





‹ ›
60
┌ └ ╭ ╰ ┼ ├ ─ ┃┃
 
╓ ╙
□ ◊
70
┐ ┘ ╯ ╯ ┬ ┤ ┴ │ ⊔ ⊓ ╖ ╜ ■
+


Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

190 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

(PM) PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set (Default Symbol Set)
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
©

V + 4 ÷ B


♂ ♀


^
10

¶ §

+ + ¬ +

A Y
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + ‚ ¨ · /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ⌂
80 Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Å
90 É æ Æ ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ø £ Ø
×
ƒ
A0 á í ó ú ñ Ñ ª ° ¿

½ ¼ ¡ « »
B0
░ ▒ ▓ │ ┤
Á Â À ©
╣ ║ ╗ ╝
¢ ¥

C0
└ ┴ ┬ ├ ─ ┼
ã Ã
╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ ╠ ═ ╬
¤
D0 ð Ð Ê Ë È ı ĺ

Î
┘ ┐ █ ▄ ╎
Ì

E0 Ó ß Ô Ò õ Õ μ þ Þ Ù Û Ú ý Ý ¯ ´
F0 - ± = ¾ ¶ § ÷ ¸ º “ . ¹ ³ ² ▪






(PT) PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
©

+ 4 ÷ B






^
10

¶ § —

+ + ¬ +

A Y
20 ! # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + ‚ - · /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ⌂
80 Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Å
90 É æ Æ ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ¢ £ ¥ Pt ƒ
A0 á í ó ú ñ Ñ ª ° ⌐ ¬ ½ ¼ ¡ ¡ « »
B0
░ ▒ ▓ │
┤ ╡ ╢ ╖ ╕ ╣ ║ ╗ ╝ ╜ ╛ ┐
C0 └ ┴ ┬ ├ ─ ┼ ╞ ╟ ╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ ╠ ═ ╬ ╧
D0 ╨ ╤ ╥ ╙ ╘ ╒ ╓ ╫ ╪ ┘ ┌
█ ▄ ▌ ▐

E0 a ß └ π ∑ σ µ Τ ф Θ Ω δ ∞ ф є ∩
F0 ≡ ± ⌠ ⌡ ÷ ≈ ○ ▪ ▪ √
n 2



Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 191

(R8) Roman-8 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ -
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80
90
A0 À Â È Ê Ë Î Ï ΄ ` ˆ “ ˜ Ù Û £
B0 - Ý ý º Ç ç Ñ ñ ¡ ¿ ¤ £ ¥ § ƒ ¢
C0 â ê ô û á é ó ú à è ò ù ä ë ö ü
D0 Å î Ø Æ å Í ø æ Ä ì Ö Ü É Ï ß Ô
E0 Á Ã ã Ð ð Í Ì Ó Ò Õ õ Š š Ú Ÿ ÿ
F0 Þ þ · µ ¶ ¾ — ¼ ½ ª «
B
» ±





(SP) ISO 17: Spanish Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ £ $ % & ´ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 § A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ¡ Ñ ¿ ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z º ñ ç ~






(SW) ISO 11: Swedish Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # ¤ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 É A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Ä Ö Å Ü _
60 é a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z ä ö å ü


Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

192 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

(TS) PS Text Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
80
90
A0 ¡ ¢ £ / ¥ ƒ § ¤ ‘ “ « ‹ › fi fl
B0 - † ‡ · ¶ • , „ “ » … ‰ ¿
C0 ` ´ ˆ ˜ ¯ ˘ · ¨ ° ¸ “ ˛ ˇ
D0 —
E0 Æ ª Ł Ø Œ º
F0 æ ł ø œ ß





(UK) ISO 4: United Kingdom Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ £ $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ⎯






(US) ISO 6: ASCII Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , · . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ -
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~


Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 193

(VI) Ventura International Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
80
90
~
⊔ ■

A0 „ À Â È Ê Ë Î Ï ™
‹ ›
Ú Û
B0 ‰ “ “ º Ç ç Ñ ñ ¡ ¿ ¤ £ ¥ § ƒ ¢
C0 â ê ô û á é ó ú à è ò ù ä ë ö ü
D0 Å î Ø Æ å í ø æ Ä ì Ö Ü É ï ß Ô
E0 Á Ã ã Í Ì Ó Ò Õ õ Š š Ú Ÿ ÿ
F0 Œ œ ¶ † ‡ — – ª º « » …






(VU) Ventura US Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
80
90
→ ⊔ ■

A0 „ ™
B0 ‰ “ “ º § ¢
C0
D0
E0
F0 ¶ † ‡ — – …

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

194 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

(W1) Windows 3.1 Latin 1 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80 € ‚ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š ‹ Œ
90 ‘ ‘ “ “ • – — ˜ ™ š › œ Ÿ
A0 ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © ª « ¬ - ® ¯
B0 ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
C0 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
D0 Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß
E0 à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
F0 ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ








(WE) Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80 € ‚ „ … † ‡ ‰ Š ‹ Ž
90

‘ “ “ – — ™ š › ž
A0 ˇ ˘ Ł ¤ ¦ § ¨ « ¬ -
B0 º ± ˛ ł ´ µ ¶ · ¸ » “
C0 Á Â Ä Ç É Ë Í Î
D0 Ð Ó Ô Ö × Ú Ü Ý ß
E0 á â ä ç é ë í î
F0 ó ô ö ÷ ú ü ý

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 195

(WO) Windows 3.0 Latin 1 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ˜

80
90 `


A0 ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ ª « ¬ - ¯
B0 ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
C0 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
D0 Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß
E0 à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
F0 ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ









(WT) Windows 3.1 Latin 5 Symbol Set
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00
10
20 ! ˜ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + ‚ - . /
30 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
40 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
50 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
60 ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
70 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~

80 € , ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š ‹ Œ
90 ‘ ‘ “ “ – — ˜ ™ š › œ Ÿ
A0 ¡
¢
£ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © ª « ¬ - ® ¯
B0 ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
C0 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
D0 Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü ß
E0 à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
F0 ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü l ÿ

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets

196 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 197

Appendi x F


Bar Code Su mmar y Dat a

Bar code fonts have alpha names (left column, below). Uppercase alpha names will print bar codes with human-readable
interpretations, if supported. Lowercase alpha names will print bar codes only. Place the ID in field b of the Format Record
header to cause the printer to encode the data field using the associated symbology; see Appendix G for details. See Table F-2
for default values. The column labeled “Linear Scanner Supported” provides an indication that printers equipped with a Linear
Scanner are capable of recognizing the associated symbology.

Bar Code Characteristics
Bar
Code ID
Symbology Length Checksum
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
A / a Code 39 Varies No 32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90 -
B / b UPC-A 11 Yes
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in the 6th
& 7th position
-
C / c UPC-E 6 Yes 48-57 Numeric only -
D / d Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2 of 5) Varies No 48-57 Numeric only -
E / e Code 128 Varies M-103 32-127 -
F / f EAN-13 12 Yes
48-57 Numeric only. Option V used in 7th &
8th position
-
G / g EAN-8 7 Yes 48-57 Numeric only -
H / h HBIC Varies M-43 32, 36-39, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90 -
I / i Codabar Varies No 36, 43, 45-58, 65-68 -
(continued)

Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data

198 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Bar
Code ID
Symbology Length Checksum
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
J / j
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ a modulo 10
checksum
Varies M-10 48-57 Numeric only -
K / k Plessey Up to 14 M-10
48-57 Numeric only. Option + is last
character for 2
nd
M-11 chksum
-
L / l
Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ modulo 10
checksum & bearer bars
13 M-10 48-57 Numeric only -
M / m 2 digit UPC addendum 2 Yes 48-57 Numeric only [1]
N / n 5 digit UPC addendum 5 Yes 48-57 Numeric only [1]
O / o Code 93 Varies No 35-38, 42-58, 65-90, 97-122 -
p Postnet Varies Yes 48-57 Numeric only
Q / q UCC/EAN 128 19 Yes 48-57 Numeric only -
R / r UCC/EAN 128 K-Mart non-EDI 18 Yes 48-57 Numeric only -
S / s UCC/EAN 128 Random Weight 34 + Yes 48-57 Numeric only -
T / t Telepen Varies Yes All ASCII characters
U UPS MaxiCode 84 Yes Alphanumeric
u UPS MaxiCode w/ Byte Count Specified Yes Alphanumeric
v FIM 1 No A, B, C, D
z PDF417 Varies Yes All
Z PDF417 w/ Byte Count Specified Yes All
W1c DataMatrix Varies Yes All 8-bit values
(continued)
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 199

Bar
Code ID
Symbology Length Checksum
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
W1C DataMatrix w/ Byte Count Specified Yes All 8-bit values
W1d QR Code – Auto format Varies Yes Alphanumeric
W1D QR Code – Manual format Varies Yes Single-byte or Kanji double-byte
W1f Aztec Varies Yes All 8-bit values
W1F Aztec w/ Byte Count Specified Yes All 8-bit values
W1G / W1g USD-8 (Code 11) Varies Yes 45, 48-57
W1I EAN 128 w/auto subset switching [2] Varies Yes 32-127 -
W1J Code 128 w/auto subset switching Varies Yes 32-127 -
W1k GS1 DataBar (six types) [2] Varies Yes Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependent)
W1L Planet Code Varies Yes 48-57 Numeric only
W1M / W1m Australia Post 4-State Bar Code Varies Yes Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependent)
W1N / W1n Industrial 2 of 5 Varies M-10 48-57 Numeric only
W1p Intelligent Mail Barcode (IMB) Varies No 48-57 Numeric only
W1q CODABLOCK Varies Yes
32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90 / All ASCII
characters (type dependent)

W1R UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI 18 Yes 48-57 Numeric only
W1S / W1s Standard 2 of 5 Varies M-10 48-57 Numeric only
W1t TCIF Linked 3 of 9 (TLC39) Varies Yes Alphanumeric
(continued)
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data

200 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Bar
Code ID
Symbology Length Checksum
Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value
representation
Linear
Scanner
Supported
W1Y / W1y Code 16K Varies Yes All ASCII characters
W1z MicroPDF417 Varies Yes All 8-bit values
W1Z MicroPDF417 w/ Byte Count Specified Yes All 8-bit values


[1]
Readable when using “Barcode Count” method (see <STX>KcSN for details).
[2]
Available for display-equipped and EX2 models only.

Table F-1: Bar Code Characteristics


Bar Code Def aul t Wi d t hs and Hei ght s

Bar Code Default Data
203 DPI Resolutions 300 DPI Resolutions 400 DPI Resolutions 600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
A .40 6:2 .40 9:4 .40 12:4 .40 18:6
B .80 3 .80 4 .80 6 .80 9
C .80 3 .80 4 .80 6 .80 9
D .40 5:2 .40 9:4 .40 10:4 .40 15:6
E .40 2 .40 4 .40 4 .40 6
F .80 3 .80 4 .80 6 .80 9
G .80 3 .80 4 .80 6 .80 9
H .40 6:2 .40 9:4 .40 12:4 .40 18:6
I .40 6:3 .40 9:4 .40 12:6 .40 18:6
J .40 5:2 .40 9:4 .40 10:4 .40 15:6
(continued)
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 201

203 DPI Resolutions 300 DPI Resolutions 400 DPI Resolutions 600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
K .40 5:2 .40 9:4 .40 10:4 .40 15:6
L 1.30 5:2 1.30 9:4 1.30 10:4 1.30 15:6
M .90 3 .90 4 .90 6 .90 9
N .80 3 .80 4 .80 6 .80 9
O .40 6:3 .40 8:4 .40 12:6 .40 18:9
p .08 N/A .08 N/A .08 N/A .08 N/A
Q 1.40 2 1.40 4 1.40 4 1.40 6
R 1.40 2 1.40 4 1.40 4 1.40 6
S 1.40 2 1.40 3 1.40 4 1.40 6
T .80 1 .80 1 .80 2 .80 3
U/u 1.00 N/A 1.00 N/A 1.00 N/A 1.00 N/A
v .5 1 .5 1 .5 2 .5 3
z N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Z/z N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
W1C/W1c N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
W1D/W1d N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
W1F/W1f N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
W1G/W1g .5 5:2 .5 7:3 .5 9:4 .5 14:6
W1I .40 2 .40 4 .40 4 .40 6
W1J .40 2 .40 4 .40 4 .40 6
W1k N/A 2 N/A 3 N/A 4 N/A 6
W1L 0.80 N/A 0.80 N/A 0.80 N/A 0.80 N/A
W1M/W1m N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
W1N/ W1n 0.40 6:2 0.40 9:4 0.40 12:4 0.40 18:6
(continued)
Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data

202 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

203 DPI Resolutions 300 DPI Resolutions 400 DPI Resolutions 600 DPI Resolutions
Font
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
Height
(inches)
Ratio/
Module Size
W1p N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
W1q .40 2 .40 4 .40 4 .40 6
W1R 1.40 2 1.40 4 1.40 4 1.40 6
W1S/W1s 0.40 6:2 0.40 9:4 0.40 12:4 0.40 18:6
W1t .40 6:2 .40 9:4 .40 12:4 .40 18:6
W1Y/ W1y .40 2 .40 4 .40 4 .40 6
W1Z/W1z N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Table F-2: Bar Code Default Data


E

Some bar codes will be sensitive to Label Command “D”; see Label Formatting Commands for details.




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 203

Appendi x G


Bar Code Det ai l s

Unless otherwise noted all bar codes depicted in this section were produced using the
ratio/module values of 00 and height fields of 000 to cause the printer to produce symbols
using default bar widths and height fields. See Appendix F for the default values.


A: Code 3 of 9

Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character.

Variable Length.

Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.

The following example prints a 3 of 9 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1A00000001501000123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode A<CR>
E


B: UPC-A

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 12 digits. If the user provides 11 digits, the printer will compute the checksum.
If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected
checksum. See Appendix O.

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).

The following example prints a UPC-A bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1B000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode B<CR>
E

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

204 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
C: UPC-E

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: Seven digits. If the user provides six digits, the printer will compute the
checksum. If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the
expected checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the
expected checksum.

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).

The following example prints a UPC-E bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1C0000000150100012345<CR>
121100000000100Barcode C<CR>
E


D: Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)

Valid Characters: 0-9

Variable Length.

Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.

The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a wide to narrow bar
ratio of 3:1:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1D000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode D<CR>
E


E: Code 128

Valid Characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.

Variable Length

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 205
This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. The printer can be selected to
start on any code subset and switch to another within the data stream. The default code
subset is B; otherwise, the first character (A, B, C) of the data field determines the
subset. Subset switching is only performed in response to code switch command. These
commands are placed in the data to be encoded at appropriate locations; see Table G-1.

E

The use a B as the first character is recommended to prevent an A or C from changing
the subset.


Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset A, place an ASCII A
(DEC 65, HEX 41) before the data to be encoded.

Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters. To select Code 128 Subset B, place
an ASCII B (DEC 66, HEX 42) before the data to be encoded. If no start character is sent
for the Code 128 font, Code 128 Subset B will be selected by default.

Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. Code 128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data. To select Code 128 Subset C, place an ASCII C (DEC 67, HEX 43) before the data
to be encoded. Subset C can only encode an even number of numeric characters. When
the data to be encoded includes an odd number of numeric characters, the last character
causes the printer to automatically generate a “switch to subset B” and encode the last
character appropriately in subset B.

Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
built into the printer (see below).

For example, to encode FNC2 into a Code 128 Subset A bar code, send the ASCII “&”
(DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by the ASCII “B” (DEC 66, HEX 41).

Sample: ATEST&B123 ¬ Encoded: TEST<FNC2>123



ASCII 2 CHAR CODE A CODE B CODE C
96 &A FNC3 FNC3 -NA-
97 &B FNC2 FNC2 -NA-
98 &C SHIFT SHIFT -NA-
99 &D CODEC CODEC -NA-
100 &E CODEB FNC4 CODEB
101 &F FNC4 CODEA CODEA
102 &G FNC1 FNC1 FNC1

Table G-1: Special Character Handling

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

206 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Control Codes: By sending these control codes, control characters can be encoded into
a Code 128 Subset A bar code (e.g., ABC{DE will be encoded as ABC<ESC>DE):

Control Code in the Bar Code Data Stream Encoded Control Character Result
` NUL
a through z 1 - 26
{ ESC
| FS
} GS
~ RS
ASCII 127 US

The following example prints a Code 128 bar code:


<STX>L
D11<CR>
1E000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode E<CR>
E





F: EAN-13

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 13 digits. If the user provides 12 digits, the printer will compute the checksum.
If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected
checksum. See Appendix O.

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).

The following example prints an EAN-13 bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1F0000000150100012345678901<CR>
121100000000100Barcode F<CR>
E
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 207
G: EAN-8

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 8 digits. If the user provides 7 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If
the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected
checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print all zeros and the expected
checksum.

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).

The following example prints an EAN-8 bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1G00000001501000123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode G<CR>
E

H: Health Industry Bar Code (HBIC)

Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -$ /. %

Variable Length.

Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.

The host must supply leading “+”’s

The following example prints a HBIC bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1H0000000150050+0123456789<CR>
121100000000100Barcode H<CR>
E



I: Codabar

Valid Characters: 0-9, A-D, -, ., $, :, /, + (comma is not valid)

Variable Length but requires at least three characters.

Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.

Valid Codabar symbols require start and stop characters (A–D). These characters should
be placed in the data field along with other data to be included in the symbol.
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

208 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
The following example prints a Codabar bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1I63040001501000A1234567890D<CR>
121100000000100Barcode I<CR>
E
Barcode I



J: Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum)

Valid Characters: 0-9

Variable Length.

Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.

The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum
added and with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1J000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode J<CR>
E



K: Plessey

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 1 to 14 digits

Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.

If a + character is the last data character, an additional MSI checksum will be added to
the bar code in place of the + character.

The following example prints a Plessey bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1K000000015010001234567890<CR>
121100000000100Barcode K<CR>
E



Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 209
L: Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum and Bearer Bars)

Valid Characters: 0-9

Variable Length: For the bearer bars to be printed, 13 characters are required.

Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.

The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum
with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1 and bearer bars:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1L00000001501000123456789012<CR>
121100000000100Barcode L<CR>
E


M: 2-Digit UPC Addendum

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 2 digits.

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol.

The following example prints a 2 digit UPC bar code addendum:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1M000000015010042<CR>
121100000000100Barcode M<CR>
E

N: 5-Digit UPC Addendum

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 5 digits.

Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).
Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

210 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
The following example prints a 5 digit UPC bar code addendum:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1N000000015010001234<CR>
121100000000100Barcode N<CR>
E



O: Code 93

Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, -.$/+% and the space character.

Variable Length.

Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other
bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width).

The following example prints a Code 93 bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1O0000000150100Datamax42<CR>
121100000000100Barcode O<CR>
E



p: Postnet

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 5, 9 or 11 digits

Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid
Postnet symbol.

Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States
Postal Service specific. This bar code is to display the zip code on a letter or package for
the US Postal Service.

The following example prints a Postnet bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1p000000015010032569<CR>
121100000000100Barcode p<CR>
E

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 211
Q: UCC/EAN Code 128

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 19 digits.

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol.

The printer spreads a weighted module 103 check sum.

The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Q00000001501000123456789012345678<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Q<CR>
E



R: UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 18 digits

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above
the symbol. (See W1R for an alternate.)

This bar code is set up according to K-MART specifications.

The following example prints a KMART bar code.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode R<CR>
E


Appendix G – Bar Code Details

212 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
S: UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: At least 34 digits.

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow
bar width).

This bar code is commonly used by the food and grocery industry.

The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1S000000015005001100736750292601193042032020018002110123456<CR>
121100000000100Barcode S<CR>
E

Barcode S


T: Telepen

Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.

Variable Length

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of the record is the width of the narrow bar in
dots. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the
narrow bar width).

The following example prints a Telepen bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1T0000000150100ABCDEF<CR>
121100000000100Barcode T<CR>
E Barcode T

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 213
u: UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2 & 3
The printer supports MaxiCode as defined in the AIM Technical Specification. The
following examples illustrate various label format record message syntaxes for encoding
data as MaxiCode. In the following examples, special formatting is used to denote
special ASCII characters as shown:

Symbol

Hexadecimal Value
R
S

1E

G
S

1D

E
O
T

04
(Printer message syntax allows for
E
O
T
to be
substituted with <CR> or the use of both
E
O
T
and

<CR>.)


UPS Modes 2 & 3 Explicit

The data stream can force Mode 2 or 3 encoding by placing #2 or #3, respectively,
before the data, as shown in the example below. If this is not specified, the printer
chooses the best mode.

1u0000001200120#3[)>
R
S
01
G
S
96123456
G
S
068
G
S
001
G
S
1Z12345675
G
S
UPSN
G
S
12345E
G
S
0
89
G
S
G
S
1/1
G
S
10.1
G
S
Y
G
S
G
S
G
S
UT
R
S
E
O
T

This example will print encoding the MaxiCode symbol in Mode 3.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1u0000001200120#3[)>
R
S
01
G
S
96123456
G
S
068
G
S
001
G
S
1Z12345675
G
S
UPSN
G
S
12345E
G
S
089
G
S
G
S
1/
1
G
S
10.1
G
S
Y
G
S
G
S
G
S
UT
R
S
E
O
T
121100000000100Barcode u<CR>
E

Where:

#3
Forces Mode 3 encoding
[)>
R
S
01
G
S
96
Message Header
123456
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal
code

068
Country Code
001

Class
Primary
Message
G
S
1Z1...

...T
R
S
E
O
T


Secondary
Message


Examples

In the UPS 3.0 protocol examples that follow, Primary Message control characters
G
S
will
not be encoded in the MaxiCode symbol. All characters, the Secondary Message, with
the exception of the leading
G
S
, in are encoded.
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

214 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
A UPS 3.0 zip + 4 with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>
R
S
01
G
S
96841706672
G
S
840
G
S
001
G
S
1Z12345675
G
S
UPSN
G
S
12345E
G
S
089
G
S
G
S
1/
1
G
S
10.1
G
S
Y
G
S
G
S
G
S
UT
R
S
E
O
T
Where:
[)>
R
S
01
G
S
96
Message Header
841706672
Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII, postal code
840
Country Code
001

Class
Primary
Message
G
S
1Z1...

...T
R
S
E
O
T


Secondary
Message


A UPS 3.0 international postal “V6C3E2” with Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120[)>
R
S
01
G
S
96V6C3E2
G
S
068
G
S
001
G
S
1Z12345675
G
S
UPSN
G
S
12345E
G
S
089
G
S
G
S
1/1
G
S
10.1
G
S
Y
G
S
G
S
G
S
UT
R
S
E
O
T
Where:
[)>
R
S
01
G
S
96
Message Header
V6C3E2
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
068
Country Code
001

Class
Primary
Message
G
S
1Z1...

...T
R
S
E
O
T


Secondary
Message


A UPS 3.0 international zip “V6C3E2” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120V6C3E2
G
S
068
G
S
001
G
S
1Z12345675
G
S
UPSN
G
S
12345E
G
S
089
G
S
G
S
1/1
G
S
10.1
G
S
Y
G
S
G
S
G
S
UT
R
S
E
O
T

Where:
V6C3E2
Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII, international zip code
068
Country Code
001

Class
Primary
Message
G
S
1Z1...

...T
R
S
E
O
T


Secondary
Message


A UPS 3.0 zip + 4 “32707-3270” without Message data format and message header:
1u0000001200120327073270
G
S
068
G
S
001
G
S
1Z12345675
G
S
UPSN
G
S
12345E
G
S
089
G
S
G
S
1/1
G
S
10.1
G
S
Y
G
S
G
S
G
S
UT
R
S
E
O
T
Where:
32707
5 digit ASCII, Zip code
3270
4 digit ASCII, +4 Zip code (not required)
068
Country Code
001

Class
Primary
Message
G
S
1Z1...

...T
R
S
E
O
T


Secondary
Message

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 215
U: UPS MaxiCode, Modes 2 & 3 with Byte Count Specifier

Specified Length – The upper case U identifies a UPS MaxiCode bar code with a 4-digit
string length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value
includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is going to Datamax<CR>
121100000000100Barcode U<CR>
E

From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,

1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is
going to Datamax

includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0051
equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes
that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is
set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent single
byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The UPS
MaxiCode bar code produced encodes “327895555840666this
package<CR>is going to Datamax”, and prints a line of text:
Barcode U.
Barcode U


v: FIM

Valid Characters: A, B, C, or D

Length: 1 character

Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier works the same as for fonts on this bar
code.

This bar code is used to display the Facing Identification Mark (FIM) that is carried on
certain types of letter mail for the U S Postal Service:

FIM A: Courtesy reply mail with Postnet.

FIM B: Business reply, penalty or franked mail without Postnet.

FIM C: Business reply, penalty or franked mail with Postnet.

FIM D: OCR readable mail without Postnet (typically for envelopes with a courtesy reply
window).

The following example prints an FIM A bar code:
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

216 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1v0000000150100A<CR>
121100000000100Barcode v<CR>
E


z : PDF-417

Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.

Variable Length – This two dimensional bar code holds large amounts of data in a small
area, while providing a high level of redundancy and error checking, if specified.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode z<CR>
E

Barcode z

The example above prints a normal, security level one, PDF-417 bar code with a 1:2
aspect ratio and best-fit rows and columns. The (bolded) bar code’s data stream
1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR> decodes as follows:

Example Data Explanation
F
1-character specifying a normal or truncated bar code (T to truncate, F for
normal).
1 1-digit security level ranging from 0 to 8.
00
2-digit aspect ratio specified as a fraction, with the first digit being the
numerator and the second digit the denominator. Use “00” for the default
ratio of 1:2. Valid range is from “00” to “99.”
00
2-digit number specifying the number of rows requested. Use “00” to let
the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “03” to “90”. Row values
less than 3 are set to 3, while row values greater than 90 are set to 90.
00
2-digit number specifying the number of columns requested. Use “00” to
let the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “01” to “30”. Column
values greater than 30 are set to 30.
PDF417 The data stream to be encoded.
<CR> Terminates the data stream.





E

Format Record header fields c and d should both be zero.

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 217
Z: PDF-417 with Byte Count Specifier

Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a PDF-417 bar code with a string 4-digit
length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be used within the data strings
without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data
byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all
of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<0x0D>417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode Z<CR>
E
Barcode Z

From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,

1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<CR>417

includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0015 equals the four-digit
decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent
single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The PDF-417 bar code
produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode Z.







W1c: DataMatrix

Valid Characters: Any 8-bit byte data

Variable Length

DataMatrix is a two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is comprised of square
modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. There are two basic types: ECC
000-140 and ECC 200.


ECC 000 - 140 symbols:

These square symbols can be any odd size from 9x9 to 49x49, which may be specified in
fields jjj and kkk. If an ECC 000-140 symbol is specified with even numbers of rows or
columns, the next largest odd value will be used. Input values greater than 49 or less
than 9 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input character stream.
The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.

a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

218 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W W Fixed value, extended bar code set
b[b] c, 1c
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Module size horizontal multiplier
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Module size vertical multiplier
eee 000 to 999 No effect; Must be numeric
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
hhh 000, 050, 080, 100, 140
A 3-digit convolutional error correction level.

If any number other than one of these options is entered
then the nearest lesser value from the valid entries is used.

Example: Selecting an ECC value of 099 will cause the
actual ECC value of 080 to be used.
i 0 - 6
1 digit format identification:

0 - Automatically choose the encodation scheme based
on the characters to be encoded.
1 - Numeric data.
2 - Upper-case alphabetic.
3 - Upper-case alphanumeric and punctuation characters
(period, comma, hyphen, and slash).
4 - Upper-case alphanumeric.
5 - ASCII, the full 128 ASCII character set.
6 - Any 8-bit byte.

If a format identifier is selected which will not encode the
input character stream then the bar code symbol will not be
printed.

Auto-encodation format identification is recommended
since it will select the best possible encodation scheme for
the input stream.
jjj
9, 11, 13 … 49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of rows requested. 000
causes rows to be automatically determined. If the rows
and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a
square using the greater of the two values.
kkk
9, 11, 13 … 49. ECC 140
minimum is 15.
A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of columns requested. 000
causes columns to be automatically determined. If the rows
and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a
square using the greater of the two values.
ll…l
8-bit data, followed by a
termination character.
Data to be encoded.

Table G-2: DataMatrix ECC 000 – 140 Record Structure

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 219
ECC 200 symbols:

There are 24 square symbol sizes available, with both row and column dimensions,
which may be specified in fields jjj and kkk, measured in modules as indicated in the
following list - 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88,
96, 104, 120, 132, and 144. If an ECC 200 symbol is specified with odd numbers of
rows or columns, the next largest even value will be used. Input values greater than
144 or less than 10 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input
character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces.

a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l

Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W W Fixed value, extended bar code set
b[b] c, 1c
Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values
have no other significance.
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Module size horizontal multiplier
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Module size vertical multiplier
eee 000 to 999 No effect; Must be numeric
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
hhh 200 ECC 200 uses Reed-Solomon error correction.
i 0 Fixed value, not used
jjj
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20,
22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40,
44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80,
88, 96, 104, 120, 132,
144
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of rows requested.

000 causes rows to be automatically determined. The
symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do
not match by taking the larger of the two values.
kkk
10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20,
22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40,
44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80,
88, 96, 104, 120, 132,
144
A 3 digit even number (or 000) of columns requested.

000 causes columns to be automatically determined. The
symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do
not match by taking the larger of the two values.
ll…l 8-bit data Data to be encoded in the symbol

Table G-3: DataMatrix ECC 200 Record Structure


Example:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1c44000010001002000000000DATAMAX<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1c<CR>
E Barcode W1c
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

220 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
W1C: DataMatrix with Byte Count Specifier

Specified Length – The upper case C identifies a DataMatrix bar code with a string 4-
digit length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This
value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1C440000100010000292000000000Datamax<0x0D>prints best<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1C<CR>
E

From the example above, the bar code’s data stream,

1W1C440000100010000292000000000 Datamax<0x0D>prints best

includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0029
equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all
bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field
termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all
represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D,
respectively. The DataMatrix bar code produced encodes
“Datamax<CR>prints best,” and prints a line of text: Barcode
W1C.
Barcode W1C















W1d / W1D: QR Code

Valid Characters: Numeric Data, Alphanumeric Data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji
characters

Variable Length: The two-dimensional bar code (as documented in AIM, Version 7.0).

Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg hh…h

Where:
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 221

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3 and 4 Rotation
W1 W1 Fixed value, extended bar code set
b D and d
Selects the QR bar code formatting mode, where:

D = Manual formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to
be entered with a comma (,) as a field separator;
fields are optional per QR Code specifications, and the
first field indicates Model 1 or Model 2 QR Code
(Model 2 is the default).

d = Automatic formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h)
to be data only.
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier Each cell in the bar code is
square, therefore “c” and “d” must be equal. Depending on
the conversion mode (<STX>n or <STX>m), each unit
indicates a cell dimension of .01 inch or .1 mm.
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier. (See explanation for “c”,
above.)
eee 000 to 999 No effect; must be numeric
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column (see Appendix J)
hh…h
Valid ASCII character
string, followed by (a)
termination character(s)
QR Code data string (see Generation Structure, below).


Generation Structure

The data input structure (hh…h) is as follows:

Auto Format (W1d)

With bar code identifier “d”, the data begins after the last character of the column
position field, and does not include any command characters. The data string is
terminated with a termination character, usually a 0x0d hex that occurs twice in
succession. The bar code symbol will have the following characteristics:

1. Model 2
2. Error Correction Code Level = “M” (Standard Reliability Level)
3. Mask Selection = Automatic
4. Data Input Mode = Automatic
[1]


Example:
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

222 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1d4400000100010This is the data portion<CR><CR>
[3]

121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E


(2 termination
characters required.)

Manual Formatting (W1D)

With bar code identifier “D”, minor changes allow flexibility for data entry. (Spaces
have been added for readability.)

[q,] [e [m] i,] cdata cdata cdata…cdata term
[2]

Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
q 1, 2 QR Code Model number, optional. Model 2 is the default.
e H, Q, M, L
Error Correction Level (Reed-Solomon) – Four levels
allowing recovery of the symbol code words:
H = Ultra Reliability Level (30%)
Q = High Reliability Level (25%)
M = Standard Reliability Level (15%)
L = High Density Level (7%)
m 0 – 8, none
Mask Number, optional:
None = Automatic Selection
0-7 = Mask 0 to Mask 7
8 = No Mask
I A, a, M, m
Data Input Mode:
A = Automatic setting, ASCII
[1]
a = Automatic, hex-ASCII
[1]
M = Manual Setting, ASCII
[2]

m = manual, hex-ASCII
[2]

cdata
N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data
Character Mode:
N = Numeric, N data
A = Alphanumeric, A data
B = Binary , Bnnnn data (where nnnn = data byte-
count, 4 decimal digits; byte-count /2 for hex-
ASCII
K = Kanji, K data
term <CR>, <CR><CR>
[3]
The data string is terminated with a termination character,
generally a 0x0d hex, but can be changed by the operator.
If the Data Input Mode is Automatic, the data string is
terminated with two successive termination characters.
[1]
When Data Input Mode = Automatic, Kanji data cannot be used; Manual data input required.
[2]
When using manual formatting, commas are required between format fields and data types.
[3]
<CR> represents the line termination character as defined by the current control code set or
after use of Txx, line field terminator label format command.

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 223
If HEX/ASCII mode is selected in manual Data Input Mode, only the data for Kanji or
Binary data types will be converted, therefore the other data types and all command
characters must be entered in ASCII format. If HEX/ASCII is selected in automatic
Data Input Mode, all of the data must be entered in HEX/ASCII format.

Data Append Mode String Format, Manual Formatting – Bar Code W1D

D aa tt pp I

Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
D D Data Append Mode String Format indicator
aa 00, 99 QR Code Number in Append Series, 2 decimal digits
tt The total number of QR Codes in series, 2 decimal digits
pp Value of Parity, 2 digits, 8 LSBs of data parity
e H, Q, M, L As above
m 0 – 8, none As above
i A, a, M, m As above
cdata
N, A, B, K
immediately followed
by data
As above
term <CR>, <CR><CR> As above


Characteristics

Models:

Model 1 (original version), bar code versions 1 through 14
A. ECC Levels “H”, “M”, “Q”, and “L”
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
D. Data Append Mode

Model 2 (enhanced version), bar code versions 1 through 40
A. ECC Levels “H”, “M”, “Q”, and “L”
B. Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8
C. Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual
D. Data Append Mode

Representation of data:

Dark Cell = Binary 1
Light Cell = Binary 0

Symbol Size (not including quiet zone, 4 cells on each of the 4 sides):
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

224 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Model 1: 21 X 21 cells to 73 X 73 cells (Versions 1 to 14, increase in steps of 4 cells
per side)

Model 2: 21 X 21 cells to 177 X 177 cells (Versions 1 to 40, increase in steps of 4
cells per side)

Data Characters per symbol (maximum for symbol size):

Numeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 1,167 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 7,089 characters

Alphanumeric Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 707 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 4,296 characters

Binary Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 486 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 2,953 characters

Kanji Data
Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 299 characters
Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 1,817 characters

Code Type: Matrix

Orientation Independence: Yes

Example

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1D44000001000102HM,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>
121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR>
E
Barcode W1D
Where:

QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.1 inch square, positioned at X =. 1” and Y = .1”,
ECC=H, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual.

Other Examples:

DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = H, Mask = 3, Data Input Mode = Manual:

1W1D4400000100010H3M,AThis is the data portion also with
binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 225
DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.08 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji:

1W1D88000001000102,LM,K<0x81><0x40><0x81><0x41><0x81><0x42><0x0D>


DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji (in
Hex/ASCII format):

1W1D4400000100010L8m,K814081418142<0x0D>


DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X =
.1” and Y = .1”, ECC = M, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic:

1W1d1100000100010Pallet 35FGA, Box 55367, Datamax Corp, Orlando,
Florida 32707<0x0D><0x0D>















W1f / W1F: Aztec

Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending upon the selected options.

Variable Length (W1f): This two dimensional bar code holds a large amount of data in a
small area and can provide a high level of error checking.

Specified Length (W1F): With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through
0xFF to be included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format
record terminators.

Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i jjj kk…k

Where:
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

226 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W1 W1 Fixed value, extended bar code set
b f and F
Lowercase selects the Aztec bar code, variable length.
Uppercase selects the Aztec bar code with a Byte Count
Specifier
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 = default size. The c/d
module size parameters should be equal to produce a
square symbol. When the label command (Dwh) is used to
generate larger text, then c and d may be used to
compensate and ensure a square symbol.
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Module size vertical multiplier, 0 = default size (See
explanation for “c”, above.)
eee 000 No Effect
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
[hhhh] 0000 to 9999
Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by
this byte count. This decimal value includes all of the data
following this byte count field, but does not include itself.
i 0, 1
Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) mode; 0 = Disabled,
1 = Enabled
jjj 000 to 300
Error Correction (EC) / Amount (see table below), where:

000 – Default EC, approximately 23%
001 – 099 EC fixed value, expressed as a percent.
101 – 104 Compact core, 1 to 4 layers respectively.
201 – 232 Full size core, 1 to 32 layers respectively.
300 – Rune format, encodes three ASCII decimal digits 0-
256; scanner decode output is decimal number 0-
256
kk…k
8-bit data, followed by a
termination character
Data to be encoded.


The error correction or size selection determines the symbol size and other
characteristics of the symbol, as shown in the following table. Attempting to encode
more data that has been made available will result in no symbol printed.
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 227

Error Correction (EC) / Size Implications
jjj
Symbol
Size
[1]

Symbol
Format
Maximum
[2]

Binary Data
Bytes
Maximum
[2]

Alphabetic
Characters
Maximum
[2]

Numeric
Characters
000 variable data
dependent
1914 3067 3832
001 to 099 variable data and EC
dependent
1914 3067 3832

101 15 compact 6 12 13
102 19 compact 19 33 40
102 19 compact 19 33 40
103 23 compact 33 57 70
104 27 compact 53 89 110
201 19 full size 8 15 18
202 23 full size 24 40 49
203 27 full size 40 68 84
204 31 full size 62 104 128
205 37 full size 87 144 178
206 41 full size 114 187 232
207 45 full size 145 236 294
208 49 full size 179 291 362
209 53 full size 214 348 433
210 57 full size 256 414 516
211 61 full size 298 482 601
212 67 full size 343 554 691
213 71 full size 394 636 793
214 75 full size 446 718 896
215 79 full size 502 808 1008
216 83 full size 559 900 1123
217 87 full size 621 998 1246
218 91 full size 687 1104 1378
219 95 full size 753 1210 1511
220 101 full size 824 1324 1653
221 105 full size 898 1442 1801
222 109 full size 976 1566 1956
223 113 full size 1056 1694 2116
224 117 full size 1138 1826 2281
225 121 full size 1224 1963 2452
226 125 full size 1314 2107 2632
227 131 full size 1407 2256 2818
228 135 full size 1501 2407 3007
229 139 full size 1600 2565 3205
230 143 full size 1702 2728 3409
231 147 full size 1806 2894 3616
232 151 full size 1914 3067 3832
300 11 Rune 1 1 1
[1]
Measured in module size x, assuming default module size (cd=00).
[2]
Maximum sizes are approximate and data dependent, and may be less than indicated.

Table G-4: Aztec Characteristics Index


Appendix G – Bar Code Details

228 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Error Correction

Size 001 to 099: This value specifies the percent of symbol code words to be used for
error correction. Actual error correction word percentage will vary depending on data.
The default value, approximately 23%, is recommended. Any other value may be
selected to meet the user’s needs. Some minimum-security code word may be
generated depending on the data sent for encoding, particularly when the volume of that
data is small. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed.

Size 101 to 104: Values 101 through 104 results in 1 through 4 layers (two modules
thick) respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as
indicated in the table above. Symbols will be of the compact form. All available code
word will be used for error correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is
printed.

Size 201 to 232: Values 201 through 232 result in 1 through 32 layers (two modules
thick) respectively, around the center finder pattern. Data volume constraints apply as
indicated in the table above. Symbols will be of the full-size form. All available
codewords will be used for error correction. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol
is printed.

Size 300: Value 300 informs the printer that the data, which follows will be used to
encode one RUNE symbol. The data consists of one to three ASCII digits with value
range of 0 to 256. The data may include leading zeros. Data streams longer than three
digits or data that includes non-numeric characters may have unpredictable results.

Extended Channel Interpretation Mode: A value of 1 provides for extended channel
codewords to be inserted into the bar code symbol, using escape sequences in the
datastream. This mode also provides for effective Code 128 and UCC/EAN 128
emulations, when used in with appropriately configured bar code readers. The valid
values for escape sequences are of the form <ESC>n, where:
<ESC> – 1 byte with value 27
10
= 1B
16
n – 1 ASCII digit, range 0 through 6

These escape sequences are encoded as FLG(n) character pairs described in the
International Symbology Specification – Aztec Code, AIM, 1997-11-05, and the
meanings of the values for n are the same in both.

<ESC>0 – Is encoded as FLG(0), and interpreted as FNC1 or <
G
S
> depending on its
location in the data stream. The printer does not validate <ESC>0
locations in the data stream.

When <ESC>0 is the leading data in the stream, it is interpreted as a
FNC1 as used in the Code 128 symbology, and specifically for UCC/EAN
128 applications. For appropriately configured scanners this will be
interpreted/transmitted as a ]C1 symbology identifier preamble. The
printer does not validate UCC/EAN 128 data syntax.

When <ESC>0 follows a single alphabetic or two numeric characters
respectively, then it also interpreted as a FNC1. For appropriately
configured scanners this would be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C2
symbology identifier preamble, and the alpha or numeric characters
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 229
preceding the FNC1 are Application Indicators assigned by AIM
International. The printer does not check AI validity.

When <ESC>0 is anywhere else in the data stream, a <
G
S
> replaces it in
the bar code symbol, as with UCC/EAN 128 field separators.


<ESC>n – Is encoded as FLG(n), and is interpreted as signaling Extended Channel
Interpretation. When the value of n is from 1 to 6, it signals that the
following n digits comprise an extended channel identifier for use with ECI
compliant bar code scanners. An erroneous bar code symbol may result
from failing to follow <ESC>n with n digits. Any <ESC>0 following
<ESC>n and not within the n digits will be encoded as FLG(0). In the
context of a FLG(n), any backslash “\” (92
10
) will be interpreted by the
scanner as two backslashes “\”.


Example 1: The variable length example encodes “AZTEC” with no ECI input, and 23%
error correction, and prints the bar code. A line of text is also printed.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1f00000001501000000AZTEC<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1f<CR>
E





Barcode W1f

Example 2: The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that
follow until the end of the bar code data. The byte count is 17. The
symbology encodes “AZTEC<CR>barcode”, and prints the bar code. Notice
that a <CR> does not terminate the bar code format record. A line of text
is also printed.
<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1F000000015010000170000AZTEC<0x0D>barcode
121100000000100Barcode W1F<CR>
E






Barcode W1F



Functions Not Supported

• Structured Append
• Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
• Module shaving


Appendix G – Bar Code Details

230 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
W1g / W1G: USD-8 (Code 11)

Valid Characters: 0-9,-

Bar Code Data String Length: Variable, typical max 41 characters

Human Readable: W1G; and, Non-Human Readable: W1g

USD-8 (Code 11) is a bar code that encodes the ten digits and the dash (-) character.
An additional character serves as the start and stop indicator. Each character has three
bars and two spaces for a total of five elements. Of these five elements, two are of
medium width and three are narrow, except for the “0”, “9”, and “-“ characters, which
have only one wide element and four narrow elements.

The narrow bar size is specified in DPL by the narrow bar parameter, the medium is
specified in DPL by the wide bar parameter and the wide bar is fixed at 2 times the
medium bar minus the narrow bar.

DPL calculates two checksum characters, C and K, and automatically places them prior
to the stop character. The following example prints a Code11 bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1G00000015001500123456789-<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1G<CR>
E

Barcode W1G


W1I: EAN128 (with Auto Subset Switching)

Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.

Variable length, minimum 4 characters

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).

This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least
four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in
the first four characters then the default start code is subset B. The next character after
start is always FNC1. Subset switching between B and C is performed based on rules as
below:

1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set
prior to the last digit.

2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character
code C will be set prior to the digits.

3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the
character.
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 231

Note that there is no auto-switching from or to Subset A. Standard switches are still
used (see table below).


Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters.

Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters.

Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. EAN128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data.

Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
built into the printer; see table below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into an EAN128
Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66,
HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.

ASCII 2 CHAR CODE A CODE B CODE C
96 &A FNC3 FNC3 -NA-
97 &B FNC2 FNC2 -NA-
98 &C SHIFT SHIFT -NA-
99 &D CODEC -NA- -NA-
100 &E CODEB FNC4 -NA-
101 &F FNC4 CODEA CODEA
102 &G FNC1 FNC1 FNC1

Table G-5: Special Character Handling


Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these
control codes:

` = NUL
a through z = 1 - 26
{ = ESC
| = FS
} = GS
~ = RS
ASCII 127 = US

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

232 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
The following example prints an EAN128 bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1I000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1I<CR>
E
Barcode W1I
When scanned this bar code will decode as follows:
[C][FNC1]1234[B]5[F1]10Z[C]213302[B]1AK(81)


W1J: Code 128 (with Auto Subset Switching)

Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set.

Variable length

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the
narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).

This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A, B, and C. If the data begins with at least
four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. If there is a non-numeric in
the first four characters or there are less than four then the default start code is subset
B. Subset switching between B and C is based on the following rules:

1. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits, subset B will be set
prior to the last digit.

2. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B, the character
code C will be set prior to the digits. If there is an odd number of numerics already in
B, the first numeric will be placed in B with the others in C.

3. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs, subset B will be inserted prior to the
character.

Note that there is no auto switching from, or to, subset A. Standard switches are still
used. See table below.

Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the control and special characters.

Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters
plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters.

Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive, as well as
special characters. Code128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric
data.

Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are
considered special characters. To access these values, a two-character reference table is
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 233
built into the printer; see table below. As an example, to encode FNC2 into a Code128
Subset A bar code, send the ASCII & (DEC 38, HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66,
HEX 41). Code FNC2 will be encoded.

ASCII 2 CHAR CODE A CODE B CODE C
96 &A FNC3 FNC3 -NA-
97 &B FNC2 FNC2 -NA-
98 &C SHIFT SHIFT -NA-
99 &D CODEC -NA- -NA-
100 &E CODEB FNC4 -NA-
101 &F FNC4 CODEA CODEA
102 &G FNC1 FNC1 FNC1

Table G-6: Special Character Handling


Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these
control codes:
` = NUL
a through z = 1 - 26
{ = ESC
| = FS
} = GS
~ = RS
ASCII 127 = US


The following example prints a Code128 Auto bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1J000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1J<CR>
E

Barcode W1J

When scanned this bar code will decode as follows:
[C]1234[B]5[F1]10Z2 [C]133021[B]AK(95)
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

234 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
W1k: GS1 DataBar ( pr evi ousl y “ Reduced Space Symbol ogy RSS” )

Valid Characters: Type dependent

Bar Code Data String Length: Type dependent

GS1 DataBar is a continuous, linear symbology used for identification in EAN.UCC
systems. There are six different types:

GS1 DataBar Type Overview*
GS1 DataBar
GS1 DataBar Truncated
GS1 DataBar Stacked
GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional

• Encodes a full 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification
within a linear symbol that can be scanned omni-
directionally.

• The encodable character set is 0 through 9.

• The maximum numeric data capacity is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.

• Error detection is mod 79 checksum.
GS1 DataBar Limited

• Encodes a 14-digit EAN.UCC item identification with
indicator digits of zero or one within a linear symbol.

• The encodable character set is 0 through 9.

• The maximum numeric data capacity for is the
application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item
identification.

• Data must begin with indicator 0 or 1. Any higher
number results in discarded data.

• Error detection is mod 89 checksum.

GS1 DataBar Expanded

• Encodes EAN.UCC item identification plus
supplementary AI element strings.

• The encodable character is a subset of ISO 646,
consisting of upper and lower case letters, digits and
20 selected punctuation characters, plus the special
function character FNC1, (#).

• The maximum numeric data capacity is 74 numeric or
41 alphanumeric.

• Error detection is mod 211 checksum.
*Additional data can be encoded in a two-dimensional composite as per specification (see AIM
Spec ITS/99-001 for more details).
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 235
Syntax for GS1 DataBar (spaces added for readability):

a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h i j m n…n | p…p

Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W1 W1 Fixed value, extended bar code set
k k Selects GS1 bar code
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Wide bar ratio, default = 2
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
eee 000 No effect
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
h R, T, S, D, L
GS1 Type:

R = GS1 DataBar Omnidirectional,
T = GS1 DataBar Truncated,
S = GS1 DataBar Stacked,
D = GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional,
L = GS1 DataBar Limited
i 1-9 Pixel Multiplier
j 0 to (i-1) X pixels to undercut
m 0 to (i-1) Y pixels to undercut
n…n 0 to 9 Numeric linear data, length 13
[1]

| | (optional)
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary
2-D data
p…p 2-D data (optional) Additional 2-D data
[2]

[1]
The application identifier is not encoded in the symbol nor is the last check digit; the user
should enter in a 13-digit value. The decoding system will display the application identifier and
calculate the check digit.
[2]
The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel
multiplier.

Table G-7: GS1 DataBar Record Structures

Examples:


The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

236 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code with 2-D data:

<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890|123456-99/99/99
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k


The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Truncated bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150T1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k


The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150S1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E

Barcode W1k


The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional
bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150D1002001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k


The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Limited bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150L1001501234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k

Syntax for the GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code (spaces added for readability):

a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h i j m nn p…p | q…q

Where:
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 237

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W1 W1 Fixed value, extended bar code set
k k Selects GS1 bar code
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Wide bar ratio, default = 2
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Narrow bar ratio, default = 2
eee 000 No effect
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
h E GS1 Type: E= GS1 DataBar Expanded
i 1-9 Pixel Multiplier
j 0 to (i-1) X pixels to undercut
m 0 to (i-1) Y pixels to undercut
nn 2-22, even only
[2]
Segments per row
p…p 0 to 9 Subset of ISO646, including alphanumerics
| | (optional)
Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary
2-D data
q…q 2-D data (optional) Additional 2-D data
[1]


[1]
Separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier.
[2]
When using additional 2-D composite data, the sequence width must be at least 4.

Table G-8: GS1 DataBar Expanded Record Structure
Example:

The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code.

<STX>L
D11
1W1k0000001500150E100022001234567890
121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR>
E
Barcode W1k



W1L: Planet Code

Valid Characters: 0-9

Variable length, minimum one digit

Example:

The following example prints a Planet Code bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1L4405001000100123456789
E
Barcode W1L
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

238 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
W1m / W1M: Australia Post 4-State Bar Code

Length: 37, 52, or 67 bars

Usage: This symbol is used for processing mail in the Australia Post System. The symbol
is 37, 52 or 67 bars in length, and the height and ratios are fixed according to the
specification (see “Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications” from Australia Post for
more information).

Syntax for the Australia Post 4-State Bar Code (spaces added for readability):

a W1 m c d eee ffff gggg hh iiiiiiii j…j

Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W1 W1 Fixed value, extended bar code set
m m and M
Lowercase selects the Australia Post bar code, and
uppercase selects the Australia Post bar code with a
human readable field.
c 0 Not used.
d 0 Not used.
eee 000 Not used.
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
hh
11, 87, 45, 92, 59, 62,
44
Format Control Code (FCC):

FCC Value Resulting Format
11 Standard Customer Bar Code
87 Routing Bar Code
45 Reply Paid Bar Code
92 Redirection Bar Code
59 Customer Bar Code 2
62 Customer Bar Code 3
44 Reserved
iiiiiiii 00000000-99999999 8-digit Delivery Point Identifier (DPID)
j…j 0-9, a-z, A-Z, #, space
Optional – Customer information, Bar Code 2 or 3 (Bar
Code 2 has a maximum of 8 digits or 5 alphanumeric
characters, while Bar Code 3 has a maximum of 15 digits
or 10 alphanumeric characters), where if all numeric then
data will be encoded in N-type; otherwise, C-type will be
used.

Example 1:

The following example prints a standard Customer Bar Code using a DPID of
“39987520”:
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 239


<STX>L
D11<CR>
1WM00000005000501139987520<CR>
E
Barcode W1M

Note that the human readable shows the format control code, sorting code and the
generated Reed Solomon error correction parity values.


Example 2:

The following example prints a Customer Bar Code 2 using a DPID of “32211324” and
customer information “A124B”:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1Wm00000005001505932211324A124B<CR>
E
Barcode W1m







W1n / W1N: Industrial 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5 is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric bar code. All of the
information is contained in the bars, either wide or narrow, typically in a 3:1 ratio. The
space is equal to the width of the narrow bar.

Valid Characters: 0-9

Variable length, minimum one digit

Human Readable: W1N; and, Non-Human Readable: W1n

Example:

The following example prints an Industrial 2 of 5 with
a human readable field:

<STX>L
D11
1W1N8305001000100123456
E

Barcode W1N

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

240 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
W1p: Intelligent Mail Barcode (IMB)

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 20, 25, 29 or 31 digits

Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid IMB
symbol.

Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States
Postal Service specific. This bar code represents a 20 digit tracking code and a zero,
five, nine, or eleven digit routing code on a letter or package for the USPS.

Example:

The following example prints an IMB bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1p000000050005001234567094987654321012345678
91<CR>
E

Barcode W1p










W1q: CODABLOCK

CODABLOCK is a two-dimensional, multi-row, stacked bar code. CODABLOCK A uses the
Code 39 character set and supports variable ratios. CODABLOCK E and F use the Code
128 character set and support only fixed ratios, while CODABLOCK E also adds FNC1
automatically to the beginning of the data.

Valid Characters: CODABLOCK A: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character; and,
CODABLOCK E and F: All ASCII characters.

Variable length

Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1q b c ddd eeee ffff g h ii jj k…k

Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 241
Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W1q W1q Fixed value, extended bar code set, selects CODABLOCK
b
1 to 9, A to Z, and
a to z
Horizontal multiplier* (0 = default size)
c
1 to 9, A to Z, and
a to z
Vertical multiplier* (0 = default size)
ddd 001 to 999 Individual row height
eeee 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
g A, E, F CODABLOCK Mode

– A, E, or F
h 0,1 Whether to generate and add checksum
ii 01-44 Number of rows to encode
jj 02-62 Number of characters per row
k…k ASCII chars Data
* Only CODABLOCK A supports variable ratios.

Example:

The following example prints a CODABLOCK E bar code with 4
rows, 2 characters per row:

<STX>L
D11
1W1q2202501000100E0040212345678
E

Barcode W1q



W1R: UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI

Valid Characters: 0-9

Length: 18 digits

Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.
All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2, 3, or 4 times the narrow bar width).
Human readable characters for this bar code are printed above the symbol.

This produces the same symbology as bar code ID “R”, except that the human readable
field has been modified to print underneath the bar code (see below).
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

242 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Example:

The following example prints a KMART bar code:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1R<CR>
E

34 567890 123 4567
Barcode W1R





W1s / W1S: Standard 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 is a discrete, self-checking, continuous numeric bar code. All of the
information is contained in the bars. Bars are either wide or narrow, typically in a 3:1
ratio. The space is equal to the width of the narrow bar.

Valid Characters: 0-9

Variable length, minimum one digit

Human Readable: W1S; and, Non-Human Readable: W1s

Example:

The following example prints a Standard 2 of 5 bar code:

<STX>L
D11
1W1S8305001000100123456
E

Barcode W1S





W1t: TCIF Linked 3 of 9 (TLC39)

Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.

Variable Length: Encodes a 25-character alphanumeric number in MicroPDF417 symbol.

Specified Length: Encodes a six-digit sequence in a standard Code 39 followed by a link
flag character in Code 3 of 9.

Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 t c d eee ffff gggg hhhhhh ; ii…i

Where:
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 243


Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W1 W1 Fixed value, extended bar code set
t t Selects TLC39 bar code
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z
Wide bar of Code 39, ratio of wide to narrow must be
between 2:1 and 3:1.
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Narrow bar of Code 39
eee 001 to 999 Height of Code 39
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
hhhhhh ECI Data Six digit ECI number
; Fixed
Parses data. (If the seventh character is not a semi colon
then only a six-digit code 39 will print.)

Up to 25 alphanumeric serial number characters to be
encoded in the MicroPDF417 symbol. This symbol is fixed
at four columns. The number of rows is determined by the
amount of data, as follows:

Character Count Row Count
1-14 4
15-22 6
i…i S/N Data
23-25 8

The link flag is the character “T” in Code 39 without a start/stop indicator. The flag
location is based on the ECI code location, length, and height. The location of the
MicroPDF417 symbol is based on the location of ECI bar code. The symbol’s module
width and height are fixed at the default. The following example prints a TLC39 bar
code:

<STX>L
D11
1Wt0000001500150123456;ABCD12345678901234
1911A0801300170A1B2C3DAAA
121100000000100Barcode W1t<CR>
E
Barcode W1t



W1y / W1Y: Code 16K

Code 16K is a multi-row bar code.

Valid Characters: All ASCII characters

Variable length

Human Readable: W1Y; and, Non-Human Readable: W1y
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

244 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Example:

The following example prints a Code 16K:

<STX>L
D11
1W1Y3305001000100ABC123
E
Barcode W1Y



W1z: MicroPDF417

MicroPDF417 is a 2 dimensional bar code capable of holding large amounts of data in a
small area. It provides a high level of redundancy and error checking.

Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending on the selected options.

Variable Length

Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W z c d eee ffff gggg h i j k 0 m…m

Where:

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1,2,3, and 4 Rotation
W1 W1 Fixed value, extended bar code set.
z z Selects the MicroPDF417 bar code.
c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 – default size.
d 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z Module size vertical multiplier, 0 – default size.
eee 000 No Effect
ffff 0000 to 9999 Label position, row
gggg 0000 to 9999 Label position, column
h 1 to 4 Number columns
i 0 to 9 and A Row / Error Correction index
j 0, 1 Byte Compaction Mode, 1 - best binary data compression
k 0, 1 Macro Character Substitution, 1 - disable
0 0 Fixed ASCII digit 0. Reserved for future use.
m…m 8-bit data Data to be encoded.


The following example prints a MicroPDF417 bar code, default module size (cd = 00),
with 1 column, 24 rows, error correction of 33%, no byte compaction, macro character
substitution enabled.
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 245

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1z000000015010014000PDF417<CR>
121100000000100Barcode W1z<CR>
E


Barcode W1z

The number of columns (h) and row / error correction index (i) combine to form the
selection index (hi), which determines other symbol characteristics as shown below:

Row/Column/Error Correction Selection Index (hi) Implications
hi Columns Rows
Max
Errors
Corrected
[1]

Symbol
Width
[2]

Symbol
Height
[3]
Max
Binary Data
Bytes
[3]

Max Alpha
Characters
[5]

Max
Numeric
Characters
[5]

10 1 11 4 40 24 3 6 8
11 1 14 4 40 30 7 12 17
12 1 17 4 40 36 10 18 26
13 1 20 5 40 42 13 22 32
14 1 24 5 40 50 18 30 44
15 1 28 5 40 58 22 38 55
20 2 8 5 57 18 8 14 20
21 2 11 6 57 24 14 24 35
22 2 14 6 57 30 21 36 52
23 2 17 7 57 36 27 46 67
24 2 20 8 57 42 33 56 82
25 2 23 10 57 48 38 67 93
26 2 26 12 57 54 43 72 105
30 3 6 9 84 14 6 10 14
31 3 8 11 84 18 10 18 26
32 3 10 13 84 22 15 26 38
33 3 12 15 84 26 20 34 49
34 3 15 18 84 32 27 46 67
35 3 20 23 84 42 39 66 96
36 3 26 29 84 54 54 90 132
37 3 32 35 84 66 68 114 167
38 3 38 41 84 78 82 138 202
39 3 44 47 84 90 97 162 237
40 4 4 5 101 10 8 14 20
41 4 6 9 101 14 13 22 32
42 4 8 11 101 18 20 34 49
43 4 10 13 101 22 27 46 67
44 4 12 15 101 26 34 58 85
45 4 15 18 101 32 45 76 111
46 4 20 23 101 42 63 106 155
47 4 26 29 101 54 85 142 208
48 4 32 35 101 66 106 178 261
49 4 38 41 101 78 128 214 313
4A 4 44 47 101 90 150 250 366
[1]
Can be any combination of 1 erasures + 2 substitutions (e.g. 13 maximum number of errors corrected
might include 7 erasures and 3 substitutions).
[2]
Includes 1 module width of quiet zone on either side.
[3]
Assumes the module height is 2 module width, and includes one module width quiet zones on top and
bottom.
[3]
Assumes Binary Compaction.
[5]
Assumes Text Compaction.
Appendix G – Bar Code Details

246 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual



E

In the table above, row/column/error correction selection index (hi) values increasingly
large do not necessarily result in the ability to encode more data.

Byte Compaction Mode (j = 1)
A value of 1 forces Byte Compaction. The compaction ratio is six 8-bit bytes of data
compressed into a 5-symbol codeword. See the table above for the maximum data
allowed for any row/column/error correction selection index (hi).

Macro Character Substitution Disable (k=1)
By default Macro Character Substitution is enabled (k=0). When enabled, Byte
Compaction has priority over Macro Character Substitution. When Macro Character
Substitution is enabled, the data stream header and trailer are compacted when they
conform to the following forms:
[)>
R
S
05
G
S
data
R
S
E
o
T

or
[)>
R
S
06
G
S
data
R
S
E
o
T

where:
data may not contain adjacent bytes with values
R
S
or
G
S

(
R
S
= 30
10
, 1E
16
and
G
S
= 29
10 ,
1D
16
and
E
o
T
= 4
10
,4
16
)

Functions Not Supported

• General Purpose Extended Channel Interpretations, including Code-128 emulations
• Structured Append
• Reader Initialization Symbol Generation
• Module shaving




W1Z: Micro PDF417 with Byte Count Specifier

Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a Micro PDF417 bar code with a 4-digit
string length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the
data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit
decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This
value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
1W1Z0000000150100001214000pdf<0x0D>417
121100000000100Barcode W1Z<CR>
E

Barcode W1Z
Appendix G – Bar Code Details
Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 247
From the example, the bar code’s data stream,

1W1Z0000000150100001214000PDF<0x0D>417,

includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0012 equals the four-digit
decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code
data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent
single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The Micro PDF417 bar
code produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode W1Z.

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

248 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 249
Appendi x H

Si ngl e and Doubl e By t e Char act er Font Mappi ng

Label format records with font code 9 in the b field of the Format Record header can specify
any of the following bitmapped or scalable fonts with the associated specification in the font
size/selection (eee height) field, as shown in the tables on the following pages.

Example: 1911u4000100010A0215134<CR>

The example above will produce a printed string consisting of the two Kanji characters
referenced by the two HEX ASCII pairs A0, 21, and 51, 34, on appropriately equipped
printers.

Example: 1911U4001000100P012P012<0x38><0x77><0x00>

The above example will produce a printed string consisting of the one 12 point Kanji
character referenced by the byte pair with hex values 38 and 77 on appropriately equipped
printers.

E

Double byte hex representation character strings terminate with two null bytes and a <CR>,
i.e., 0x 00 00 0D. The Hex-ASCII representation is terminated with <CR>.


The alphanumeric portion (nn) of the scalable font specifiers, Snn, Unn, unn, numbering
system is a base 62 numbering system, 0, 1, 2…8, 9, A, B, C...X, Y, Z, a, b, c...x, y, z. For
scalable fonts the S designation signifies single byte characters and U designates double
byte. The lower case U counterpart signifies that print data in the label format record is in a
hex-ASCII format. Fonts that have been downloaded with designators of the form nn, where
nn are alphanumeric, as seen in the font size specifier (eee height) column below, may be
referenced in label format records by their upper or lower case specifiers as available.
However, fonts created for double-byte access cannot be accessed using Snn as the font
designator, and vice versa, single-byte fonts cannot be accessed using Unn or unn.

E

Downloading scalable fonts require specifying the font ID, a two character alphanumeric.
The S, or U, u used in referencing the font within label format records is not used in the
download specification. Attempting to utilize a scalable font with an inappropriate byte-size
designation (e.g. S on double byte or U, u on single byte) will have unpredictable results.

Appendix H – Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping

250 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Font 9, Font Specifications (eee Height) and Associated Characteristics
Font
Name
Character
Mapping
Font Size Specifier
(eee Height)
Point
Size
Font 9 Bitmapped Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte 100 - 999 user defined
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications
CG Triumvirate Bold
Condensed
[1] [2]

Single Byte S00 scalable
CG Triumvirate
[1] [2]
Single Byte S01 scalable
Font 9 Scalable Resident Fonts Specifications (optional)
CG Times
[2]
Single Byte SA0 scalable
CG Times Italic
[2]
Single Byte SA1 scalable
CG Times Bold
[2]
Single Byte SA2 scalable
CG Times Bold
[2]

Italic
Single Byte SA3 scalable
Gothic B Kanji Double Byte (Binary) U40 scalable
Gothic B Kanji Double Byte (Hex ASCII) u40 scalable
GB Simplified
Chinese
Double Byte (Binary) UC0 scalable
GB Simplified
Chinese
Double Byte (Hex ASCII) uC0 scalable
Korean Hangul Double Byte (Binary) UH0 scalable
Korean Hangul Double Byte (Hex ASCII) uH0 scalable
Font 9 Scalable Downloaded Fonts
User-downloaded
typeface
Single Byte (Binary)
S50 - S5z...,
S90 - S9z
scalable
User-downloaded
typeface
Double Byte (Binary)
U50...,U5z...,
U90...U9z
scalable
User-downloaded
typeface
Double Byte (Hex ASCII)
u50...,u5z...,
u90...u9z
scalable

[1]
I-4208 Standard font
[2]
All Printers except Ex2 and E-Class

Table H-1: Font 9 Specifications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 251



Appendi x I


Sy mbol Set s and Char act er Maps


Symbol Set Selection

Scalable fonts are mapped through a symbol set sometimes referred to as a “code page”.
This mapping allows the host application to select a variety of characters to match the
application. For example in the code page (CP), character code 0xE4 causes character to
be printed. In CP E7, the character code 0xE4 causes to be printed. Each of the CPs allows
the host application to “emulate” a character set for their application. Datamax-O’Neil
printers that support scalable fonts contain either a standard or an enhanced group of CPs
as defined below. The CP (symbol set) is selected using a DPL Command, <STX>ySxx, where
xx is the two letter CP Identifier.

E

In the following table, the checkmark symbol ( ) is used to indicate a full compliment of
characters, while “Part” indicates a partial compliment of characters and “X” indicates an
absence of characters for the given code page.

Single Byte Code Pages
Font Format Code Page
Identifier
Intellifont
[1]
MicroType
[2]

Datamax
HP
(PCL)
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
True
Type
Description
AR 8V X X
[1]
Arabic-8
CP 3R Part Part
[1]
PC Cyrillic
D1 11L X X X X ITC Zapf Dingbats/100
D2 12L X X X X ITC Zapf Dingbats/200
D3 13L X X X X ITC Zapf Dingbats/300
DN 0D Part Part Part Part
ISO 60 Danish /
Norwegian
DS 10L X X X X PS ITC Zapf Dingbats
DT 7J DeskTop
E1 0N ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
E2 2N Part ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
E5 5N ISO 8859/9 Latin 5

(continued)
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps

252 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Single Byte Code Pages
Font Format Code Page
Identifier
Intellifont
[1]
MicroType
[2]

Datamax
HP
(PCL)
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
True
Type
Description
E6 6N Part ISO 8859/10 Latin 6
E7 12N Part X X
ISO 8859/7
Latin/Greek
E9 9N X X
[1]

[1]

[1]
ISO 8859/15 Latin 9
EG 12N Part Part
[1]

ISO 8859/7
Latin/Greek
EH 7H Part Part
[1]

ISO 8859/8
Latin/Hebrew
ER 10N Part Part
[1]

ISO 8859/5
Latin/Cyrillic
FR 1F Part Part Part Part ISO 69: French
G8 8G Part Part
[1]
Greek-8
GK 12G Part Part
[1]
PC-8 Greek
GR 1G Part Part Part Part ISO 21: German
H0 0H Part Part
[1]
Hebrew-7
H8 8H Part Part
[1]
Hebrew-8
IT 0I ISO 15: Italian
L$
[1]
14L X X
HP4000 ITC Zapf
Dingbats
LG 1U Legal
M8 8M Math-8
MC

12J
[3]

[3]
Macintosh
MS 5M
[3]

[3]
PS Math
P9
[1]
13U X X
[3]

[3]
PC-858 Multilingual
PB 6J Part Part Part Part Microsoft Publishing
PC 10U PC-8, Code Page 437
PD 11U
PC-8 D/N, Code Page
437N
PE 17U Part PC-852 Latin 2
PG 10G Part Part
[1]
PC-851 Latin/Greek


(continued)
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 253

Font Format Code Page
Identifier
Intellifont
[1]
MicroType
[2]

Datamax
HP
(PCL)
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
True
Type
Description
PH 15H
[1]
PC-862 Latin/Hebrew
PI 15U Part Part Part Part Pi Font
PM 12U
[3]

[3]

[3]
PC-850 Multilingual
PR 10V PC-864 Latin/Arabic
PT 9T
PC-8 TK, Code Page
437T
PU 9J PC-1004
PV 26U Part PC-775 Baltic
PX 12U X X PTXT3000
PY 3Y X X X X
[1]

Non-UGL, Generic Pi
Font
R8 8U Roman-8
R9
[1]
4U X X
[3]

[3]
Roman-9
SP 2S ISO 17: Spanish
SW 0S ISO 11: Swedish
SY 19M X X X X Symbol
TK 8T X X Turkish-8
TS 10J PS Text
UK 1E ISO 4: United Kingdom
US 0U ISO 6: ASCII
U8 - X X UTF8
VI 13J Ventura International
VM 6M
[1]
Ventura Math
VU 14J Part Part Part Part Ventura US
W1
[3]
19U Part Windows 3.1 Latin 1
WA 9V Part
[1]
Windows Latin/Arabic

(continued)
Appendix I – Symbol Sets and Character Maps

254 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Font Format Code Page
Identifier
Intellifont
[1]
MicroType
[2]

Datamax
HP
(PCL)
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
CG
Triumvirate
CG
Times
True
Type
Description
WD 579L X X X X Wingdings
WE
[3]
9E Part Windows 3.1 Latin 2
WG
[3]
9G Part Part
[1]
Windows Latin/Greek
WL
[3]
19L Part
Windows 3.1 Baltic
(Latv, Lith)
WN 9U X X Windows
WO 9U
[3]

[3]

[3]
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
WR
[3]
9R Part
[3]

[1]
Windows Latin/Cyrillic
WT
[3]
5T Windows 3.1 Latin 5

[1]
Supported in the EX2 model.
[2]
Supported in the A-Class, H-Class, I-Class, and EX2 models.
[3]
Contains the Euro currency symbol ( ).

Table I-1: Single Byte Code Pages


Doubl e- By t e Sy mbol s, Chi nese, Kanj i , and Kor ean

Character Map Selection

Double byte scalable fonts are mapped through a “character map”. This mapping allows the
host application to select a variety of characters to match the application. Each of the code
pages allows the host application to emulate a character set for the application.

Double Byte Character Map
Character
Map ID
TrueType
Font
Description
B5 BIG 5 (Taiwan) Encoded
*

EU EUC (Extended UNIX Code)
GB Government Bureau Industry Standard; Chinese (PRC); default
JS JIS (Japanese Industry Standard); default
SJ Shift JIS
UC Unicode (including Korean)
*Unavailable for the EX2.
Table I-2: Double Byte Character Map

The double-byte symbol set is selected using <STX>yUxx command. The single-byte symbol
set is selected using the same command, <STX>ySxx. Each affects an independent database
selection and has no impact on the other.

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 255

Appendi x J


Gener al Pur pose I npu t Out p ut ( GPI O) Por t Appl i cat i on s

GPIO-equipped printers can interface with most external controlling devices. Operational
preferences can be stored for subsequent power-ups using the printer menu, or via <STX>Kc
commands. Functions and connections vary, as discussed below.

E

When a label is ready to print but awaiting a Start of Print signal, the prompt differs
slightly depending upon equipment:
• Non-Display Models – The STOP LED will flash.
• Display-Equipped Models – The display will indicate WAITING FOR SIGNAL.



Always wear a wrist strap and follow ESD prevention measures when handling the GPIO
or Applicator Interface Card. For specification information, reference the printer’s
Maintenance Manual.


Appl i cat or I nt er f ace Car d ( Ty pe 1)

The Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) is equipped with a GPIO Port, an Auxiliary (Serial B)
Port and two LEDs as detailed below.

9
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Auxiliary Port, J1
Green and Yellow LEDs
GPIO Port, J2
Applicator Interface Card
Connector
Pin-Outs


Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Location and Connector Pin Outs
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
256 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Jumper Locations



The GPIO Port allows printer integration. Functions can be configured using the menu
system or via <STX>Kc commands. All configuration settings are saved in non-volatile
memory. Jumper settings are critical:

• Jumper settings allow internal or external power distribution to the applicator circuitry.

• Jumper settings allow + 5 or +24 VDC output signal levels.





Failure to configure the card for the device(s) you are connecting may result in damage
to the printer and/or the applicator.



The table below details the GPIO Port functions, and configurable settings:

Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 257

Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) GPIO Port (J2) Overview
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
Signal
Direction
Active
Setting
Jumper
Placement
Function /
Description
Ground Ground JMP 7 “On”
Printer chassis ground is
used
1


Ground
(Configurable)



Open Open JMP 7 “Off”
Ground return must be
supplied
Output +5 VDC JMP 8 “On”
Printer +5 VDC is used
(.5 amp max.)
2

+5 VDC
(Configurable)

Open Open JMP 8 “Off” +5 VDC must be supplied
3
Start Of
Print
[3]

Input Programmable


4
Slew
Label


Input Programmable
5
Pause
Toggle
Input Low
6 Reprint
[2]
Input Low
7
+24 VDC
(1.0 amp
max.)
Output +24 VDC
8 Ground Ground Ground
N/A N/A
9
Ribbon
Low
Output Programmable


10
Service
Required
[1]

Output Low
11
End Of
Print
Output Programmable


12
Media
Out
Output Low
13
Ribbon
Out
Output Low
14
Data Ready
(DRDY)
Output Low
JMP 9:

Pins 1 & 2
= +5 VDC



– OR –

Pins 2 & 3 =
+24 VDC


When inactive, all output
pins will be pulled up to
the voltage determined
by this jumper setting.

Failure to
configure the card
for the device(s) you
are connecting may
result in damage to
the printer and/or
the applicator.
15 Spare

Output N/A N/A N/A
[1]
Evoked by occurrences listed under “Fault Messages” in the A-Class Operator’s Manual.


[2]
Reprints the last label exactly, with no increment or time stamp changes; use it for error
conditions. Always keeping this signal LOW will result in non-stop printing.
[3]
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” is displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999
while always keeping this signal “On” will cause non-stop label printing, except in single label mode
(see Imaging Mode, Section 4.2.5 of the A-Class Operator’s Manual), which will cause the printer to
stop between labels.

Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
258 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
The Start of Print Circuit depends upon the applicator system’s requirements:



• For di r ect i nput s –

Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply
the devices interfacing to the GPIO inputs (as
shown, right).



J2 - GPIO PORT
3
4
5
6
1
Start of Print
Slew Label
Pause Toggle
Reprint
Ground




• For i sol at ed i nput s –

Supply an external +5 VDC and ground,
remove JMP 7 and JMP 8 from the Applicator
Interface Card and follow the schematic shown
right.


3
4
5
6
2
Start of Print
Slew Label
Pause Toggle
Reprint
Vcc
Vcc = 5 VDC External Power Source
Ground
J2 -GPIO PORT



The Auxiliary Port (J1) is an RS-232 interface. Serial data transfer settings (such as baud
rate, word length, and parity) can be made using <STX>KcSP commands. These settings
must match the device that you are connecting. Jumpers JMP 1 – JMP 4 should be in
installed.

Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Auxiliary Data Port
Pin Number(s) Signal
1 +5 VDC (0.5 Amp )
2 RX
3 TX
4 DTR
5 Ground
6 & 9 N/C
7 RTS
8 CTS


Indicators: The LEDs provide a visual indication of printer/applicator signal activity:

Applicator Interface Card (Type 1) Indicators
• Yellow LED Flash at power-up and when the outputs change state.
• Green LED Flash at power-up and when the inputs change state.
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 259
Appl i cat or I nt er f ace Car d ( Ty pe 2)

The Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) has two GPIO Ports, two Auxiliary Ports (Serial C &
D) and two indicator LEDs as detailed below.


J2
J1
9
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
J4
1
6
11
5
4
3
2
9
8
7
10
15
14
13
12
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
1
J3


Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) Port Pin Out



Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) Hardware Jumper Locations
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
260 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
GPI/O A (J1)

Four dedicated inputs are available for control of printer functions. These inputs require
no external pull-ups, are designed to interface to open-collector outputs and accept totem
pole outputs from +4.5 to + 26 VDC. Optical isolators are available to provide isolation. Two
print control circuit examples are given below.


• For di r ect i nput s –

Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply
the devices interfacing to the GPI/O A inputs
(as shown, right).



GPI/O A - J1
3
4
5
6
1
Start of Print
Slew Label
Toggle/Pause
Reprint
Ground




• For i sol at ed i nput s –

To provide galvanic isolation for the GPI/O A
inputs, remove jumper JMP 9 then supply an
external +5VDC source voltage to Pin 2, and
remove jumper JMP 8 then supply an external
Ground to Pin 1 (as shown, right).


3
4
5
6
2
Start of Print
Slew Label
Toggle/Pause
Reprint
Vcc
+5 VDC External Source
GPI/O A - J1
1 Ground



Seven dedicated outputs are available for control, warning, and error functions. These
open-collector outputs are slew-limited. Optional 10K ohm pull-up resistors, tied to a
common point for use at either +5 or +24 VDC, are available via jumper JMP 1.

E

To avoid damage if external pull-up resistors are used (that is, without jumper JMP1
installed), ensure that the external voltage does not exceed +30VDC.


The table below details the GPI/O A pin assignments, settings and functions:
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 261


Failure to properly configure the GPIO Port can result in damage to the printer and / or connected devices.

Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) GPI/O Port A Overview
Pin
Number
Signal Name
Signal
Direction
[1]

Jumper Position Function / Description
Installed Printer chassis is used.
1

Ground

JMP 8
Removed Ground must be supplied.
Installed
Printer +5VDC is used (.5 amp maximum)
E
Drawing more than .5 amps can cause unreliable printer operation.

2 +5 VDC
N/A
JMP 9
Removed +5VDC must be supplied.
3
Start Of Print
[2]

Programmable


4 Slew Label Programmable


5
Toggle /
Pause
The printer pauses when the signal is taken LOW.
6 Reprint
Input
The last label is reprinted exactly, with no increment or time stamp
changes; recommended for use during error conditions. Keeping this
signal LOW results in non-stop printing.
7 +24 VDC Printer +24 VDC (1.5 amp maximum)
8 Ground
N/A
N/A N/A
Printer chassis.
9 Ribbon Low Programmable
[1]
. Signifies a RIBBON LOW DIAMETER warning.
10
Service
Required
Evoked by occurrences listed under “Fault Messages.”
[1]
Active LOW.
11 End Of Print Programmable
[1]
. Signifies the End of Print (EOP) process.
12 Media Out Evoked during an Out of Stock condition. Active LOW.
13 Ribbon Out Evoked during an Out of Ribbon condition. Active LOW.
14 Data Ready
Evoked when a label is waiting to be printed. Then after the printer
receives the Start of Print signal, printing will begin. For synchronization
with the print cycle, the End Of Print signal indicates the completion of
the print process. Active LOW.
15 Option Fault
Output JMP 1
When inactive, outputs will
be pulled up to a voltage
determined by this jumper
setting, where:

• Pins 1 – 2 = +5VDC;
• Pins 2 – 3 = +24VDC; or,
• None = A common external
voltage (not to exceed
+30VDC) via external pull-
ups (providing a 20K ohm
feedback path through any
two outputs).
Evoked during a Linear Scanner or RFID fault condition. Active LOW.
[1]
Signal directions are given relative to the printer.
[2]
If active with no current print job, “WAITING FOR DATA” will be displayed. Specifying a quantity of 9999 while keeping this signal “On” will cause non-stop
label printing, except in single label “Imaging Mode”, which will cause the printer to stop between labels.

Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 262
GPI/O B (J2)
Six unassigned inputs are designed to interface to open-collector outputs. These inputs
require no external pull-ups and blocking diodes allow the use of totem pole outputs from
+4.5 to + 26 VDC. Optical isolators are available to provide isolation. Two print control
interface circuit examples are given below.




• For di r ect i nput s –

Use the printer’s +5VDC and Ground to supply
the devices interfacing to the GPI/O B inputs
(as shown, right).




GPI/O B - J2
8
3
12
7
Input 1
Ground
13
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
6
Input 5
Input 6 2










• For el ect r i cal l y- i sol at ed i nput s –

To provide galvanic isolation for the GPI/O B
inputs, remove jumper JMP 11 then supply an
external +5VDC source voltage to Pin 1, and
remove jumper JMP 10 then supply an
external Ground to Pin 6 (as shown, right).




1 Vcc
+5 VDC External Source
GPI/O B - J2
8
3
12
7
Input 1 13
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Input 5
Input 6 2
Ground 6




Six unassigned outputs are programmable and slew-limited. Optional 10K ohm pull-up
resistors, one for each of the output lines, can be used at either +5 or +24 VDC via jumpers
JMP 2 – 7.

E

To avoid damage if external pull-up resistors are used (that is, when Jumpers JMP 2 - 7 are
not installed), ensure that the external voltage does not exceed +30VDC.

The table below details the GPI/O B pin assignments, settings and functions:
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 263


Failure to properly configure the GPIO Port can result in damage to the printer and / or connected devices.

Applicator Interface Card (Type 2) GPI/O Port B Overview
Pin Number
Signal Name /
Direction
[1]

Jumper Position Function / Description
Installed
Printer +5VDC is used (.5 amp maximum).
E
Drawing more than .5 amps can cause unreliable printer operation.

1 +5 VDC JMP 11
Removed +5VDC must be supplied.
2 Input 6 N/A N/A Programmed input function.
3 Input 3 N/A N/A Programmed input function.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2 Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3 Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC. 4 Output 6 JMP 7
Removed An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2 Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3 Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC. 5 Output 3 JMP 4
Removed An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed Printer chassis is used.
6 Ground JMP 10
Removed Ground must be supplied.
7 Input 5 N/A N/A Programmed input function.
8 Input 2 N/A N/A Programmed input function.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2 Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3 Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC. 9 Output 5 JMP 6
Removed An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2 Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3 Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC. 10 Output 2 JMP 3
Removed An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
11 +24 VDC N/A N/A Printer +24 VDC (1.5 amp maximum).
12 Input 4 N/A N/A Programmed input function.
13 Input 1 N/A N/A Programmed input function.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2 Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3 Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC. 14 Output 4 JMP 5
Removed An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
Installed: Pins 1 – 2 Programmed output function pulled-up to +5VDC.
Installed: Pins 2 – 3 Programmed output function pulled-up to +24VDC. 15 Output 1 JMP 2
Removed An external voltage via external pull-ups determine this level, not exceed +30VDC.
[1]
Signal directions are given relative to the printer.
Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 264
COM C (J4)
Serial Port C functions as an RS-232 interface or as a dedicated device interface, according
to jumper setting configurations indicated below:

COM C Jumper Setting Functions
Position
Function
JMP 12 JMP 13 JMP 14 JMP 15
RS-232 Communications On On On On
RFID Off On On On
Linear Scanner On Off On On
Remote Display On On Off On

E

Jumper settings will override most printer menu settings; however, if COM C jumpers
are set for RS-232 communications with both the RFID and Linear Scanner options
menu-enabled the printer will automatically assign the Linear Scanner to COM C (J4).



COM D (J3)
Serial Port D is an RS-232 communications interface.



Indicators:

Real-time incoming (IN) and outgoing (OUT) signal activity can be observed via LEDs on the
card bracket. Sampled every millisecond, color change occurs with a corresponding change
of signal state.

E

Unused, non-connected inputs and outputs will have an indeterminate state and assume a
value of 1 or 0.

Signal Out
Signal In

Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 265
I - Cl ass GPI O

I-Class GPIO functions are detailed in the table below:

I-Class GPIO Overview
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
Signal
State
Signal
Direction*
Description
1 Vcc +5 VDC Output +5 VDC power supply.
2
Ribbon
Fault
Low Output
Goes low when a ribbon out condition is
detected.
3
Paper
Fault
Low Output
Goes low when an out of stock condition is
detected.
4
Printer
Fault
Low Output Goes low when any printer fault is detected.
5
Ribbon
Low
Programmable Output
Goes high (or low) when a low ribbon supply
is detected.
6
End of
Print
Programmable Output
Goes high (or low) when printing is
complete, typically monitored to initiate the
next Start of Print sequence.
7
Backup
Label
Programmable Input
When received, will position a presented
label for printing, provided that the
programmed present distance is greater
than zero.
8
Start of
Print Signal
(SOP)
Programmable Input
When received, begins printing. (If the
printer awaits the SOP signal, WAITING FOR
SIGNAL will be displayed).
9
Signal
Ground
Ground N/A Ground return.

GPIO pin configuration (illustrated right), as viewed from the
rear of the printer:



I-Class Control Circuit
Connections for an external Start of Print / Backup Label control
can be made (1) directly to Pin 8 / 7 using a TTL-level input or
(2) with an interface circuit similar to the one shown right. For
additional interfacing requirements; see the table above.



Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
266 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
M- Cl ass I I GPI O

MII GPIO functions are detailed in the table below:


MII GPIO Overview
Pin
Number
Signal
Name
Signal
State
Signal
Direction*
Description
1 Vcc +5 VDC Output Printer: Max +5 VDC, 100mA
2
Printer
Fault
Low Output
Goes low upon printer detection of a fault
condition. Max +5 VDC, 100mA
3 Spare Reserved Input
Must be pulled high with 1k Ohm resistor
(see sample SOP circuit, below).
4
Start of
Print
(SOP)
Programmable Input
When active, will begin print. Recommend
only setting this signal to ACTIVE LOW.
When ready to print a label, the applicator
should hold this signal low for at least 50ms
– or until EOP goes not active. See sample
SOP circuit, below. Max +3.27 VDC, +/-
5mA
5
End of
Print
(EOP)
Programmable Output
Signifies the end of the print process. Can
be monitored to initiate next Start of Print
sequence. Minimum signal time 30ms. Max
+5 VDC, 100mA
6 & 8
Signal
Ground
Ground N/A Ground
7 +24 VDC 500mA Output Printer: Max +24 VDC, 500mA
[1]
Given relative to the printer.
[2]
Port operation is configuration dependent: Disable all unused optional functions (e.g., Present Sensor
or Cutter) and set GPIO to “YES” (or on display-equipped models, to APPLICATOR). Use the
Configuration Set command (<STX>Kc); or program the selections for non-display models via the
“Printer Setup Menu List” and for display-equipped models via the menu.


The GPIO signals can be accessed via the front Option Port connector (Molex, P/N 44300-
800), or via the Main PCB J6 connector (AMP, P/N 640456-8), where the pin-outs (as
viewed when facing the printer) are as follows:

Option Port Main PCB (J6)


8 6 4 2
7 5 3 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 267

MII Sample SOP Circuit
Pin 3 should be pulled to +5VDC. In additional,
connections for the external Start of Print control can
either be directly made to Pin 4 of the Option Port (or
Main PCB connector) using a TTL-level input, or via an
interface circuit (similar to the one shown). For more
information, see the table below.

1
8
Vcc
Gnd
GPIO Connector Pin Number
3 Spare
4 SOP
1K O
1K O


Appendix J – General Purpose Input Output Port Applications
268 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 269

Appendi x K



E

The tables in this section use the following standards: X = Supported; ND = Non-Display




Max i mu m Fi el d & Char act er Val ues


Printer Maximum Format Fields
[1]
Total Characters All Fields
I-4206 & I-4208 500
All others 700
32768
[1]
When the product of the number of fields and characters in each field exceeds the available printer memory (the limiting factor), portions
of the label may not print.
Table K-1: Maximum Label Format Fields & Characters






Appendix K –Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations

270 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Pr i nt Resol u t i on s and Max i mu m Wi d t h & Recor d Col u mn Val ues
Print Resolution Dot Dimensions (nominal) Maximum Print Width Maximum “gggg” Value
Model
DPI DPMM Inches Millimeters Dots Millimeters Inch Metric
A-4212 203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 832 104.1 410 1041
A-4310 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1248 105.7 416 1057
A-4408 406 16.0 .0013 x .0018 .03 x .05 1664 104.1 410 1041
A-4606 600 23.6 .0008 x .0015 .02 x .04 2496 105.7 416 1057
A-6212 203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 1344 168.1 662 1680
A-6310 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1920 162.6 640 1626
EX2 203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 832 104.1 410 1041
E-4205e 203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 864 108.0 425 1080
E-4304e 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1248 105.7 416 1046
MP Compact MarkII 203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 864 108.0 425 1080
MP Compact MarkII 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1248 105.7 416 1046
H-4212 & H-4212X 203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 832 104.1 410 1041
H-4310 & H-4310X 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1248 105.7 416 1046
H-4408 406 16.0 .0013 x .0018 .03 x .05 1664 104.1 410 1041
H-4606 & H-4606X 600 23.6 .0008 x .0015 .02 x .04 2496 105.7 416 1057
H-6210 & H-6212X 203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 1344 168.1 662 1680
H-6308 & H-6310X 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1920 162.6 640 1626
H-8308X 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 2560 216.7 853 2167
I-4206, I-4208,
I-4210 & I-4212
203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 832 104.1 410 1041
I-4308 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1248 105.7 416 1046
I-4406 406 16.0 .0013 x .0018 .03 x .05 1664 104.1 410 1041
I-4604 600 23.6 .0008 x .0015 .02 x .04 2496 105.7 416 1057
M-Class 4206 &
4210 Mark II
203 8.0 .0043 x .0052 .11 x .13 864 108.0 425 1080
M-Class 4308 Mark II 300 11.8 .0027 x .0043 .07 x .11 1248 105.7 416 1046
Table K-2: Print Widths, Resolutions, and Record Column Field Values
Appendix K – Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 271
Col umn, Pr esen t , & Row Adj ust Fi ne Tune Range

Printer
Resolution (DPI)
Column Adjust Fine Tune
Parameter Range (+/– dots)
Row & Present Adjust Fine Tune
Parameter Range (+/– dots)
203 -100 – 100 dots -100 – 2030 dots
300 -150 – 150 dots -150 – 3000 dots
400 -200 – 200 dots -200 – 4060 dots
600 -300 – 300 dots -300 – 6000 dots
Table K-3: Adjust Range per Print Resolution





Appendix K –Maximum Row, Column, & Character Values; Print Resolutions & Widths; and, Module Identifiers & Allocations

272 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Memor y Modul e I dent i f i er s an d Al l ocat i on s
Printer
M
o
d
u
l
e

I
D

Description
A
-
C
l
a
s
s

M
P

C
o
m
p
a
c
t

I
I
E
X
2


E
-
C
l
a
s
s

I
-
C
l
a
s
s

H
-
C
l
a
s
s

M
-
4
2
0
6


M
a
r
k

I
I

M
-
4
2
1
0

&

4
3
0
8


M
a
r
k

I
I

A DRAM (512 KB - default size)

X X
B
[1]
Flash (512 KB available to user)



X X
C Default, as assigned by <STX>X X
X
X X X X X X
DRAM (512 KB - default size), configurable.

X X
[6]

D

DRAM (default 1MB), configurable. X
X
X X X X
SDIO X
[8]


X
F
4 MB Flash option (as equipped)
[4]


X
256 KB Flash, Main CCA
[2]


X X
512 KB Flash, Main CCA, configurable up to 6.5 MB with Flash option
[3, 4]
X


≈ 1.0 MB Flash, Main CCA
[4, 5]

X
X X
G


≈ 4.0 MB Flash, Main CCA
[4, 5]


X
[7]
X
[7]
X X
[7]
X
H USB Host Ports (as equipped) X
[8]


X X
I USB Host Ports (as equipped) X
[8]


X X
J 64 MB option (as equipped)

X
X ILPC Module, configurable 256 KB to 4 MB (as equipped). X
[3,4]


X
[5]
X
[5]


X
[5]
X
[5]
X
[5]

64 KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected

X
Y

128 KB Flash – Menu / EFIGS – protected X
X
[5]

X
[5]
X
[5]
X
[5]
X
[5]
X
[5]

Z
[4]
4 MB Flash – Option ILPC – protected

X
[1]
≈100,000 writes for semi-or-permanent data storage, dependent upon options and available memory; see the configuration label or <STX>KC.
[2]
Not available for the I-4206 and I-4208.
[3]
Modules G and X are partitioned to equal the sum of the total space available.
[4]
Configurable; see <STX>KcMCC.
[5]
Modules X and Y are factory allocated and locked; memory is shared with Module G.
[6]
Reduced to 128KB when MCL equipped.
[7]
Size dependant on main board flash and options installed, up to 4MB.
[8]
Optional for A-Class Mark II models only.

Table K-4: Memory Module Identifiers and Default Memory Allocations

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 273


Appendi x L


Speed Ranges

Speed Value:
Printer Speed Command*
Inches per Second Millimeters per Second
A 1.0 25
B 1.5 38
C 2.0 51
D 2.5 63
E 3.0 76
F 3.5 89
G 4.0 102
H 4.5 114
I 5.0 127
J 5.5 140
K 6.0 152
L 6.5 165
M 7.0 178
N 7.5 191
O 8.0 203
P 8.5 216
Q 9.0 227
R 9.5 241
S 10.0 254
T 10.5 267
U 11.0 279
V 11.5 292
W 12.0 305
X 13.0 330
Y 14.0 356
Z 15.0 381
a 16.0 406
b 17.0 432
c 18.0 457
d 19.0 483
e 20.0 508
*Applicable speed values are printer dependent. See Table L-2, below.

Table L-1: Speed Command Values
Appendix L – Speed Ranges

274 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Print Speed Feed Speed Reverse Speed Slew Speed
Model
Range Default Range Default Range Default Range Default
A-4212 C – W O C – W O C – I G C – a O
A-4310 C – S O C – W O C – I G C – a O
A-4408 C – O K C – S K C – I G C – a K
A-4606 C – K G C – O G C – I G C – a G
A-6212 C – W O C – W O C – I G C – Y O
A-6310 C – S O C – W O C – I G C – Y O
EX2 A – G G A – G G A – E C N/A N/A
E-4205e A - I G A - I G C C N/A N/A
E-4304e A – G E A – G G C C N/A N/A
H-4212 &
H-4212X
C – W O C – W O C – G G C – a O
H-4310 &
H-4310X
C – S O C – W O C – G G C – a O
H-4408 C – O K C – S K C – G G C – a K
H-4606 &
H-4606X
C – K G C – O G C – G G C – a G
H-6210 C – S K C – W K C – G G C – W K
H-6212X C – W O C – W O C – G G C – Y O
H-6308 C – O K C – S K C – G G C – S K
H-6310X C – S O C – W O C – G G C – Y O
H-8308X C – O K C – S K C – G G C – W K
I-4206 C – K K C – O K C – G G C – K K
I-4208 C – O O C – O O C – G G C – O O
I-4210 C – S O C – S O C – G G C – W O
I-4212 C – W O C – W O C – G G C – W O
I-4308 C – O K C – O K C – G G C – O K
I-4406 C – K I C – K I C – G G C – K I
I-4604 C – G E C – G E C – G G C – G E
4206 Mark
II
C – K K C – K K C – G G C – K K
4210 Mark
II
C – S O C – S O C – G G C – S O
4308
Mark II
C – O K C – O K C – G G C – O K
MP
Compact II
A - I G A - I G C C N/A N/A

Table L-2: Speed Ranges and Defaults

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 275
Appendi x M


Command s by Funct i on

Commands by Function
Function Command
Backup speed pa
Batch quantity request <SOH>E
Cancel <SOH>C
Character bitmapped data <ESC>(snnnWdata
Character code <ESC>*cnnnE
Character dump mode <STX>P
Column offset amount Cnnnn
Configuration label and dot pattern print <STX>Z
Configuration Set (See Table 5-1 for individual listings) <STX>Kc
Continuous paper length <STX>cnnnn
Count by ^nn
Cut <STX>o
Cut by :nnnn
Cut by cnn
Decrement alphanumerically <fii
Decrement numerically - fii
DIP switch, host controlled settings <STX>Vn
Dot size height and width Dwh
Edge sensor enable <STX>e
Feed rate <STX>Sa
Feedback characters enable <STX>a
Field data line terminator Tnn
File delete from module <STX>xmfname
Firmware version request <STX>v
Font descriptor <ESC>)snnnW
Font ID number <ESC>*cnnnD
Form feed <STX>F
Set Present Distance <STX>Kfnnnn
Format attribute An
Graphics image download <STX>Iabfname
c
r

Heat setting Hnn
Inches <STX>n
Increment alphanumerically >fii
Increment numerically +fii
Label format field replacement <STX>Unnstring
Label formatting start <STX>L
Label length maximum <STX>Mnnnn

(continued)
Appendix M – Commands By Function

276 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Function Command
Memory query <STX>KQ
Memory query (new format) <STX>Kq
Metric <STX>m
Metric m
Mirror M
Module clear <STX>qm
Module, compress <STX>zm
Module, directory request <STX>Wa
Module, set default <STX>Xm
Module, FLASH memory Test <STX>w
Module, RAM memory Test <STX>t
Modules, clear all <STX>Q
Pause for each label <STX>J
Pause toggle <SOH>B
Pause, controlled <STX>p
Place data in global register G
Print last label format <STX>G
Print speed Pa
Print time and date <STX>Tstring
Print head dot pattern test label <STX>T
Quantity labels printed <STX>Ennnn
Quantity of labels Qnnnn
Recall global data and place in field <STX>Sa
Recall stored label rname
Reflective sensor select <STX>r
Replacement field tag U
Reset <SOH>#
Resettable counters reset <STX>Kr
Ribbon saver <STX>Rx
Row offset amount Rnnnn
RS-232 port test <STX>k
Scalable font download <STX>imtaabbb...b
c
r
xxxxxxxxfff...f
Sensor values request <STX>Y
Feed speed Sa
Status ASCII string request <SOH>A
Status byte request <SOH>F
Store label in module & terminate formatting smname
Symbol set select <STX>ySaa
Symbol set select ySaa
Terminate formatting - print label format E
Terminate label formatting, do not print label X
Time and date request <STX>B
Time and date set <STX>AwMMddyearhhmmjjj
Update system database with current database <SOH>U
Zero (Ø) conversion to “0” z
Table M-1: Commands Listed by Function

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 277

Appendi x N


I mage Loadi ng

The printer will accept four types of image files: .BMP, .IMG, .PCX and a special Datamax 7-
bit ASCII file (as defined in this section). Use of the Datamax 7-bit ASCII format will require
at least twice as much data transmission time as the other formats, (see <STX>I). The
Datamax ASCII image file format is made up of a set of records with identical formats, each
representing a dot row of the image; a terminator follows the last of these records.

Dot-row record




Dot-row record
Terminator


Each dot-row record has the following format:

Syntax:
80nndd...d<CR>

nn
- Is the number of character pairs in dd...d, represented in
ASCII hex.

Where:
dd…d
- Is dot data, character pairs, ASCII hex, 00-FF.


Duplicate records may be encoded using a repeat data record, following the data record that
needs duplicating. The repeat data record format is:

Syntax:
0000FFnn<CR>

Where:
nn
- Is the number of duplicates, ASCII hex, 00-FF.


The terminator, last record, at the image download is: FFFF<CR>





Appendix N – Image Loading

278 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
^BqA(CR)
^BIAAFLOGO(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000007FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF8000C0003FFFFE000000FFFFE0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC00000000FFC0003FFFFC001FC0001FC0003FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000007FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000003FC0001FFFFC001FC0001FC0001FFFFC0018000FFC001FF800040001FFFFE0000003FFFC0001FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFC000000000FC0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FF800060001FFFFE0000003FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000007E0001FFFFC001FE0001FE0001FFFFC00180007FC000FFC00060000FFFFE0000001FFFC0003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000003E0000FFFFC001FE0000FE0000FFFFC00180007FC0007FC00020000FFFFE0000001FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000001E0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE0010000FFF80003FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000F0000FFFFC001FE0000FF0000FFFFC001C0007FC0007FC00030000FFFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFE0000000000700007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0007FC0003FC000380007FFFE00180007FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001C0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000380007FFFC001FF0000FF80007FFFC001C0003FC0003FE000380007FFFE001E0003FF80007FFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF0000000000180003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001C0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001E0001FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00000000001C0003FFFC001FF00007FC0003FFFC001E0003FC0001FE0001C0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF00007C00000C0003FFFC001FF00007FE0003FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0003FFFE001F0000FF0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007F80000E0001FFFC001FF80007FE0001FFFC001E0003FC0000FF0001E0001FFFE001F80007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FC0000E00000000001FF80007FE00000000001E0001FC0000FF0001E00000000001FC0007F0000FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80007FE0000600000000001FF80003FF00000000001E0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FC0003F0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F0000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFF80003FF0000700000000001FF80003FF00000000001F0001FC00007F8000F00000000001FE0001E0001FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFC0001FFC0003C0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFE00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007E0000000001FFF00000003FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0001FFC0001E0000000001FFE0001FFE0000000001F8000FC00000FC0007F0000000001FFF00000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001F8000FC000007C0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFC0001F0000000001FFE0000FFF0000000001FC0007C000007E0003F0000000001FFF80000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0001F0001FFC001FFE0000FFF8001FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFC0000007FFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFE0000FFE0000F8001FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF0000FFF8000FFC001FC0007C000003E0003F8000FFE001FFFE000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF0000FFE0000F8000FFC001FFF00007FFC000FFC001FC0007C000001F0001FC000FFE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FE0000FC000FFC001FFF00007FFC0007FC001FE0007C002001F0001FC0007FE001FFFF000000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FC0007FC001FFF00007FFE0007FC001FE0003C002001F0001FE0007FE001FFFF800000FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF00007FF0000FE0007FC001FFF80007FFE0007FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0007FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0007FC001FFF80007FFE0003FC001FE0003C003000F0001FE0003FE001FFFFC00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80007FF00007E0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00300078001FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF00007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0003FC001FE0003C00380078000FF0003FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0003FC001FFF80003FFF0001FC001FF0003C00380078000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFF80003FF80007F0001FC001FFF80003FFF8001FC001FF0001C003C0038000FF8001FE001FFFFE00001FFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFC0000000007FFC000001F80000000000FC000001FFF0000003FFE0000007FFC000001FFFC0003F80007FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFE000000000FFFC000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFE0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFF000000000FFFE000001F80000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FC0003FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFC00000000FFFE000001FC0000000000FE000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFE000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFE00000000FFFE000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF0000007FFF000001FFFC0003FE0001FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFF00000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000007FFF000001FFF80003FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFC0000001FFFF000001FC00000000007F000001FFF8000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF0000FFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFE0000003FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFF8000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF0000007FFFF800001FC00000000007F800001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFF800001FFF80007FF80007FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFF800000FFFFF800001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFC000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFE00001FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFC00001FFF00007FFC0003FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF00007FFFFFC00001FE00000000003FC00001FFFC000003FFFE000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFF8003FFFFFFC00001FE00000000003FE00001FFFC000003FFFF000003FFFE00001FFF00007FFE0001FF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
8030FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF0000(CR)
FFFF(CR)
^BL(CR)
1Y1100000000000LOGO(CR)
E(CR)
Figure N-1: Sample Datamax 7-Bit ASCII File Image


Figure N-2: Sample Label

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 279

Appendi x O


UPC- A and EAN- 13 : Var i abl e Pr i ce/ Wei gh t Bar Codes

The EAN/UPC standard allows for an additional checksum to be generated in the middle of
the bar code based on the data. This is used when the price or weight of an item is
embedded into the bar code data (commonly used in the food industry).

For the printer to generate this checksum, a “V” must be placed in the data stream in the
position the checksum is requested. If the “V” is placed in the 6th position for UPC-A or the
7th position for EAN-13, a checksum will be generated using the next five digits in the data
stream. If the “V” is placed in the 7th position for UPC-A or the 8th position for EAN-13, a
checksum will be generated using the next four digits in the data stream. The checksum is
generated per the EAN/UPC bar code standard.


Examples:

1B110000200020012345V01199

Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the sixth position.


1B1100002000200123456V0150

Prints the UPC-A bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.


1F1100002000200123456V01199

Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the seventh position.


1F11000020002001234567V0150

Prints the EAN-13 bar code with the variable price checksum in the eighth position.
Appendix O – UPC-A and EAN-13 Variable Price / Weight Bar Codes

280 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 281
Appendi x P


I nt er nat i onal Language Pr i nt Capabi l i t y ( I LPC)
Pr ogr ammi ng Ex ampl es

ILPC (if equipped) allows the printing of non-English character sets, available with European
language support (CG TIMES), KANJI language support, Chinese language support
(SIMPLIFIED GB) and Korean Hangul. All of the features are embedded in the printer
resident firmware and accessible through DPL thus eliminating excessive download time of
bitmapped characters. Using scalable technology licensed from AGFA, this firmware allows
users to print smooth characters in sizes from 4pt (1.4 mm) to 999pt (350 mm) in over 40
languages. Consult Appendix I for code page selections. Specific details regarding which
characters are supported in each option can be obtained through Datamax-O’Neil Technical
Support.


I LPC - CG

TI MES

The CG Times is a single-byte scalable font consisting of four typefaces in 38 Western
European languages. This contains over 900 unique characters in each of the four typefaces
from the CG Times typeface family, Normal, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic. Single-byte scalable
fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating Label Formats and Appendix
H for details).

Scalable CG

TIMES Font Code (“eee” field):

SA0 -CG TIMES
SA1 -CG TIMES ITALIC
SA2 - CG TIMES BOLD
SA3 - CG

TIMES BOLD ITALIC

Sample DPL file (Greek) and resulting label:

<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySWG<CR>
1911SA003600020P020P020(WG) Greek Characters from<CR>
1911SA003000085P020P020the internal Symbol Set,<CR>
1911SA002400085P020P020font code SA0<CR>
1911SA001500050P020P020<ca><e1><eb><f9><f3><ef><f1><df><f3><e1><f4><e5><20>
<d3><f5><ed><dd><e4><f1><e9><ef><20><CR>
1911SA001100100P020P020<f4><f9><e3><20><c5><f4><e1><df><f1><f9><e3><20><f4>
<e7><f2><CR>
1911SA000700140P020P020Datamax<CR>
1X1100000100020B365190005005<CR>
Q0002<CR>
E<CR>
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

282 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual



E

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the character sent to the printer.















I LPC - Kanj i

The Kanji Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Kanji Gothic B. In the double byte
format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from the
host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see Generating
Label Formats and Appendix H for details).
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 283

Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KANJI
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font
Name
Binary
Addressing
Hex ASCII
Addressing
Code
Pages
U40 Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
Scalable

EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
u40 Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-B Kanji
Scalable

EUC, JIS,
SJIS, UC
UK1 Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
Scalable

EUC, JIS,
SJIS
uK1 Scalable Resident
HG-Gothic-E Kanji
Scalable

EUC, JIS,
SJIS
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
U50 -
U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined


E

Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.


Sample Kanji Gothic B DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:

<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic B Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911U4002650150P012P012<4D><3F><21><21><21><21><4D><4F><21><21><21><21><4D>
<5F><21><21><21><21><4D><6F><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911U4002600150P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600205P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600250P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>
2911U4002600300P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911U4002330315P012P012<4D><6F><21><21><21><21><4D><5F><21><21><21><21><4D>
<4F><21><21><21><21><4D><3F><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911U4001950165P012P012<4D><3F><00><00><CR>
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

284 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

4911U4001950215P012P012<4D><4F><00><00><CR>
4911U4001950265P012P012<4D><5F><00><00><CR>
4911U4001950315P012P012<4D><6F><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911U4001200020P010P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200050P020P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200080P030P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200110P040P020<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200145P040P030<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200190P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200250P040P050<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4001200320P040P060<21><6F><00><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL MIRROR<CR>
1911U4000250010P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
1911U4000250245P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911U4000250090P040P040<21><6F><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911U4000250390P040P040<4B><30><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>




E

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 285
Sample Kanji Gothic E DPL file (Hex-ASCII addressing) and resulting label:

<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Kanji Gothic E Available<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUJS<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030JIS CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911uK102650150P012P0124D3F212121214D4F212121214D5F212121214D6F<CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911uK102600150P012P0124D3F<CR>
2911uK102600205P012P0124D4F<CR>
2911uK102600250P012P0124D5F<CR>
2911uK102600300P012P0124D6F<CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911uK102330315P012P0124D6F212121214D5F212121214D4F212121214D3F<CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911uK101950165P012P0124D3F<CR>
4911uK101950215P012P0124D4F<CR>
4911uK101950265P012P0124D5F<CR>
4911uK101950315P012P0124D6F<CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING JIS CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911uK101200020P010P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200050P020P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200080P030P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200110P040P020216F<CR>
1911uK101200145P040P030216F<CR>
1911uK101200190P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK101200250P040P050216F<CR>
1911uK101200320P040P060216F<CR>
112200000050010NORMAL INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL MIRROR<CR>
1911uK100250010P040P040216F<CR>
1911uK100250245P040P0404B30<CR>
A5<CR>
1911uK100250090P040P040216F<CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911uK100250390P040P0404B30<CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>

Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

286 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual








I LPC - Chi nese

The Chinese Option is a double byte scalable font supporting Simplified GB Chinese. In the
double byte format the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent
from the host. Double byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see
Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).

DPL Big 5 Encoding Support: With the ILPC Chinese option, the printer firmware supports
font files that are encoded for the GB Character Map and the Big 5 Character Map. The
resident Asian font in the printer is encoded in the GB Character Map. To utilize the Big 5
Character Map, the user must download a font file that is Big 5 encoded. The font file
downloaded must be of a size compatible with the internal module size available or of a size
compatible with an external (plug in) module where applicable. Printing characters from the
Big 5 encoded font file is accomplished by:

1. Setting the character mapping with a System Command or Label Format Command
(<STX>yUB5 or yUB5, respectively).

2. Setting the “b” field = “9” and “eee” field = “Unn”, where “nn” is equal to the Font ID
number selected for the Big 5 encoded font file downloaded.

3. Selecting string data corresponding to the Big 5 Character Map.
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 287

Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - CHINESE
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type
Font
Name
Binary
Addressing
Hex ASCII
Addressing
Code
Pages
UC0

Scalable Resident
Simplified
GB Chinese
GB
uc0

Scalable Resident
Simplified
GB Chinese
GB
U50 -
U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
Big 5 B5
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
Big 5 B5
U50 -
U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User
defined



u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User
defined






Sample Simplified GB Chinese DPL file (binary addressing) and resulting label:

<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Chinese Available in GB Character Set<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
yUGB<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030GB CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATION’S<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UC002650150P012P012<BD><D0>A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD>
<D2><A1><A1>
<A1><A1><BD><D3><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911UC002600150P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600205P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600250P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>
2911UC002600300P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UC002330315P012P012<BD><D3><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D2><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD>
<D1><A1><A1><A1><A1><BD><D0><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UC001950165P012P012<BD><D0><00><00><CR>
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

288 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
4911UC001950215P012P012<BD><D1><00><00><CR>
4911UC001950265P012P012<BD><D2><00><00><CR>
4911UC001950315P012P012<BD><D3><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING GB CHARACTER’S<CR>
1911UC001200020P010P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200050P020P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200080P030P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200110P040P020<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200145P040P030<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200190P040P040<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200250P040P050<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
1911UC001200320P040P060<BA><D0><00><00><CR>
112200000050010NORMAL INVERSE<CR>
112200000050245 NORMAL MIRROR<CR>
1911UC000250010P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>
1911UC000250245P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UC000250090P040P040<BD><E0><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UC000250390P040P040<BD><E1><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>





E

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 289
I LPC - Kor ean

The Korean Option is a double-byte scalable font supporting Korean Hangul. In the double-
byte format, the printer recalls one character printed from every two 8-bit bytes sent from
the host. Double-byte scalable fonts are selected using a print format record (see
Generating Label Formats and Appendix H for details).

Scalable Double-Byte Font Map - KOREAN
eee
(Font Code)
Scalable
Font Type

Font Name
Binary
Addressing
Hex ASCII
Addressing
Code
Pages
UH0 Scalable Resident Korean Hangul UC
uh0 Scalable Resident Korean Hangul UC
u50 - u5z…
u90 - u9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined
U50 -
U5z...
U90 - U9z
Scalable Non-Resident
(download)
User defined


E

Not all fonts contain an entire compliment of character codes for a given character map.


Sample Korean Hangul DPL file (binary addressing) and the resulting label:

<02>L<CR>
D11<CR>
ySPM<CR>
1911S0003100010P020P015Scalable Korean Available in UC Character Set<CR>
yUUC<CR>
1B110000020017001234567890<CR>
1X1100001900010b0392011000020002<CR>
112200002800030HANGUL CHARACTER’S IN ALL 4 ROTATIONS<CR>
112200002600030Rotation 1<CR>
1911UH002620150P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620205P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620250P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
1911UH002620300P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
112200002400030Rotation 2<CR>
2911UH002550150P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550205P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550250P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
2911UH002550300P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
Appendix P – ILPC Programming Examples

290 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
112200002200030Rotation 3<CR>
3911UH002330165P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330220P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330265P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
3911UH002330315P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
112200002000030Rotation 4<CR>
4911UH001950165P012P012<AC><00><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950215P012P012<AC><65><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950265P012P012<AC><69><00><00><CR>
4911UH001950315P012P012<AC><DF><00><00><CR>
1X1100001100010b0392007500020002<CR>
112200001650030SCALING HANGUL CHARACTERS<CR>
1911UH001200020P010P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200050P020P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200080P030P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200110P040P020<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200145P040P030<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200190P040P040<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200250P040P050<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
1911UH001200320P040P060<AC><AC><00><00><CR>
112200000200010NORMAL INVERSE<CR>
112200000200245 NORMAL MIRROR<CR>
1911UH000450010P040P040<AC><4D><00><00><CR>
1911UH000450245P040P040<AC><15><00><00><CR>
A5<CR>
1911UH000450090P040P040<AC><4D><00><00><CR>
A1<CR>
M<CR>
1911UH000450390P040P040<AC><15><00><00><CR>
M<CR>
E<CR>




E

The notation “<xx>” in this DPL file should be interpreted by the reader as representing the
hexadecimal value of the byte sent to the printer.


Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 291
Appendi x Q


Pl ug and Pl ay I Ds

MFG; CMD; MDL; CLS; DES

Where:
MFG
= Datamax-Oneil

CMD
= Fixed string: “DPL”

MDL
= Model: (Valid designations are A4212, A4310, A4408, A4606, A6212, A6310,
E4205e, E-4304e, EX2, H4212, H4310, MP Compact4 Mark II 203, MP Compact4
Mark II 300, I4206, I4208, I4308, I4210, I4212, I4406, I4604, 4206MII,
4210MII, and 4308MII.)

CLS
= Fixed string: “PRINTER”

DES
= Description (subject to change with the application [firmware] revision and printer
model)


Example: Datamax-Oneil 4208 Label Printer Version 06.06 07/09/2001


Appendix Q – Plug and Play IDs

292 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 293
Appendi x R


Li ne Mode

Line Mode allows the printer to respond to raw data from a device that may not be able to
send a complete DPL file. In Line Mode raw data is directed into replaceable fields in formats
or templates stored in the printer.

The printer can be placed in Line Mode via the front panel, as explained in the printer’s
Operating Manual, or by using the <STX>KcEM command (see Extended System-Level
Command Functions), where:

<STX>KcEM0 will enter standard DPL Mode; and,

<STX>KcEM1 will enter Line Mode.

E

• A reset will follow a change of mode.

• While in Line Mode, the printer will also respond to DPL commands; however, special
download types (such as firmware updates) should only be sent when the printer is in
DPL mode.


Line Mode Specifics

º Raw data sent to the printer must be terminated by a carriage return [0x0D].

º The host timeout setting (see <STX>KcHT) will determine the maximum waiting period
between data sent. If the timeout value is reached, the label will print using the data
received before timeout occurred.

º A form feed command [0x0C] may be sent to terminate processing and print the data
that has been received.

º Issuing the <STX>Ennnn command (where nnnn represents the print count), allows
quantities of the same label to be printed.

º The printer must have a template program loaded. A template is a standard DPL file that
ends in a store format command, instead of the print command (E). The template name
must be either DMXFRM or DMXFRMxx. Using DMXFRMxx, allows multiple templates to
be available.


Sample Template 1:

The following sample uses DMXFRM as the template name and stores it to the default module.
(The default module is printer model dependent.)
Appendix R – Line Mode

294 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD #1
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD #2
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRM


To print a label, the attached device now only has to send the data. Sample data in this
example is as follows:

TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]


The sample data will print the following label (layout and font are approximations):


TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC



If multiple labels are needed, data for the labels can be sent at the same time. Sample data
for two labels:

TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
TEST DATA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD[CR]
TEST DATA EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE[CR]
TEST DATA FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF[CR]


The sample data will print the following two labels (layout and typeface are
approximations):

Appendix R – Line Mode

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 295
Label 1:

TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC


Label 2:


TEST DATA DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

FIXED FIELD #1
TEST DATA EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

FIXED FIELD #2
TEST DATA FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF




Sample Template 2:

If a template in the form of DMXFRMxx is used, the data must be preceded by the value of
xx. Below is a sample template for DMXFRMxx:

<STX>L
PG
SG
D11
15110000160001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100001200010FIXED FIELD NUMBER ONE
15110000080001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
151100000400010FIXED FIELD NUMBER TWO
15110000000001099999999999999999999999999999999999
U
Q0001
sCDMXFRMA1

Sample data for DMXFRMxx type templates:

A1>TEST DATA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA[CR]
A1>TEST DATA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB[CR]
A1>TEST DATA CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC[CR]
Appendix R – Line Mode

296 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual










Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 297
Appendi x S


RFI D Ov er v i ew

The printer has two different operational modes for the programming of RFID tags: Direct,
and Label Formatting.

The RFID programming data can be entered in one of two formats: ASCII, or Hexadecimal.
Data in the ASCII format is entered conventionally, while data in the hexadecimal format is
entered as the hexadecimal-pairs equivalent of the ASCII character(s). For example, to
program the word “TEST” in the ASCII format, the data is entered as TEST; alternately, in
the hexadecimal format the word is entered as 54455354. The other important
consideration is the data format byte count. Compared to the ASCII format, hexadecimal
formats use twice the number of bytes. Returning to the example above, in the ASCII
format “TEST” has a byte count of four, while the hexadecimal format equivalent has a byte
count of eight.

To send information about the results of tag printing back to the host, refer to the
<STX>KcOF command for option feedback.


Di r ect Mode

Direct Mode allows the user (host) to directly control the reading and writing of RFID tags.
This mode contains both a generic Read / Write Interface and a high level HF / UHF Tag
Interface. In Direct Mode, each RFID tag is individually processed with status and data
responses. Typically these commands are used for diagnostics or custom applications.

Generic Read/Write Interface

The Generic Read/Write Interface allows the Host Application to send generic commands
for RFID operations by utilizing the printer’s database for specific parameters. Requiring
no knowledge of the tag types being used (except the data format), these commands
consist of simple read and write operations. See the <STX>KaR and <STX>KaW commands
for details.

HF (13.56 MHz) ISO15693 Tag Interface

The ISO15693 Tag Interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations
pertaining to HF-type (13.56 MHz) tags. Since these commands override the printer’s
database by interfacing directly to the tag module, knowledge of HF tags and their
operation is required. See the <STX>KtA, <STX>KtD, <STX>KtE, <STX>KtH, <STX>KtU,
<STX>KtR, and <STX>KtW commands for details.

Appendix S – RFID Overview

298 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
UHF Interface

This interface allows the Host Application to perform specific operations pertaining to
UHF-type tags. Since these commands override the printer’s database by interfacing
directly to the tag module, knowledge of UHF protocols and their operation is required.
See the <STX>KuR and <STX>KuW commands for details.








Label For mat t i ng Mode

Label Formatting Mode utilizes the current printer configuration to process all reading,
writing, and exception processing for each tag printed. (For exception processing and fault
handling; see the <STX>KcFH command.) The specification for RFID programming is
contained in the data fields of the DPL label format, which instructs the printer to write and
read data. Two Label Formatting Modes for RFID are available. While each supports auto
increment and decrement commands for numeric (+/-), alphanumeric (>/<), or
hexadecimal ((/)) data, they differ when a byte count specifier is added. Both RFID Label
Formatting commands are detailed below.

E

Up to six RFID operations per label are allowed.








Wx / W1x: RFID

Syntax for RFID (spaces added for readability):

a bbb c d eee ffff gggg jj…j

Where:
Appendix S – RFID Overview

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 299

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1, 2, and 3
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write w/ Read back and Verify
bbb Wnx RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no “n” is an implied 1.
c 0 Not Used, should be 0
d 0 Not Used, should be 0
HF: Lock after write, where:

x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.

x = 1 – Lock after write.

yy = Not Used
UHF EPC Gen2: Lock after write, where:

x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.

x = 1 – Lock after write.

yy = Lock state where “01”is permalock, “10” is pwd-write
lock or “11” is both states
eee xyy
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 000
HF: Starting block number to write.
UHF EPC Gen2: Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002”
is Tag ID or “0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC
data also (for backwards compatibility).
ffff
0000 – 9998
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
HF: Not Used, should be 0000
UHF EPC Gen2: Data word offset – currently only used for read
operation
gggg 0000
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
jj…j
Valid hexadecimal
pairs per character
followed by a
termination
character.
Data to write to the tag.

E
UHF data length must be 16 or 24 for EPC, 16 for Tag ID or
multiples of four for user memory sections.


Appendix S – RFID Overview

300 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Example 1: The following example encodes an HF tag , starting at block 001, with
“Datamax writes RFID best”:

<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1x0000000010000446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374<CR>
E

Example 2: The following format encodes a UHF Gen2 tag with EPC data
“112233445566778899AABBCC” and user memory data “1111222233334444”.

<STX>L
D11
2W1x0000000010000112233445566778899AABBCC
2W1x00000000300001111222233334444
E

Example 3: The following format reads a UHF Gen2 tag with data from address 1,
offset 2nd word (EPC data), Tag ID from address 2, and user data from address 3. Note
that the length of the data in the record determines how much data is read.

<STX>L
D11
1W1x0000000010002xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000020000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
1W1x0000000030000xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
E

With Option Feedback enabled, the format above would return data, such as:

<R;C;03;03;0002:0001;112233445566778899AABBCC;E20060010128FF33;11112222333
34444>

Where, “112233445566778899AABBCC” is the EPC data, “E20060010128FF33” is the
Tag ID and “1111222233334444” is the user memory data. See Option Feedback Mode
(<STX>KcOF) for more information on the response format.


WX / W1X: RFID with Byte Count Specifier
Specified Length – The upper case X identifies an RFID data string with a string 4-digit
length specifier. The length specifier allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included
within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The
four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position
field. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not
include itself.

Syntax for RFID with Byte Count Specifier (spaces added for readability):

a bbb c d eee ffff gggg hhhh jj…j

Where:
Appendix S – RFID Overview

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 301

Field Valid Inputs Meaning
a 1, 2, and 3
Operation to perform, where:
1 = Read (report to host)
2 = Write
3 = Write / Verify
bbb Wnx RFID Hexadecimal Operation, where no “n” is an implied 1.
c 0 Not Used, should be 0
d 0 Not Used, should be 0
HF: Lock after write, where:

x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.

x = 1 – Lock after write.

yy = Not Used
UHF EPC Gen2: Lock after write, where:

x = 0 – Use printer setup to determine if lock is performed.

x = 1 – Lock after write.

yy = Lock state where “01”is for permalock, “10” for pwd-
write lock or “11” for both states
eee xyy
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 000
HF: Starting block number to write.
UHF EPC Gen2: Block address where “0001” is EPC data, “0002”
is Tag ID or “0003” is user memory. Using “0000” is for EPC
data also (for backwards compatibility).
ffff 0000 – 9998
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
HF: Not Used, should be 0000
UHF EPC Gen2: Data word offset – currently only used for read
operation
gggg 0000
UHF other tag types: Not Used, should be 0000
hhhh
Four-digit decimal
data byte count.
Number of bytes to follow (to include all bytes that follow until
the end of the data).

E
UHF data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections.
jj…j
Valid ASCII character
string followed by a
termination
character.
Data to write to the tag.

E
UHF data length must be 8 or 12 for EPC, 8 for Tag ID or
multiples of 2 for user memory sections.

Appendix S – RFID Overview

302 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual
Example1: The following example encodes a HF tag, starting at block 001, with
“Datamax <CR> writes RFID best.” It includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in
bold), where 0024 equals a four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that
follow until the end of the data. Field termination is set by the byte count.

<STX>L
D11<CR>
2W1X00000000100000024Datamax<CR>
writes RFID best<CR>
E

Example 2: The following format encodes a tag with EPC data “1122334455667788”
with byte count shown in bold. Note that the field data is entered as the hex value for
the ASCII character.

<STX>L
D11
2W1x00000000000000008<0x11><0x22><0x33><0x44><0x55><0x66><0x77><0x88>
E


GEN2 Ki l l / Access Passw or ds

Gen2 tags are capable of storing a 4-byte kill password and a 4-byte access password. The
kill password is stored at address 0, word offset 0 and access password is stored at address
0, word offset 2. The default for these passwords is typically 0.

To write these to the tag it is necessary to store the desired password value in the printer
database:

To write the database for the kill password the command is <STX>KcRIKnnnnnnnn, where
nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs; and,

To write the database for the access password the command is <STX>KcRICnnnnnnnn,
where nnnnnnnn represents the 4-byte value in hexadecimal pairs.

These can also be viewed or modified via the printer’s display under RFID OPTIONS / UHF
SETTINGS. If the stored value for either or both of these passwords is non-zero and a label
formatting command to write EPC data is issued, then these passwords will be written also.


GEN2 Lock St at es

Gen2 supports a lock state of permalock, pwd-lock or both for any of the data sections of
the tag. This includes access/kill passwords, EPC data, Tag ID or user memory. To store
these states in the printer database the command is <STX>KcRIGn, where: 1 is permalock; 2
is pwd-lock; 3 is both; and, 0 is none (default). When a section of the tag is written via
label formatting command and the stored lock state and lock after write are enabled, the
section will be locked.



Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 303
Appendi x T


Wi Fi Regi on Coun t r y Codes

Region Country Codes
Code Country Code Country Code Country
AF Afghanistan GH Ghana PK Pakistan
AX Åland Islands GI Gibraltar PW Palau
AL Albania GR Greece PS Palestinian Territory
DZ Algeria GL Greenland PA Panama
AS American Samoa GD Grenada PG Papua New Guinea
AD Andorra GP Guadeloupe PY Paraguay
AO Angola GU Guam PE Peru
AI Anguilla GT Guatemala PH Philippines
AQ Antarctica GN Guinea PN Pitcairn
AG
Antigua and
Barbuda
GW Guinea-Bissau PL Poland
AR Argentina GY Guyana PT Portugal
AM Armenia HT Haiti PR Puerto Rico
AW Aruba HM
Heard Island and
McDonald Islands
QA Qatar
AU Australia VA
Holy See (Vatican City
State)
RE Réunion
AT Austria HN Honduras RO Romania
AZ Azerbaijan HK Hong Kong RU Russian Federation

(continued)
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes

304 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Code Country Code Country Code Country
BS Bahamas HU Hungary RW Rwanda
BH Bahrain IS Iceland SH Saint Helena
BD Bangladesh IN India KN Saint Kitts and Nevis
BB Barbados ID Indonesia LC Saint Lucia
BY Belarus IR Iran, Islamic Republic of PM Saint Pierre and Miquelon
BE Belgium IQ Iraq VC
Saint Vincent and the
Grenadines
BZ Belize IE Ireland WS Samoa
BJ Benin IL Israel SM San Marino
BM Bermuda IT Italy ST Sao Tome and Principe
BT Bhutan JM Jamaica SA Saudi Arabia
BO Bolivia JP Japan SN Senegal
BA
Bosnia and
Herzegovina
JO Jordan CS Serbia and Montenegro
BW Botswana KZ Kazakhstan SC Seychelles
BV Bouvet Island KE Kenya SL Sierra Leone
BR Brazil KI Kiribati SG Singapore
IO
British Indian Ocean
Territory
KP
Korea, Democratic
People's Republic of
SK Slovakia
BN Brunei Darussalam KR Korea, Republic of SI Slovenia
BG Bulgaria KW Kuwait SB Solomon Islands
BF Burkina Faso KG Kyrgyzstan SO Somalia

(continued)
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 305

Code Country Code Country Code Country
BI Burundi LA
Lao People's Democratic
Republic
ZA South Africa
KH Cambodia LV Latvia GS
South Georgia and the
South Sandwich Islands
CM Cameroon LB Lebanon ES Spain
CA Canada LS Lesotho LK Sri Lanka
CV Cape Verde LR Liberia SD Sudan
KY Cayman Islands LY Libyan Arab Jamahiriya SR Suriname
CF
Central African
Republic
LI Liechtenstein SJ Svalbard and Jan Mayen
TD Chad LT Lithuania SZ Swaziland
CL Chile LU Luxembourg SE Sweden
CN China MO Macao CH Switzerland
CX Christmas Island MK Macedonia SY Syrian Arab Republic
CC
Cocos (Keeling)
Islands
MG Madagascar TW
Taiwan (Republic of
China)
CO Colombia MW Malawi TJ Tajikistan
KM Comoros MY Malaysia TZ
Tanzania, United Republic
of
CD
Congo, The
Democratic Republic
of the
ML Mali TL Timor
CK Cook Islands MT Malta TG Togo
CR Costa Rica MH Marshall Islands TK Tokelau
CI Côte d'Ivoire MQ Martinique TO Tonga
HR Croatia MR Mauritania TT Trinidad and Tobago

(continued)
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes

306 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Code Country Code Country Code Country
CU Cuba MU Mauritius TN Tunisia
CY Cyprus YT Mayotte TR Turkey
CZ Czech Republic MX Mexico TM Turkmenistan
DK Denmark FM
Micronesia, Federated
States of
TC Turks and Caicos Islands
DJ Djibout MD Moldova, Republic of TV Tuvalu
DM Dominica MC Monaco UG Uganda
DO Dominican Republic MN Mongolia UA Ukraine
EC Ecuador MS Montserrat AE United Arab Emirates
EG Egypt MA Morocco GB United Kingdom
SV El Salvador MZ Mozambique US United States
GQ Equatorial Guinea MM Myanmar UM
United States Minor
Outlying Islands
ER Eritrea NA Namibia UY Uruguay
EE Estonia NR Nauru UZ Uzbekistan
ET Ethiopia NP Nepal VU Vanuatu
FK
Falkland Islands
(Malvinas)
NL Netherlands
Vatican City State - see
Holy See
FO Faroe Islands AN Netherlands Antilles VE Venezuela
FJ Fiji NC New Caledonia VN Viet Nam
FI Finland NZ New Zealand VG Virgin Islands, British
FR France NI Nicaragua VI Virgin Islands, U.S.
GF French Guiana NE Niger WF Wallis and Futuna

(continued)
Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 307

Code Country Code Country Code Country
PF French Polynesia NG Nigeria EH Western Sahara
TF
French Southern
Territories
NU Niue YE Yemen
GA Gabon NF Norfolk Island
Zaire - see Congo, The
Democratic Republic of
the
GM Gambia MP
Northern Mariana
Islands
ZM Zambia
GE Georgia NO Norway ZW Zimbabwe
DE Germany OM Oman

Table T-1: Region Country Codes



Appendix T – WiFi Region Country Codes

308 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 309
Appendi x U


Gr aphi cs Di spl ay I con Key

Display Size
Large Small
Description

Initialization, typically brief (but a damaged or invalid printhead
can delay the process).
M
ENU

Display large fonts; see Section 4.1.2.
DPL

Input Mode – DPL; see Section 4.2.4.
LINE

Input Mode – LINE; see Section 4.2.4.
PL Z

Input Mode – PL-Z; see Section 4.2.4.
RFID

RFID detected.
SD

SD memory card detected.
USB
HOST

USB memory (or keyboard) detected.

Wired network detected.

Server inaccessible.

WLAN associated with Access Point.

WLAN not associated with Access Point.

WLAN ADHOC Mode.

*

Receiving data.
STOP


*

Paused.
!


*

Faulted, see Section 6.1.2.
*LED

Appendix U – Display Icon Key and Control Panel Button Sequence Functions

310 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Cont r ol Panel Bu t t on Sequen ces

Three Button / Three LED Control Panel
Function Printer Mode Button Sequence
Pause Idle PAUSE
Feed / Clear Fault Idle FEED
Cancel Idle CANCEL
Soft Reset Idle PAUSE & CANCEL (or Long CANCEL)
Print Test Label Idle PAUSE & FEED
Print Configuration Label Idle FEED & CANCEL
Print Network Label Idle PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
Quick Calibration Idle Long FEED
Empty Calibration Idle Long PAUSE & FEED
Media Calibration * CANCEL
Reset Database to Configuration File * PAUSE & FEED
Menu / Setup * PAUSE
Reset firmware (but not Ethernet
parameters)
* PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
Reset firmware (and Ethernet
parameters)
* FEED & CANCEL
Hex Dump Mode Power-Up Hold FEED
Enter Boot Mode Power-Up Hold PAUSE & CANCEL
*Power “On” the printer then when the LEDs illuminate press and hold indicated the Button Sequence
until the LEDs extinguish.
Appendix U – Display Icon Key and Control Panel Button Sequence Functions

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 311

Seven Button Control Panel
Function Printer Mode Button Sequence
Pause Idle PAUSE
Feed / Clear Fault Idle FEED
Cancel Idle CANCEL
Soft Reset Idle PAUSE & CANCEL (or Long CANCEL)
Print Test Label Idle PAUSE & FEED
Print Configuration Label Idle FEED & CANCEL
Print Network Label Idle PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
RFID Calibration Idle Long FEED & TEST
Quick Calibration Idle Long FEED
Empty Calibration Idle Long PAUSE & FEED
Menu / Setup Idle MENU
Reset Database to Configuration File Power-Up PAUSE & FEED
Reset Firmware (but not Ethernet
parameters)
Power-Up Hold PAUSE, FEED, & CANCEL
Reset Firmware (and Ethernet
parameters)
Power-Up Hold FEED & CANCEL
Hex Dump Mode Power-Up Hold FEED
Enter Boot Mode Power-Up Hold PAUSE & TEST (or PAUSE & CANCEL)
Display Magnification Idle DOWN ARROW


Appendix U – Display Icon Key and Control Panel Button Sequence Functions

312 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual




Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 313
Appendi x V


Bar Code Sy mbol ogy I nf or mat i on Resour ces

American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
1819 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20036 USA
Phone: 202-293-8020
Fax: 202-293-9287
http://www.ansi.org/


Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility, Inc.
125 Warrendale-Bayne Road
Warrendale, PA 15086 USA
Phone: 724-934-4470
Fax: 724-934-4495
http://www.aimglobal.org/


Automotive Industry Action Group
26200 Lahser Rd., Suite 200
Southfield, MI 48034-7100 USA
Phone: 248-358-3570
Fax: 248-358-3253
http://www.aiag.org/


Computing Technology Industry Association
1815 S. Meyers Road, Suite 300
Oakbrook Terrace, IL 60181-5228 USA
Phone: 630-678-8300
Fax: 630-268-1384
http://www.comptia.org/


GS1 (International Article Numbering Association)
Blue Tower
Avenue Louise 326 - Bte 10
1050 Brussels - Belgium
Phone: 32(0)2-788 78 00
Fax: 32(0)2-788 78 99
http://www.gs1.org/


Appendix V – Bar Code Symbology Information Resources

314 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Health Industry Business Communications Council (HIBCC)
2525 E Arizona Biltmore Circle, Suite 127
Phoenix, Arizona 85016 USA
Phone: 602-381-1091
Fax: 602-381-1093
http://www.hibcc.org/


Uniform Code Council, Inc.
7887 Washington Village Drive, Suite 300
Dayton, OH 45459 USA
Phone: 937-435-3870
Fax: 937-435-7317
http://www.uc-council.org/


U.S. Government Printing Office
732 North Capitol St. NW
Washington, DC 20401 USA
Phone: 202.512.0000
Fax: 202-512-1293
http://www.gpo.gov/



Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 315
Gl ossar y


alphanumeric Consisting of alphabetic, numeric, punctuation and other symbols.

backing material The silicon-coated paper carrier material to which labels with adhesive
backing are affixed. Also referred to as “liner”.

bar code A representation of alphanumeric information in a pattern of machine-readable
marks. The basic categories are divided into one-dimensional (UPC, Code 39, Postnet,
etc.) and two-dimensional bar codes (Data Matrix, MaxiCode, PDF417, etc.).

boot loader The resident program that loads the application from Flash memory,
decompresses it into the DRAM, and starts operations.

burn line The row of thermal elements in the print head.

calibration The process through which Media Sensor readings are entered into the printer
for correct sensor function (for example, detection of a given media type) and top of
form positioning.

character set The entire complement of alphanumeric symbols contained in a given font.

checksum An alphanumeric error detection method used in many bar code symbologies
for informational security.

continuous media An uninterrupted roll or box of label or tag stock media that contains
no gap, slit, notch, or black mark to separate individual labels or tags.

cutter A mechanical device with a rotary or guillotine type blade used to cut labels or tags
following printing.

defaults The functional setting values returned following a factory reset of the printer.

diagnostics Programs used to locate and diagnose hardware problems.

die-cut media Media that has been cut into a pattern using a press, where the excess
paper is removed leaving individual labels, with gaps between them, attached to a
backing material.

direct thermal The printing method that uses a heat sensitive media and only the heat of
the thermal print head to create an image on the label.

direct thermal media Media coated with special chemicals that react and darken with the
application of heat.

DPI (dots per inch) A measurement of print resolution, rated in the number of thermal
elements contained in one inch of the print head. Also referred to as “resolution.”
Glossary

316 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

DPL (Datamax-O’Neil Programming Language) programming commands used
specifically for control of and label production in Datamax-O’Neil printers.

fan-fold Media that is folded and stacked.

feed speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head in non-printed areas
or when the FEED Key is pressed.

Flash memory Non-volatile memory (does not require printer power to maintain data)
that can be erased and reprogrammed, used to hold the printer’s operating program.

font A set of alphanumeric characters that share a particular typeface.

gap A space between die-cut or notched labels used to sense the top-of-form.

IPS (inches per second) Imperial measurement of printer speeds.

label A paper or synthetic printing material, typically with a pressure sensitive adhesive
backing.

label length The distance from the top of the label to the bottom of the label as it exits
the printer.

label repeat The distance from the top of one label to the top of the next label.

label tracking Excessive lateral (side to side) movement of the media as it travels under
the print head.

label width The left to right measurement of the label as it exits the printer.

media Generalized term for all types of printing stocks, including: roll fed, continuous,
butt-cut, die-cut, reflective, and fanfold.

media hub Device in the printer used to support roll media.

media sensor An electronic device equipped with photosensors to detect media and the
top-of-form on die-cut, notched or reflective media.

MMPS (millimeters per second) Metric measurement of printer speeds.

notched stock Media, typically tag stock, with holes or notches in the material that is
used to signal the top-of-form. The printer must be set to “gap“ to use this media type.

perforation Small cuts extending through the backing and/or label material to facilitate
their separation. Also referred to as “perf”.

preprinted media Label stock that contains borders, text, or graphics, floodcoating, etc.

present sensor An electronic sensor that provides a signal to the printer firmware that a
label is present, typically located beyond the print head, where the labels exits the
printer.
Glossary

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 317
print speed The rate at which the media moves under the print head during the printing
process.

reflective media Media imprinted with carbon-based black marks on the underside of the
material, which is used to signal the top-of-form when the “reflective” Media Sensor is
enabled.

registration Repeatable top to bottom alignment of printed labels.

reverse speed The backward rate of media motion into the printer during tear-off, peel
and present and cutting operations for positioning the label at the start of print
position.

ribbon An extruded polyester tape with several layers of material, one of which is ink-like,
used to produce an image on the label. Also referred to as “foil”.

roll media A form of media that is wound upon a cardboard core.

slew The moving of media using the GPIO function.

start of print The position on the label where the printing actually begins.

tag stock A heavy paper or synthetic printing material, typically featuring a notch or black
mark for top of form and no adhesive backing.

thermal transfer The printing method that creates an image by transferring ink from a
ribbon onto the media using the heat from the thermal print head.

TOF (top-of-form) The start of a new label as indicated by a label gap, notch, mark or
programming.







CG Times (based upon Times New Roman), CG Triumvirate, MicroType, and TrueType are trademarks of the AGFA Monotype Corporation. PCL, Intellifont, and HP Laser JetII are trademarks of the Hewlett Packard Corporation. Macintosh is a trademark of the Apple Corporation. Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation. All other brand and product names are trademarks, service marks, registered trademarks, or registered service marks of their respective companies. Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Datamax-O’Neil Corporation. No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, for any purpose other than the purchaser’s personal use, without the expressed written permission of Datamax-O’Neil Corporation.

All rights reserved Copyright © 2010, Datamax-O’Neil Part Number 88-2341-01 Revision K

Contents
1 Overview.............................................................................................. 1

Who Should Use this Manual ............................................................................... 1 The Scope of this Manual..................................................................................... 1 General Conventions............................................................................................ 3 Computer Entry and Display Conventions............................................................ 3 Important Safety Instructions................................................................................ 3 Special Instructions .............................................................................................. 4 Typical Data Flow Sequence ................................................................................ 4
2 Control Code Command Functions ......................................................... 9 Introduction ........................................................................................... 9

Attention-Getters .................................................................................................. 9 Alternate Control Code Modes ........................................................................... 10

3 Immediate Command Functions .......................................................... 11 Introduction ......................................................................................... 11

SOH # SOH * SOH A SOH a SOH B SOH C SOH D SOH E SOH e SOH F

Reset ................................................................................................... 11 Reset ................................................................................................... 11 Send ASCII Status String..................................................................... 12 Send ASCII Extended Status String..................................................... 12 Toggle Pause....................................................................................... 13 Stop/Cancel ......................................................................................... 14 SOH Shutdown .................................................................................... 14 Send Batch Remaining Quantity.......................................................... 14 Send Batch Printed Quantity................................................................ 15 Send Status Byte ................................................................................. 15

i

4 System-Level Command Functions ...................................................... 17 Introduction ......................................................................................... 17

STX A STX a STX B STX c STX E STX e STX F STX f STX G STX I STX i STX J STX K STX k STX L STX M STX m STX n STX O STX o STX P STX p STX Q STX q STX R STX r STX S STX T STX t STX U STX V STX v STX W

Set Time and Date............................................................................... 17 Enable Feedback Characters .............................................................. 18 Get Printer Time and Date Information ................................................ 18 Set Continuous Paper Length.............................................................. 19 Set Quantity for Stored Label............................................................... 19 Select Edge Sensor ............................................................................. 20 Form Feed ........................................................................................... 20 Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed)...................................................... 20 Print Last Label Format........................................................................ 21 Input Image Data ................................................................................. 21 Scalable Font Downloading ................................................................. 22 Set Pause for Each Label .................................................................... 23 Extended System-Level Commands.................................................... 23 Test RS-232 Port ................................................................................. 23 Enter Label Formatting Command Mode ............................................. 23 Set Maximum Label Length ................................................................. 24 Set Printer to Metric Mode ................................................................... 24 Set Printer to Imperial Mode ................................................................ 24 Set Start of Print Position..................................................................... 25 Cycle Cutter ......................................................................................... 26 Set Hex Dump Mode............................................................................ 26 Controlled Pause ................................................................................. 26 Clear All Modules................................................................................. 27 Clear Module ....................................................................................... 27 Ribbon Saver Control........................................................................... 27 Select Reflective Sensor...................................................................... 28 Set Feed Speed................................................................................... 28 Print Quality Label................................................................................ 28 Test DRAM Memory Module................................................................ 29 Label Format String Replacement Field............................................... 29 Software Switch Settings ..................................................................... 31 Request Firmware Version .................................................................. 32 Request Memory Module Information .................................................. 32

ii

........................ 114 STX KS Memory Configuration...................................................................................................................................................................... 39 STX K}Q Quick Media Calibration .................................. 110 STX KQ Query Memory Configuration ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 41 STX Kb Backfeed Time Delay.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 33 Delete File from Module............ 36 5 Extended System-Level Command Functions ...... 36 Pack Module ................................................................................. 41 STX KC Get Configuration... 108 STX KO GPIO Output ................................................. 43 STX KD Database Configuration ................................................... 106 STX KJ Assign Communication Port (MCL)......................................................... 107 STX KI GPIO Input............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 103 STX KE Character Encoding ..................................................... 38 STX K}M Manual Media Calibration .................. 42 STX Kc Configuration Set .... 103 STX KF Select Factory Defaults............................................................................... 37 STX K}E Empty Sensor Calibration ...............................STX w STX X STX x STX Y STX y STX Z STX z Test Flash Memory Module . 105 STX KH Dot Check ............ Scalable Font Cache ............................................................................................................................................................ 40 STX KaW Write Data to RFID Tag .................................................................................................................. 114 STX Kr Resettable Counter Reset.. 109 STX Kp Module Protection.......................................................................................................................... 111 STX Kq Query Memory Configuration........................................ 35 Select Font Symbol Set ............................. 108 STX Kn NIC Reset ............................................................................................................ 102 STX Kd Set File as Factory Default.. 113 STX KR Reset Memory Configuration ....................... 105 STX Kf Set Present Distance ....... 35 Print Configuration Label ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 37 Introduction .............................................................. 114 iii .......................................................................................... 37 STX K Memory Configuration ........................................... 34 Output Sensor Values.................................. 33 Set Default Module ....................... 39 STX KaR Read Data from RFID Tag.............................

............................... 126 Bar Code Magnification........STX KtA Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag...................................................... 132 Set Inch (Imperial) Mode..................................................................... Printable Label Width....................... 131 Justification ............................................................... 130 Place Data in Global Register................ 125 Introduction .. 127 Set Column Offset Amount ............................................... 129 Advanced Format Attributes .......................................... 131 Select Mirror Mode..................... 128 Set Dot Size Width and Height ........................................................................................ 133 iv .................. 130 Enter Heat Setting . 115 STX KtE Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit.................................................... 116 STX KtR Read Data from RFID Tag .................................................................. 116 STX KtH Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host ............................................................................. 123 STX KZ Immediately Set Parameter .................................................. 128 Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label........ 117 STX KtW Write Data to RFID Tag ................................................................................................................................................................. 132 Set Print Speed........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 115 STX KtD Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag ................... 121 STX KuW Write Data to RFID Tag ................ 122 STX KV Verifier Enable/Disable ...... 132 Set Metric Mode............................................................ 129 Set Present Speed................... 122 STX Kx Delete Configuration File ...................... 120 STX KuF Send RFID Device Firmware Version ...................................................125 : A B C c D E e F f G H J M m n P Set Cut by Amount............................................................................................................................................... 120 STX KuR Read Data from RFID Tag......................................................................................................................................................................... 119 STX KuB Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section.................................................. 129 Recall Printer Configuration .................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 125 Set Format Attribute. 127 Set Cut by Amount............................................................... 123 6 Label Formatting Command Functions.............. 122 STX KW Memory Configuration......................................................................................................................................................... 120 STX KuJ Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section .....

................................................................................................................ 139 Make Last Field Entered Increment .................... 148 Record Structure Types.................................................................... 146 Character Download Data............................................................................ 137 Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field .................................... 145 Font Descriptor ................................................ 139 Make Last Field Entered Decrement....... 145 Introduction .................. 133 Set Quantity of Labels to Print .......................................................... 148 The Structure of a Record .................................. 134 Set Row Offset Amount .................................................................................................................................................. 146 8 Generating Label Formats ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 141 Recall Global Data and Place in Field.......................... 134 Recall Stored Label Format ...................................... 142 Print Time and Date ................................................................................................. 161 v ... 147 Generating Records ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 142 Special Label Formatting Command Functions ................... 136 Set Field Data Line Terminator ................................................ 138 Select Font Symbol Set .................................................................................................................................................................................... 146 Character Code ................................ 152 Advanced Format Attributes ..... 137 Terminate Label Formatting Mode................ 135 Set Feed Speed..........................................................................................................................................147 Format Record Commands .............................142 7 Font Loading Command Functions........................................ 136 Store Label Format in Module......................... 147 Introduction .........145 *c###D )s###W *c###E (s#W Assign Font ID Number .......................................................................... 138 Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0”................................................................................................. 140 Set Count by Amount.....p Q R r S s T U X y z + (>)(() – (<)()) ^ STX S STX T Set Backfeed Speed ..................................................................

.165 Appendix B. 165 ASCII Control Chart.............................Appendix A......................................................................................... 249 Single and Double Byte Character Font Mapping ........................................................ 185 Single Byte Symbol Sets .............................................................................................................................. 177 Available Fonts – Sizes..................................................................................................................... 183 Reset Codes......................................... 167 Sample Programs....................249 vi ..................................................................................................................................................................167 Appendix C...................................................................177 Appendix D..............................................203 Appendix H...........................................197 Bar Code Default Widths and Heights ...................................................... and Samples ............................................................183 Appendix E ..................... 197 Bar Code Summary Data............................................................ References...................... 203 Bar Code Details ............................200 Appendix G....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................185 Appendix F .............

.............. 279 UPC-A and EAN-13: Variable Price/Weight Bar Codes........................................................................251 Double-Byte Symbols....................................................................................279 Appendix P...............................275 Appendix N ......................................................270 Column.......................................................... 281 International Language Print Capability (ILPC) Programming Examples............................................................................................................255 Appendix K...................................... 275 Commands by Function.................................Appendix I ................................................................272 Appendix L .............................271 Memory Module Identifiers and Allocations .....281 vii .......................................................................... 269 Maximum Field & Character Values .................................................... & Row Adjust Fine Tune Range .................................. Chinese.... 251 Symbol Sets and Character Maps ................273 Appendix M ............................. Kanji..........................269 Print Resolutions and Maximum Width & Record Column Values... 277 Image Loading .......................254 Appendix J ....................... 255 General Purpose Input Output (GPIO) Port Applications....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... and Korean ............................................................................................................................................ Present................................ 273 Speed Ranges .......277 Appendix O .

............................. 293 Line Mode............................................................................................................................. 315 viii ...................Appendix Q ...................................................................................309 Control Panel Button Sequences ................. 313 Bar Code Symbology Information Resources ........................................................................................................................................................................ 303 WiFi Region Country Codes..................................................................................................................291 Appendix R........................................................................................................................313 Glossary........................ 309 Graphics Display Icon Key ...........................................................................297 Appendix T ................................................................... 297 RFID Overview ...........................................................................303 Appendix U.........293 Appendix S ............................. 291 Plug and Play IDs...............310 Appendix V..........................................................................................................................................................................

datamax-oneil.08 12. GPIO-1. if necessary. Display or Non-Display) and equipment types (e. RFID.datamax-oneil. the listed firmware version below: Printer A-Class A-Class Mark II E-Class Mark II EX2 H-Class I-Class M-Class Mark II MP Compact4 Mark II Firmware Version 11. loading and storing of programs for the control and production of label formats (designs) for the following printers at. and cabling.08 12.e.  • See the <STX>KC command for information regarding attainment of the printer’s firmware version. consult to the appropriate Operator’s Manual for details.g. or above. etc. upgrade that firmware. Upgrades are available at http://www. explains Datamax-O’Neil Programming Language (DPL) and its related uses in the writing. All manuals can be downloaded from our web site at http://www.). the use of any command will require checking for possible exclusionary conditions.. The Scope of this Manual This manual.com. • Where applicable.02 Model distinctions.1 Overview Who Should Use this Manual This manual is intended for programmers who wish to create their own label production software. • Programming information for Class Series printers (or firmware versions for Class Series printers) not found in this manual can be found in the Class Series Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2316-01). The appendices of this manual also contain details that cannot be ignored.01 11.com.. except the S-Class printer and the legacy model printers which can be found in the DPL Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2051-01). and. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 1 . port settings. and then. • References to “Menu Settings” refer either to the set-up menu or to the system menu of the printer.071 14. arranged alphabetically by command.071 11. will be indicated in this text to differentiate command compatibility. including configurations (i. for the E3202 see the E-3202 Programmer’s Manual (part number 88-2257-01).07 12. graphics display.08 12. printer responses to a host device will depend upon the communication port.

also includes a typical data flow sequence for the printer. and bar code symbology details. 2 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . organization. that control the printer and allow scalable font and image downloads.  IMMEDIATE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 11 Description of the commands. print or store. and available alternate characters and line terminators. See the Table of Contents for specific content information. listed alphabetically. that control the position of text and images on the media. that perform status queries and printer control commands.  CONTROL CODE COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 9 Description of the attention-getter characters necessary for the printer to receive a command sequence. and acronyms used in this manual. used when downloading font data in PCL-4 compatible bitmaps. abbreviations. programming examples.  FONT LOADING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 145 Description of commands.  APPENDICES on pages 165 – 313 These contain details that cannot be ignored including various tables. the different types. and end the formatting process. and conventions used in this manual.  GENERATING LABEL FORMATS on page 147 Description of the structure of records. listed alphabetically. printer default values.  GLOSSARY on page 315 Definitions of words. listed alphabetically.  EXTENDED SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 37 Description of the commands (listed alphabetically) that control the printer.  LABEL FORMATTING COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 125 Description of commands.Overview This manual contains the following sections and appendices:  OVERVIEW on page 1 Contents. listed alphabetically. and their use in generating label formats.  SYSTEM-LEVEL COMMAND FUNCTIONS on page 17 Description of the commands.

and are single-byte hexadecimal values (e. See Appendix A for the ASCII character set. and Italics are used to indicate the command syntax parameters..)     Important Safety Instructions The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance instructions. the page number and the title of the manual. and <0x0D> equal 02. <CR>..Overview General Conventions These are some of the conventions followed in this manual:       On the header of each page. 0D. 0x02 = 02 hex. Names of other manuals referenced are in Italics. files and printer responses.g.g. This manual refers to IBM-PC based keyboard command characters for access to the ASCII character set. 0x41 = 41 hex. Square brackets ([ ]) indicate that the item is optional. and 0D. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 3 . On the footer of each page.. Other strings placed between < > in this manual represent the character of the same ASCII name. Notes are added to bring your attention to important considerations. <CR> is used to identify the line termination character. <STX>. etc. Apple’s Macintosh ) should use the appropriate keyboard command to access the desired ASCII character. Boldface is also used to bring your attention to important information. Computer Entry and Display Conventions Command syntax and samples are formatted as follows:  The Courier font in boldface indicates the DPL command syntax. tips or helpful suggestions. Systems based on different formats (e. Regular Courier font indicates sample commands. the name of the section.g. respectively). Hexadecimal values are often displayed in “C” programming language conventions (e.

Typical Data Flow Sequence The typical data flow sequence is summarized in the following bullets and detailed in the table below. top to bottom. orientation. Q0001 E 4 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .        Status commands Configuration commands Download commands Label format Status commands Label reprint commands Memory cleanup Printer Commands <SOH>A Description “Status” commands: Get Status. Label header records are not required.. See <STX>Kc to reduce configuration commands transferred RAM (temporary) or Flash (semipermanent) memory. Printer Commands data is transmitted to the printer as shown in the table from left to right. data Label Quantity Label Terminate record 131100000500050Typical text field 01 Existing label formats may be recalled. bidirectional communication required for these commands.Overview Special Instructions  The green check box is intended to alert the user to conventions used within this text or to notable operating details of the printer. image. <STX>WG <STX>O220 <STX>n <STX>V0 “Configuration” commands.data <CR> <STX>L D11 “Download” commands. position.. download image… <SOH>D <STX>IApImagename<CR>image data. fonts… Begin label Label Header record Label Formatting Data record – Object type. Request Memory Module Storage Information… Notes Optional.

and Label Save Command “s”. See <STX>Kc for changes to the default powerup configuration. and adding new data. <SOH>A Status command <STX>U01new data for field 01 <STX>E0005 <STX>G <STX>xImagename<CR> <STX>zA Memory cleanup Typically used for temporary storage. Label Recall Command “r”. Configuration Commands The following table lists some commands useful in controlling printer configuration. Must be 0000 for gap media. bidirectional communication required for these commands. Used for fast reprints. Sets sensing for gap or registration hole type stock. Typical commands used in the various stages shown above are listed in the tables that follow. toggling power restores the default configuration.Overview Printer Commands Description Notes Optional. These techniques are used for increasing throughput. Changing the default power-up configuration and saving objects in printer Flash memory can reduce the data transmitted for each label and therefore improve throughput. <STX>c <STX>e Set Edge Sensor Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 5 . updating data. see <STX>G. These commands are generally effective only for the current power-up session. not used for reflective media. Configuration Command <STX>A Name Set Date and Time Set Continuous Paper Length Function Sets Date and Time. Reprint with New Data Records Commands are available for retrieving stored label formats.

not used with continuous media.Overview Configuration Command Name Function Determines label stop position. <STX>K default position relative 64 in/100 maximum deviation. <STX>V Software Switch 6 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Enables optional hardware. older models. mm/10). head relative. and present sensor. Sets the stop position of the printed label. <STX>Kf Set Present Distance <STX>Kc Configuration Set <STX>F Send Form Feed <STX>M Set Maximum Label Length <STX>m Set to Metric Mode Subsequent measurements interpreted in metric (most units. <STX>f edge sensor relative equivalent command. cutter. Label equivalent command can be used. <STX>S Set Feed Rate Sets blank label movement speed. <STX>O Set Start of Print Position Effect is not on the label immediately following command since media position is at Start of Print between labels. Length to search for next gap or reflective mark. <STX>n Set to Inch Mode Subsequent measurements interpreted in inches (most units in/100) label equivalent command can be used. Determines default power-up configuration.

the print quality and quantity. Downloads Scalable Font to selected memory module. The Format Attribute (A) and the Offset (C. R) commands can be changed at any point between format records to achieve desired effects. Downloads Bitmapped Font to selected memory module. <STX>i Download Scalable Font <ESC> Download Bitmapped Font Label Header Commands These commands determine how the label formatting occurs. Label Header Command A C D H M P P Q R S Name Set Format Attribute Column Offset Set Width and Dot Size Set Heat Setting Set Mirror Mode Set Print Speed Set Backup Speed Set Quantity Set Row Offset Set Feed Speed Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 7 .Overview Download Commands Download Command <STX>I Name Download Image Function Downloads Image to selected memory module. They are typically issued immediately following the <STX>L start of the label format.

Overview 8 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

Easy Control Codes are always enabled. Control Commands. System-Level Commands.. Attention-Getters The attention-getters (e.g.e. informing the printer that it is about to receive a command and the type of command it will be. Two types of sequences have been created to meet any application’s requirements. Alternate. Use these sequences where you normally would use a single SOH or STX character. ^A or Ctrl A). whether in Standard. or Custom Control Code Mode. Appendix A contains the entire ASCII Control Code Chart. “SOH”) are standard ASCII control labels that represent a one character control code (i. Alternate 2..2 Control Code Command Functions Introduction The printer requires a special “attention-getter” character in order to receive a command sequence. Attention-Getter Immediate Commands System-Level Commands Font Loading Commands ASCII Character SOH STX ESC Decimal Value 1 2 27 HEX Value 01 02 1B Table 2-1: Attention Getter Listings Easy Control Codes DPL has been enhanced to accept a 3-character SOH and STX sequence. followed by a command character that directs printer action. and Font Loading Commands have their own unique attention-getter. Control Character SOH STX 3 “%” Character Sequence %01 %02 3 “^”Character Sequence ^01 ^02 Command Type Control System Table 2-2: Easy Control Code Listings Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 9 .

Alternate Line Terminator Example: Alternate Control Codes provide for substitution of the line terminator. For example using Alternate 2. The actual values will depend on whether standard or alternate control codes are enabled for the particular application. The following is a sample label format data stream for a printer configured for Alternate-2 Control Codes: ~L|1911A10001000101234560|X|~UT01ABCDE|~G| 10 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Alternate Control Code Modes are available. ^ set count by amount. Table 2-3: Alternate Control Code Listings  Throughout this manual <SOH>. the line terminator <CR> (0x0D) is replaced by | (0x7C). the <STX>Kc command or. Control Character SOH STX CR ESC “Count By” [1] [1] Standard 0x01 0x02 0x0D 0x1B 0x5E Alternate 0x5E 0x7E 0x0D 0x1B 0x40 Alternate 2 0x5E 0x7E 0x7C 0x1B 0x40 Custom Command Type Control System Line Termination Font Loading Label Formatting User Defined See Label Formatting Commands. the <STX>KD command) requires the substitution of Standard Control Characters with Alternate Control Characters in what is otherwise a normal data stream. as well as the control characters listed above. and ^ will be used to indicate control codes. <STX>.Control Code Command Functions Alternate Control Code Modes For systems unable to transmit certain control codes. <CR>. Configuring the printer to operate in an Alternate Control Code Mode (selected via the Setup Menu. where applicable. <ESC>.

<XON> T (The T may come before the <XON>) SOH * Reset (Display-Equipped Models only) This command forces a soft reset of the microprocessor. resetting the printer. Command Character SOH # Reset This command resets the printer. Immediate Commands may be issued before or after System-Level commands. and clearing the communication and print buffers. however. The command also clears DRAM memory. Resetting the printer returns all settings to default and clears both the communications and printing buffers. see Control Code Command Functions. 2. returning all factory default values. Syntax: Printer Response: <SOH>* The printer will reset. its current operation will be momentarily interrupted to respond to the command.3 Immediate Command Functions Introduction When the printer receives an Immediate Command. they may not be issued among Label Formatting Commands or during font or image downloading. <XON> R (The R may come before the <XON>) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 11 . Syntax: Printer Response: <SOH># The printer will reset. 0x01 or 0x5E. Immediate Commands consist of: 1. Attention-Getter.

The printer returns a string of seventeen characters. Each character (see below) indicates an associated condition.Immediate Command Functions SOH A Send ASCII Status String This command allows the host computer to check the current printer status. See <SOH>F.Y/N . The printer returns a string of eight characters. followed by a carriage return.Y/N . either true (Y) or false (N). Syntax: Sample: Printer Response: <SOH>a <SOH>a abcdefgh:ijklmnop<CR> 12 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . See <SOH>F. followed by a carriage return.Y/N .Y/N .Y/N Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Interpretation = Interpreter busy (imaging) = Paper out or fault = Ribbon out or fault = Printing batch = Busy printing = Printer paused = Label presented = (Internal) Rewinder out or fault Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes <SOH>A <SOH>A abcdefgh<CR> Transmit Sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SOH a Send ASCII Extended Status String This command allows the host computer to check an extended current printer status. Byte 1 is transmitted first. Byte 1 is transmitted first. either true (Y) or false (N).Y/N .Y/N . Syntax: Sample: Printer Response: Where: Possible Values a b c d e f g h .Y/N . Most characters (see below) indicate an associated condition.

The PAUSE Key is pressed. and wait until one of the following occurs: • • The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer. then resume operation from the point of interruption. Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator “Off” and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display. suspend printing. an <XON> character will be transmitted from the printer.Immediate Command Functions Where: Possible Values a Y/N b Y/N c Y/N d Y/N e Y/N f Y/N g Y/N h Y/N : i Y/N j Y/N k Y/N l Y/N m Y/N n Y/N o Y/N p Y/N : q Y/N r Y/N s Y/N t Y/N u Y/N v Y/N w Y/N x Y/N <CR> Interpretation Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y : Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y : Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Interpreter busy (imaging) Paper out or fault Ribbon out or fault Printing batch Busy printing Printer paused Label presented Rewinder out or fault Always : Cutter Fault Paper Out Ribbon Saver Fault Print Head Up Top of Form Fault Ribbon Low N (reserved for future) N (reserved for future) Always : Ready (no data or signal) Waitng for Signal Waitng for Data Com1 has data not parsed N (reserved for future) N (reserved for future) N (reserved for future) N (reserved for future) Transmit Sequence 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 Table 3-1: ASCII Status Bytes SOH B Toggle Pause This command toggles the printer’s paused state between “On” and “Off.) Syntax: Sample: Printer Response: <SOH>B <SOH>B This command will illuminate the Paused/Stop Indicator and/or indicate PAUSED on the LCD or graphics display panel.) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 13 .” (This is the same function achieved by pressing the PAUSE Key. (If the Receive Buffer is not full.

. an <XON> character will be transmitted from the printer. (If the Receive Buffer is not full.Immediate Command Functions SOH C Stop/Cancel This command performs the same function as pressing the STOP/CANCEL Key (i. (The pause condition is terminated as described under <SOH>B. 14 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . until one of the following occurs: • • The <SOH>B command is sent to the printer. Syntax: Printer response: Where: <SOH>E nnnn<CR> nnnn . 0-9999. followed by a carriage return. pauses the printer. SOH E Send Batch Remaining Quantity This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of labels that remain to be printed in the current batch.Are four decimal digits.e. or The PAUSE Key is pressed.) SOH D SOH Shutdown This command is ignored by the printer. and illuminates the Paused/Stop Indicator).) Syntax: Sample: Printer Response: <SOH>C <SOH>C The print buffer is cleared and the Paused/Stop Indicator is illuminated (and/or PAUSED is displayed on the LCD or graphics display) as operations are suspended. Communications latency may cause this value to be higher than actual on some printers. it clears the current format from the print buffer. Upon which the printer will turn the Paused/Stop Indicator “Off” and/or remove PAUSED from the LCD or graphics display.

See <SOH>A. followed by a carriage return. Syntax: Response format: Where: <SOH>F X<CR> “X” is 0 through 0xef with bits as indicated in the “Condition” column below: Bit* 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 * Value 1 or 0 1 or 0 1 or 0 1 or 0 1 or 0 1 or 0 1 or 0 1 or 0 Condition (Internal) Rewinder out or fault Label presented Printer paused Busy printing Printing batch Ribbon out or Fault Paper out or Fault Command interpreter busy (imaging) One is the least significant bit. the single bit will always be zero.Immediate Command Functions SOH e Send Batch Printed Quantity This command causes the printer to return a four-digit number indicating the quantity of labels that have been printed in the current batch. followed by a carriage return (see below).Are four decimal digits. SOH F Send Status Byte This command instructs the printer to send a single status byte where each bit (1 or 0) represents one of the printer’s status flags. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 15 . If an option is unavailable for the printer. Syntax: Printer response: Where: <SOH>e nnnn<CR> nnnn . Communications latency may cause this value to be lower than actual on some printers. 0-9999.

Immediate Command Functions 16 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

2. The initial setting of the date will be stored in the printer’s internal inch counter. This date can be verified by printing a Configuration Label. otherwise. the Julian date will print as entered. 8:55AM. 034  • When set to 000. System-Level Commands are used to override default parameter values (fixed and selectable) and may be used before or after Immediate Commands but cannot be issued among Label Formatting Commands. removed. System-Level Commands consist of: 1. Feb 3. These are used to load and store graphics information. Command Character 3. 1996. <STX>AwmmddyyyyhhMMjjj <STX>A1020319960855034 Mon. Attention-Getter.4 System-Level Command Functions Introduction The most commonly used commands are the System-Level Commands. see Control Code Command Functions. the Julian date is automatically calculated. 0x02 or 0x7E. 7 = Sunday 2 digits for month 2 digits for day 4 digits for year 2 digits for hour in 24 hour format 2 digits for minutes 3 digits for Julian date / constant. If factory defaults are restored the actual Julian date will also be restored. in addition to printer control. without daily increments. 1 = Monday. • Printers without the Real Time Clock option lose the set time/date when power is • Response format is variable. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 17 . see notes below. see the Special Label Formatting Command <STX>T. Parameters (if any). Syntax: Where: w mm dd yyyy hh MM jjj Sample: Printed response: 1 digit for day of week. STX A Set Time and Date This command sets the time and date.

Syntax: Sample: Response format: Where: w mm dd yyyy hh MM jjj 1 digit for day of week. Response sample: 1020319960855034<CR> 18 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 1 = Monday 2 digits for month 2 digits for day 4 digits for year 2 digits for hour in 24 hour format 2 digits for minutes 3 digits for Julian date / constant* <STX>B <STX>B wmmddyyyyhhMMjjj<CR> * See <STX>A for details and restrictions. Syntax: Printer response: Where: Event Invalid character Label printed End of batch Return Characters 0x07 ( BEL ) 0x1E ( RS ) 0x1F ( US ) <STX>a Event dependent.System-Level Command Functions STX a Enable Feedback Characters This command enables the feedback ASCII hex characters to be returned from the printer following specific events after each completed batch of labels when using serial communications.) STX B Get Printer Time and Date Information This command instructs the printer to retrieve its internal time and date information. The default value is ”OFF”. (Also see Appendix D for error codes.

 If no <CR> terminates the command. specifying 9999 will cause continuous printing. The sensor.) When used in conjunction with the <STX>G command. including leading zeros. this will print the format. in inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m). which equals 1.A five-digit quantity. however. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 19 . Syntax: Where: <STX>Ennnnn<CR> nnnnn <CR> Sample: Printer response: .Specifies the length of the media feed for each label format. .  STX E Set Quantity for Stored Label This command sets the number of labels for printing using the format currently in the print buffer.0x0d terminates the name. (The printer automatically stores the most recent format received in the buffer until the printer is reset or power is removed. Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>cnnnn nnnn . See <STX>M. It disables the top-of-form function performed by the Media Sensor.00 inch (assuming Imperial Mode is selected). and. <STX>c0100 The sample above sets a label length of 100. a four-digit quantity (nnnn) can be entered. <STX>E00025<CR> <STX>G 25 labels of the current format in memory will be printed. continues to monitor paper-out conditions.System-Level Command Functions STX c Set Continuous Paper Length This command sets the label size for applications using continuous media. This command must be reset to zero for edge or reflective sensing operation.

When the next label format is sent.System-Level Command Functions STX e Select Edge Sensor This command enables transmissive (see-through) sensing for top-of-form detection of die-cut and holed (notched) media. Syntax: Where: <STX>fnnn nnn . Display-Equipped Models: This command is not honored. the printer motor reverses direction to retract the media to the start-of-print position. STX f Set Form Stop Position (Backfeed Command) This sets the stop position of the printed label. allowing the label to stop at a point past the start-of-print position.Is a three-digit distance from the Media Sensor. Syntax: Printer response: <STX>F The printer will form feed.5 mm) between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). in inches/100 or mm/10. Sample: <STX>f230 The sample above sets a stop position distance of 230 (2. This is the default setting.1 inches (2. 20 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Backfeed will then only occur when printing has stopped for a few seconds. yet it must be greater than the start-of-print position to take effect. the printer will operate without backfeeding.  STX F Form Feed This commands the printer to form feed to the next start of print. If quantities of more than one label are requested. Syntax: <STX>e This command is ignored when <STX>cnnnn is issued with a non-zero value for nnnn. This sensor will detect a minimum gap of 0. Non-Display Models: Option Control must be set via the printer menu to “Host” for this command to have effect. see <STX>Kf and <STX>Kc. This distance is independent of the start-of-print position (<STX>O).3 inches from the Media Sensor’s eye).

IMG 8-bit format.Format Designator: f Designator: F B b I i P p Format Type: 7-bit D-O image load file . The data that immediately follows the command string will be image data.System-Level Command Functions STX G Print Last Label Format This command prints a previously formatted label and restarts a canceled batch job following the last processed label. B&W . (7 bit) 00-FF. The available display area is 312 pixels wide by 94 pixels high. refer to Generating Label Formats.Memory Module Bank Select (see Appendix K). Images larger than this specified width or height will be clipped along the right and/or bottom edges. B&W Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 21 . To print an image. flipped. B&W . The <STX>E command is used to enter the quantity. The image must be stored on a Flash module. printer power must be cycled for the new image to appear. A-Class (and large display H–Class models): A “ready mode” logo image can be input using this command. one label will print. A-F. flipped. Also. B&W . A or omit: b Value: A omit f Image Data Value Range: ASCII Characters 0-9.IMG 8-bit format. If any of the 8-bit input formats are to be used.PCX 8-bit format.) Syntax: <STX>G STX I Input Image Data This command must precede image downloading from the host to the printer. B&W .BMP 8-bit format.  Syntax: Where: The native format for storing downloaded PCX and BMP images is RLE-2. it is necessary to disable the Immediate Command interpreter by executing an <SOH>D command before issuing the <STX>I command. <STX>Iabfnn…n<CR>data a b .PCX 8-bit format.Data Type (optional). (Without the <STX>E command. black and white (B&W) .BMP 8-bit format. The image name must be “logolab” (lowercase only) in the following DPL command. See Appendix N for more information. flipped. This is used when there is a label format in the buffer. . (8 bit) . which results in a better compression ratio for less module space usage when downloading gray-scale images and images with large black or white areas.

hexadecimal. 9a-9z (base 62 numbers). .Up to 16 characters used as an image name..0x0d terminates the Name. STX i Scalable Font Downloading The command structure for downloading TrueType (.Type of scalable font being downloaded: T = TrueType .TTF) scalable fonts (files may be single-byte or double-byte character systems) is as follows: Syntax: Where: <STX>imtnnName<CR>xx…xdata… m . The sample above downloads a TrueType font to Module D. see Appendix K.0x0d terminates the name. t nn Name <CR> xx…x data Sample: <STX>iDT52Tree Frog<CR>000087C2data. padded with leading zeros. (2) name the image “Test”.. Valid range is 50-99.dim file extension). 22 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . and assigns it the Font ID of 52 with the name “Tree Frog” and file extension .. .System-Level Command Functions nn…n <CR> data Sample: . . for this font.Two-digit font reference ID. The size of the font data is 0x87C2 bytes long. . .The scalable font data.The designator of the module where the font is to be saved.The title.. . number of bytes.dtt.Image data <SOH>D <STX>IDpTest <CR> data.data <CR> The sample above instructs the printer to (1) receive an 8-bit PCX image sent by the host in an 8-bit data format. up to 16 characters. . 9A-9Z.Eight-digit size of the font data. and (3) store it in Module D (with a .

STX k Test RS-232 Port This command instructs the printer to transmit the Y character from the printer’s RS-232 port. (Failure to receive Y could indicate an interfacing problem. It is intended for use with the peel mechanism or tear bar when the Present Sensor option is not installed.) Syntax: Printer response: <STX>k Y STX L Enter Label Formatting Command Mode This command switches the printer to the Label Formatting Command Mode. Immediate. (see Label Formatting Commands for additional information).System-Level Command Functions STX J Set Pause for Each Label This command causes the printer to pause after printing each label.) Syntax: <STX>J STX K Extended System-Level Commands This is an expansion of the System-Level Command structure. Syntax: <STX>L Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 23 . s. System-Level. and Font Loading commands will be ignored until the label formatting mode is terminated with E. After removing the printed label. the PAUSE Key must be pushed in order to print the next label. where the printer expects to receive only Record Structures and Label Formatting Commands. (The printer must be reset to clear the <STX>J command. or X. see Extended SystemLevel Commands for more information.

Therefore. and is the default mode. <STX>c0100 will equal 1.00 inch). The default setting is 16 inches/ 406. Maximum setting is 9999 (99.99 inches or 2540 mm). in/100 or mm/10. it is a good practice to set this command to 2. Syntax: <STX>n 24 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . black mark.1 inch [2. etc. notch.Is a four-digit length. <STX>c0100 will equal 10. A paper fault condition can occur if this setting is too close (within 0..g.System-Level Command Functions STX M Set Maximum Label Length This command instructs the printer move media this distance in search of the top-ofform (label edge. The minimum value should be at least 5” (127 mm)..5 to 3 times the actual label length used. Syntax: <STX>m STX n Set Printer to Imperial Mode This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as inch values (e.54 mm]) to the physical length of the label. see <STX>m). Sample: <STX>M0500 The sample above sets a maximum travel distance of 5 inches (unless the printer is in metric mode.g. STX m Set Printer to Metric Mode This command sets the printer to interpret measurements as metric values (e.) before declaring a paper fault. Syntax: Where: <STX>Mnnnn nnnn .4 mm.0 mm). 0000-9999. The default is Imperial (see <STX>n).

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 25 . Sample (Non-Display models): <STX>O0300 The sample above sets a start of print position of 3.0 inch farther away from the leading edge if 110 (ProdPlus) SOP Emulation was selected. the start of print position can be finetuned via the menu: Menu Mode / Print Control / Custom Adjustments / Row Adjust. emulating the selected legacy printer’s distance.System-Level Command Functions STX O Set Start of Print (SOP) Position This command sets the point to begin printing relative to the top-of-form (the label’s edge as detected by the Media Sensor). as measured between the media sensor and the print head burn line. Syntax: Where: <STX>Onnnn nnnn . In addition. Display-Equipped Models: If SOP Emulation is set to “enabled” (via the menu). or 1. and settings below 50 are adjusted back to the default value.Is a four-digit offset value in inches/100 or mm/10. this command sets the point where printing starts. regardless of the SOP Emulation setting. see <STX>m). Sample (Display-Equipped <STX>O0210 models): The sample above will begin printing 0. The “zero” setting is the default value. Display-Equipped: The default setting is “Off” and the printer assumes the natural SOP position.0 inches (unless in Metric Mode.1 inch closer to the leading edge of the label if the 220 (Allegro) SOP Emulation was selected. Non-Display Models: The printer Options Control must be set (via the menu) to “Host” for this command to have effect. Non-Display: The default setting is 0220 in Imperial Mode (0559 in Metric Mode). This value operates independently of the <STX>f command. The printer will feed from the top-of-form to the value specified in this command to begin printing.

The cutter must be installed. data sent following this command will be printed in its raw ASCII format. enabled and the interlock(s) closed for operation. Syntax: <STX>o STX P Set Hex Dump Mode This command instructs the printer to assume Hex Dump Mode.System-Level Command Functions STX o Cycle Cutter This command will cause the optional cutter mechanism to immediately perform a cut after all previously received commands are executed. (This command will not clear the pause condition. labels should be at least four inches (102 mm) long and as wide as the maximum print width. Syntax: <STX>p 26 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . see <SOH>B). To capture all data. Syntax: Printer response is data dependent (layout may vary): <STX>P STX p Controlled Pause This command will cause the printer to pause only after all previously received commands are executed. This command has the same effect as turning “On” the printer while depressing the FEED Key (return normal operation by manual reset). often useful between label batches. Instead of a formatted product.

It is the only command used to control the Ribbon Saver.Y . Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 27 .Memory module designator. Ribbon Saver Control This command enables the operation of the optional Ribbon Saver. Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>qa a <STX>qA The sample above clears memory Module A. The printer must be set to thermal transfer (ribbon) printing mode then. During normal operations if a module becomes corrupted (identifiable when the printer responds with a “No Modules Available” message to a <STX>W command) it must be cleared.) N . during operation.  This command is ignored on non-equipped printers.Disabled Sample: <STX>RY The sample above will turn the ribbon saver on. All stored data will be destroyed. the Ribbon Saver engages automatically. Syntax: Where: <STX>Rx x .  STX R Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module.System-Level Command Functions STX Q Clear All Modules This command instructs the printer to clear all Flash and DRAM modules (except as noted). . see Appendix K. Its operation is continuous when enabled. see the corresponding Operator’s Manual for applicable module options. lifting when the minimum amount of label white space is exceeded.  STX q Clear Module This command clears the selected Flash or DRAM module. Syntax: <STX>Q Will not affect Module Y or the ILPC Font module. All stored data will be destroyed.Enabled (Default = Menu selection.

Syntax: Default setting: <STX>r Edge sensing STX S Set Feed Speed This command controls the output rate of the media when the FEED Key is pressed. Use the <STX>O command to adjust the print position. The end of the black mark determines the top of form. and fan-fold or tag stocks with reflective marks on the underside. use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see Appendix K) and at least four inches (102 mm) long.Is a letter value (see Appendix L).1 inches (2. a format comprised of different patterns and bar codes useful in printer setup. Syntax: Printer response (dot patterns may vary): <STX>T 28 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . STX T Print Quality Label This command instructs the printer to produce a Print Quality label.54 mm) between labels (see the Operator’s Manual for media requirements). Syntax: Where: <STX>Sn n . To capture all printed information. This Media Sensor will detect a minimum mark of 0.System-Level Command Functions STX r Select Reflective Sensor This command enables reflective (black mark) sensing for top-of-form detection of rolled butt-cut.

Syntax: Where: <STX>Unnss…s<CR> nn ss…s Exact Length Sample: .Is the new string data. 2 digits. To easily keep track of fields. When the dynamic data is shorter than the length of the originally defined data field. Feedback Characters can be enabled via the menu (see the Operator’s Manual for additional information). place all of the fields to be updated with the command at the beginning of the label format. Two options are available: Exact Length and Truncated Length.Is the format field number. Syntax: 3 <STX>t Module D: xxxxK xxxx results RAM Tested results <CR> Response format: Where: . Fields are numbered consecutively 01 to 99 in the order received. followed by a <CR> <STX>L 1A1100001000100data field 1<CR> 161100001100110data field 2<CR> 161100001200120data field 3<CR> Q0001 E <STX>U01123<CR> <STX>U02New data F2<CR> <STX>E0002 <STX>G Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 29 . .System-Level Command Functions STX t Test DRAM Memory Module This command tests the DRAM module. The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function. A maximum of 99 format fields can be updated. The printer returns a one-line message stating the module condition (no message is returned if a module is unavailable). . Exact Length Replacement Field Functions – The new data string must equal the original string length and contain valid data.Test results given as “Good” or “Bad”. STX U Label Format String Replacement Field This command places new label data into format fields to build a label.Module size in Kbytes. then field will be padded with blanks (or zero when the Format Record header specifies a numeric bar code).

Is the format field number. followed by a <CR>. it only has three digits (and no spaces). .Is the new string data. The bar code is shortened. The first is formatted with the commands between <STX>L and E.System-Level Command Functions The sample above produces three labels. The bar code is the same length: 3 digits and nine spaces.Truncate option . Truncated Length Replacement Field Functions – A variant of the <STX>U command includes the truncate option “T”. The first is formatted with the commands between <STX>L and E. <STX>L 1A1100001000100data field 1<CR> 161100001100110data field 2<CR> 161100001200120data field 3<CR> Q0001 E <STX>UT01123<CR> <STX>U02New data F2<CR> <STX>E0002 <STX>G The sample above produces three labels. The next two labels print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). where dynamic data shorter than the originally defined field length will not be padded and the original maximum field length is maintained for subsequent replacements. The next two labels print with the replacement data contained in the <STX>U commands (see <STX>E and <STX>G). 30 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 2 digits. Syntax: Where: <STX>UTnnss…s<CR> nn T ss…s Truncated Sample: .

this enables the Present Sensor and Cutter options. Printer options are set by entering selections through the menu. Syntax: Where: <STX>Vn n . Reset or power-up returns the printer to the original settings. The tables below indicate the bit assignments and corresponding command value needed to enable the desired option(s). When applied. Sample: <STX>V5 The sample above corresponds to setting Bits 0 and 2.g. where the appropriate value allows the option(s) to be “On” or “Off. creating a command value of 5.. Bit Assignment 0 1 2 3 Printer Option Cutter N/A Present Sensor N/A Table 4-1: Software Switch Bit Assignment Use the bit assignment table above to determine the command value n in the binary table below (e.” Each option has a corresponding bit whose value is “1” when enabled.Is a single digit ASCII numeric value from 0-F.System-Level Command Functions STX V Software Switch Settings This command controls the printer options. Command Values for Bits Assigned Bit n Value 0 1 4 5 3 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Table 4-2: Software Switch Binary Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 31 . The software setting command allows two of these option settings to be modified without returning to the menu. the command value 5 sets the bits 0 and 2 to “1”). The value of n is used to override the power-up option settings.

04 01/01/2008<CR> STX W Request Memory Module Information This command requests a memory module directory listing. Syntax: Where: <STX>W[b][c]a b c a s optional – list file size also e optional – list file extension also .Data type: F G L C X N M f p * Sample: Printer response (using an H-Class): <STX>WF = = = = = = = = = = Downloaded fonts Graphics (Image) Label formats Configuration files Menu language files Plug-ins Miscellaneous type files Resident fonts Entire module contents All types MODULE: D<CR> S50 92244ttf50<CR> AVAILABLE BYTES: 945152<CR> MODULE: G<CR> AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR> MODULE: X<CR> AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR> MODULE: Y<CR> AVAILABLE BYTES: 852480<CR> 32 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Results may vary depending on printer class.System-Level Command Functions STX v Request Firmware Version This command causes the printer to send its version string (same as printed on the configuration label). model. or firmware version. Syntax: Printer Response: <STX>v VER: H-4212–11. The version may be different from printer to printer.

System-Level Command Functions STX w Test Flash Memory Module This command tests the Flash module. depending upon the size of the module. The default module is one of the following: 1. . See Appendix K. The first alpha designator of the existing modules if item 2 has not occurred. The time for each test will vary from 20 to 120 seconds. Syntax: Where: Response format: Where: <STX>wa a .Module designator.Module designator. The module selected by this command. see Appendix K. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 33 . Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>Xa a <STX>XB The sample above sets “B” as the default module. . 2. . typically used prior to the loading of PCL-4 bitmapped fonts (see Font Loading Commands). If no module is present.Module tested.Module size in Kbytes.Test results given as “Good” or “Bad”. there will be no printer response. Module A: xxxxK results A xxxx results . All stored data will be destroyed. is designed to allow the user to select between modules when downloading information. STX X Set Default Module This command.

. The actual storage space occupied by the file is not released. 34 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . three character font identifier. • Graphic name. where: • Font (bitmapped). The file name is removed from the module directory and thus the file cannot be accessed. up to sixteen alphanumeric characters. two character font identifier. • Font (scalable). Syntax: Where: <STX>xmtnn…n<CR> m t .Module designator. • Label format name.System-Level Command Functions STX x Delete File from Module This command removes a specific file from the specified module. or. characters. see Appendix K. up to sixteen alphanumeric Sample: <STX>xDS50<CR> The sample above deletes a downloaded scalable font with ID 50 from Module D.The file to delete.The file type identification code: G L F S C X N M u = = = = = = = = = Image file Label format file Downloaded bitmapped font file Downloaded scalable font file Configuration file Language file Plug-in file Miscellaneous file type Unknown type – must use extension if applicable nn…n . To reclaim deleted file storage space use <STX>z to pack the module.

. Syntax: Where: <STX>ySxx S . or. U = Double byte symbol sets. The printer must have Feedback Characters enabled for this command to function. 0000 indicates paper is not present. see Appendix H: S = Single byte symbol sets. • Some readings require printer-controlled paper movement to produce a meaningful value. Option dependent and not all symbol sets can be used with all fonts. and. Syntax: Printer response: <STX>Y Thermistor ADC: 0048 Reflective ADC: 0000 Transmissive ADC: 0204 Paperout ADC: 0000 24 Volt ADC: 0217 Contrast ADC: 0093 TOF Adjust ADC: 0170 Ribbon ADC: 0125 Battery Level: Good <CR> Paperout ADC: Battery level: 0225 indicates paper is present. and label stock placed in the sensor. The selected symbol set remains active until another symbol set is selected.System-Level Command Functions STX Y Output Sensor Values This command causes a sensor value response. transmissive (<STX>e) or reflective (<STX>r). (Feedback Mode [Characters] can be enabled via command or menu setting. To repeat the display of values. send <ESC> to terminate this function.Byte-size designation. and options. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 35 . See the <STX>KS command and Appendices E. and H for more information. When <STX>Y is received. send the printer a “SPACE” character (20 hexadecimal). • Media Sensor readings require the appropriate sensor selection. Low indicates an insufficient charge. I. model. Where:  • Equipped sensors vary with printer. the printer will respond with the digitally converted values of the internal analog sensors (see below). STX y Select Font Symbol Set This command selects the scalable font symbol set.Symbol set selection. xx Sample: <STX>ySPM The sample above selects the PC-850 multilingual set. Good indicates a sufficient battery charge. see the <STX>KcFM command or the Operator’s Manual for additional information).

see Appendix K. 36 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . use the labels as wide as the maximum print width (see Appendix K) and at least four inches (102 mm) long. 8 MB PROTOCOL: PARITY: NONE 8 FLASH SIZE: RAM TEST: PASS DATA BITS:  Printed information will vary according to printer. firmware version.  Valid for I-Class and A-Class only. Syntax: Where: <STX>zm m .50 in. To capture all printed information. STX z Pack Module This command causes the printer to reclaim all storage space associated with all deleted files on the specified module (see <STX>X and <STX>x). ignored by all others.01 10/02/2007 CG TIMES HP10 83-2541-11H3 11.The module identification character. model. and options.00. 1 UNLOCKED: FPGA: iPH: 5x-00289 #163 00-0d-70-03-8b-b9 NOT SET 00-90-c9-01-D0-64 VOID DISTANCE: RETRY COUNT: BACKFEED ON CLEAR: DISABLED MACM: MACO: MACR: COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORT A: BAUD RATE: 9600 BPS BOTH SYSTEM INFORMATION PRINT BUFFER SIZE: 100 in. Syntax: Printer response: <STX>Z CONFIGURATION TUE 09:09 AM 10FEB2009 PRINTER KEY: 4212-HE25-060224-090 MODE: 0 DISABLED BACKUP DELAY (1/50s): FONT EMULATION: STANDARD FONTS STATE & FIELDS ENGLISH APPLICATION VERSION: MCL Version: 1.System-Level Command Functions STX Z Print Configuration Label This command causes the printer to produce a Database Configuration Label.06-072 BOOT LOADER: 83-2539-11A 11.083 12/22/2008 LABEL STORE: MENU LANGUAGE: FAULT HANDLING: LEVEL: STANDARD 0.

contains no fields. M Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns memory to an Internal Module. the Extended System-Level Commands expand certain System-Level Commands to provide an extra degree of printer control. y. Memory can be assigned to specific entities or functions in units of 4KB blocks. A value of “0000” will delete the Internal Module (see Appendix J for additional information). draw from the same memory pool. If the total requested memory allocation exceeds the configurable memory available. If no Internal Module exists. Syntax: Sample: <STX>Kix[:jy][:kz]<CR> <STX>KM0020:S0015<CR> The sample above allocates 20*4*1024 bytes for module space and 15*4*1024 bytes for the scalable cache. k are M. z are four-digit maximum numbers of 4K byte blocks or inches/100 or (mm/10) as described below. This field is optional. it will be created and formatted. and are separated by the colon.5 Extended System-Level Command Functions Introduction Issued in the same context as System-Level Commands. The allocation(s) set by this command. Brackets indicate optional fields. then the Internal Module is not affected. If this field does not appear. x. or for configurations not specified. or W. the command will be rejected and the printer will assume its previous configuration. re-sized and formatted. S. The printer executes the memory configuration specified by the command during the next idle period following its receipt. the current amount of memory assigned to the S Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 37 . The number that follows the M is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the size in 4KB blocks of memory to assign to the Internal Module. Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that assigns the amount of internal memory allocated to the smooth scalable font processor. and is stored in Flash memory then reinstated upon a power-up or reset. Any of the three fields are optional. Existing Internal Modules will be erased. j. affecting maximum print length and label throughput (see note below). Where. if it does not appear. i. STX K Memory Configuration This command configures the available DRAM (including any installed optional DRAM) as a method for managing printer memory.

thereby disabling the printing of smooth scalable fonts. Printer Response REMOVE STOCK[CR] ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR] PASSED CALIBRATION[CR] Alternate N/A N/A FAILED CALIBRATION[CR] 38 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . The number that follows the S is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the size in 4 KB blocks to assign to the smooth scalable font processor. For maximum throughput. the printable label width is set to the maximum.Extended System-Level Command Functions smooth scalable font processor will remain unchanged. and. W Represents the start of a sequence (up to five characters) that sets the printable label width. The allocation must be at least 15 (60KB) to print scalable fonts. and at least 30 for double-byte fonts. the memory allocated should allow for a minimum of three times the computed requirement. Setting a width smaller than the natural (maximum) width of the printer effectively extends printable label length.  • Label printing requirements may be computed as bytes (label print length times width allocation times print head resolution divided by 8). depending on the current units setting of the printer (imperial or metric). This field is optional. different front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration progress and outcome. Depending upon the printer model. Any value less than the minimum requirement results in the amount assigned to be zero (0). If the value specified is less than the minimum value allowed (200) then the printable label width is set to the minimum allowed value. the current printable label width is left unchanged. STX K}E Empty Sensor Calibration (Non-Display Models only) This command causes the printer to determine and save the calibration value for an empty media sensor condition. if it does not appear. or the available label length (as determined by <STX>KQ command) should be three times the label print length. see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash sequences details. • These commands will result in a system reset for the EX2. If the value specified exceeds the printable width of the printer. The recommended value is 0025 (100KB). This calibration function should be performed when no material is installed in the media sensor. The number that follows the W is a decimal number (up to four digits) that specifies the printable label width in either 100ths of an inch or in millimeters.

sample. see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash sequences details. Depending upon the printer model. different front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration progress and outcome. Depending upon the printer model. see the corresponding printer operator manual for LED flash sequences details.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX K}M Manual Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only) This command causes the printer to save the sampled calibration values as an operator places different portions of label stock within the media sensor. Printer Response LOAD STOCK[CR] ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR] LOAD MARK[CR] ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR] REMOVE STOCK[CR] ENTER TO CONTINUE[CR] PASSED CALIBRATION[CR] Alternate N/A LOAD GAP[CR] N/A FAILED CALIBRATION[CR] STX K}Q Quick Media Calibration (Non-Display Models only) This command causes the printer to move media. This calibration function should be performed with media installed in the printer. Printer Response FAILED CALIBRATION[CR] ADJUST GAIN SETTING[CR] PASSED CALIBRATION[CR] Alternate N/A FAILED CALIBRATION[CR] Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 39 . and then save sensor samples as calibration values. different front panel LED flash sequences and printer responses (below) will indicate calibration progress and outcome. Sending <ESC> to the printer instead of <CR> will terminate the process and leave the TOF Sensor values unchanged.

Reserved. the character “A” would be returned as “41”).Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KaR Read Data from RFID Tag (Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface) This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that data into a replaceable field.Field number in which to place the data (must be 01.HF . and prints the data in the location specified by the replaceable field. <STX>L 1911A1802000010TEXT U X <STX>KaR0000010001 <STX>G The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01). Should be 0.Command 2. ..Optional – for data in the ASCII format. 40 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .g. . Reserved.Starting block number (000  maximum block number. replaceable fields should be twice as long than if using ASCII data (e.The number of bytes to read. Syntax: Where: <STX>KaRAaaabbbcdee<CR> A aaa bbb . etc. 02. which is dependent upon the transponder manufacturer). Since there are two digits per each hex value. otherwise. Should be 0. UHF – Should be 000.Command 1.  Sample: The 00 value will send read data to the host with no printing. 03. c d ee . . recalls data from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block).) matching the order of Label Formatting command U. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device. . “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field.

Optional – for data in the ASCII format. Syntax: Where: <STX>KaWAaaabbbcdee…e<CR> Aaaa . <STX>KaW0000054455354[CR] The sample above writes the data “TEST” at block zero. Syntax: Where: <STX>Kbnnn<CR> nnn . c d ee…e . STX Kb Backfeed Time Delay This command controls the time a printed label is allowed to remain “presented” before being retracted to the start of print position.Seconds/10 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 41 . followed by the byte count (000-999).HF – Starting block number (000  maximum block number. UHF – Should be 000. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device. a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be displayed. which is dependent upon the transponder manufacturer).Command 2. Reserved for Future (should be 0) . and.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KaW Write Data to RFID Tag (Direct Mode – Generic Read/Write Interface) This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. Reserved for Future (should be 0) .Command 1.Data to be encoded on RFID tag (HF – the last used block will be null-padded. bbb  Sample: UHF ASCII formats must be 8 or 12 characters. . UHF Hexadecimal formats must be 16 or 24 character pairs. otherwise. if necessary).

and equipped options.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KC Get Configuration This command returns the configuration of the printer.0in/sec REVERSE SPEED 4. The form of the returned data is similar to that of a printed Configuration Label. SENSOR CALIBRATION PAPER SENSOR LEVEL 144 GAP SENSOR LEVEL 30 EMPTY SENSOR LEVEL 0 SENSOR GAIN 10 PRINT CONTROL HEAT 10 PRINT SPEED 6. Each line is terminated by a CR (0x0d) & LF (0x0a).25 in.16 in.00 in. MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH •30. 42 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .00 in. CUSTOM ADJUSTMENTS: DARKNESS 32 ROW ADJUST 64 DOTS COLUMN ADJUST 0 DOTS PRESENT ADJUST 64 DOTS PRINTER OPTIONS MODULES A: NOT INSTALLED B: NOT INSTALLED D: FORMATTED F: NOT INSTALLED G: FORMATTED X: FORMATTED Y: 83-2296-01C Z: NOT INSTALLED PRESENT SENSOR NOT INSTALLED CUTTER NOT INSTALLED GPIO PORT: NOT INSTALLED SYSTEM SETTINGS FACTORY SETTING FILE NONE INTERNAL MODULE 1024 KB DEFAULT MODULE D SCALEABLE FONT CACHE 312 KB SINGLE BYTE SYMBOLS PC-850 MULTILINGUAL DOUBLE BYTE SYMBOLS UNICODE ABSOLUTE COUNTER 3782 in.0in/sec ROW OFFSET 00. COLUMN OFFSET 00. not character positions.0in/sec FEED SPEED 6. LABEL WIDTH 4. 27MAR2001 FORMAT ATTRIBUTES XOR IMAGING MODE MULTIPLE LABEL PAUSE MODE DISABLED SELECT SECURITY DISABLED PEEL MODE DISABLED UNITS OF MEASURE IMPERIAL SOP EMULATION DISABLED BACK AFTER PRINT DISABLED MENU LANGUAGE ENGLISH COMMUNICATIONS SERIAL PORT A: BAUD RATE 9600 BPS PROTOCOL BOTH PARITY NONE DATA BITS 8 STOP BITS 1 SERIAL PORT B: NOT INSTALLED PARALLEL PORT A: PORT DIRECTION UNI-DIRECTIONAL PORT STATUS DISABLED PARALLEL PORT B: PORT DIRECTION BI-DIRECTIONAL PORT STATUS DISABLED NIC ADAPTER: DMXNET INACTIVE HOST SETTINGS: HOST TIMEOUT 10 SEC CONTROL CODES STANDARD CODES FEEDBACK CHARACTERS DISABLED ESC SEQUENCES ENABLED HEAT COMMAND ENABLED SPEED COMMANDS ENABLED DIAGNOSTICS HEX DUMP MODE DISABLED PRINT TEST RATE(min) 0 SENSOR READINGS THR TRAN RIBM 24V 132 141 159 178 PS HD RANK 000 254 000 RIBBON SENSOR LIMITS RIBBON ADC LOW 105 RIBBON ADC HIGH 182 END OF LIST <STX>KC<CR>  The format of the displayed information will vary with printer. Syntax: Printer response: CONFIGURATION TUE 02:01PM 01AUG2005 PRINTER KEY: 4308-TB10-010327-494 APPLICATION VERSION: 83-2284-06E 06.00 in. This command should be parsed by KEYWORDS.00 in.04 10/30/2000 SYSTEM INFORMATION PRINT BUFFER SIZE: 280 in.00 in. FLASH SIZE: 4 MB RAM TEST: PASS OPTIONAL LANGUAGES: FRANCAIS ITALIANO DEUTSCH ESPAÑOL CONFIGURATION FILE: NONE MEDIA SETTINGS MEDIA TYPE THERMAL TRANSFER SENSOR TYPE GAP LABEL LENGTH 04. firmware version. 27MAR2001 RESETTABLE COUNTER 205 in. PAPER OUT DISTANCE 00. PRESENT DISTANCE 0.06 07/09/2001 BOOT LOADER: 83-2269-03D 03. model.

may not be effective on other same-type printers due to hardware tolerances.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX Kc Configuration Set This command specifies the Power-up Configuration parameter values for the printer and is equivalent to using other system commands followed by the <SOH>U. or where clarification is required.aaIvalI][. such as memory allocation. The following table summarizes (alphabetically by name) different Configuration Set command parameters. and have no impact when no differences exist.Are parameter values. value ranges. with ranges appropriate for the associated parameter. <STX>Kcaa1val1[. valn . multiple parameter values may be sent in a single command stream. If system commands are sent that override the Power-up Configuration value(s). no commands should be sent to the printer until this reset is complete. In any case. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 43 .STC<CR> The sample above sets the Present Adjust to 120 dots.Are two letter parameter names. Sample: <STX>KcPA120. •  Syntax: Where: Illegal or out of range parameter values may have unpredictable results.). see sample below. . Configuration commands are examined for differences relative to the current configuration. descriptions immediately follow the table. All values are stored in Flash memory and remain in effect until new values are received or until factory defaults are restored. This command is intended for easily configuring a custom setup. If no command equivalent is given. but NOT for dynamic configuration changes. The respective functions are documented in the appropriate Operator’s or Maintenance Manual. valI. the Power-up Configuration value(s) will be restored the next time the printer is powered “On” or is reset. and the Sensor Type to Continuous with a label length of six inches. TOF Bias. aan val1. aaI. Other command highlights include the following: • • • • These parameter values are equivalent to changing the respective menu settings and do not affect the factory default settings of the printer. or as those found in the Menu System (display-equipped models). command equivalents and applicability. Display-equipped models will reset upon completion of a command stream containing parameter value changes. while non-display models reset only for certain functions.aanvaln]<CR> aa1. In addition.CL600. If separated by a semi-colon (. etc. These parameters are the same as those found in the Setup Menu (non-display models). media sensing scaling values. Not all commands are effective on all Class printers.

N Y = Enabled.Extended System-Level Command Functions Configuration Set Commands <STX>Kc Parameter Name Alignment Length Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range 0 – 999 Units / Interpretation 1/100 inch Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent N/A AL (18) Backup After Print BA Y. N Y = Enabled. N = Disabled N/A N/A Buzzer Enable (continued) BZ Y. 3. 4 = Active High Model specific ranges. System Settings N/A Backup Label BL 0. N Y = Enabled. 3 = Active Low. 4 Printer Options N/A Backup (Reverse) Speed BS or bS alpha character Print Control pa British Pound BP Y. N = Disabled System Settings N/A 44 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . N = Disabled System Settings N/A Backup Delay BD 0 – 255 1/50 second 0 = Disabled. see Appendix L.

N = Disabled 1 = Enabled. Print Control N/A Column Offset CO 0 – 9999 1/100 in. N CS 1. 0 = Disabled Communications (25) (E-Class . 0 = Disabled Communications (26) (E-Class . 0 Y = Enabled. and Column Adjust Fine Tune Print Control (7) N/A Column Adjust Fine Tune CF + / – dots Resolution specific. 0 Y = Enabled. N CH 1. N = Disabled 1 = Enabled.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Column Adjust [1] CA xxx dots Resolution specific. Print Control Cnnnn Comm Heat Commands Y. see Appendix K.24) N/A (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 45 .24) N/A Comm Speed Commands Y. see Appendix K.

Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Y = Enabled. N or D = Disabled A = Auto. 1 = Alternate. 2 S = Standard. Media Settings (12) <STX>c Control Codes CC S. N = Disabled Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Comm TOF Commands CT Y. N Communications N/A Continuous Label Length CL 0 – 9999 1/100 in. N/D CE A. E. E = Enabled. 2 = Alternate-2 Communications (11) N/A Cut Behind CB 0–9 Queued label count A or Y = Auto. N = Disabled Printer Options N/A Cutter Equipped A/Y. N Printer Options <STX>V (continued) 46 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . E or Y = Enabled. 1. E/Y.

E = Enhanced Diagnostics N/A NS Y. 600 AA – ZZ. N N/A N/A Display Mode GD S. ySxx DPI Emulation DE Dots per inch System Settings N/A Empty Sensor Level EV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 47 . N = Disabled S = Standard.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Darkness DK 1 – 64 N/A Print Control N/A Default Module DM D. G A. 400. 300. E System Settings N/A Double Byte Symbol Set DS 2-Byte alpha character 200. B Module Letter System Settings <STX>X Delay Rate (Test Labels) Disable Symbol Set Selection DR 0 – 120 Seconds Y = Enabled. printer resident symbol set System Settings <STX>y.

D. Print Control Sa (continued) 48 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 3. 3 = Active Low. B See Table 5-2. R. 4 = Active High Printer Options N/A ESC Sequences ES Y. 4 1 = Low Pulse. 2 = High Pulse. System Settings (24) N/A Feed Speed SS or sS Alpha character Model specific ranges. N Y = Enabled.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent End Character EN D N/A N/A N/A End Of Print EP 1. see Appendix L. N = Disabled Communications N/A Fault Handling FH L. 2.

V = Verifier. T System Settings An Gain Reflective Value GR 0 – 31 Media Settings N/A Gap / Mark Value GM 0 – 255 N/A 0 = Outer sensor. N. N = Disabled 0 = No Substitution 1 = Sub CG Times SA0 2 = Sub User S50 X = XOR. A = Applicator2 Printer Options (23) N/A (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 49 . N = Disabled. default 1 = Inner sensor Media Settings N/A Gap Sensor Location (MP Comapct4 Mark II only) GL 0 or 1 N/A <STX>KcGL GPIO Equipped GE A. V. T = Transparent N/A Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent FM Communications <STX>a Font Emulation FE 0. 2 N/A N/A Format Attributes FA X. O = Opaque. N Units / Interpretation Y = Enabled. 1.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Feedback Mode Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Y. 2 A = Applicator. O.

2 = High Pulse. D Printer Options N/A GPIO Slew GS 0–4 0 = Standard. R System Settings N/A Head Cleaning HC 0 – 9999 Media Settings N/A Heat HE 0 – 30 N/A Print Control (21) Hnn Host Timeout HT 1 – 60 Seconds Communications N/A (continued) 50 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 4 = Active High L = Leftmost dot is zero.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation E = Enabled. R = Rightmost dot is zero Inches (or centimeters) multiplied by 1000 Printer Options N/A Head Bias HB L. D = Disabled Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent GPIO Error Pause GP E. 3 = Active Low. 1 = Low Pulse.

1 = Line. 0 = Disabled Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Ignore Control Codes Y. 0 = Disabled 1 = Enabled. S = Single label System Settings (22) N/A Input Mode EM 0. 7. available.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Y = Enabled. 7 = PL-B. 9 = Auto System Settings (19) N/A Internal Module IM 100 – up to max. 0 Communications N/A Ignore Distances IE 1. 3 = PL-Z. see Appendix K Kbytes System Settings (15) N/A (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 51 . 3. N IC 1. 9 0 = DPL. S M = Multiple label. 1. 0 N/A N/A Imaging Mode IL M. N = Disabled 1 = Enabled.

L. L LE N. P = Prodigy.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Label Alignment LA N. A. N Y = Rotate 180 N = None F = Fields. P. S = States & Fields System Settings N/A Label Store LM F. P. M = Prodigy Max X = XL System Settings (20) N/A Mark Value MV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A (continued) 52 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . S System Settings N/A Label Width LW 0075 – head width. see Appendix K 1/100 inch Media Settings (13) <STX>KW Language Select LS String Language Name System Settings N/A Legacy Emulation N. Y See Table 5-3. L = Prodigy Plus. A. 17 N/A Label Rotation LR Y. M N = None. A. A = Allegro.

00 and later) NE See command (NE) Network Configuration N/A N/A Network Setup (for firmware versions 13. DV2. T. B. I. N/A N/A Option Feedback (continued) OF D. N/A N/A Network Configuration (for firmware versions 14. 1 = Ignore 1/100 inch Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent N/A Communications Maximum Length ML 0 – 9999 Media Settings <STX>M Media Type MT D. X. SV1 See Table 5-4. m. w. 1 Units / Interpretation 0= Normal processing. N Y = Enabled. Y. Z. U. N. S. N = Disabled See Table 5-6.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Maximum Length Ignore Parameter Pneumonic SM Value / Range 0. D. T D = Direct. G. $ See Table 5-5. P. T = Thermal Transfer Media Settings (1) N/A Menu Mode MM U. G U = User. A Z. N/A N/A No Reprint NR Y. W. E. Rx. DV1.99 and earlier) NT A. C. WIFI. S Communications N/A Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 53 . WE. F. A = Advanced System Settings N/A Module Command MCC B G.

0–9 Four characters (or. N = Disabled System Settings <STX>J Peel Mode PE Y. if security is enabled then eight characters). N Y = Enabled. System Settings N/A Pause Mode PM Y. N Y = Enabled. Communications N/A Password Set PW A – Z. N = Disabled System Settings N/A (continued) 54 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Paper Empty PO 0 – 9999 1/100 inch Media Settings N/A Paper Value PV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A Parallel Direction PP xz See Table 5-7.

see Appendix K. and Present Adjust Fine Tune. E. E = Enabled. see Appendix K. N or D = Disabled Printer Options (3) <STX>V Print Contrast PC 0 – 64 N/A Print Control N/A Printer Level PL 000000 – FFFFFF Hex Codes System Settings N/A (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 55 . Print Control (8) N/A Present Adjust Fine Tune PJ + / – dots Dots (model specific).Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Present Adjust [1] PA xxx dots Model specific. Print Control N/A Present Distance PD 0 – 400 1/100 inch Print Control <STX>Kf Present Sensor Equipped PS A/Y. N/D A or Y = Auto.

M. T. N or D = Disabled Printer Options N/A Rewinder Adjust RR -xx. N. Printer Options N/A Ribbon Low Diameter RL 100 – 200 1/100 in. W See Table 5-8. S. P. +yy Printer Options N/A Rewinder Equipped RM A/Y. where -30 to +15 is the valid range. E = Enabled. N/A Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Print Speed pS Alpha character Print Control Pa Query Configuration QQ Q. U. N/D Printer Options N/A RFID Configuration RI A. V. E. see Appendix L. A or Y = Auto. L.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Model specific ranges. E. B. Media Settings N/A (continued) 56 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . D. K Configuration Label N/A Reflective Paper Value RV 0 – 255 N/A Media Settings N/A Retract Delay RW 1 – 255 Specified value times ten milliseconds Applied torque. R.

N = Disabled 3 = Active Low. N Units / Interpretation Y = Enabled. P. 4 = Active High Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent N/A Media Settings Ribbon Low Signal RS 3. P = Prodigy. E = Enabled.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Ribbon Low Pause Parameter Pneumonic RP Value / Range Y. N or D = Disabled Model specific. Printer Control N/A Row Offset RO 0 – 9999 0 – 255 (128 nominal) 1/100 in. see Appendix K. 4 Print Options N/A Ribbon Saver Enable RE A/Y. see Appendix K. see Row Adjust Fine Tune A = Allegro. and Row Adjust Fine Tune Printer Options <STX>R Row Adjust [1] RA xxxx dots Print Control (6) N/A Row Adjust Fine Tune RF + / – dots Resolution specific. D = Disable Print Control Rnnnn SOP Adjust [1] SA N/A <STX>O SOP Emulation SE A. E. L = Prodigy Plus. L. N/A. N/D A or Y = Auto. D System Settings N/A (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 57 .

D. System Settings N/A Sensor Gain Value SG 0 – 32 N/A Media Settings N/A (continued) 58 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Y. V N. Printer Options N/A Security Lock Sl See Table 5-9. H. T See Table 5-11. B. M.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Alphanumeric string Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Save As Filename SF Up to 16 characters System Settings N/A Scalable Font Bolding FB 1 – 36 N/A System Settings N/A Scalable Font Cache SC 100 – 8192 Kbytes System Settings (14) N/A Scalable Heap SH 0 – 9999 Kbytes N/A N/A Scanner Configuration SN C.

<STX>r. N Y = Processed N = Ignored Communications N/A (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 59 . R = Reflective Media Settings (2) <STX>e. <STX>c Serial Port SP xyz See Table 5-12. see Appendix L. C. Print Control <STX>KZSx Software Switch SV Y. printer resident symbol set System Settings <STX>y.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range Units / Interpretation Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent Sensor Type ST G. R G = Gap (edge). C = Continuous. Communications 9 & 10 N/A Single Byte Symbol Set AS 2-Byte alpha character AA – ZZ. ySxx Slew Speed FS Alpha character Model specific ranges.

N = Disabled N/A N/A User Label Mode UD Y. <STX>n User Terminator UT ON N/A N/A N/A (continued) 60 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . N = Disabled System Settings N/A Unit of Measure UM M. C. 4 = Active High Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent N/A EQ Printer Options Stop Location SL A. I M = Metric. 4 Units / Interpretation 3 = Active Low. P. N See Table 5-10. H. I = Imperial System Settings (5) <STX>m. T. N Y = Enabled.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Start of Print Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range 3. N Y = Enabled. 16 N/A TOF Precedence TP Y.

3. 2. U See Table 5-14. E. N/A N/A 1. C. L.00 and later see Network Setup parameter NE) WS A. R. P. V. Commands are provided for backward compatibility on EX2. see associated new commands. X See Table 5-13.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Name Verifier Equipped Parameter Pneumonic Value / Range A/Y.00 and later see Network Setup parameter NE) WE A. P. S. For firmware versions 14. N or D = Disabled Reserved for future use Menu Item (or Number) (if available) Command Equivalent VE Printer Options <STX>KV Verifier Type VT A. E = Enabled. N/D Units / Interpretation A or Y = Auto. F. D N/A N/A WiFi Security (for firmware versions 13. C. The KcQQQ command will respond with the new command equivalent. M. providing backward compatibility. Present distance changes for EX2 will only be accepted if the Stop Location (SL) is set to “Host. query commands will result in printer responses with module IDs that are non-display compatible. The EX2 will accept display-equipped module IDs (D & G) as command parameters for upward compatibility. L. For firmware versions 14.99 and earlier. N/A N/A WiFi Setup (for firmware versions 13. T.99 and earlier. I. K. B.” Table 5-1: Configuration Set Commands Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 61 . N.

(BD) Backup Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a presented label in one-fiftieth (1/50) of a second increments. the printer will not initiate repositioning until the next label is ready to print (may help prevent the curling of the label edge). errors of 0. critical for small labels when Label Alignment is set to YES. (BL) Backup Label – This command determines the timing of reverse label motion when the GPIO option is installed and enabled. See <STX>y or ySxx for command details. see Appendix C for available speed ranges. The number of labels that can be fit between the Media Sensor and the print head will magnify any error in label alignment length. see Appendix J for details. If disabled. Errors in measurement are more favorable on the low side rather than the high side. For very small labels.Extended System-Level Command Functions <STX>Kc Parameter Overviews (AL) Alignment Length – This command.01” can result in noticeable print variations on the labels between the media sensor and the print head. Non-Display models: The printer will verify the label position using the provided Alignment Length before printing the first label after power-up. the printer immediately backs up the label after the applicator-issued start of print signal is received or the label is removed. when enabled. When enabled. (AS) Single Byte Symbol Set – This command allows for a default single-byte symbol set. (BA) Backup After Print – This command determines the timing of the label back up positioning when the present distance is set and the GPIO option or Present Sensor option (including Peel and Present) is enabled. 62 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . cutting or present distance. resulting in faster throughput. (BP) British Pound – This command. The measured length must be provided to the nearest hundredth of an inch. will automatically switch from the Number symbol (#) found at 0x23 (default PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set) to the British Pound symbol (£) at 0x9C. allows a length (measured from leading edge to leading edge of two successive labels) to be entered. (BS or bS) Backup Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement during backup positioning for start of print.

Hex 7E = STX command. if enabled. allows a change to the prefix of the software commands interpreted by the printer: Value S 1 2 Units / Interpretation Standard Codes Alternate Codes Alternate Codes 2 Control Code Definition Hex 01 = SOH command. Hex 0x7C = Carriage Return (CE) Cutter Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the cutter option. sounds printer warning and fault conditions. for non-display models “Y” is equivalent to “E”. depending upon printer type.disables device detection. a fault is generated. Hex 1B = ESC. Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return Hex 5E = SOH command. The <STX>KcQQQ response will show the Column Adjust Fine Tune (CF) equivalent value. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 63 . countby = ^. “E” enables the device. no error is generated. Hex 02 = STX command. (CA) Column Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset setting by shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width termination point to the right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident when multiple printers share label formats. (CB) Cut Behind – This command allows the printer to queue a specified number of small labels before a cut is performed to increase throughput. Hex 0x0D = Carriage Return Hex 5E = SOH command. (CF) Column Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Column Offset setting by shifting both the horizontal start of print position and the Label Width termination point to the right in dots (see Appendix K) to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident when multiple printers share label formats. and. Note that alternate values are accepted for backward compatibility as follows: For display-equipped models “Y” is equivalent to “A”. countby = @. where its presence must be detected. (CC) Control Codes – This command. One of these values is returned in response to <STX>KcQQQ.automatically senses device presence. countby = @. “A” .Extended System-Level Command Functions (BZ) Buzzer Enable – This command controls the audible signaling device that acknowledges User Interface entries and. if undetected. Hex 1B = ESC. Hex 1B = ESC. Hex 7E = STX command. “N” . Note that the EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only. limited in range (28228). otherwise.

Continuous. 64 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . (CO) Column Offset – See Cnnnn for command details. the sensor type is controlled via the menu setting.Extended System-Level Command Functions (CH) Communicated Heat Commands – This command causes the printer to ignore DPL Heat commands. (DE) DPI Emulation – This command allows printers with higher resolutions to emulate lower print resolutions. speed values are controlled via the menu setting. instead. (CL) Continuous Label Length – See <STX>c for command details. the Heat value is controlled via the menu setting. (DM) Default Module – See <STX>X for command details. as follows: • • 600 DPI can emulate 300 and 203 DPI resolutions. instead. (CS) Communicated Speed Commands – This command causes the printer to ignore DPL speed commands. and. instead. 400 DPI can emulate a 203 DPI resolution. (DK) Darkness – This command adjusts the length of the print head strobe to finetune the HEAT setting. (CT) Communicated TOF Commands – This command causes the printer to ignore DPL TOF (Gap. and Reflective) commands.

which is standard). instead. (EM) Input Mode – This command determines the data processing mode: Value 0 Interpretation DPL Input Mode Interpretation Character strings are parsed for standard DPL processing. and a tag calibration performed. Character strings are parsed for PL-Z processing. if possible. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 65 . No parsing occurs. each carriage return (<CR>) terminated data line is printed according to a stored template (see Appendix S). 9 Auto  A clean file is required. applicable only if the appropriate firmware is installed. Character strings are automatically parsed and processed according to the identified language. (EN) End Character – This command terminates a <STX>Kc string. the appropriate Input Mode must be selected. 3 PL-Z 1 Line  For RFID. 7 PL-B Character strings are parsed for PL-B processing. as indicated by a “Z” in the version string (except for H-Class and M-Class Mark II. Also.Extended System-Level Command Functions (DR) Delay Rate – This command sets the number of minutes to delay between multiple batch printings of Quick Test Labels. driver / software options to use “Printer Defaults” should be chosen to minimize potential conflicts. as indicated by a “B” in the version string. otherwise. where extra leading characters may cause the language to be unrecognizable. applicable only if the appropriate firmware is installed. tag type and size should be preselected. the hardware option. (DS) Double Byte Symbol Set – See <STX>y or ySxx for command details.

(FA) Format Attribute – See the “An” command for details (Label Formatting Command Functions). (ES) ESC Sequences – This command allows data containing invalid ESC control code sequences to be processed (helpful because some systems send a “banner” to the printer). where one causes the least amount of bolding and thirty-six the most (default value is 8). When set to “Disabled.” ESC sequences are ignored and the data is processed. 66 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . SOP signal must go high for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate printing. (FB) Scalable Font Bolding – This command sets a bolding factor to fine tune scalable fonts. Bitmapped font downloads are disabled in this mode.Extended System-Level Command Functions (EP) End of Print – This command defines the signal output used to signify the End of Print (EOP) process: Value 1 2 3 4 Units Low Pulse High Pulse Active Low Active High End of Print Interpretation Outputs a low pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long) following printing. Outputs a logic low (zero) following printing. (EQ) Start of Print – This command defines the type of signal input required to control the Start of Print (SOP) process: Value 3 4 Units Active Low Active High Start of Print Interpretation SOP signal must go low for at least 50 milliseconds to initiate printing. Outputs a logic high (one) following printing. (EV) Empty Sensor Level – This command sets threshold value for the “Empty” media sensor parameter. Outputs a high pulse (approximately 30 milliseconds long) following printing.

the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault. Depending on host drivers.) occurs. or above. the entire label batch will be cancelled by pressing the ENTER Key again). Value Units / Interpretation 0 = No Reprint Selection / Definition Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. The label in process is not reprinted. To allow reprinting. the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault.Extended System-Level Command Functions (FE) Font Emulation –This command allows font substitution for all internal fonts. The label in process is reprinted. one of the following actions when faulted: 1 = Standard • If the Retry Count has not been exceeded. • If the CANCEL Key is pressed. “VOID” is printed on the label in process and reprinting occurs automatically. the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault. Depending upon the RETRY COUNT. allowing a new default font to be defined without changing the host DPL data streams. press the ESCAPE Key. L 2 = Void and Retry • If the Retry Count has been exceeded. After the problem is corrected. the TOF. media out. the user may have to disable Symbol Set commands and modify the Default Symbol set. Selecting a default font that supports a desired character set could match with third party software to print native characters without modifying the PC drivers. or.  (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 67 . After the problem is corrected. etc. (FH) Fault Handling – This command determines the level of user intervention and the disposition of the label being printed when a fault condition (ribbon out. to cancel reprinting. printing stops and a fault message is displayed. After the problem is corrected. The label in process is reprinted. press the ENTER Key (and. In other words. or. VOID will not be printed when insufficient text space exists (see VOID DISTANCE. match the PC font with the Printer Font then no interpretation would be required by driver or printer. Printing stops and a fault message is displayed. the operator now has the option of canceling the reprint. below) or if the fault occurs after the label reaches its Present Distance at.

Establishes the number of times a reprint will be attempted when using the RFID or Scanner option. N Table 5-2: Fault Handling Command Example: <STX>KcFHD112<CR> The example above configures the printer to back up and print a one-inch tall “VOID” message on a faulted label. a fault will be declared.10 . (GD) Display Mode – This command controls the size of displayed menu characters. 4 = Void Retry & Cont.Extended System-Level Command Functions Value Units / Interpretation Selection / Definition Increases throughput when bar codes reside near the trailing edge of the label (in the direction of FEED). Retract from presented distance prior to feed-clear motion. until the RETRY COUNT has been exceeded and then that label will be skipped (discarded) and printing will continue to the next label in queue. where Enhanced makes them larger. if the last label printed in this count has been voided.00) R Retry Count (0 – 3) B Enable / Disable Y. with reprint attempts occurring automatically. • The label immediately following a faulted label is not scanned for errors. then the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault. • VOID AND RETRY and REPRINT are automatically disabled. the fault will occur after the next label prints. the job can only be cancelled. Sets the distance (. (FM) Feedback Mode – See <STX>a for command details.2. (FS) Slew Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement between printing areas when the GPIO port is used. D Void Distance (. if two successive faults occur during the printing of that label. 68 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .00) to backup the faulted label to print “VOID” on its trailing edge.  3 = Delayed Scan Fault L • If unreadable.10 . VOID is printed on a faulted label. which also indirectly establishes the font size of the void message. This option is intended for use with applicator equipment that may require certain GPIO signals for proper operation.2. see Appendix L for ranges.

(GP) GPIO Error Pause – This command enables or disables the printer from sending a service required fault to the GPIO output (Applicator Interface CCA. and not de-asserting DRDY when PAUSED. functions as if pressing the Feed Key. Enables the GPIO Port for a bar code verifier. or by <STX>e. clearing alarms and advancing media. Enables the alternate applicator mode. Disables the GPIO Port. allowing FEED any time. and. where Data Ready (DRDY) is extended to overlap the End Of Print (EOP) signal by about 1 msec when printing the last label. Outer Gap sensor is defined as the sensor 6.Extended System-Level Command Functions (GE) GPIO Equipped – This command is used to interface the printer to external controlling devices (see Appendix J): Value Units / Interpretation Applicator GPIO Enable Definition Enables the standard applicator mode.2mm from the edge of the media (GM) Gap / Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s “gap” or “mark” parameter. Type 2 only).3mm from the edge of the media. (GS) GPIO Slew – This command sets the GPIO slew function and control: Value 0 1 2 3 4 Slew Interpretation Standard (Active Low) Low Pulse * High Pulse * Slews while low (Active Low) Slews while high (Active High) * Pulse must be at least 60 milliseconds in length. Inner Gap sensor is defined as the sensor 17. where PAUSE or FAULT de-asserts the DRDY signal and inhibits the FEED operation. de-asserting DRDY as soon as last label starts printing. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 69 . (Outer is default). A N V Disabled Verifier 2 Applicator2 (GL) Gap Sensor Location (MP Compact4 Mark II only) – This command will tell the printer which sensor to use when GAP mode is selected either by the <STX>KcSTG. (GR) Gain Reflective Value – This command sets the sensitivity of the reflective media sensor.

the printer will fault until cleaning is initiated. prevents <STX>O processing that will change the start of print position. and zero disables this function. The value is also used to “timeout” an image / label format download (i. 70 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . (HT) Host Timeout – This command controls the number of seconds a communications port must be idle before the printer will process data from a different port or use a different parsing method. (IC) Ignore Control Codes – This command allows the user to remove control codes (< 20 Hex) in the data field. STX. as viewed from the label exit. The selected line terminator is processed.) (IE) Ignore Distances – This command. when enabled.  The number specified is multiplied by one thousand. The entered value specifies the inch (or centimeter) count to reach before prompting a print head cleaning. when dot zero occupies the right-most location. When dot zero occupies the left-most location on the print head then printing is left justified. If the number specified is exceeded three times. (Note that some fonts do have printable characters in this range and they will not be printed when enabled. When enabled.Extended System-Level Command Functions (HB) Head Bias – This command instructs the printer to switch the dot zero position.. data flow stops before a complete label format is received.e. the data will be ignored). (HC) Head Cleaning – This command controls the print head cleaning routine. CR. DPL Control Code (SOH. (HE) Heat – See Hnn for command details. and. and ^) characters are removed from the data string. printing is right justified. ESC. at any time. if.

Non-Display models begin printing at the current location. (LA) Label Alignment – This command prevents labels with lengths that are less than the distance between the print head and the Media Sensor from being wasted at power-up. The EX2 will only measure the label length when new label stock is loaded. notched.5-inch and greater (≥ 16. notched. the time will reflect the moment the label is imaged rather than when actually printed. or the Setup Menu. When enabled. Description / Operation When disabled.Extended System-Level Command Functions (IL) Imaging Mode – This command instructs the printer whether to pre-image the label format: Value Units / Interpretation Imaging Mode Definition The printer images multiple labels as memory permits. Specify the Label Alignment Length using the <STX>KcAL command. if time-stamping. N= Disabled A= Auto 6. and multiple form lengths. and reflective Y= Enabled Table 5-3: Label Alignment Command  The Real Time Clock (RTC) option allows the position-state of the label to be stored. see note below. but it slows label throughput time. In auto mode. Unless otherwise noted.51 cm) die-cut. The printer images the next label only after the previous label has been successfully printed. If the stock has been changed then a Forced Alignment (press and hold FEED 4 seconds) is recommended.5-inch or less (≤16. see the <STX>KM command) allocated for Module D. continuous.51 cm) die-cut. thus eliminating the need for an alignment prior to first label printing (assuming the label has not moved during power off). the printer will verify the label position using the provided Alignment Length before printing the first label after power-up. however. See the appropriate Operator’s Manual for specific information. Press and hold the FEED Key four seconds so the printer will measure the length of the label. achieving the fastest throughput. Single processing provides time-stamps that are more accurate. M Multiple Label S Single Label (IM) Internal Module – This command sets the number of 1K blocks (or 4K blocks for Non-Display models. The EX2 assumes the label position has not moved while power was “Off” and that no system changes have occurred. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 71 . reflective. unless equipped with RTC (Real Time Clock). the following information pertains to all Non-Display models: Value & Mode Media Type 6. the printer will verify the label position using the provided Alignment Length before printing the first label after power-up.

)  The EX2 requires this command prior to the start of the label format command (<STX>L). (LR) Label Rotation – This command sets label rotation. allowing formats to be flipped 180 degrees. 72 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . (LM) Label Store – This command selects the level of stored format recall to include the label-formatting command fields. see Appendix K. also Prodigy Max® emulation). Objects extending beyond this limit will NOT print. or the label-formatting command fields and the printer state. n.  Use causes the printer to ignore Label commands A.  Language name limited to a twenty character maximum. (LS) Language Select – This command selects the language for the menu system messages and configuration label. Only languages that are resident will be available. and T.Extended System-Level Command Functions (LE) Legacy Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats that were designed for the Allegro® Prodigy®. (LW) Label Width – This command sets the maximum limit for the printable width. (For Non-Display models also see the <STX>KW command. M. and Prodigy Plus® (If the printer is DisplayEquipped.

(For Non-Display models also see the <STX>KD command. This is the amount to be allocated to Module G. in 128 Kbytes blocks. This is the amount to be allocated to Module Z.) (MV) Mark Value – This command sets threshold value for the reflective media sensor’s “mark” parameter. Table 5-4: Module Command Gxx Where xx = (ML) Maximum (Label) Length – See <STX>M for command details. any remaining memory will be allocated to Module X. (MT) Media Type – This command selects the printing method: Direct Thermal for use with heat sensitive media or Thermal Transfer for use with media requiring a ribbon to create an image. Size: 1 – 56.Extended System-Level Command Functions (MCC) Module Command – This command adjusts the size of Flash module on the optional Expansion Card according to the table below (see Appendix K for appropriate module details): Value Zxx Where xx = Module Command Units / Interpretation Size: 1 – 7 Mbytes. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 73 . (MM) Menu Mode – This command sets the menu access level of the printer – where User is a basic listing of menu settings and controls. any remaining memory will be allocated to Module F. and Advanced is a full menu listing.

N.Extended System-Level Command Functions (NE) Network Configuration – (for firmware version 14. Decimal Item Number Delimiter vvvvi Item Value (syntax defined later) : Item Value Delimiter Nested Configuration Sub-Group data stream XX Sub-Group Identifier (1 – N alpha characters) [] Sub-Group Scope Delimiters Configuration Group Terminator XX[…] . The value fields can be represented as one of the following types: Decimal Value A decimal value string consisting of an optional leading ‘+-‘ character and followed by decimal numeric characters 0 – 9. Binary Bit Value A binary bit value expressed like ‘0b011011’ Boolean Value A single character from the following set: ‘Y.vvvv2:….mmmmE+-XXX. Hexadecimal Value A hexadecimal value expressed like ‘0xb9E23c’. F. 0. T.vvvvi: Configuration Group Identifier Group Scope Delimiters Item – Value Delimiter Item – Value Pair Delimiter Configuration Item – Value pairs nnni Decimal Item Numbers from 1 to 9999 . Syntax is: aai[nnn1. Scientific Notation Value A numeric value in scientific notation: (+-)nnnn.00 and later) This command configures the printer for an wired or wireless Ethernet connection.nnnn. ‘…’.vvvv1:nnn2.vvvvn:XX[…]YY[…] ]. where: aai [] . 1’ String Value A string of characters delimited by quotes. The ‘\’ acts as the escape character permitting the following escaped character sequences: o \nnewline (0x0a) o \rcarriage return (0x0d) o \bbackspace o \ttab o \fform feed o \backslash o \’quote o \dddddd consists of 3 OCTAL DIGITS 74 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . : nnni.

’192.Identifier ‘DV2’  Silex Version 1 . followed by string password value Wired Ethernet (802.26’ WIFI 1.0 2.3 Wired Ethernet Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘WE’ 802. This sub group consits of 4 addtional sub-groups:  General WIFI Configuration Parameters . 0 = Wired Ethernet Value 2 = Network Password.N 2. Y = Boolean Value for Enabled DPAC Version 1 sub-group defined for WLS sub-group 1 = DPAC Version 1 Network Type.10.0:]]]. No Item-Value pairs are defined for ‘NE’ but there is the following sub-groups: General Network Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’ 802.’192. 0 = Value for Infrastructure Network Configuration Parameters The two character identifier for the Network Configuration Parameters is ‘NE’. <CR> <STX>Kc NE G 1.Identifier ‘DV1’  DPAC Version 2 .0:2.N:2. followed by IP address string Wireless Ethernet (802.Y::DV1[1. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 75 .168.168.3) sub-group 1 = DHCP Enabled.11) sub-group 1 = DHCP Enabled.Identifier ‘SV1’ The configuration data stream for the network configuration parameters has the following structure: NE[G[…]WE[…]WIFI[..Extended System-Level Command Functions Example: <STX>KcNE[G[1.26’:]WIFI[1.11 Wireless Ethernet (WIFI) Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘WIFI’.Y DV1 1.0 This is the beginning of command Network Ethernet group General Network sub-group 1 = Primary Interface Item.Identifier ‘G’  DPAC Version 1 .10.’sysadm’ WE 1.’sysadm’:]WE[1. N = Boolean Value for Not Enabled 2 = Static IP Address.]].

15 16 Y Y String String 17 18 19 20 21 Y Y Y N N String String String String String 76 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .3) and Wireless Ethernet (802. SNMP Server IP Address in dotted decimal notation. Enables or Disables the NetBIOS services. Static Secondary WINS Server IP Address in dotted decimal notation. Provides a Default MTU Size (used internally). Enables or Disables the Netcenter services. Value of the TCP Port for Print Services. it would be the PRIMARY interface used. Email Address – Not currently used. only item-value pairs.Extended System-Level Command Functions General Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’ The ‘G’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply ‘globally’ or ‘generally’ to any ethernet interface used. Static Primary DNS Server IP Address in dotted decimal notation. SNMP TRAP IP Address in dotted decimal notation.11). in the future if multiple ethernet interfaces would be supported. Enables or Disables the TELNET services. NetBIOS Name for the Printer. It is called ‘Primary’ since. Value of the Gratuitous ARP Period in seconds. Interface types are Wired Ethernet (802. The ‘ItemValue’ pairs within the ‘G’ sub-group are defined by the following table: Item Number 1 Name Available to User (Y/N) Y Value Type Description Primary Interface Decimal 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Network Password SNMP Enable Telnet Enable FTP Enable HTTP Enable LPD Enable NetBIOS Enable Netcenter Enable Gratuitous ARP Period Printer TCP Port Default MTU Static Primary WINS Server IP Address Static Secondary WINS Server IP Address Static Primary DNS Server IP Address Static Secondary DNS Server IP Address SNMP TRAP IP Address SNMP Server Address NetBIOS Name Domain Name Email Address Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y String Boolean Boolean Boolean Boolean Boolean Boolean Boolean Decimal Decimal Decimal String String Indicates the primary or used ethernet interface type. Enables or Disables the LPD (Line Printer Daemon) services. Enables or Disables the HTTP (WEB Pages) Server. Enables or Disables the SNMP services. No sub-groups are currently defined for the ‘G’ sub-group of configuration parameters. Static Secondary DNS Server IP Address in dotted decimal notation. Enables or Disables the FTP Server. Provides the network password used for WEB and TELNET sessions. Domain Name – Not currently used. 0 = Disabled. Static Primary WINS Server IP Address in dotted decimal notation.

Defaults to the DEFAULT MTU from the ‘G’ sub-group.) Auto-Negotiate = 0 10BaseT Half Duplex = 1 10BaseT Full Duplex = 2 100BaseT Half Duplex = 3 100BaseT Full Duplex = 4 Defines the ethernet PHY Advertise mode. Formally known as IP Discovery. Static Default Gateway (Router) IP Address in dotted decimal notation.3 – Wired Ethernet Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘WE’ The ‘WE’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply only to the Wired Ethernet (802. Static Subnet Mask for the Printer in dotted decimal notation.Extended System-Level Command Functions 802. The ‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘WE’ sub-group are defined by the following table: Item Number 1 Name Available to User (Y/N) Y Value Type Description DHCP Enable Boolean 2 3 4 5 Static Printer IP Address Static Printer Subnet Mask Static Printer Default Gateway or Router PHY Mode Y Y Y String String String Indicates if the DHCP Protocol is to be used to automatically obtain all required network addresses. Four (4) sub-groups are currently defined for the ‘WIFI’ subgroup of configuration parameters and are as follows: General WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’ DPAC Version 1 – Identifier ‘DV1’ DPAC Version 2 (Veyron) – Identifier ‘DV2’ SILEX Version 1 – Identifier ‘SV1’ Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 77 . etc. Defines the ethernet PHY Mode (Auto. Always = 0 Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size for the wired interface.11 – Wireless Ethernet . Auto = 0 All Capabilities = 1 Defines the ethernet PHY capabilities to advertise.3 Specification) ethernet interface. No sub-groups are currently defined for the ‘WE’ sub-group of configuration parameters. 10BaseT HD. Y Decimal 6 PHY Advertise Mode Y Decimal 7 PHY Capabilities to Advertise MTU Y Decimal 8 Y Decimal 802.11 Specification) ethernet interface. Static IP Address for the Printer in dotted decimal notation. only item-value pairs.WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘WIFI’ The ‘WIFI’ sub-group contains network configuration parameters that apply only to the Wireless Ethernet (802.

Password String for LEAP (Cisco) EAP Protocol. These configuration parameters are universally standard within the WIFI realm and are interpreted commonly by the various WIFI radio modules. Two (2) character zero terminate Region Code string. Static Default Gateway (Router) IP Address in dotted decimal notation. such as “US”. WIFI Module type (DPAC1=1. User ID String for other EAP Protocols. The ‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘G’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the following table: Item Number 1 Name Available to User (Y/N) Y Value Type Description DHCP Enable Boolean 2 3 4 5 Static Printer IP Address Static Printer Subnet Mask Static Printer Default Gateway or Router MTU Y Y Y String String String Indicates if the DHCP Protocol is to be used to automatically obtain all required network addresses. 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 1 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 2 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 3 10 or 26 digit WEP Key 4 8 to 64 character Pre-Shared Key used by WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK User ID String for LEAP (Cisco) EAP Protocol. A decimal number from 1 to 4 that designates the WEP key used.Extended System-Level Command Functions General WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘G’ The ‘G’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are generally common to ALL WIFI radio modules used by Datamax-O’Neil. Defaults to the DEFAULT MTU from the ‘G’ sub-group. Password String for other EAP Protocols Realm String for EAP Protocols that utilize a Realm. Defines the Maximum Transmission Unit size for the wired interface. Static Subnet Mask for the Printer in dotted decimal notation. Cannot exceed the maximum ethernet packet size!!! WIFI Channel Number used when operating in Peer-Peer (Ad-Hoc) mode. DPAC2=3) Y Decimal 6 Ad-Hoc Channel Y Decimal 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Region Code WEP Key Used WEP Key 1 WEP Key 2 WEP Key 3 WEP Key 4 Pre-Shared Key or PSK LEAP Used ID LEAP Password EAP User ID EAP Password EAP Realm SSID WIFI Type Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y String Decimal String String String String String String String String String String String Decimal 78 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . SILEX=2. Formally known as IP Discovery. String that represents the SSID if in Infrastructure mode. Static IP Address for the Printer in dotted decimal notation.

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 79 . Automatic = 0 Open = 1 Shared Key = 2 Static IP Address for the DPAC Version 1 radio module in dotted decimal notation. AD-HOC = 0 Infrastructure = 1 Value that represents the DPAC Version 1 Security Codes supported. Security Disabled = 0 WEP. Open. The ‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘DV1’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the following table: Item Number 1 Name Available to User (Y/N) Y Value Type Description Network Type Decimal 2 WIFI Security Type Y Decimal TKIP+40Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 5 TKIP+128Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 6 TKIP+40Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 7 TKIP+128Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 8 Value that represents a Valid Network Type for the DPAC Version 1 module.Extended System-Level Command Functions DPAC Version 1 WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘DV1’ The ‘DV1’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are specific to the DPAC Version 1 WIFI radio module used by Datamax-O’Neil. 128 Bit Key = 2 WPA-PSK = 3 WPA CISCO LEAP = 4 3 WIFI Authentication Type Y Decimal 4 Static Radio IP Address Static Radio Subnet Mask Y String 5 Y String Value that represents the DPAC Version 1 Authentication Types supported (Auto. 64 Bit Key = 1 WEP. Static Subnet Mask for the DPAC Version 1 radio module in dotted decimal notation. Shared Key).

128 Bit Key = 2 WPA-PSK = 3 WPA CISCO LEAP = 4 TKIP+40Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 5 TKIP+128Bit WEP using EAP (LEAP) = 6 TKIP+40Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 7 TKIP+128Bit WEP using WPA-PSK = 8 WPA2-PSK = 9 WPA/WPA2 TLS = 10 WPA/WPA2 PEAP = 11 WPA/WPA2 TTLS = 12 Value that represents the DPAC Version 2 Authentication Types supported (Auto. Security Disabled = 0 WEP. Automatic = 0 Open = 1 Shared Key = 2 80 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . etc.Extended System-Level Command Functions DPAC Version 2 WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘DV2’ The ‘DV2’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are specific to the DPAC Version 2 (Veyron) WIFI radio module used by Datamax-O’Neil. EAP. AD-HOC = 0 Infrastructure = 1 Value that represents the DPAC Version 2 Security Codes supported. Open. The ‘ItemValue’ pairs within the ‘DV2’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the following table: Item Number 1 Name Available to User (Y/N) Y Value Type Description Network Type Decimal 2 WIFI Security Type Y Decimal 3 WIFI Authentication Type Y Decimal Value that represents a Valid Network Type for the DPAC Version 2 module.). Shared Key. 64 Bit Key = 1 WEP.

etc. EAP. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 81 . AD-HOC = 0 Infrastructure = 1 Value that represents the SILEX Version 1 Encryption Types supported.). The ‘Item-Value’ pairs within the ‘SV1’ sub-group of the ‘WIFI’ sub-group are defined by the following table: Item Number 1 Name Available to User (Y/N) Y Value Type Description Network Type Decimal 2 Encryption Type Y Decimal 3 Authentication Type Y Decimal 4 Inner Authentication Type Y Decimal 5 Use WPA Group Key Y Boolean Value that represents a Valid Network Type for the SILEX Version 1 module.Extended System-Level Command Functions SILEX Version 1 WIFI Configuration Parameters – Identifier ‘SV1’ The ‘SV1’ WIFI sub-group contains the configuration parameters that are specific to the SILEX Version 1 WIFI radio module used by Datamax-O’Neil. Open. Security disabled = 0 WEP64 = 1 WEP128 = 2 WPA = 3 WPA2 = 4 Value that represents the SILEX Version 1 Authentication Types supported (Auto. Open System = 0 Shared Key = 1 Pre-Shared Key = 2 TTLS = 3 LEAP = 4 PEAP = 5 EAP-FAST = 6 TLS = 7 Value that represents the Inner Authentication Type used if a Tunneled EAP method is specified. Pre-Shared Key. None = 0 PAP = 1 MSCHAP_V2 = 2 Enables or Disables use of the WPA Group Key.

0 – 2048. where x: C x 0 = Advertises the DUPLEX CAPABILITY set value.000. Half Duplex 10Base-T. where a: F a Y = Enable N = Disable Is the Gateway Address. where a: D a Y = Enable N = Disable Is the communication capability for the Wired network. no spaces Transmits the printer’s Wired network communication capability.xxx.000. Full Duplex 0 Y 0 Is FTP enable.99 and earlier) This command configures the printer for an Ethernet connection. Is Discovery (DHCP or Bootp). where x: E x 0 1 2 3 4 = = = = = Auto-Negotiate 10Base-T. Value Parameter Interpretation Is the transmission interval for Gratuitous ARP. Full Duplex 100Base-T.Extended System-Level Command Functions (NT) Network Setup – (for firmware version 13. where: B y y = Up to 16 alphanumeric characters. where: G xxx. 1 = Advertises all possibilities for DUPLEX CAPABILITY.xxx. Half Duplex 100Base-T. in minutes DMX_[and the last 3 octets (in hexadecimal) of the MACM (or MACO) Address] Default Value* A x 0 Is Network Bios Name.000 N (continued) 82 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .xxx x = 0 to 9 000. where: x = The interval.

000.xxx x = 0 to 9 Is MTU packet size.026 m x x = a range.xxx.Extended System-Level Command Functions Value Parameter Interpretation Is the IP Address.xxx x = 0 to 9 Is Telnet enable.010.xxx. where: Y U xxx.xxx x = 0 to 9 Is the destination Port Number.xxx x = 0 to 9 Is SNMP enable.000. where: 192.xxx.000 P xxxx x = 0 to 9 Is the Subnet Mask.xxx.000 K a Y = Enable N = Disable N (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 83 .xxx. 512 – 65515. in bytes Is the SNMP Trap Address.168. where: 9100 S xxx.000.xxx.xxx.000 X a Y = Enable N = Disable Is the DNS1 Address.xxx.xxx x = 0 to 9 Is WiFi enable.xxx.xxx x = 0 to 9 Is TCP Keep Alive enable.xxx.255. where a: 255.000. where: N Y xxx. where: Default Value* I xxx.xxx.000.000. where a: 000. where a: 000. where: 000.000 w a Y = Enable N = Disable Is the WINS1 Address. where: 1500 N xxx.255.xxx.000 T a Y = Enable N = Disable Is the WINS2 Address.000. where a: 000. where: N W xxx.000.

where: Default Value* Z xxx. Example: <STX>KcNTI010.000.000 NTG010.<CR> The command string above is typical of a network setup string (where the values meanings are shown in the following table). etc.012. the FEED Key must be pressed to clear the fault and resume normal operation.0.0.255. After the problem is corrected.012.12.243 Subnet Mask: 255.Extended System-Level Command Functions Value Parameter Interpretation Is the DNS2 Address.NTS255.000 $ xxxxxx x = alphanumeric characters sysadm * Prior to the introduction of WiFi.254..0.xxx.255. 84 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 192. paper out. This configuration setup command string may be included with any other Kc sub-commands. the label in process is not reprinted.xxx x = 0 to 9 Sets the webpage password.243 NTS255.0.12.000.000. When enabled.000. printing stops and a fault indicator is illuminated.). where: 000.0.0.243 must be sent to the printer as 010.0 Gateway Address: 10.254 DHCP is disabled (NR) No Reprint – This command controls the label reprint function following the correction of a fault condition.000. Upon detection of a fault (ribbon out.254 NTDN Interpretation IP Address: 10.254. Sub-commands and Values NTI010.12.012. an IP Address of 10.000.0.254.192 was the IP default value and the Subnet Mask was 0.254. Table 5-5: Network Setup  Each octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e.000.NTDN.243).255.012.000.243.xxx.g.012.NTG010.0.

Value D Option Feedback Mode Units / Interpretation = Disable D. Rx. Once enabled. where x is the response format: A = ASCII H = Hexadecimal S = Scanner Enable Table 5-6: Option Feedback Command  Not supported on the I-4208 printer. DPL Symbol Set commands are ignored. as follows. S Rx = RFID Enable. (OF) Option Feedback Mode – This command configures the printer to output the status of the RFID or Scanner option to the active port. the printer will report information about the results of the last label printed. The format and contents of the returned information is as follows: Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 85 .Extended System-Level Command Functions (NS) Disable Symbol Set Selection – This command prevents the <STX>y and y commands from changing the default single-byte symbol set. One response per label is returned to the host (this includes each voided and retried label). When enabled.  When enabled. the only way to change the current symbol set is with the <STX>KcAS command.

01.02.DATA2>[CR] 86 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . given in four characters each.0013:0001.C. .C.) Write response example: <R.The number of good reads for bar codes or tags.0012:0001.C.0002:0001.0002:0001.The printer’s internal Job Identifier and Sub Job Identifier.) if multiple reads.0013:0001>[CR] Write/Verify hexadecimal response example: <R. given in two characters.C. delimited with semicolons (.01.DATA1>[CR] <S.446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374> [CR] Write/Verify ASCII response example: <R.E.00.0002:0001.Extended System-Level Command Functions Response format: <A. successfully retried: <S.B.03.01.DATA2. and.01.DATA1.D.01.446174616D61782077726974657320524649442062657374> [CR] Read hexadecimal response example: <R.01. Write/Verify commands return the data written.F>[CR] Where: A . Datamax writes RFID best >[CR] Read ASCII response example: <R.01.00.03. Datamax writes RFID best >[CR] Scanner response samples: A successfully read label example: <S. .The number of expected reads for bar codes or tags.DATA3>[CR] A failed label. given in two characters.C.Resulting status: C = entire label complete F = faulted (failed) label U = unknown . (See Appendix S for a listing of commands.0013:0001.0012:0001.C.C.02.DATA1.The data read.01.Device type: R = RFID S = Scanner . B C D E F RFID response sample differences: Since RFID commands vary in operation.F.C. . Write commands return entire tag data.01. the data returned also differs.02. Read commands return data and length requested in the specified format.

(PE) Peel Mode – This command. the printer will operate without reversing. (See Stop Location. (PJ) Present Adjust Fine Tune – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance setting in dots to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple printers share label formats. (PL) Printer Level – This command is used to upgrade the software feature level of the printer. specifies that a Feed operation be prevented when the label is presented and not removed.Extended System-Level Command Functions (PA) Present Adjust – This command fine-tunes the Present Distance setting in dots to compensate for slight mechanical differences sometimes evident if multiple printers share label formats. the printer will automatically backfeed to the start position. (PD) Present Distance – This command sets the label stop position past the start of print. when enabled. below). Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 87 . <STX>KcQQQ response shows the Present Adjust Fine Tune (PJ) equivalent value. which allows fine-tuning for specific media/ribbon mix. or if the printer is to wait for the GPIO start of print signal. limited in range (28-228). (PM) Pause Mode – See <STX>J for command details. If the present distance is set to zero. The EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only. (PC) Print Contrast – This command adjusts the relative print edge (gray) component of the print quality. When the next label format is received.

B (bidirectional – IEEE 1284 back-channel operation). no error will be generated. otherwise.automatically senses device presence. N or D . Also see the <STX>KD command.  Not recommended for use with non-display models. or. (PT) Tear Position – This command sets the label stopping location at the tear plate on the printer’s cover. (PP) Parallel Direction – This command controls the parallel port communications settings: Value Parallel Direction Units / Interpretation x = Port ID: A or B xz z = Direction: U (unidirectional – one-way communication). Table 5-7: Parallel Communications Configuration Command (PS) Present Sensor Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the present sensor option. where its presence must be detected.disables device detection. 88 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . instead see Stop Location (SL).Extended System-Level Command Functions (PO) Paper Empty – This command sets the length of travel before an out of stock condition is declared. a fault is generated. E . or N. (Note that the value range for Non-Display models is only Y.) (pS) Print Speed – See Label Formatting Command Function P for details. See <STX>V for command details. A (or Y) .enables the device. if undetected.

<STX>KcQQQ response shows the Row Adjust Fine Tune (RF) equivalent value.enables the device. used for generating Upgrade Codes. (RA) Row Adjust – This command shifts the vertical start of print position (in dots).Extended System-Level Command Functions (PV) Paper Value – This command sets threshold value for the media sensor’s “paper” parameter. K causes the printer to respond with the Printer Key. Note that the EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only.disables device detection. otherwise.automatically senses device presence. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 89 . enter the new password followed by the old password (with no spaces) in this form: XXXXXXXX  To be activated. E . if undetected. (RF) Row Adjust Fine Tune – This command shifts the vertical start of print position in dots (see Appendix K) upward or downward. limited in range (28-228). A (or Y) . a fault is generated. N or D . The <STX>Kc response command stream format is sent to the host computer via the same port as the query containing all parameters controlled by the <STX>Kc command. A parameter value of Q causes the printer to respond with the current configuration settings. (QQ) Configuration Query – This command requires a parameter of either K or Q. where its presence must be detected. no error is generated. (RE) Ribbon Saver Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the ribbon saver option. See <STX>R for command details. the default password (0000) must be changed. (PW) Password Set – This command modifies the numeric password required to access the menu when security is enabled. and may be used for restoring the printer’s configuration or for configuring other printers. If security is enabled.

For Hex EPC data a 96-bit tag size is 24 characters and 64-bit is 16. the data will be cut. or. Sets the Lock Code (Alien UHF only). Allows erasures of the tag on error (HF only). If the data is less than the selected EPC tag data size. nulls will be added to the back (right). Allows locking the DSFID after writing (HF only). D = Disable E = Enable. Allows locking the AFI after writing (HF only). the data will be cut. or. D = Disable RFID Configuration Definition / Function Sets the Application Family Identifier (AFI). D = Disable Bn where n: 1 = Leading 2 = Trailing DIhh DLn where hh: and where n: where n: where hh: 2-Chararacter Hex ID E = Enable. Enables the RFID module for UHF Class 1 (Alien). Disables the RFID module.Extended System-Level Command Functions (RI) RFID Configuration – This command configures the optional RFID interface module. if too much data is given. Disables padding or truncating of data (EPC only). nulls will be added to the front (left). Sets the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID). if too much data is given. Enables the RFID module for UHF Multiprotocol. D = Disable 2-Chararacter Hex ID D = Disable Mn where n: H = HF U = UHF M = UHF (continued)  Nulls are represented as “00”. (“N” is also a valid disabler. HF only. as follows: Value AIhh ALn Units / Interpretation where hh: and where n: 2-Chararacter Hex ID E = Enable.) Enables the RFID module for HF (Securakey). HF only. En Lhh 90 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . For ASCII EPC data a 96-bit tag size is 12 characters and 64-bit is 8. If the data is less than the selected EPC tag data size.

(Subject to change. lock after writing.RIWE.RIEE.RIS04. Philips. Un where n: Sets the UHF tag type (Multiprotocol UHF only). Allows locking the tag after writing. Vn Wn where n: where n: Adjusts the power. representing the manufacturer’s code (HF only).Extended System-Level Command Functions Value Nn Units / Interpretation where n: 64 = 64-bit 96 = 96-bit 3-Digit Value 0–9 2-Chararacter Hex ID 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = = = = = ISO 15693.00. D = Disable RFID Configuration Definition / Function Sets the UHF tag data size (Multiprotocol UHF only). protect after write DFSID 22.RIP000<CR> The above example sets the printer to HF. ST Micro LRI 512. in dBmn (Multiprotocol UHF only).RIA11E.) Sets the number of retries for RFID functions. Sets the tag encoding position: A value of 0. ST Micro LRI 64 EPC 0 EPC 0+ Matrics EPC 0+ Impinj EPC 1 UCODE EPC 1.RID22E. allow 3 tries for each read or write attempt. protect after write AFI 11.19* EM 4022/4222 Gen 2 -4 to +4 E = Enable. or. set EAS Bit (Mfg. Table 5-8: RFID Configuration Set Commands Example: <STX>KcRIMH. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 91 . Pxxx where xxx: where n: where hh: Rn Shh Tn where n: Establishes the tag type (HF only). a value greater than 0 causes the presented position to be used. Code 0x04). Texas Instruments. and use a position of 0.00 causes the print position to be used. Sets the Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) set.RIR3. erase the tag if there is an error. *Unavailable for A-Class printers.

E . in percentage points of the nominal force. where the time specified is multiplied by ten milliseconds. where its presence must be detected. (RO) Row Offset – See Rnnnn (in Label Formatting Command Functions) for command details. to minimize TOF registration drift (sometimes evident when using small or narrow media). the PAUSE Button must be pressed to continue printing. 92 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . (RM) Rewinder Equipped – This command allows the printer to sense the powered internal rewind option. a fault is generated. (RW) Retract Delay – This command sets a time delay for the retraction of a presented label. (RR) Rewinder Adjust – This command changes the torque applied by the powered rewinder. otherwise. (RP) Ribbon Low Pause – This command (when enabled) pauses the printer when a Ribbon Low Diameter warning is declared.disables device detection. (RS) Ribbon Low Signal – This command sets the signal output type for the Ribbon Low Diameter condition when using the optional GPIO (see Appendix J). (RV) Reflective Paper Value – This command sets the threshold value for the reflective media sensor’s paper parameter. if undetected. N or D . A (or Y) .Extended System-Level Command Functions (RL) Ribbon Low Diameter – This command sets the threshold for a low ribbon indication. no error is generated.automatically senses device presence. where nnnn is the diameter in hundredths of inches.enables the device.

(SG) Sensor Gain Value – This command sets the control of the voltage to the LED emitter of the Media Sensor.) (SE) SOP Emulation – This command enables the <STX>O and <STX>f print positioning commands to allow backward compatibility with label formats designed for other printers. relative to the top of form. saves the effective printer configuration to a file in Flash memory with a . (For non-display models see the <STX>KS command.Extended System-Level Command Functions (SA) SOP Adjust – This command sets the start of print (SOP) location. which may be sent separately or included as the last command in an <STX>Kc command string. (SH) Scalable Heap – This command sets a working “scratch pad space” in DRAM for scalable font construction. see Appendix K. (SC) Scalable Cache – This command sets the number of 1K blocks allocated for the scaleable font engine.dcm file extension. Available memory dependent upon model. (SF) Save As Filename – This command. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 93 . limited in range (28-228). The EX2 accepts this command for backward compatibility only. See <STX>O for command details.

Sets the stop location to the start of the next label.Extended System-Level Command Functions (Sl) Security Lock – This command provides the ability to password-protect the User Interface. Sets the stop location at the tear bar. Host commands will override. This selection has the same effect as <STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 0. The Present Sensor status and this setting are independent. equivalent to setting the <STX>KD Ignore Host Distance bit value 1. as follows: Value A Stop Location Automatically sets the stop location. Where xxxx is a new password. Installed options will be “auto-sensed” and the appropriate stop position will automatically be set. Table 5-10: Stop Location Command H P C T N 94 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . the position is just following the end of the label. the default password (0000) must be changed. The cutter status and this setting are independent. this enables Menu protection and sets a new password. Sets the stop location to a nominal cut position. The stop location (present distance) may be controlled dynamically by the host using the <STX>f or <STX>Kf commands. (SL) Stop Location – This command sets the label stopping (and in certain cases the starting) location. Table 5-9: Security Lock Command Yxxxx Txxxx  To be activated. as follows: Value Nxxxx Security Function Where xxxx is the current password. a nominal peel position. and sets a new password. disables Test functions. Sets the stop location at approximately two millimeters behind the peel bar edge. For die-cut media. this disables Menu protection. Where xxxx is a new password. If no options are installed the printer sets stop location to the next label’s start of print. Host commands are ignored. Sets stop position according to options installed. this enables Menu protection.

Extended System-Level Command Functions (SM) Maximum (Label) Length Ignore – This command controls recognition of the <STX>M command. followed by “Y” (to enable) or “N” (to disable) the code. Mode – Enables detection of the scanner by the printer. where: 00 – 99 (00 = Auto [variable] mode. enable only those symbologies that will be read. counting those codes present) C  Do not use Auto Mode with bitmapped codes or codes with certain addendums. as follows: Values Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation Bar Code Type – Specifies the bar code. 2x) H  The specified distance should not exceed 50% of the measured bar code height. see Appendix F. where: 1 2 3 4 5 0 = = = = = = 1/16 2/16 3/16 1/4 1/2 Disabled (defaults to Redundancy Level. (SN) Scanner Configuration – This command configures the linear scanner. using two digits. D = Disabled (the scanner is disabled). where: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 = = = = = = = = = = = = = = CODE 39 IATA CODABAR INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 CODE 93 CODE 128 MSI/PLESSEY EAN(13/8) EAN(13/8)+2 EAN(13/8)+5 UPC(A/E) UPC(A/E)+2 UPC(A/E)+5 B  To maximize throughput and decoding integrity. Bar Code Count – Specifies the number of codes to be read. where: M A = Auto (automatically senses presence).) (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 95 . Min Readable Height – Sets the vertical distance of the code that must have identical reads to pass. (N is also a valid disabler. Y is also a valid enabler. E = Enabled (if not detected a fault is generated).

the count is restarted. identical decodes required to pass the bar code. higher Redundancy Levels may cause erroneous failures when scanning multiple or small bar codes. where the selected level sets the number of consecutive. where: 0 = Auto Mode 1 = read code 1X 2 = read code 2X 3 = read code 3X 4 = read code 4X 5 = read code 5X 6 = read code 6X 7 = read code 8X 8 = read code 10X 9 = read code 12X A = read code 15X B = read code 20X C = read code 25X D = read code 30X E = read code 35X F = read code 40X G = read code 45X V  Depending upon the print speed. and to pass only those codes where a ¼ inch zone has identical reads. to read a variable number of UPC bar codes.Extended System-Level Command Functions Values Scanner Configuration Range / Interpretation Redundancy Level – An alternative data integrity method. 96 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . If differing values are read. Table 5-11: Scanner Configuration Set Command Example: <STX>KcSNC00H4MAB12YV0<CR> The example above sets the printer to sense the scanner automatically.

4800 96 . N.Serial A B .two bits Where: x = Port Identifier: A .Stop Bits 1 .Serial B y = Function: P . an eight-bit word.38400 Table 5-12: Serial Port Configuration Set Command xyzz  For EX2 models the data length.Serial B y = Function: B .200 bits per second.none S – software p .both H .19200 28 .9600 19 .28800 38 . And.none O – odd D .SPAS1.SPAB19<CR> The example above configures Serial Port A to use hardware and software handshaking. parity. this command is also used to configure the GPIO Auxiliary port (ID always “B”).eight bits 8 .2400 48 .Extended System-Level Command Functions (SP) Serial Port – This command configures the serial communication port(s) as follows: Value xyz Where: Serial Port Range / Interpretation x = Port Identifier: A .SPAD8.1200 24 .seven bits S .Baud Rate zz = Setting: 12 .SPApN.Data Length 7 . and 1 respectively. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 97 .Handshaking Protocol z = Setting B .hardware N . Example: <STX>KcSPAPB.Serial A B .even N . for Applicator Interface Card-equipped models. with no parity and one stop bit at 19.one bit 2 . and stop bits are fixed at 8.Parity E .

The default (“No”) prints all of the data (traversing the top of form as necessary) then slews to the next TOF. (For non-display models also see the <STX>KD command.prn.txt formats. 98 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .dpl. (TB) TOF Bias – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to recognize a label “gap” or “mark”. . . including . which provides menu-driven processes to print user defined files. (ST) Sensor Type – See <STX>e (edge) or <STX>r (reflective) for command details. (TG) TOF Gain – This command controls the voltage to the LED emitter of the Media Sensor.dlb. (TP) TOF Precedence – This command instructs the firmware to stop printing at the first top of form mark it detects.Extended System-Level Command Functions (SS or sS) Feed Speed – This command controls the rate of label movement between printing areas. (UD) User Label Mode – This command places the printer in standalone operation. see Appendix L. . (TN) No Paper Min – This command sets the media sensor level for the Out of Stock (OOS) condition.) (SV) Switch Settings – This command controls recognition of the software switch setting command <STX>V. (TD) TOF Delta – This command controls the low-level voltage difference level to recognize a label “gap” or “mark”.

automatically senses device presence. where x: 1 = Fixed 0 = Exponential Is the IP Address*.disables device detection. where: y = Up to 31 characters. otherwise. a fault is generated.enables the device. (VE) Verifier Equipped – This command enables the GPIO for a bar code verifier (see Appendix J).xxx.Extended System-Level Command Functions (UM) Units of Measure – See <STX>m (metric) or <STX>n (imperial) for command details. country dependent). E . where: x = 0 to 255 seconds 150 192.010. as follows: Value Parameter WiFi Interpretation Is the SSID (Access Point name). N or D .168. no spaces Is the Channel number (Adhoc only. In the <STX>Kc string. (VT) Verifier Type – This command is reserved for future use. (WE) WiFi Setup – This command configures the printer for a WiFi connection. for the purposes of readability only. followed by a line terminator (see the <STX>KcEN command for details).xxx. The last command needs to be END.001 0 Default Value A y MACR C x 1 F x I xxx. the command UTON must fall somewhere before the first line terminator. no error is generated. (UT) User Terminator – This command allows word wrapping of long character strings of commands to the next line in a file.xxx L x (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 99 . where: x = 0 to 9 Is the DHCP Acquire Time Limit. A (or Y) . where its presence must be detected. if undetected. where: x = 1 to 14 Is Enable DHCP Fixed Interval Transmission.

12. where x: N/A P x 0 = Low 1= Medium 2 = High Is the Region.248.WEI010.NTwN.Extended System-Level Command Functions Value Parameter WiFi Interpretation Is the maximum transmission rate..012. and.g.WEAEngWAN1.000. where a: 2 V x 15 X a 0 = Disable 1 = Enable 0 * Each octet must be zero-filled to be properly interpreted (e. an IP Address of 10.255. Is the Mode.NTI010. Table 5-13 WiFi Setup Example 1: <STX>KcNTDN.5 Mbps 11 Mbps 2 N y Is the client name.000. where: y = Up to 31 characters. where: x = 1 to 64 seconds Is MAC Cloning. no spaces Is the WEP Access Point Density.243 must be sent to the printer as 010. where x: Default Value M x 0 1 2 3 = = = = 1 Mbps 2 Mbps 5.012.NTG010.000.254<CR> 100 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . where x: 0 R y US T x 0 = Adhoc 1 = Infrastructure 2 = Unique (SSID = MAC address.000.000.254.NTS25 5.012. where: y = Two-character code.243).0.245. WiFi type = Adhoc) Is the DHCP Retransmit Interval.012. see Appendix T.

where x: 1 2 3 4 = = = = WEP WEP WEP WEP Key Key Key Key 1 2 3 4 Default Value 1 (See Note 1) xy And where y: Is the Key. where x: K x 1 2 3 4 = = = = WEP WEP WEP WEP Key Key Key Key 1 2 3 4 1 0 Is the Security setting. where y: Is up to 32 characters. See Note 2 P y See Note 3 U y See Note 4 1. Is the LEAP User ID. up to 26 characters with no spaces. where y: Is up to 32 characters. 4. Is the WPA Passphrase (Preshared Key). The password cannot contain spaces. where x: A x 0 = Auto 1 = Open 2 = Shared Is the WEP Default Key. The User ID cannot contain spaces. The LEAP password is 1 to 32 characters and must match the LEAP password assigned to the LEAP user on the LEAP server. 64 hex characters.Extended System-Level Command Functions (WS) WiFi Security – This command configures WiFi security. 2. 3. Default values for WEP Keys are all zeros (whether 10 digit or 26 digits). Value Parameter WiFi Interpretation Is the WEP Key. Table 5-14 WiFi Security Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 101 . where x: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 = = = = = = = = = Disabled WEP 64 Bit WEP 128 Bit WPA PSK WPA LEAP WPA LEAP 64 WPA LEAP 128 WPA PSK+TKIP 64 WPA PSK+TKIP 128 S x 0 L y Is the LEAP Password. where y: Is 8 to 63 characters with no spaces. Is the Security Authentication. or. The WPA passphrase must match the passphrase on the Access Point.

Use the <STX>KD command or the Setup Menu to enable this feature. <STX>KD Parameter Bit Number 0–2 w 3 4&5 6 7 0 1 2 3 x 4 5 6 7 0&1 2 y 3–5 6 7 0&1 2 z 3–5 6 7 [1] Selects the values of Function BAUD Rate / Set Test Mode Value(s) 0 = 9600. no parity. even parity Unused Set to 0 Always 1 Set to 1 Always 0 Set to 0 Print Method 0 = direct thermal. Table 5-15: Database Configuration Command 102 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 1 = reflective. 5 = 38400. y. 7 = 9600 Test Mode 0 = 8 bits. Word Length and Parity 1 = 7 bits. 1 = Alternate characters Cutter 0 = disabled. The <STX>Kc command is recommended for use over <STX>KD. 2 = continuous Linerless 0 = not equipped. with direct thermal printing.  • Ignore Host Distance (see below) disregards <STX>O and <STX>f commands (in case host software sends values that may be inappropriate). 1 = thermal transfer Present Sensor 0 = not equipped. see Control Code Command Functions. 1 = equipped Control Character[1] 0 = standard. 4 = 4800. Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>KDwxyz<CR> w. standard control characters. and z are binary values with respective bit settings as defined in the following table. Ignore Host Distance 1 = enabled (see note above) 0 = disabled. 1 = equipped Unused Set to 0 Always 1 Set to 1 Always 0 Set to 0 Reserved Set to 0 Reserved Set to 0 Unused Set to 0 Always 1 Set to 1 Always 0 Set to 0 the control characters.) <STX>KD@H@@<CR> The sample above configures 9600 baud. controls the printer’s environment and operates as a pseudo DIP switch. stored in Flash memory for future power-ups. • This command will result in a system reset for the EX2. 1 = 600. 1 = enabled 0 = disabled. 3 = 19200. 2 = 2400. no parity. 6 = 1200.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KD Database Configuration (Non-Display Models only) This command. gap sensing. Alt-2 Control Codes[1] 1 = Alternate-2 characters Always 1 Set to 1 Always 0 Set to 0 Sensor Type 0 = gap. and a cutter. 8-bit words. (Bit 0 is least significant. x.

Via the menu SYSTEM SETTINGS / SET FACTORY DEFAULTS entry. the printer will decode any ASCII hexadecimal numeric pairs following the delimiter as single-byte values. Syntax: Where: <STX>KEex<CR> e .. The command allows the delimiting character to be selected. up to 16 characters.###BOT_TEXT###4###BOT_TEXT###lt;CR> E<CR> Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 103 . subsequent “Select Factory Default” commands will configure the printer to this file’s configuration using one of the following methods: • • • <STX>KF command. there cannot be more than one defined delimiter. and the encoding to be enabled or disabled.Delimiter: one ASCII character (Do not include when e = N) x Sample: <STX>KEN <STX>KEY\ <STX>L<CR> 1u0000001200120[)>E###BOT_TEXT###1D\. After execution. and character encoding must be disabled with <STX>KEN prior to re-enabling regardless of any change in the delimiter. <STX>KdName<CR> Name <CR> . of the file. Power-up the printer while pressing the PAUSE and CANCEL Keys. . or. STX KE Character Encoding This command is provided primarily as a means for users of 7-bit communication and to embed control characters and extended ASCII characters in their data streams. Character encoding is used where control characters cannot be transmitted or where control characters within data may prematurely terminate a label format record.Y – character encoding enabled N – character encoding disabled .0x0d terminates the name. When character encoding is enabled. Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>KdPlant1<CR> The sample above selects the configuration file Plant1 as the default factory configuration. Although the delimiter may be changed at any time (except within a label format definition).The name. Any character in the DPL data stream may be substituted with a delimited two-character ASCII hexadecimal numeric equivalent.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX Kd Set File as Factory Default This command selects the specified file name as the “factory default” configuration..

and then enables character encoding with the backslash (\) as the delimiter. an odd number of bytes will be treated as an illegal string and. 5C16. not correctly decoded. FX) or Character Encoding Examples: In the following partial datastreams it is assumed that character encoding is enabled and that the selected delimiter.. range each byte – 0-9. A UPS MaxiCode will be formatted using a data string interpreted as follows: [)>RS01GS. leading and trailing. 3116. 4316. has been transmitted to the printer (i. \) will be interpreted as one byte whose value is that of the delimiting character. ASCII. via a Setup Menu or the <STX>KD / <STX>Kc commands.g.. 104 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . • A delimited string that contains either a non-valid hexadecimal character (e. therefore. and EF16 5 bytes 1A<SUB>1A with values 3116. . range each character – 0-9..Extended System-Level Command Functions The sample above disables. A-F (optional) .. depending upon the model. see notes below. range each character – 0-9.2 bytes. ASCII. The number of hexadecimal digits between the delimiter pair must be even. hexadecimal encoded. <SUB> represents a single-byte ASCII control character with value 1A16 Alternate Control Codes with an Alternate Line Terminator: Character Encoding can also be used with the Alternate Control Character set. A-F . the printer has not received an unpaired delimiter prior the example.g. E OT<CR> then formatting is terminated. 4416 3 bytes with values AB16. Character Encoding Syntax: This syntax requires at least two hexadecimal ASCII digits (0-9.One byte delimiter. Partial Sample Data Stream AB\CE \ABCDEF\ 1AAA Interpretation 5 bytes AB\CE with values 4116. hexadecimal encoded. Syntax: Where: xaa[bbcc…nn]x x aa . range each character – 0-9. see Control Code Command Functions. In each example. 4216. hexadecimal encoded. 4116. a backslash (\). <STX>KEY\).2 bytes. Alternate Control Characters are enabled. 1A16. allowing the assigned delimiter to be interpreted as itself rather than as the delimiter. ASCII. 4116. ASCII.2 bytes.. CD16. A-F (optional) . A-F) delimited by the character specified in the <STX>KE command. 0 to ff16.2 bytes.e. hexadecimal encoded. A-F (optional) bb cc nn  • A delimiter pair with no ASCII hexadecimal pairs between (e.

. <STX>Kf0100 The sample above represents a one-inch label advance unless in metric mode (see <STX>m). STX Kf Set Present Distance This command specifies an additional amount to advance the label after printing.A four-digit present distance in inches/100 or mm/10. restoring the Factory Setting File). Display-Equipped Models: SOP Emulation selection has no effect on this command. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 105 . if saved. and clears Calibration and Custom Adjustments.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KF Select Factory Defaults This command restores the configuration of the printer to the factory default settings. Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>Kfnnnn<CR> nnnn .3 = Returns the factory default settings. Syntax: Where: <STX>KFn<CR> n . These settings may be default values or the values previously specified by a configuration file (see <STX>Kd). but specifies a distance to advance relative to the start of print (<STX>O command) of the next label.  Calibration will be required. This command has the same effect as the <STX>f command.2 = Returns the factory default settings (and. Non-Display Models: The printer Option Control must be set (via the menu) to HOST for this command to have effect.

. Sample: <STX>KHA<CR> The sample above returns results from the last dot check for every element and its resistance up to 1350 ohms [with out of range (bad or suspect) values indicates as ******]. and average resistance and variance: DOTCHECK RESULTS DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832 DOT OHMS 0 1148 1 1148 2 1140 .Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KH Dot Check (H-Class & M-Class Mark II only) This command specifies dot check operations for the printhead elements. the minimum. the total number of bad or suspect dots detected and.Specifies the operation. . where: P = Performs dot check. maximum. 830 1116 831 1116 832 1116 TOTAL BAD DOTS: MIN MAX AVG VAR 2 921 1640 1125 719 106 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Syntax: Where: <STX>KHx<CR> x . B = Returns the most recent dot check failed dot results. and. . . Sample: <STX>KHP<CR> The sample above performs dot check with DOTCHECK and a progress bar displayed. 142 1199 143 ***** 144 ***** 145 1050 . A = Returns the most recent dot check and dot resistance results. the number of dots tested.

and the minimum.Flag: 1 = DPL 0 = MCL f Sample: <STX>KJN1 The sample above forces the Ethernet port to bypass MCL and go directly to DPL. the total number of bad or suspect dots. and average resistance and variance: DOTCHECK RESULTS DOTS TESTED GOOD 830 OF 832 BAD DOT LIST 143 144 TOTAL BAD DOTS: MIN 921 MAX 1640 2 AVG VAR 1125 719  The process normally adds a few seconds to the power-up sequence. STX KJ Assign Communication Port (MCL Command) This command assigns a communication port for specific use.Extended System-Level Command Functions Sample: <STX>KHB<CR> The sample above returns results from the last dot check for the number of elements tested. Syntax: Where: <STX>KJpf<CR> p . however. all ports are assigned to MCL.Port ID: P = Parallel S = Serial (A) U = USB N = Ethernet L = Wireless A = Serial (B) . if the printhead is invalid or extremely damaged. the number of the bad or suspect dot(s). maximum. it could take a minute to complete. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 107 . this command allows changes to that assignment. When activating MCL.

168. only). 108 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . .000.g.000 * Prior to introduction of the Wireless Ethernet. where: F = Returns the NIC to the factory default settings. PS [Print Start].0.255. . or.000 000.000. I1 [User Input 1].Signal type.192 was the IP default value and the Subnet Mask was 0.0.255. see Appendix J for details. and N = Negative Pulse .000 000.0.2 character function name abbreviation (e.001 255. H = Reports settings to host (wireless. etc).026 255.0. n s p www STX Kn NIC Reset This command resets the NIC to factory defaults.000.3 character filter pulse width. and 1 = Active High . P = Positive Pulse.000 Default Values Wireless Ethernet 192. Syntax: Where: <STX>KIffnspwww<CR> ff . 192. where 1 – 8 is the valid range.010.255.255..0. in milliseconds.Pin number. where: 0 = Active Low.Polarity.Specifies the action.000.168.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KI GPIO Input This command configures the GPIO input channels of the Applicator Interface Card. where: L = Level.010. Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway Default Values Wired Ethernet* 192. Syntax: Where: <STX>Knx x .

etc). and 1 = Active High 3 character delay time from function condition “true” to output signal. LC [Label Complete]. where 1 – 8 is the valid range. 3 character pulse width corresponding to the function condition becoming “true”. 3 character pulse width corresponding to the function condition becoming “false”.) n s p td0 pw0 td0 - pw0 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 109 .. LM [Label Movement]. see Appendix J for details. where: L = Level. Syntax: Where: <STX>KOffnsptd0pw0td1pw1<CR> ff 2 character function name abbreviation (e.g. (Ignored for level-type signals. P = Positive Pulse. where: 0 = Active Low. (Ignored for level-type signals. Signal type. and N = Negative Pulse Polarity. Pin number.) 3 character delay time from function condition “false” to output signal.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KO GPIO Output This command configures the GPIO outputs of the Applicator Interface Card.

. however. on subsequent resets. When “protected”. • • RAM . Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>KpY0 The sample above disables protection for Module Y. downloads and delete commands. and. these graphics will be protected. if power is cycled or if the printer is reset. where: 0 = disable protection. There are two module types: RAM (volatile) and Flash (non-volatile).When protected.Module ID – Range A to Z (See Appendix K). the module can be temporarily unprotected. This command can be useful to add data to reserved modules (see Appendix K for a listing of the memory modules).Extended System-Level Command Functions STX Kp Module Protection This command controls memory module protection.When protected and if power is cycled or if the printer is reset. <STX>Kpmf m f . 1 = enable protection. the module state resets to unprotected. 110 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . a module will ignore format. the module state resets to protected. Flash .Flag specifying Enable or Disable protection. graphics may now be downloaded to the module and.

/ 640 max.The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM allocated as an Internal Module. . total amount installed.ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) delimiter.ee mm/dd/yy . Where: aa-cdd. . 200 min. . its memory configuration (i. and amount currently assigned to specific functions or entities) to the host device. .. vvvv X: xxxx ssss LLLL wwww gggg oo Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 111 .ASCII character identifying a DRAM module followed by an ASCII colon (:). amount available for configuration.ASCII string sequence that represents the firmware version number string. . in a model-dependent format.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KQ Query Memory Configuration This command causes the printer to transmit.The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM assigned to the smooth scalable font processor cache. .e. iiii . Syntax: Non-Display model response format: <STX>KQ<CR> INTERNAL MEMORY<CR> VER: aa-cdd.Current printable length (in 100ths of an inch or millimeters).Current label dimension unit’s designation: “IN” for inches or “MM” for millimeters.The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM available for configuration. this field and its associated legend will not appear.ee mm/dd/yy<CR> INSTALLED: iiii<CR> AVAILABLE: vvvv<CR> MODULE: X:xxxx<CR> SCALABLE: ssss<CR> LABEL MEM: LLLL<CR> LABEL SIZE: wwww:gggg:oo<CR> <CR> .Current maximum printable label width (in 100ths of an inch or millimeters). .The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM memory. .The number of 4KB blocks of DRAM assigned to label print buffer. If no Internal Module is present.

Total number of inches/millimeters of Print Dot Buffers available. Print Buffer Size Allocation RAM Internal Files Font Cache 112 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .09 IN Print Buffer Size: 272 IN Allocation RAM: 6389 KB Internal Files: 512 KB Font Cache: 232 KB Where: Product Installed RAM Label Width .Extended System-Level Command Functions Display-Equipped model response format: Product: I4208 – 01.01 05/21/1999 Installed RAM: 8 MB Label Width: 4.Amount of RAM that can be configured for the Internal Files. which is limited to 99. type.Total amount of RAM. Increasing this buffer will increase performance if labels have a large variety of font sizes and characters.Size of the Font Buffer used to temporarily store characters. (This is not the maximum size of a label. .99 inches. graphics and label formats. .Size of the Internal Module used to store downloaded fonts. Font Cache and the remainder going to the Print Buffer Size. . .) . and firmware version.Size in inches/millimeters of the print head. .Printer model.

The length of the Label Width.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX Kq Query Memory Configuration This command causes the printer to transmit its internal DRAM memory configuration to the host device.The length of the Print Buffer. .The number of megabytes of installed internal DRAM memory. the amount available for configuration. Syntax: Response format: <STX>Kq<CR> Memory Configuration<CR> Product: aaaacdd. . and the amount currently assigned to specific functions or entities.Current label dimension unit’s designation.ASCII Carriage Return (0x0D) record delimiter.ee mm/dd/yy<CR> Installed RAM: iiiiMB<CR> Label Width: vvvvoo<CR> Print Buffer Size: :xxxxoo<CR> Allocation RAM: ssssKB<CR> Internal Files LLLLKB<CR> Font Cache wwww:KB<CR> <CR> . Where: aaaacdd.The number of kilobytes assigned to the Scalable Cache.The number of kilobytes of internal memory assigned to the label Print Buffer.ASCII string sequence that represents the firmware version number string.The number of kilobytes assigned to the internal memory module. iiii . . vvvv xxxx ssss LLLL wwww oo Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 113 . “IN” for inches and “MM” for millimeters. . .ee mm/dd/yy . . The transmitted data provides information regarding the total amount of internal DRAM installed.

see <STX>KM.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KR Reset Memory Configuration This command resets the printer’s DRAM configuration to the default settings. STX Kr Resettable Counter Reset This command resets the internal counters. Follow this command with an <SOH>U command to retain the reset or the counters will revert to the previous values after cycling power.  This command will result in a system reset for the EX2. Syntax: <STX>KR<CR>  This command will result in a system reset for the EX2. Scalable Font Cache (Non-Display Models only) See the <STX>K command. 114 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Syntax: <STX>Kr<CR> STX KS Memory Configuration.

.Lock the Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) after writing: 0 = No Protection 1 = Write Protect . 0-9. locking value. retrying nine times if necessary. .56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) This command writes the AFI data to the tag. STX KtD Write Data Storage Format Identifier (DSFID) to Tag (Direct Mode – HF [13.The number of retry attempts. retrying nine times if necessary. Syntax: Where: <STX>KtDabcc a b . locking value.Lock the Application Family Identifier (AFI) after writing: 0 = No Protection 1 = Write Protect .56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) This command writes the DSFID data to the tag. cc Sample: <STX>KtD91C3[CR] The sample above writes 0xC3 DSFID byte. Syntax: Where: <STX>KtAabcc a b .The number of retry attempts.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KtA Write Application Family Identifier (AFI) to Tag (Direct Mode – HF [13.Two character AFI value representing one byte. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 115 .Two character DFSID value representing one byte. cc Sample: <STX>KtA91C3[CR] The sample above writes 0xC3 AFI byte. 0-9.

e. <STX>KtH DATA FLAG: 0x0F TAG ID: E004010000751412 DSFID: 0xE3 AFI: 0x01 NUM BLK: 0x1B BLK SIZ: 0x03 IC REF: 0x01 Sample Feedback: 116 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . cc Sample: <STX>KtE9004[CR] The sample above writes the EAS bit for Philips (0x04). retrying nine times if necessary..56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) This command writes the EAS bit for Philips ISO tags.Two character Manufacturer’s Code. STX KtH Read and Feedback Tag Information to Host (Direct Mode – HF [13. Syntax: Where: <STX>KtEabcc a b . representing one byte.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KtE Write Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) Bit (Direct Mode – HF [13. when the tag contains DSFID. .56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) This command returns the tag info to host. AFI.  Syntax: This command only works when the Data Flag for the tag is 0x0F (i. VICC and IC data).The number of retry attempts. 0-9.Electronic Article Surveillance (EAS) option: 0 = Set EAS 1 = Reset EAS 2 = Test EAS .

aaa bbb c d ee  Sample: A 00 value will send tag data to the host with no printing. recalls data from the RFID tag block zero (reading only one block. Should be 0.Starting block number (000  maximum block number). a standard RFID read/write fault will be issued. and prints the data in the location specified by replaceable field.(Optional) Hexadecimal data – “H” may be added directly after “R” to return a two character hex value of the data. otherwise. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 117 . It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device. Since there are two digits per hex value. . replaceable fields should be twice as long than if using ASCII data (e. Transponder dependent. Syntax: Where: <STX>KtRUn1…n16Haaabbbcdee<CR> Un1…n16 . 0-9. the character “A” would be returned as “41”).Reserved. .) matching the order of Label Formatting command. . Transponder dependent. U.The number of retry attempts. 02.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KtR Read Data from RFID Tag (Direct Mode – HF [13. which is attempted nine times).  When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found. . <STX>L 1911A1802000010TEXT U X <STX>KtRUE00700ABCDEF1234H0000015001 <STX>G The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01).The number of blocks to read (001  maximum block number). “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s). Must be sixteen characters long. H .(Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier (UID) in hexadecimal format. 03. .. etc.g.Field number in which to place the data (must be 01.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then put that data into a replaceable field.

118 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .  A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no printing. . U. otherwise. 03.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KtU Read Unique Serial Number from RFID Tag (Direct Mode – HF [13. 0-9.  Syntax: Where: This is a sixteen character alphanumeric value. Should be 0. .Field number in which to place the data (must be 01. “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s). etc.The number of retry attempts.Reserved.56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) This command instructs the RFID device to read the unique serial number data from the tag and then place that data into a replaceable field. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device. <STX>KtUabcc<CR> a b cc . 02. the replaceable field must have an adequate length.) matching the order of Label Formatting command.

. the separate lock command will also use the addressed mode and the supplied UID. 0x03 in block zero.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KtW Write Data to RFID Tag (Direct Mode – HF [13. 0-9. to allow non-printable characters (i. 0x01. Sample 2: <STX>KtWUE00700ABCDEF1234B004000510TEST[CR] Sample 2.Reserved. programs the data “TEST” to the tag with UID “E00700ABCDEF1234” at block zero then write-protects block zero (attempting to write five additional times if necessary). Bncncnc aaa b c d ee…e Sample 1: <STX>KtWB004000900<0x00><0x01><0x02><0x03>[CR] Sample 1.(Optional) Where ncncnc is the data byte count.Lock block after writing: 0 = No Protection 1 = Write Protect . . otherwise. Transponder dependent. programs the hex values 0x00..(Optional) Where n1…n16 is the Unique Identifier (UID) in hexadecimal format. Syntax: Where: <STX>KtWUn1…n16Bncncncaaabcdee…e<CR> Un1…n16 .e.Starting block number (000  maximum block number). a standard RFID read/write fault will be issued. It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device. . characters with hex values less than 0x20) to be encoded. a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be displayed. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 119 .  When using addressed commands and the tag with the specified UID cannot be found. above.Data to be encoded on RFID tag. Should be 0.The number of retry attempts. .56 MHz] ISO15693 Tag Interface) This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. sixteen characters in length. 0x02. . When write protecting (locking) with UID. above.

002 is Tag ID. 120 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .Block address number. 003 is user memory. which is location of the EPC data. which is the EPC data.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KuB Read Data from Gen2 Tag Section This command reads a specific block address of a Gen2 tag.XXX. and. .Data offset in word length . Syntax: Where: <STX>KuJaaabbb<data> aaa .Data offset in word length. bbb Sample: <STX>KuB001002 The sample above reads the block address 1 at offset word 2.XXX[CR] STX KuJ Write Data to Gen 2 Tag Section This command writes a specific block address of a Gen2 tag. . where: 000 is kill/access section.Block address number. 002 is Tag ID. Syntax: Where: <STX>KuBaaabbb aaa . 001 is EPC section. or. 001 is EPC section. where: 000 is kill/access section.Hexadecimal data (must be length of multiples of 4) bbb <data> Sample: <STX>KuJ001002112233445566778899AABBCC The sample above writes data “112233445566778899AABBCC” to block address 1 at offset word 2. Syntax: Printer response: <STX>KuF<CR> DEVICE VERSION: XXX. STX KuF Send RFID Device Firmware Version This command instructs the RFID device to return the firmware version. 003 is user memory.

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 121 . Syntax: Where: <STX>KuRaa<CR> aa .Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KuR Read Data from RFID Tag (Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only) This command instructs the RFID device to read data from the tag and then place that data into a replaceable field.) matching the order of Label Formatting command. U.Field number in which to place the data (must be 01. etc.  Sample: A 00 value will send the ID to the host with no printing. <STX>L D11 1911A1801000100 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx U 1A31050002000200 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx U X <STX>KuR01 <STX>Kur02 <STX>G The sample above creates a replaceable text field (01) and bar code field (02) and then recalls the data from the tag and places it into the specified fields. 02. It is expected that the tag transponder is within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device. 03. “Void” will be printed in the text or bar code label field(s). otherwise.  Data should be at least 16 or 24 characters in length.

Syntax: Where: <STX>KuWabcc…c<CR> a . b cc…c  Sample: Must be 16 or 24 characters long. a warning will occur and a warning message (Read / Write Fail) will be displayed.Reserved.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX KuW Write Data to RFID Tag (Direct Mode – UHF Interface – Hexadecimal Data Only) This command instructs the RFID device to write data to the tag. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . . The valid characters are 0-9.Y = verifier enable N = verifier disable STX KW Memory Configuration. Syntax: Where: <STX>KVa<CR> a . attempting to write one additional time if necessary. A-F. erase and program the tag (1 – 9). STX KV Verifier Enable/Disable This command allows a verifier to be enabled and disabled.  122 This command will result in a system reset for the EX2. Should be 0.The number of attempts to locate. . It is expected that the tag transponder will be within the read / write distance of the RFID programming device. Must be sixteen characters in length.Data to be encoded in the ASCII format. otherwise. Printable Label Width See the <STX>K command for details. <STX>KuW10ABCDEF0102030405[CR] The sample above programs the data <0xAB><0xCD><0xEF><0x01><0x02><0x03><0x04><0x05> to the tag.

.Extended System-Level Command Functions STX Kx Delete Configuration File This command deletes a configuration file. .) STX KZ Immediately Set Parameter This command immediately sets the specified parameter.Heat Parameter Range – A two-digit value (00-30). (Remember to prefix this command with the Module (Un)Protect Command <STX>Kp. up to 16 characters. . see the “H” Label Formatting Command. as follows: F = Feed Speed P = Print Speed S = Slew Speed H = Heat Setting x -orxx . of the configuration file.Valid Module ID – Range A to Z.0x0d terminates the name.Speed Parameter Range – A to e (see Appendix L). Syntax: Where: <STX>KZax<CR> a . <CR> Sample: <STX>KxYPlant1 The sample above deletes the configuration file Plant1 from Module Y. Syntax: Where: <STX>KxmName<CR> m Name . Sample: <STX>KZH22 The sample above causes the file currently being executed to assume a Heat Value of 22.The name. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 123 .Valid parameter identifier.

Extended System-Level Command Functions 124 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

10.  The cutter must be enabled with all mechanism interlocks closed for operation.Is a four digit decimal number indicating the number of labels to be printed before a cut is performed. Label 21 will be cut at the start of a subsequent label format (batch) unless a default (cut by amount) greater than one has been entered. : Set Cut by Amount This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is initiated. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 125 . and 20 labels have been printed. The amount must be smaller than the quantity of labels printed. All commands following the <STX>L are interpreted as label formatting commands. <STX>L<CR> :0005<CR> 141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR> Q0021<CR> E<CR> The sample above instructs the printer to make a cut after 5. Between 1 and 9999 labels may be printed before a cut is made. Label formats that contain no commands overriding printer default values will assume those defaults. Syntax: Where: Sample: :nnnn nnnn . and can be used to override default parameter values. as defined in the corresponding Operator’s Manual. Selectable parameter value defaults may be also reassigned via the Setup Menu. This feature is useful when it is necessary to print an uncut strip of labels.6 Label Formatting Command Functions Introduction The <STX>L command switches the printer from the System-Level Processor to the Label Formatting Processor.

Interacting text is obliterated by the text formatted last. This mode allows inverse (white on black) printing (e. <STX>L A3 141100001000100DATAMAX<CR> 141100001100110DATAMAX<CR> E The sample above sets the printer to Opaque Mode and produces one label. images. the effect will be similar to the XOR mode. If text or image fields overlap in this mode.) This is the default mode. (An odd number of overlapping objects will print. the region where text strings. see table below. 2. and bar codes will print. Each character cell is treated as opaque.g. a proportionally sized border and background are printed similar to photographic negative). Table 6-1: Format Attributes Example 1 XOR Mode 2 Transparent Mode 3 Opaque Mode 5 Inverse Mode 126 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . or 5. allowing the user to print fields atop one another.Label Formatting Command Functions A Set Format Attribute This command specifies the type of format operation and remains in effect until another format command is specified or another label format has begun (<STX>L). images or bar codes intersect will not be printed. 3. Syntax: Where: Sample: An n . n Attribute Description In this mode.. the intersecting regions of text strings. Each label format defaults to Attribute 2 (Transparent Mode). See Record Structure Types. The default is 1.Is attribute mode 1. This mode is effective only in rotation 1.

the printed information may overlap the preprinted data. <STX>L C0050 141100001000100DATAMAX<CR> The sample above shifts all format data 0. C Set Column Offset Amount This command allows horizontal adjustment of the point where printing begins.Is a four-digit number for the column offset. Syntax: Where: Sample: Cnnnn nnnn .Is a two digit decimal number indicating the magnification value.Z in the field record). The default is 0. Syntax: Where: Sample: Bnn nn .Label Formatting Command Functions B Bar Code Magnification This command provides a mechanism to specify bar codes greater than 36 dots (0 .9. inches/100 or mm/10. A . (see Label Formatting Command “m”). This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information. <STX>L<CR> D11 B01 1a9305000100030ABCD<CR> B03 1a3105000700030ABCD<CR> Q0001 E The sample above instructs the printer to print two bar codes. each 9 dots by 3 dots. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 127 . The value is reset to 1 at the start of every label and stays active for the entire label or set to a new value.  If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to label. unless the printer is in metric mode.5 inches to the right. The printer is instructed to print label formats nnnn units to the right of the position that the format specifies.

By changing the height of a dot. 1 to 99 labels may be printed before a cut is made. See Label Formatting Command “:”. 128 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .Is Dot Height multiplier 1. .Label Formatting Command Functions c Set Cut by Amount This command is the same as the “:” command except only a two-digit value can be entered. For the element sizes see Appendix K.Is Dot Width multiplier 1 or 2. 2. and 21 have been printed. Syntax: Where: cnn nn . hence the print resolution – dots per inch (DPI) of the print head. the maximum length of a label can be increased or decreased. This command allows a predetermined number of labels to be printed before a cut is initiated. D Set Dot Size Width and Height This command is used to change the size of a printed dot. Sample <STX>L<CR> c07<CR> 141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR> Q0021<CR> E The sample above instructs the printer to make cuts after labels 7. or 3. Syntax: Where: Dwh w h .  D11 is the default value for 300. 14.  The cutter must be enabled and all mechanism interlocks closed for the cut operation. The default is one. 400 and 600 DPI printer models. while D22 is the default value for all 203 DPI printer models.Is a two-digit number indicating the number of labels to be printed before a cut is performed.

F Advanced Format Attributes These commends extend the text presentation capabilities for Scalable Fonts. . <CR> Sample: <STX>L<CR> ePlant1<CR> 1A2210001000000Testing<CR> E<CR> The sample above recalls the stored printer configuration. or Font Download type. otherwise.The name. System-Level. (Other termination commands are “X” and “s”. of the configuration file. even if no printable data has been received. It is highly recommended that only one Recall Printer Configuration command be used per label.) Syntax: Where: eName<CR> Name . Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 129 . Additional commands allow the specification of line rotation and font changes within a label field. Plant1. e Recall Printer Configuration This command recalls a previously stored printer configuration. up to 16 characters. The format attribute allows a set of label format records to select Bolding. (Printer configurations may be stored using the Extended System-Level Commands or via the printer’s menu system. Italicizing and Underlining. to terminate the Label Formatting Mode then generate. and feed a label. Syntax: Sample: E <STX>L<CR> 121100000000000Testing<CR> E<CR> The sample above will print one label. The label generated will be based on whatever data has been received to that point.) Commands sent to the printer after the Terminate Label command must be of the Immediate.0x0d terminates the name. when the processing Label Formatting commands. print. See “Advanced Format Attributes” (Section 8) for details.Label Formatting Command Functions E Terminate Label Formatting Mode and Print Label This command causes the printer. and that it be used at the beginning of the label. unpredictable results will occur.

limited by the feed speed range. allowing the media movement to be slowed during “presentation” (the distance traveled after printing is completed to the label stop position).Is a single alpha character representing a speed. and prints the data in global register A. Syntax: Sample: G <STX>L<CR> 121100000000000Testing<CR> G<CR> 1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR> E<CR> The sample above stores. the first label has present speed of 1 inch per second. Sample: <STX>LD11H30PGSG fA 191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1 E <STX>L 191100200830165Fixed Data Field 1 E The sample above prints two labels. if a subsequent format does not contain a present speed command then the present speed reverts to the feed speed. Global registers are named in the order received. This data may be retrieved and copied to another record in the same label format using the special Label Formatting Command: <STX>S. This command is used only within the context of a label format. One label is printed with “Testing” in two locations. beginning with Register A. Syntax: Where: fa a . The default is the feed speed. 130 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . G Place Data in Global Register The “G” command saves the print data of a print format record in a global register (temporary storage). The speed assigned is retained until another label format is received or until power is removed.Label Formatting Command Functions f Set Present Speed (Non-Display Models only) This command controls the rate at which the present distance is positioned. and incrementing with each instance of the G command use. ending at Register P. see Appendix L. retrieves. while the second reverts to the feed speed of 4 inches per second.

Is a two-digit heat value (00-30). each requiring a different amount of heat to properly image the media. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 131 .” while providing subtle changes. Syntax: Where: Ja a .Is a single-digit alpha character: L = left justified (default) R = right justified C = center justified Sample: <STX>L<CR> 1911A1801001000TEST1 JR 1911A1801000100TEST2 JC 1911A1802000200TEST3 E The sample above prints “TEST1” one inch up and one inch over going right. is intended to be used to match print contrast levels following print head replacements. lightening or darkening the print contrast accordingly. <STX>L<CR> H15<CR> 141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR> E The sample above sets the printer for a heat value of 15 and prints one label. where the default setting can be changed through the keypad). “TEST2” one inch up and one inch over going left.  Display-Equipped Models – This command is only valid for use with scalable fonts. An increase or decrease in this value results in a change of heat applied by the print head to the media.  J Non-Display models – the “Darkness Potentiometer. The host device can send this command value to correct the heat setting per the application. This is helpful when using different media types. Syntax: Where: Sample: Hnn nn .Label Formatting Command Functions H Enter Heat Setting This command changes the “on time” of elements of the print head. and “TEST3” two inches up and over. Justification This command changes the printing justification. The default setting is 10 (except in the case of printers with a menu.

0 mm). all measurements will be interpreted as metric values.g.0 inch.0 mm. 132 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . a column offset of 0010 will be interpreted as 1. n Set Inch (Imperial) Mode This command sets the printer to measure in inches. Syntax: Sample: n <STX>L<CR> n 141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR> E The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 1. and is menu selectable. 10. producing fields that are transposed visually. 1. Syntax: Sample: M <STX>L 161100003200010 NOT MIRRORED<CR> M<CR> 161100003000400 MIRRORED<CR> E Printed Result: m Set Metric Mode This command sets the printer to measure in metric.0 inch. Syntax: Sample: m <STX>L<CR> m 141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR> E The sample above prints the text (SAMPLE LABEL) starting at location coordinates 10. all measurements will change to inches.Label Formatting Command Functions M Select Mirror Mode This command instructs the printer to “mirror” all subsequent print field records. When this command is sent.0 mm. When this command is sent.. Default mode. (e.

see Appendix L for valid ranges. Syntax: Where: Sample: pa a . see Appendix L for valid ranges. controls the rate at which the labels will reverse to align to the next start of print position. <STX>L pF The sample above sets the printer to a backup speed of 3. typically used in conjunction with the Cut or Peel and Present operations. Syntax: Where: Sample: Pa a . p Set Backfeed Speed This command. the first at a speed of 2 inches per second (51 mm per second) and the second at the default setting.Label Formatting Command Functions P Set Print Speed This command sets a print speed for a label or batch of labels.5 IPS. The setting remains in effect until another backfeed speed command is received or until the printer is reset.Is a single alpha character representing a speed. <STX>L PC 141100001000100LABEL1<CR> E <STX>L 141100001000100LABEL2<CR> E The sample above prints two labels.Is a single character representing a speed. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 133 .

(A four-digit command value does not need to be <CR> terminated. The default is 0. <STX>L R0037<CR> 141100001000100SAMPLE LABEL<CR> E The sample above prints a label with a row offset amount of . This feature is useful when a single format is to be printed on labels containing preprinted information. • If printing near the TOF is important (i. This permits host applications to generate label quantity commands without the need to pad leading zeros. Sample: <STX>L 121100000000000Testing<CR> Q0020<CR> E<CR> The sample above will print a batch of 20 identical labels.Is a one to five-digit delimited value setting for the number of labels to be printed. it may be necessary to use the ROW ADJUST setting to shift the vertical start of print position in the negative direction.Is a four-digit number (0000-9999) for the row offset.Label Formatting Command Functions Q Set Quantity of Labels to Print This command sets the number of the label copies to be printed. on very small labels or in very tight formats).  • If using preprinted labels where the placement of the preprint data varies from label to label. The printer is instructed to print label formats nnnn units above the position that the format specifies. the printed information may overlap the preprinted data. unless in metric mode. if the command is delimited by a carriage return <CR>.) Syntax: Where: Qnnnnn nnnnn . Set Row Offset Amount This command allows vertical adjustment of the point where printing begins.e. The default value is one. in inches/100 or millimeters/10.  R Specifying 9999 as the four-digit quantity results in continuous printing..37 inches. A one to five digit value is allowed. Syntax: Where: Sample: Rnnnn nnnn . 134 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

The samples below explain different ways to recall and print a label format. Syntax: Where: rnn. up to 16 characters in length. (Use <STX>W to view a memory module’s directory.) String Sent: Sample 1: <STX>L<CR> rTEST<CR> Q0002<CR> E<CR> <STX>L<CR> rTEST<CR> X<CR> <STX>G<CR> <STX>L<CR> D11<CR> PO<CR> SO<CR> rTEST<CR> E<CR> Printer Interpretation: Begin label format Retrieve format named TEST Quantity requested = 2 Terminate formatting and print Begin label format Retrieve format named test Terminate formatting Print Begin label format Dot size = 1x1 Print speed O Feed speed O Retrieve format named test Terminate formatting and print Sample 2: Sample 3: The sample below explains recall embedding. within a recall label is also possible. up to 6 levels of nesting.Label Formatting Command Functions r Recall Stored Label Format This command is used to retrieve label formats stored on a memory module..Is a label name.n nn…n . Embedding recalled labels.. String Sent: Sample: <STX>L rLABEL1 191111111111LABEL1FIELD1 sGLabel1 <STX>L rLABEL1 191111111111LABEL2FIELD1 sGLabel2 <STX>L rLabel2 19111111111LABEL3FIELD1 E Printer Interpretation: Store label 1 Store label 2 Print label 3 What gets printed: LABEL1 FIELD1 LABEL2 FIELD1 LABEL3 FIELD1 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 135 .

Label Formatting Command Functions S Set Feed Speed This command controls the rate at which the label is moved through non-printed areas. Syntax: Where: sann…n a . In addition. see Appendix K.Represents the name of the label (maximum 16 characters). .Is a single alpha character representing a speed. <STX>L SE 141100001000100LABEL1<CR> E <STX>L 1411000010001000LABEL2<CR> E The sample above sets a 3 IPS feed speed and prints two labels.dlb file. (To recall a label format from the module use the “r” command.Is the module designator representing a single character module name. Syntax: Where: Sample: Sa a . s Store Label Format in Module This command stores a label format to a specified module as a . otherwise. with the same feed speed for both. The setting remains unchanged unless another feed speed command is received or until the printer is reset. Supplying the module name will store the label to that module. nn…n Sample: <STX>L<CR> D11<CR> 191100501000000123456789012<CR> 1911005020000001234567<CR> 191100500000000Sample<CR> 1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR> Q0001<CR> sATEST<CR> The sample above stores a format in Memory Module A and names it “TEST”. this command terminates the Label Formatting Command.) 136 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . see Appendix L for valid ranges. using C will cause the label format to be stored in the selected default module (see <STX>X).

U Mark Previous Field as a String Replacement Field This command controls the formatting of replacement data. allows binary control codes (e. PDF417). The data being used when created must be valid for the font type being selected. The first two of four format records have been designated replacement fields. intended for use with record types that accept binary data (e. Syntax: Where: Sample: Tnn nn . fields will optimize throughput. Syntax: Sample: U <STX>L D11 121100001000000123456789012<CR> U<CR> 1211000020000001234567<CR> U<CR> 161100000000000Sample<CR> 1X1100000000000B250250002002<CR> Q0001 E <STX>U01ABCDEFGHIJKL<CR> <STX>U028901234<CR> <STX>G The sample above sets the format for register loading and prints two labels. The second label is generated with System-Level field-replacement commands and printed. The terminator is immediately restored to a carriage return <CR>.Label Formatting Command Functions T Set Field Data Line Terminator This command. both must be equal.g. Specifying a field as a string replacement for dynamic. See <STX>U.. not static.Is an ASCII two-character representation of a HEX code to be used for the end of data terminator. Valid only for the next format record. a carriage return) to be embedded in the printed data by setting an alternate data line terminator. <STX>L<CR> T00<CR> 191100200000000TEST<NULL> 141100001000100TERMIATOR<CR> Q0001<CR> E<CR> The sample above sets the a NULL terminator (ASCII NULL: HEX 00) for the data line termination code. as seen in the format record containing the text “TERMINATOR”. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 137 . the terminator then defaults back to the carriage return.g.  The length of the original string sets the data string length of any replacement..

y Select Font Symbol Set This command. Syntax: Where: ySxx S .Byte-size designation. like the <STX>y. xx Sample: <STX>L ySSW<CR> The sample above selects the Swedish symbol set for use in format records using scalable fonts. U = Double byte symbol sets. but no label will be printed. However. see the <STX>y command for details.Label Formatting Command Functions X Terminate Label Formatting Mode This command causes the printer.) Syntax: Sample: X <STX>L<CR> 141100001000100SAMPLE<CR> X<CR> The sample above will result in a label format. and. (Other termination commands are the “E” and “s”. see Appendix H: S = Single byte symbol sets. unlike the “E” command. 138 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . it will not print a label. when in label formatting mode. . to immediately switch to the system command mode and generate a label format based on the data received at that point. selects the scalable font symbol set. The selected symbol set remains active until another symbol set is selected.Symbol set selection.

.Is the amount by which to increment the field. Syntax: Sample: z <STX>L z 121100000000000Test0000<CR> E None of the smooth fonts (i. and is intended to be used with the Q. <STX>E. The numeric data in the field will increment by the value assigned after the plus sign (+) each time a label is produced [or the greater than symbol [>] can be substituted to make the field increment alphabetically. .Label Formatting Command Functions z Zero (Ø) Conversion to “0” This command removes the slash zero in fonts 0 to 8. Font 9) use the slash zero convention. usually in pairs)]. or (for hexadecimal increment.Is + for numeric increment. p ii Sample: <STX>L<CR> 13220000000000012345<CR> +01<CR> Q0003<CR> E<CR> The sample above will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of 12345. > for alphanumeric increment. and this command will have no effect on scalable fonts.e. and then increments that number by one for the next two labels. and is effective only for the label format in which it appears. The command applies only to format records containing those fonts and bar codes.  + (>)(() Make Last Field Entered Increment This command. causes the printer to automatically increment a field in a batch of labels. useful in printing sequenced labels. . and in the human readable field (if any) of the bar codes A to Z. Syntax: Where: *pii * .Is the fill character for the left-hand character of the field. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 139 . or <STX>G commands. This command is effective only on the label format record that it follows. or the left parenthesis [(] can be substituted to make the field increment hexadecimal data (valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F.

This command is effective only on the label format record that it follows. incrementing 0001 by 1 on each label with AB and CD remaining untouched: AB0001CD. < for alphanumeric decrement. or) for hexadecimal decrement.. and is intended to be used with the Q.Is – for numeric decrement.Is the amount by which to decrement the field.Label Formatting Command Functions Embedding Numeric strings for incrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e. . .g. Note that the increment value has one leading blank and two trailing zeros. <STX>E or <STX>G commands. or the right parenthesis [)] can be substituted to make the field decrement hexadecimal data (valid hexadecimal data is 0-9 or A-F. AB0003CD. AB0002CD. while the blank is a pad character and the trailing zeroes are placeholders that leave CD unchanged. usually in pairs)]. useful in printing sequenced labels. The numeric data in the field will decrement by the value assigned after the minus (-) sign each time a label is produced [or the less than character [<] can be substituted to make the field decrement alphabetically.Is the fill character for the leftmost character of the field. Syntax: Where: *pii * . 140 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Sample: <STX>L<CR> 161100000100010AB0001CD<CR> + 100<CR> Q0003<CR> E<CR> The sample above will print three labels. and then decrements that number by one for the next two labels. when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes). – (<)()) Make Last Field Entered Decrement This command. causes the printer to automatically decrement a field in a batch of labels. p ii Sample: <STX>L<CR> 132200000000000123AB<CR> <01<CR> Q0003<CR> E<CR> The sample above will generate a single field label format that prints the initial label with a value of 123AB.

Sample: <STX>L<CR> 1611000001000101000CD<CR> . Sample: <STX>L<CR> 13220000000000012345<CR> -01<CR> ^02<CR> Q0006<CR> E<CR> The sample above prints two labels containing the same field value before decrementing the field. the ^ character must be replaced by the @ character (hexadecimal 0x40).100<CR> Q0003<CR> E<CR> The sample above will print three labels: 1000CD. when alternate Control Codes are enabled.Label Formatting Command Functions Embedding Numeric strings for decrementing may also be embedded between alphabetic characters (e.g. and 998CD. In addition. 999CD. when systems require alphanumeric bar codes with alphabetic prefixes or suffixes). the justification of the rightmost character is sustained regardless of the number of digits replaced by the pad character on the left side.Is a two-digit value that specifies the number of labels to be generated before incrementing (or decrementing) the field value. ^ Set Count by Amount This command allows applications using the increment / decrement field command to print more than one label with the same field value before the field data is updated. Six labels are printed.. The default is 1. When a fixed pitch font is used. Syntax: Where: ^nn ^ nn . see note below.  This command can only be issued once per label format.May be 0x55 or 0x40. . see Control Code Command Functions. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 141 . Note that the pad character is a placeholder for digits removed from the left side in the subtraction process.

are entered directly into the data field of label format records. <STX>L<CR> 121100000000000DMX<CR> G<CR> 1A2210001000000<STX>SA<CR> E<CR> The sample above places the string “DMX” into the next available global register (A).Is any set of characters. places data from a specified global register into the data field. instead.) If alternate control codes are enabled the <STX> becomes “~” (hexadecimal 0x7E). when in the format record data field. using string characters and markers.Z and a – h. Syntax: Where: Sample: <STX>Sn n . allows time and date data to be selected and retrieved from the internal clock. the <STX>S and the <STX>T. A . the label will show the corresponding print value. Syntax: Where: <STX>Tstring<CR> string .Specifies the global register (A P) that contains the data to place into the data field. and then line 4 is effectively replaced by the data from global register A. see Control Code Command Functions. (Do not confuse them with System-Level Commands because the same control character is used. see the table below.Label Formatting Command Functions Special Label Formatting Command Functions Two Special Label Formatting Commands. STX T Print Time and Date This command. the <STX>T may be preceded by data to be printed/encoded. Label Formatting Character <STX>S <STX>T Command Description Recall global data and place in field Print time and date Table 6-2: Special Label Formatting Commands STX S Recall Global Data and Place in Field This command. 142 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . The string characters/markers are not printed. See the G command. In addition. and/or the string may be terminated by an <STX> command followed by more data then <CR> terminated.

. and illustrates a method of embedding the time string. Sun = 7) Day Name Month Number Month Name Day Year String Markers VW XY Za gh bc def Print Values 24-hour time format 12-hour time format Minutes Seconds AM or PM Julian Date Table 6-3: Time and Date String Characters and Markers  When using substitution. you must ensure the converted string produces valid characters for the selected bar code / font. Sample 3: <STX>L<CR> 191100100100010ABC <STX>TEF/PQ<STX> DEF<CR> E<CR> Sample 3 prints ABC 12/21 DEF.Label Formatting Command Functions String Characters A BCD EF GH. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 143 . Sample 1: <STX>L<CR> 121100001000100<STX>TBCD GHI PQ. 1998. Sample 2: <STX>L<CR> 191100100100010<STX>TEF/PQ<CR> E<CR> Sample 2 prints 12/21.  The samples above assume a current printer date of December 21. 98.O PQ RSTU Print Values Week Day (Mon = 1. TU<CR> E<CR> Sample 1 prints SUN DEC 21. where the string must be terminated by <STX>..

Label Formatting Command Functions 144 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

Command *c###D )s#Wnn…n *c#E (s#W Description Assign Font ID Number Font Descriptor Character Code Character Download Data Table 7-1: Font Loading Commands *c###D Assign Font ID Number This command is the first command required for downloading a font to either RAM or Flash Memory modules.Is the font ID numbers 100-999 (000 – 099 are reserved for resident fonts).dbm. during font downloading. The downloaded font will be stored in the default module (refer to the <STX>X command) as file type . however. the assigned font ID number command must be sent to the printer before the font file. All Font Loading Commands begin with <ESC> (ASCII control character 27 [decimal]). The commands in the table below are listed in their order of appearance. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 145 .7 Font Loading Command Functions Introduction The commands used for font loading are usually generated by font creation software. The <SOH>D command must be sent prior to downloading a font. top to bottom. ESC represents the ASCII control character 27. Syntax: Where: <ESC>*c###D ### .

nn…n 146 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . . three digits maximum. Syntax: Where: <ESC>)s###Wddd…d ### .Is the descriptor.Is the number of bytes of font descriptor data from 1 to 3 ASCII decimal digits. Syntax: Where: <ESC>(s###Wnn…n ### . dd…d *c###E Character Code This code is the ASCII decimal value corresponding to the next downloaded character.Is the ASCII value of the character. from 1 to 999.Is the bitmapped data. (s#W Character Download Data This command contains all of the information for one downloaded character. but the initial 64 bytes will remain consistent with the PCL-4 (HP LaserJet II) format. 0 to 999.Is the number of bytes of bitmapped data. Different font generation software will create different length header information. Syntax: Where: <ESC>*c###E ### . three digits maximum.Font Loading Commands )s###W Font Descriptor This command (typically first data in a font file) contains all of the information about the font contained in the file. .

Format Record Commands Received label format data (see example below) is processed by the printer sequentially. String Sent <STX>L<CR> D11<CR> 121100000050005Home Position<CR> 191100602000200ROTATION 1<CR> 291100602000200ROTATION 2<CR> 391100602000200ROTATION 3<CR> 491100602000200ROTATION 4<CR> 1A3104003000260123456<CR> 2A3104001400300123456<CR> 3A3104001000140123456<CR> 4A3104002600100123456<CR> 1X1100000000000B400400003003<CR> 1X1100002000000L400003<CR> 1X1100000000200L003400<CR> 121100004100010Printhead Location<CR> Q0001<CR> E<CR> Interpretation Begin label format Set dot size Format text Format text Format text Format text Format text Format bar code with text Format bar code with text Format bar code with text Format bar code with text Format box Format line Format line Format text Label quantity End formatting. (print direction) Figure 8-1: Formatted Sample Label Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 147 .8 Generating Label Formats Introduction This section explains the use of the different fields in a print format record. left to right and top to bottom. with four inch media. begin printing Table 8-1: Sample Label Format   The sample above assumes that “inch” mode (<STX>n) is selected.

14. shown below. but different types of records may use this information in different ways. which is necessary to complete the label formatting and begin printing. Images 6. Generating Records Every record is made of three parts: (1) a header that is 15 bytes in length. Smooth Font (Simulated) 3. and (3) a termination character (e. Every record must end with a termination character (usually a carriage return. Header 121100000050005 Data String HOME POSITION Table 8-2: Record Structure Components Termination Character <CR> 148 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Records are the building blocks of label formats. size. The six record types are: 1. font type. For details regarding the various interpretations of the six types see Record Structure Types. Line 15 is the exit and print command. (2) the data to be printed. Omitting termination characters will result in the concatenation of records.g. Bar code 5. Omitting the carriage return that precedes the termination character E. The remaining lines (3-13) are print format records. (Other System-Level Commands may precede the <STX>L for printer setup. explained in this section.) Lines 2. Scalable Font 4. and position options. will cause the printer to continue interpreting all subsequent data as label print format records. <CR>) marking the end of the field. Graphics The Structure of a Record The basic structure of the record is described below. divided into its three basic component parts. and 15 are Label Formatting Commands. A record is a data string that contains the information to be printed on the label(s). Internal Bitmapped Font 2. The third line of the label format example in Table 8-1 consists of the following: 121100000050005HOME POSITION<CR> This string comprises a complete record. The header is used to select the appearance of the data when printed by choosing rotation.Generating Label Formats The first line in the sample format (Table 8-1) is the System-Level Command directing the printer to begin label formatting. <CR>). Every header contains similar information..

and Image record types. The left-most column shows the locations of all characters in the record. Identifying lower case letters have been placed below field values for reference in the following sections: 1 2 1 1 a b c d 000 eee 0005 ffff 0005 gggg HOME POSITION [hhhh iiii] jj…j <CR> Termination character Location Within Record a b c Record Type Internal Bitmapped Font Rotation Font ID Width Multiplier Height Multiplier 000 Row Position Column Position N/A N/A Data String Smooth Font Rotation 9 Width Multiplier Height Multiplier Font Size/ ID Row Position Column Position N/A N/A Data String Scalable Font Rotation 9 Width Multiplier Height Multiplier ID Row Position Column Position Font Height Font Width Data String Bar Code Rotation Bar Code Wide Bar Narrow Bar Bar Code Height Row Position Column Position N/A N/A Data String Images Rotation Y Width Multiplier Height Multiplier 000 Row Position Column Position N/A N/A Image Name Graphics 1 X 1 1 000 Row Position Column Position N/A N/A Graphics Specifier d eee ffff gggg hhhh iiii jj…j Table 8-3: Record Type Structure In Table 8-3. For example. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 149 .Generating Label Formats The record (with spaces added for readability) conforms to the following fixed field format. and corresponds to the example above the table. While c is a Width Multiplier for Internal Bitmapped Font. the record structure is shown for each of the record types. it has other interpretations for Bar Code and Graphics record types. Each record structure interprets the characters of the record in its own way. the characters ffff are interpreted as Row Position in all record types. Smooth Font. though some of the interpretations of the characters are identical across all record types. Scalable Font.

Values a through z (lowercase) will print bar codes only. box. When 9 is used to select a scalable font. Please reference the detailed descriptions under Record Structure Types for variations. The field name titles of the following paragraphs are preceded with a reference letter from Table 8-3.Generating Label Formats The Header Fields Each of the fields in the record header is generally described below. A font field value X selects a drawing object (line. box. the font size (font I. • Values 0 through 9 select human-readable fonts. 3 = 180º. Bar code/Font expansion Line. as shown in the table below. and. where: 1 = 0º. alphanumeric.D. and field value Y is used to print an image stored in a module. value 9 selects the CG Triumvirate smooth scalable font (internal) or scalable fonts. a: Rotation The first field of a header is a single ASCII character that selects the clockwise degree of rotation for the data to be printed on a label. circle Image Table 8-4: Font Field Interpretations Interpretation • • • 150 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . number) is chosen by entering a value in the height field eee. polygon. b Font Field Value 0-9 A-T a-z Wxx X Y Font Bar code with human readable text. Bar code without human readable text. 4 = 270º. Bar Codes. b: Fonts. Value W requires two additional characters to specify the Bar Code/Font ID. 0 through 8 will select standard printer fonts. Values A through z select bar codes. where the bottom left corner is the pivot point. and Images The second field (b) determines how the rest of the fields are interpreted. Values A through T (uppercase) will print bar codes with human-readable interpretations. circle or polygon). relative to the print direction. Graphics. 2 = 90º. Figure 8-1 shows the direction and amount of rotation. All characters sent to the printer within the header fields are ASCII.

For bar codes. A04-A72. u00-u9z 000-999 000-999 000-999 000 eee Field Interpretation Not used – Internal bitmapped font Font height. but vertical. see Appendix K. For human-readable fonts. When used in the context of bar codes. and a-z represent multiplication factors from 1 – 61. Field data is interpreted in hundredths of an inch or tenths of millimeters. as shown below. Font selection Bar code height (with human readable) Bar code height Bar code height (with human readable) Not used Table 8-5: Bar Code Height Field Interpretations ffff: Row Position The lower left corner of a label is considered the “home position” (see Figure 8-1). this character specifies the wide bar width or ratio at a resolution that is dependent upon the printer model. Values 1-9. or the small bar (module) width. respectively. this field is the ratio denominator. The narrow bar width resolution and range are dependent upon the print head resolution. A “dot multiplier” command can also be used to change the printed dot size (see Label Formatting Command “D” and Appendix F). the width multiplier represents the number of times the selected font dot tables are multiplied and has no effect on the character height. S00-S9z. and a-z will give a narrow bar width of one dot (dot size = 1/printhead resolution) to dots. A-Z. U00-U9z. A-Z.Y eee Field Range 000 000-999.Generating Label Formats c: Width Multiplier Values 1-9. The row position field is a vertical coordinate that determines how far above the home position the data is to be printed. eee: Bar Code Height (Font Size/Selection) This field has interpretations dependent upon the value of the font b field. See Appendix F for default values. b Font Field Value 0-8 9 A-T a-z Wxx X. d: Height Multiplier The height multiplier has the same range and function as the width multiplier (c). Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 151 .

See note below. 152 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . it will output differently on printers with different DPI/MMPI resolutions. downloaded bitmapped fonts. The field location identifiers in the tables that follow are the same as those in Table 8-3. Appendix G lists the maximum values of the gggg field. A string of data can be up to 255 characters in length (except when using the PDF417 bar code. specify the font size in points. bitmapped fonts. To specify the size in dots. To specify the height in points the first character of the field is a “P” followed by the number of points. all four characters must be numeric. and graphics. If the font is specified in dots. There are 72. ending with a carriage return. but unique. (See note below Optional Scalable Font Width. record structures for each: internal.Generating Label Formats gggg: Column Position This field is a horizontal coordinate that determines how far to the right of “home position” the data will be printed.847 mm). There are similar. To specify the width in points.  jj…j: Data Field The final field contains the data that will actually be printed on the label. This field must be specified for scalable fonts. Consult Appendix K for a listing by printer. Characters placed in the data field will be printed as long as they fall within the physical range of the print head. hhhh: Optional Scalable Font Height The height of a scalable font can be specified in two ways: points or dots. To ensure that the data stream is portable to other Datamax-O’Neil printers. 004 to 999. Record Structure Types Each of the six record types has its own field structure and is described in the following section. which may be up to 3000 characters long). scalable fonts. points or dots.307 points per 1 inch (2. This field must be specified for scalable fonts. all four characters must be numeric. To specify the size in dots. The record types allow quick reference to the field types and their valid data inputs for the field. the first character of the field is a “P” followed by the number of points. bar codes. internal smooth fonts. 004 to 999 points. images.) iiii: Optional Scalable Font Width The width of a scalable font can be specified in two ways.

When a 9 is entered in field b. Font Modules. or a subset thereof. These include downloaded bitmapped fonts (see Table 8-5). 3 and 4 9 1 to 9. followed by a termination character. and a to z 000 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer.Generating Label Formats 1: Internal Bitmapped Fonts This record type is used for internal bitmapped fonts (see Appendix C. and a to z 1 to 9. if equipped (see Appendix I). The bitmapped fonts include 8 different fonts (see Appendix C). 3 and 4 0 to 8 (see Appendix C). 2. or Flash memory. A to Z. Values 100 through 999 select individual fonts stored on DRAM. and Downloaded Bitmapped Fonts This record type is used for internal smooth fonts (CG Triumvirate – see Table C-6) or a bitmapped font downloaded to a memory module. and a to z Valid Inputs Meaning Rotation Fixed Value Width Multiplier Height Multiplier (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 153 . then the height field eee determines the font. See Appendix K. The character mapping for these fonts is shown in Appendix A. The internal smooth font has up to 13 font sizes (see Appendix C). Tables C-1 through C-5). 2. A to Z. A to Z. and a to z 1 to 9. see Font Loading Commands. Field a b c d eee ffff gggg jj…j 1. Field a b c d 1. 1 to 9. Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters. A to Z. The character mapping is shown in Appendix A. then the height field eee is not used. Table 8-6: Internal Bitmapped Font Record Structure Valid Inputs Meaning Rotation Font Width Multiplier Height Multiplier N/A Row Column Data 2: Smooth Font. When a 0 through 8 is entered in field b. Use eee values of 096 – 099 for Kanji fonts.

Generating Label Formats Field eee ffff gggg jj…j Valid Inputs 000 to 999 (000 to 099 Reserved). P004-P999. u00-uzz 0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. dots Character Width. See Appendix K.TTF) Scalable Font file formats are supported. Table 8-7: Smooth Font Record Structure Meaning Font / Size Row Column Data 3: Scalable Fonts The Smooth Scalable Font Technology is licensed from AGFA. 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 Dependent upon printer. Table 8-8: Scalable Font Record Structure 154 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 2. and data type – normal (binary) or Hex ASCII. points. A04 to A72. 0016-4163** P004-P999. U00-Uzz. A to Z. See Appendix K. x04 – x72. Where x is an upper case letter. select a scalable font. 3 and 4 9 1 to 9. **Character sizes are resolution dependent. Values S00 to S9z. and U00 to U9z (u00 to u9z). points. Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a termination character. dots Data jj…j * I-Class supports Intellifont. see Appendix H. S00 and S01 are used for the standard internal (resident) fonts on display-equipped models. Both Microtype* and TrueType (. A to Z. as indicated in the following table. Valid Inputs Meaning Rotation Fixed Value Width Multiplier Height Multiplier Font Data Type Row Column Character Height. while S01 is used for the standard internal (resident) font on non-display models. and a to z 1 to 9. and a to z S00 to Szz. Field a b c d eee ffff gggg hhhh iiii 1. The eee field identifies the scalable font. Uppercase S or U – binary. lowercase u – Hex ASCII (see Appendix H). 0014-4163** Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a termination character.

Generating Label Formats Print head Resolution (DPI) 203 300 400 600 Character size (dots) Width 16-2817 14-4163 22-5550 33-8325 Table 8-9: Scalable Character Size Ranges Height 16-2817 16-4163 22-5550 33-8325  A scalable font cache must be allocated to print. use the jj…j data field as the location for these parameters. Field a b [bb] c d (continued) 1. v. and a to z Valid Inputs Meaning Rotation Bar Code Wide Bar Narrow Bar Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 155 . For module-based bar codes. Because the Postnet font does not provide human-readable data. No n is an implied 1. z). u. A to Z. Other bar codes without a human-readable counterpart include u (MaxiCode) and z (PDF417) – for additional model-specific restrictions see Appendix F.254 mm) to 9. The valid range (001 to 999) translates to bar heights ranging from . field d and field c must have the same value. 3 and 4 A to Z and a to z (except P. See Appendix G for specific bar code information and variations in record format field usage. and a to z 1 to 9.7 mm). A to Z. or Wna where n is 1 to 9 and a is A to S and a to s. The double byte fonts require five units of additional cache. For bar codes that require additional specified parameters. 1 to 9. The eee height field represents the bar code (symbol) height. field d is the narrow bar width in dots (the denominator).01 inch (. Minimum cache size is 15. See the specific bar code for details in Appendix G. For example. For consistent results in all rotations for bar codes of this type. For ratio-based bar codes field c is the wide bar width in dots (the numerator). the uppercase P is not valid.99 inches (253. lowercase letters will only print the bar code. entering a “p” in the b field selects the Postnet bar code. 4: Bar Codes Valid inputs for the bar code field b are letters: uppercase letters will print a humanreadable text below the bar code. field d is the narrow bar width in dots (bar code module size). 2.

Forms can be created using shaded boxes. A to Z. This function is selected by entering an X in field b. or even a simple diagonal line without the need to download a graphics file to the printer. and a to z 000 0000 to 9999 See Appendix K.Generating Label Formats Field eee ffff gggg jj…j 001 to 999 0000 to 9999 See Appendix K. boxes. and circles. 156 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . The values entered in the data field determine the sizes and shapes of the objects to be drawn. Generate each kind of graphic as described below. Table 8-10: Bar Code Record Structure  Placing 0 (zero) in both c and d will result in the default bar code ratio or module size. the printer can produce lines. Field a b c d eee ffff gggg jj…j 1 Y 1 to 9. see <STX>I. and a to z 1 to 9. 5: Images An image record is used to print an image that is stored in a memory module. Placing 000 (zero) in the symbol height field will result in the default bar code height. Valid Inputs Meaning Symbol Height Row Column Data Valid ASCII character string up to 255 characters followed by a termination character. Images can be printed only in Rotation 1. Table 8-11: Image Fields Valid Inputs Meaning Fixed Value Image Width Multiplier Height Multiplier Fixed Value Row Column Image Name 6: Graphics Using graphics. A to Z. see Appendix F for defaults. up to 16 characters followed by a termination character. polygons. complex logos. ASCII string.

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 157 . all measurements are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10 (see <STX>m). thickness of box sides. length.  Boxes are hollow. = horizontal width of line.Generating Label Formats Lines and Boxes Lines and boxes are drawn by values that determine column and row starting position. = horizontal width of line. Depending on the printer’s mode. Box****: Where: bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss b hhhh vvvv bbbb ssss = = = = = “b” and specifies box drawing. Valid Inputs Meaning Fixed value Line / Box Fixed Value Fixed Value Fixed Value Row Column Line* Line** Box*** Box**** jj…j Line**: Where: lhhhhvvvv l hhhh vvvv = “l” and specifies line drawing. and wall thickness of the line or box (see Appendix K). = vertical height of line. The data field jj…j is used to describe the line or box dimensions. Box***: Where: Bhhhvvvbbbsss B hhh vvv bbb sss = = = = = “B” and specifies box drawing. = vertical height of line. and. thickness of bottom and top box edges. Lhhhvvv lhhhhvvvv Bhhhvvvbbbsss bhhhhvvvvbbbbssss Table 8-12: Line and Box Parameters Line*: Where: Lhhhvvv L hhh vvv = “L” and specifies line drawing. while lines can be understood as filled-in boxes. vertical height of box. and. and. Segment a b c d eee ffff gggg 1 X 1 1 000 0000 to 9999 0000-9999. width. thickness of box sides. thickness of bottom and top box edges. vertical height of box. see Appendix K. horizontal width of box. and. horizontal width of box.

See Label Formatting Command A. (see <STX>m). Polygons may be filled with a variety of different patterns. specifying a number of data points that represent the vertices of the object. Circles A circle is created by defining by its center point and radius. and radius are interpreted as inches (100) or millimeters (10) depending on printer mode. to any free-form outline. Row. or a triangle (three points). a single line will be drawn. Circles can be filled with a variety of different patterns (see Table 8-15). All row/column specifiers are interpreted as inches/100 or millimeters/10 depending on the printer mode. Record structure for a polygon (spaces added for readability): 1 X 11 ppp rrrr cccc P ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc … <CR> Where: 1 X 1 1 ppp rrrr cccc P Rotation (must be 1) Graphic field ID Multiplier (must be 1) Multiplier (must be 1) Fill pattern # Row of point 1 Column of point 1 Polygon ID (Fixed Value) ppp bbbb rrrr cccc rrrr cccc … <CR> Fixed Value (001) Fixed Value (0001) Row of point 2 Column of point 2 Row of point 3 Column of point 3 Additional points Termination character Table 8-13: Polygon Record Structure  The points must be specified in the order to be drawn. Record structure for a circle (spaces have been added for readability): 1 X 11 fff rrrr cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr <CR> Where: 158 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . the last point specified is automatically connected to the first point to close the polygon. column. which can range from a simple line (two points).Generating Label Formats Polygons Polygons are created by defining the positions of the corners. If only two points are specified.

Generating Label Formats 1 X 1 1 fff rrrr Rotation (must be 1) Graphic field Multiplier (must be 1) Multiplier (must be 1) Fill pattern number Row of the center point cccc C ppp bbbb rrrr <CR> Column of the center point Circle ID (Fixed Value) Fixed Value (001) Fixed Value (0001) Radius of the circle Termination character Table 8-14: Circle Record Structure Fill Patterns Pattern Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Description No Pattern Solid Black 6% Black 12% Black 25% Black 38% Black 50% Black Diamonds Circles Right Diagonal Lines Left Diagonal Lines Grid Table 8-15: Fill Patterns Example Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 159 .

Generating Label Formats Examples (with spaces added for readability): 1: Triangle The record: 1 X 11 000 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0040 0025 0010 0040<CR> Produces a triangle with no fill pattern: (row 0040. column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and no fill pattern: 4: Circle with Fill The record: 1 X 11 009 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR> Produces a circle centered at row 0100. column 0100 with a radius of 0025 and filled with pattern 9 (right diagonal lines): 160 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . column 0200) The record: 1 X 11 000 0100 0100 C 001 0001 0025<CR> Produces a circle centered at row 0100. column 0010) 2: Rectangle with Fill The record: (row 0010. column 0010) 3: Circle (row 0050. column 0025) (row 0010. column 0040) 1 X 11 004 0010 0010 P 001 0001 0050 0010 0050 0200 0010 0200<CR> Produces a rectangle filled with pattern 4 (25% Black): (row 0010.

or. Notes minus “-” is disable. the first format attribute command can be illustrated as follows. Specifies the rotation of the base line. All label formats begin by default with attributes disabled. (Some models have limited standard font sets and capabilities. The text below and the resulting label (Figure 1) are examples of a current DPL format: Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 161 . Specifies the vertical point size of the following text relative to the base line. Command FB FI FU FPn Units +/+/+/Points Purpose Turns on or off font boldfacing.Generating Label Formats Advanced Format Attributes Two different advanced formatting attributes extend the text presentation capabilities. plus “+” is enable FSn Points FR[+/-]n Degrees  These commands are only valid for scalable fonts. Note that these commands are delimited by the ###BOT_TEXT###lt;xxx> sequence (where xxx is from the list below). Turns on or off underlining of string. Table 8-16: Advanced Format Attributes If a + or – precedes the numeric value. then the direction is relative to the current print direction.) For example. Specifies the horizontal point size of the following text relative to the base line. The table below represents the current list of font attributes available to the user. The second format attribute provides a means of inserting text and font formatting commands directly into the DPL data stream via a command delimiter structure. relative to the original print direction of the record. S01. The first format attribute allows a set of label format records to make a state change that modifies the font attributes of any following DPL text records. or downloaded TrueType scalable fonts. S00. such as Internal Font 9. see the notes below for applicability of commands and consult the appropriate Operator’s Manual for available standard and optional font sets. Turns on or off font italicization.

Once invoked. that command is in affect until turned off or the label format is terminated with the “E” “s” or the “X” command. the resulting label (Figure 2) is printed: <STX>L D11 FA+ FB+ 1911S0102600040P018P018New FU+I+ 1911S0102000040P018P018New FI-U+B1911S0101400040P018P018New FU-B+ 1911S0100800040P018P018New FB+I+U+ 1911S0100200040P018P018New FB-U-IE DPL World DPL World DPL World DPL World DPL World Figure 2 Note that if all format commands after the first FB+ were deleted the entire label would have been printed with bold scalable fonts. An example of this command is as follows: 162 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . The second format attribute command is inserted into the text data stream and delimited by the angle brackets “<>“ This structure takes the form of ###BOT_TEXT###lt;command>. This is what is meant by a state change.Generating Label Formats <STX>L D11 1911S0102600040P018P018Old 1911S0102000040P018P018Old 1911S0101400040P018P018Old 1911S0100800040P018P018Old 1911S0100200040P018P018Old E DPL DPL DPL DPL DPL World World World World World Figure 1 If the DPL format is modified as follows.

the command ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR+45> will rotate the baseline forty five degrees in the positive direction from the default print direction. (For example. the angle of the baseline may be specified relative to the current orientation of the record.Generating Label Formats <STX>L D11 A2 FA+ 1911S0105000020P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FP36FS36>FONT###BOT_TEXT###lt;FS10FP10> sizes ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FS8FP12>in the string 1911S0103500100P018P018###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR80>D###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>P###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>L###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>l###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR5>e###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR->t###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>s###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>y###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>o###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>u###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>w###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR5>r###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>i###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>t###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>e###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>i###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>n###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>c###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR5>i###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>r###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>c###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>l###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>e###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>s###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5> ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>t###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>o###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR5>o###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR-5>! 1911S0102400040P018P018###BOT_TEXT###lt;FR+45>DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>Rotations###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-FR-90> in the string 1911S0102000040P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>BOLD###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-> in the string FU+ 1911S0101400040P018P012DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FI+>ITALICS###BOT_TEXT###lt;FI-> in the string FI+U1911S0101000040P018P012DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+I+>COMBINATIONS###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-I-> in the string FB+I1911S0100600040P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>BOLD###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-> in the string FU+I+ 1911S0100200040P018P018DPL allows ###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB+>BOLD###BOT_TEXT###lt;FB-> in the string FB-U-IE Figure 3 is an example of the output from this DPL command stream.)  Refer to Section 8 for more information regarding the DPL record format for a scalable font text string. In addition. Figure 3 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 163 . The user has the ability to change the point and set size of the font within the DPL command record.

Generating Label Formats 164 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

. / 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : . < = > ? Dec 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Hex 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3A 3B 3C 3D 3E 3F Char @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ Dec 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 Hex 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 4F 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F Char ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Dec 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 Hex 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6A 6B 6C 6D 6E 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 7D 7E 7F (continued) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 165 .Appendix A ASCII Control Chart Char Ctrl @ Ctrl A Ctrl B Ctrl C Ctrl D Ctrl E Ctrl F Ctrl G Ctrl H Ctrl I Ctrl J Ctrl K Ctrl L Ctrl M Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl P Ctrl Q Ctrl R Ctrl S Ctrl T Ctrl U Ctrl V Ctrl W Ctrl X Ctrl Y Ctrl Z Ctrl [ Ctrl \ Ctrl ] Ctrl ^ Ctrl _ NUL SOH STX EXT EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US Dec 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Hex 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F Char ! “ # $ % & Ô ( ) * + .

Appendix A – ASCII Control Chart Char Ç ü é â ä à å ç ê ë è ï î ì Ä Å É æ Æ ô ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ø £ Ø x ƒ Dec 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 Hex 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F Char á í ó ú ñ Ñ ª ° ¿ ® 1/2 1/4 ¡ ¯ Dec 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 Hex A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD AE AF B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF Char Dec 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 Hex C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF Char Ó ß Ô Ò õ Õ µ þ Þ Ú Û Ù ý Ý Dec 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 Hex E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF ã Ã ² ³ ´ Á Â À © ¹ » ¢ ¥ ð Ð Ê Ë È Í Î Ï ± 3/4 ÷ ¸ º ¨ · Ì Table A-1: ASCII Chart  • For hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands: o XON o XOFF =Ctrl Q (DC1) =Ctrl S (DC3) • The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to the table above at 255 (FF) as a Datamax-O’Neil standard for resident bitmapped fonts 0.6.4.2. and 9 (CG Triumvirate).1.3. 166 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .5.

desc)./ Select Bar code type ‘a’ / fputs (“E\n”. fputs (“DMX Printer Test Program\n”. / End Label format mode and  print / } 10K OHM 1/4 WATT Figure B-1: Sample Label Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 167 . fputs (“\x02L\n”. pcs). char desc = “10K OHM 1/4 WATT”. / STX L – Enter Label Formatting / / Enter Heat Setting of 7/ / Set Width and Height Dot Size /  / fprintf (stdaux. / DMX SERIES Sample C program # include <stdio. fputs (“H07\n” stdaux). stdaux).h> main () { char pcs = “590”. “1a6210000000050%sPCS\n”. “191108010000025%s\n”.Appendix B Sample Programs “C” Language Program The following sample “C” program is included for reference. stdaux). stdaux). Figure B-1 shows the output generated by this program. fputs (“D11\n”. stdout)./ Select smooth Font  / fprintf (stdaux.

Five bar codes are printed along with data fields and headings. A user can scroll through the records and then print a selected one.Appendix B – Sample Programs ASCII text file The following ASCII text file will also generate the label shown in Figure B-1. ^BL H07 D11 19110080100002510K OHM 1/4 WATT<CR> 1a6210000000050590PCS<CR> E<CR> VB Application Generating DPL The following sample is a Visual Basic program that displays a database record on the screen. 24 pt Const OrderBC = “1a6205004200120” Const CustomerTxt = “191100603600010” Const Const Const Const Item1NO = “191100403250010” Item1BC = “1a6204002870010” Item1Txt = “191100402690010” Item1Qty = “191100603070260” ‘DPL Fixed Items on label Const Itm1 = “191100303400010Item #” Const Qty1 = “191100303400250Quantity” Const Boxsize = “B065035002002” Const BoxPos1 = “1X1100003050240” Const Image1 = “1Y3300004750010SLANT1” Dim Fixed As String ‘Item Variables Dim Item1 As String Dim PrintLabel As String Dim OrderData As String ‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse Private Sub cmdPrint_Click() 168 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . ‘Printer DPL Controls Dim CharSet As String‘<STX> byte Const StartLabel = “L” Const EndLabel = “E” Const PrintDensity = “D11” ‘Printer DPL Data to position dynamic information on label Const OrderTxt = “191100704150010”‘font 9.

Output = PrintLabelEnd Sub ‘Display the record form on the screen Private Sub Form_Load() Fixed = Itm1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & Qty1 & Chr$(13) & Chr$(13) & BoxPos1 & Boxsize & Chr$(13) CharSet = Chr$(126) ‘Alternate <stx> character ~ MComm.Appendix B – Sample Programs ‘Concatenate all the dynamic data fields with the constant header strings.PortOpen = 0‘Close down the serial port End End Sub VB Application interfacing via Windows Driver Create a form similar to the one shown here.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1BC & txtItem1.Text ‘Concatinate entire label format and send out serial port PrintLabel = CharSet & MaxLength & Chr$(13) & CharSet & StartLabel & Chr$(13) & PrintDensity & Chr$(13) & Image1 & Chr$(13) & OrderData & Chr$(13) & Item1 & Chr$(13) & Fixed & Chr$(13) & EndLabel Comm1.Text & Chr$(13) & OrderBC & txtOrderNo. VERSION 5.PortOpen = 1‘Open the serial port End Sub ‘Exit the program by clicking Exit button with the mouse Private Sub cmdExit_Click() Comm1.00 Begin VB. terminated with <cr> Chr$(13) OrderData = OrderTxt & txtOrderNo.Form Form1 Caption = ClientHeight = ClientLeft = ClientTop = ClientWidth = LinkTopic = MaxButton = MinButton = ScaleHeight = ScaleWidth = “Datamax Test Print” 1065 60 345 2325 “Form1” 0 ‘False 0 ‘False 1065 2325 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 169 .Text & Chr$(13) & CustomerTxt & txtCustomer.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Qty & txtItem1Qty.Text Item1 = Item1NO & txtItem1.Text & Chr$(13) & Item1Txt & txtItem1Desc.

driver will inform GDI to generate an ‘image that will be downloaded Printer.EndDoc End Sub Private Sub Form_Load() Dim X As Printer Dim I As Integer ‘Used for the font list ‘ search for printer queue name / driver name For Each X In Printers If X.ComboBox cmboFonts Height = 315 Left = 90 TabIndex = 2 Text = “Font List” Top = 45 Width = 2130 End Begin VB.Print “0123456789” Printer.CurrentY = 2160 ‘2 inches (row position) Printer.CurrentX = 1440 ‘1 inch (column position) Printer.DeviceName = “Datamax I-4206” Then ‘printer found ‘ Set printer as system default.CommandButton cmdExit Caption = “Quit” Height = 465 Left = 1350 TabIndex = 1 Top = 495 Width = 825 End Begin VB.Height = 6480 ‘4.CommandButton cmdPrint Caption = “Print” Height = 465 Left = 90 TabIndex = 0 Top = 495 Width = 870 End End Attribute VB_Name = “Form1” Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False Attribute VB_Creatable = False Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True Attribute VB_Exposed = False ‘Print label by clicking print button with the mouse Private Sub cmdPrint_Click() ‘font name as seen in application font list box ‘if not found.Appendix B – Sample Programs StartUpPosition = 3 ‘Windows Default Begin VB.5 inches in twips Printer.Text ‘1.FontName = cmboFonts. Set Printer = X For I = 0 To Printer.440 twips equals one inch Printer.Width = 5760 ‘4 inches in twips Printer.FontCount . 170 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .1 ‘ Determine number of fonts.

Appendix B – Sample Programs cmboFonts.Form Form1 Caption = “Form1” ClientHeight = 1290 ClientLeft = 165 ClientTop = 735 ClientWidth = 3750 LinkTopic = “Form1” MaxButton = 0 ‘False MinButton = 0 ‘False ScaleHeight = 1290 ScaleWidth = 3750 StartUpPosition = 3 ‘Windows Default Begin MSComDlg. VERSION 5.CommonDialog CommonDialog1 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 171 . the combo box should be populated with the available fonts as shown below. DPL is created by the application and sent to LPT1. Next I Exit For End If Next End Sub ‘Exit the program and shut down the serial port ‘by clicking Exit button with the mouse Private Sub cmdExit_Click() End End Sub ‘ Put each font into list When the program is run.Fonts(I) box.ocx” Begin VB. a global variable called SelPrinter must be defined as a string. Then use the following code to create a .2#0”. If one is installed then a DPL file can be printed via the print driver. To begin.frm file. **Note that this does not have to be a Datamax-O’Neil DPL print driver.AddItem Printer.00 Object = “{F9043C88-F6F2-101A-A3C9-08002B2F49FB}#1. “comdlg32. VB Application to Send Raw Data via Printer Driver This is a sample Visual Basic program that checks for any printer driver attached to “LPT1”.

Menu open Caption = “&Open” End Begin VB.CommandButton cmdClose Cancel = -1 ‘True Caption = “Close” Height = 372 Left = 2400 TabIndex = 3 Top = 735 Width = 972 End Begin VB.Label Label1 Caption = “File Name” Height = 255 Left = 120 TabIndex = 0 Top = 135 Width = 1455 End Begin VB.Menu exit Caption = “&Exit” Shortcut = ^Q End End End Attribute VB_Name = “Form1” Attribute VB_GlobalNameSpace = False Attribute VB_Creatable = False Attribute VB_PredeclaredId = True Attribute VB_Exposed = False Option Explicit ‘********************************** 172 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .Menu File Caption = “&File” Begin VB.TextBox txtFile Height = 288 Left = 120 TabIndex = 1 Top = 360 Width = 3492 End Begin VB.Appendix B – Sample Programs Left = 1635 Top = 765 _ExtentX = 847 _ExtentY = 847 _Version = 393216 End Begin VB.CommandButton cmdStoreImage Caption = “Print” Default = -1 ‘True Height = 372 Left = 240 TabIndex = 2 Top = 735 Width = 972 End Begin VB.

Appendix B – Sample Programs #If Win32 Then Private Type DOC_INFO_1 pDocName As String pOutputFile As String pDatatype As String End Type #End If ‘WIN32 Types ‘********************************** ‘** Function Declarations: #If Win32 Then Private Declare Function OpenPrinter& Lib “winspool. pcWritten As Long) Private Declare Function EndDocPrinter& Lib “winspool. ByVal Level As Long.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As Long) Private Declare Function WritePrinter& Lib “winspool. f1 As Integer.FilterIndex = 1 ‘Display Open dialog box CommonDialog1.drv” Alias “OpenPrinterA” (ByVal pPrinterName As String.FileName Label2.*)|*.*” ‘Specify Default Filter CommonDialog1.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As Long) Private Declare Function ClosePrinter& Lib “winspool.Filter = “All Files (*. pBuf As Any. ByVal pDefault As Long) ‘ Third param changed to long Private Declare Function StartDocPrinter& Lib “winspool.Caption = loadfile Exit Sub ErrHandler: Exit Sub End Sub Private Sub cmdStoreImage_Click() Dim hPrinter& Dim jobid& Dim res& Dim written& Dim printdata$ Dim docinfo As DOC_INFO_1 loadfile = Form1. ByVal cdBuf As Long.ShowOpen loadfile = CommonDialog1. loadfile As String Private Sub cmdOpenFile_Click() On Error GoTo ErrHandler ‘ Set Filters CommonDialog1.Text If loadfile = ““ Then Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 173 .txtFile.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As Long) Private Declare Function EndPagePrinter& Lib “winspool.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As Long) #End If ‘WIN32 Dim ch As String * 1.drv” Alias “StartDocPrinterA” (ByVal hPrinter As Long.drv” (ByVal hPrinter As Long. pDocInfo As DOC_INFO_1) Private Declare Function StartPagePrinter& Lib “winspool. phPrinter As Long.

pDatatype = vbNullString jobid = StartDocPrinter(hPrinter. hPrinter.”. Len(printdata$).pOutputFile = vbNullString docinfo. . ByVal printdata$. Len(printdata$). SelPrinter = X. ByVal printdata$.Port = “LPT1:” Then ‘printer found ‘ Set printer as system default. vbExclamation Exit Sub End If ‘ Open file. docinfo) Call StartPagePrinter(hPrinter) Call WritePrinter(hPrinter. vbExclamation End Sub Private Sub cmdClose_Click() Unload Me End Sub Private Sub exit_Click() End End Sub Private Sub Form_Load() Dim X As Printer ‘ search for printer queue name / driver name For Each X In Printers If X.pDocName = “MyDoc” docinfo. 1.DeviceName Exit For End If Next End Sub Private Sub lpt2_Click() 174 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . f1 = FreeFile Open loadfile For Binary As f1 ‘ Open printer for printing res& = OpenPrinter(SelPrinter.Appendix B – Sample Programs MsgBox “You must Open a file to send”. ch printdata$ = ch Call WritePrinter(hPrinter. written) Wend Call EndPagePrinter(hPrinter) Call EndDocPrinter(hPrinter) Call ClosePrinter(hPrinter) ‘ Close when done ‘ Close file Close #1 MsgBox “File sent to print spooler. written) While Not EOF(1) Get #f1. 0) If res = 0 Then MsgBox “Unable to open the printer” Exit Sub End If docinfo.

Text = loadfile End Sub Private Sub Printer_Click() CommonDialog1.Appendix B – Sample Programs End Sub Private Sub open_Click() CommonDialog1.ShowPrinter End Sub This will create the form pictured below:  It may be necessary to remove and reinsert the common dialog control due to Windows® registry issues. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 175 .FileName txtFile.ShowOpen loadfile = CommonDialog1.

Appendix B – Sample Programs 176 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

84. 146. 153. 156. 90 Dependent upon selected symbol set. 157. 88. 40-58. 225. 157.Appendix C Available Fonts – Sizes. Each font has a name (Font ID) associated with it for use in programming. 142-144. 142-144. 255 32. and Samples All character bitmapped fonts available on the printers are described in this section. 157. 146. 168. 171. 153. 225. 128. 78. 255 32-168. 172. 65-90. 154. 165. 83. Use the Font Number (in the left column of Table C-1) in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to use the corresponding font. 142-144. References. 156. 168. 154. 35-38. 62. 168. 156. 168. 255 32-126 32. 35-38. 157. 35-38. For example. 40-58. 225. see Appendix H. 128. These fonts are non-proportional (monospaced). 255 32. 153. Font Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 32-127. 35-38. 165. 67. The CG Triumvirate font number 9 is a proportional font. 255 32. 40-58. 65-90. 156. 40-58. Fonts 0 through 8 use the slash zero (Ø) conventions for distinguishing between the zero and the alphabetic O. Each character will take up a different amount of space when printed. 255 32. The slash can be removed with the label formatting command z. 128. 225. 154. the letter W will be wider than the letter I. Therefore. 225. 171. This is helpful when using variable data in a fixed area. 69. 172. 146. 225. 65-90. 65-90. 165. 153. 48-57. 255 32-168. 146. 165. The sizes of these fonts are shown on the following pages. 60. 154. 142-144. all of the characters take up the same amount of space when printed. 128. Scalable Font Internal Bitmapped Fonts Valid ASCII Characters (decimal) Use with Record Structure Type Table C-1: Valid Human-Readable Font (Internal) ASCII Characters Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 177 .

3 9.9 Table C-4: Font Sizes @ 406 DPI Resolution 178 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .4 9.Appendix C – Available Fonts Font sizes are dependent upon the print head resolution of the printer used.5 4.3 9.8 11.4 4. Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Height 7 13 18 27 36 52 64 32 28 Width 5 7 10 14 18 18 32 15 15 Spacing 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 5 5 Point Size 2. The tables below contain a listing of the font sizes by resolution with dimensions given in dots.4 9.6 6.3 9.7 18.7 11.6 12.4 22.8 18.6 12.6 6.6 6.8 Table C-3: Font Sizes @ 300 DPI Resolution Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Height 14 26 36 54 72 104 128 64 56 Width 10 14 20 28 36 36 64 30 30 Spacing 2 4 4 4 6 6 8 10 10 Point Size 2.8 18.9 Table C-2: Font Sizes @ 203 DPI Resolution Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Height 10 19 27 40 53 77 95 47 41 Width 7 10 15 21 27 27 47 22 22 Spacing 1 3 3 3 4 4 6 7 7 Point Size 2.5 22.4 22.5 9.7 11.6 12.5 4.

8 Table C-5: Font Sizes @ 600 DPI Resolution Internal Smooth Font 9 (Smooth Font) Point Size Specifiers Label format records with font code 9 (in Format Record header field b) can specify any of the font sizes in the leftmost column of the table below.7 18.5 22. as available. [2] All fonts greater than A24 are created from multiples of smaller fonts.Appendix C – Available Fonts Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font Font 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Height 20 38 54 80 106 154 190 94 82 Width 14 20 30 42 54 54 94 44 44 Spacing 2 6 6 6 8 8 12 14 14 Point Size 2.8 11.4 4. In the sample format below.5 9. Sample format: <STX>L<CR> 1911A0400100010four point font<CR> E<CR> Smooth Font 9 Font Size Specification Syntax Ann 203 DPI [1] Point Size 300. & 600 DPI [2] 0nn 4 A04 5 A05 000 [3] 6 A06 A06 001 8 A08 A08 002 10 A10 A10 003 12 A12 A12 004 14 A14 A14 005 18 A18 A18 006 24 A24 A24 007 30 A30 A30 008 36 A36 A36 009 48 A48 A48 010 72 A72 [1] All fonts greater than A36 are created from multiples of smaller fonts. Optional font sets may contain subsets of those described here.6 12. the character mapping for this font is the selected scalable symbol set (see Appendix E). 2x or 3x.3 9. Table C-6: Internal Bitmapped (Smooth Font) 9 Size Chart Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 179 . as available. The corresponding specification in either column labeled Ann or 0nn is used in the font size/selection (eee height) field to select the desired font size.6 6. [3] Available at 300 DPI and greater print resolutions only. 2x or 3x. For an optional font set that generates these fonts via scalable font technology. 400. a 300 DPI printer will use 4-point smooth font to produce a printed label with the words “four point font”.

4: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font. 1: Identifies a 145-character uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric font that includes desenders and ascenders. 3: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font. 2: Identifies a 138-character alphanumeric upper and lowercase font.Appendix C – Available Fonts Internal Bitmapped and Smooth Font Samples The identifying number is used in the Format Record header field b to cause the printer to use the corresponding font. 180 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . 0: Identifies a 96-character alphanumeric font.  The Euro currency character ( ) has been added to Fonts 0 – 6. uppercase and lowercase.

8: Identifies a font that prints OCR-B. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 181 . size I. 7: Identifies a font that prints OCR-A. size III.Appendix C – Available Fonts 5: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric upper case font. 6: Identifies a 62-character alphanumeric uppercase font.

see Table C-6. Point sizes are selected by the number in the Format Record header eee height field.Appendix C – Available Fonts 9: Identifies the Internal CG Triumvirate font. 182 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

A software reset is made by sending the command sequence to the printer or by performing a reset using the front panel keys. caused when an overflow of data is sent to the printer. Lowercase “v” There is an input buffer overflow situation.Appendix D Reset Codes The most common transmitted error codes are: Uppercase “R” This code is sent every time the printer is turned “On. Uppercase “T” This code signals a software reset.” signaling a hardware reset. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 183 .

Appendix D – Reset Codes 184 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

Results may vary if printing this document using a different input locale. WR. K [ k { . Symbol sets containing the Euro currency character are W1. and PM. see Appendix I.  0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 The following sets were produced using a Windows -based PC-compatible with a United States keyboard properties layout. < L Ø l ø = M Å m å . K Æ k æ . > N ^ n ~ / ? O o ▒ “ – ( ª ‘ ¶ “ ± ) º ‘ § µ × « æ ˆ † ‰ » Æ ¨ ‡ ©  „ Ð ˇ ® o ‘ ij ˘ ¼ ¡ IJ ” ¢ þ – ¹ ℓ œ ¯ — ² £ Œ . WL.  ¾ Pt t · ‚ ð ˜ ½ ¿ t ° … ‘ ³ ¥ ø ˛ fi ¬ / ¤ fl ¦ ƒ þ l = ß Þ Ø ' Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 185 . Not all of these symbol sets can be used with every font. 1 2 (DN) ISO 60: Danish / Norwegian Symbol Set 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . and the <STX>y command. WG. WE. > N ^ n ¯ / ? O _ o ▒ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 4 (DT) DeskTop Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + .Appendix E Single Byte Symbol Sets The following tables include some of the sixty-six standard symbol sets. WT. < L \ l | = M ] m } .

> N ^ n ~ / ? O o ▒ ° À Ð à ð ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ ¢ ² Â Ò â ò £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô ¥ µ Å Õ å õ ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö § · Ç × ç ÷ ¨ ¸ © ¸ ª ¹ È Ø è ø É Ù é ù Ê Ú ê ú « » Ë Û ë û ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü ½ Í Ý í ý ® ¾ Î Þ î þ ¯ ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 4 (E2) ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . K [ k { .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 (E1) ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . < L \ l | = M ] m } . K [ k { . < L \ l | = M ] m } . > N ^ n ~ / ? O o ▒ ˘ º Á Ð á â Â Ł ł Ó ó ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô Ö ö § · Ç × ç ÷ ¨ ¸ Ø ¹ É é Š š Ë Ú ë ú ü Ü · “ Í Ý í ý Z z Î ß î 186 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

K º k à . > N ^ n ß / ? O _ o ▒ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 2 3 4 (IT) ISO 15: Italian Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 § P ù p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r £ 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . < L ç l ò = M é m è . K [ k { . < L ç l ù = M § m è . > N ^ n ì / ? O _ o ▒ Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 187 . K Ä k ä ̗ < L Ö l ö = M Ü m ü . < L \ l | = M ] m } . > N ^ n ¨ / ? O _ o ▒ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 § P ‘ p 1 2 3 (GR) ISO 21: German Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ̓ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 4 (E5) ISO 8859/5 Latin 5 Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . K º k é . > N ^ n ~ / ? O o ▒ º À à ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ ¢ ² Â Ò â ò £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô ¥ µ Å Õ å õ ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö § · Ç × ç ÷ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø ¹ É Ù é ù ª º Ê Ú ê ú « » Ë Û ë û ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü ½ Í í I ¾ Î î ¯ ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 2 3 (FR) ISO 69: French Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 à P µ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r £ 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + .

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 2 3 4 (LG) Legal Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ° p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . L l ¶ = M ] m † . ¢ N n ™ / ? O _ o ▒ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 4 (MC) Macintosh Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p Ä ê † ∞ ¿ – ‡ ! 1 A Q a q Å ë º ± ¡ — ` Ò “ 2 B R b r Ç í ¢ ≤ ¬ “ ‚ Ú # 3 C S c s É ì £ ≥ √ “ „ Û $ 4 D T d t Ñ î § ¥ f ‘ ‰ Ù % 5 E U e u Ö ï • µ ≈ ‘  & 6 F V f v Ü ñ ¶ ‘ 7 G W g w á ó ß Σ « Á ˜ ( 8 H X h x à ò ® » ÿ Ë ¯ ÷ Ê ˆ ) 9 I Y i y â ô © π … Ÿ È ˘ * : J Z j z ä ö ™ / Í ˙ + . > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ╛ ╬ ▐ є ■ / ? O _ o ⌂ Å ƒ » ┐ ╧ ▀ ∩ 188 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . > N ^ n ~ é û Æ æ Œ fi Ó ˛ / ? O _ o è ü Ø Ø œ fl Ô ˇ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á ░ └ ╨ a ≡ 1  2  3 !! # 3 C S c s â ô ú │ ├ ╙ π (PC) PC-8 Code Page 437 Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A  B C ♂ ∟ . K [ k { ã õ ´ ª À ¤ Î º . K [ k { ï ¢ ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ▒ ┴ ╤ ß ± “ 2 B R b r é Æ ó ▓ ┬ ╥ └ & 6 F V f v å û ª ╢ ╞ ╓ µ ÷ ½ ╗ ╦ █ δ √ . K [ k § . < L \ l | å ú ¨ ° à < = M ] m } ç ù Ω Õ > Ï ¸ Ì ¨ . < L \ l | î £ ¼ ╝ ╠ ▄ ∞ n D ♀ = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ╜ ═ ▌ ф 2 E ♫  F   ¶ $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ ┤ ─ ╘ ∑ ⌠ § % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ ╡ ┼ ╒ σ ⌡ ­ ↨ ‘ 7 G W g w ç ù ° ╖ ╟ ╫ Τ ≈ ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ ╕ ╚ ╪ ф ○ ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ⌐ ╣ ╔ ┘ Θ ▪ * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ ║ ╩ ┌ Ω ▪ + .

Code Page 437N Symbol Set 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B  C ♂ ∟ . < L \ l | î D ♀ = M ] m } Ł E ♫  F   § % 5 E U e u ▬ & 6 F V f v ↨ ‘ 7 G W g w ç ž ╣ ╚ Î š ̧ ° ╔ ┘ Ú ¨ ║ ╩ ┌ ´ ╗ ╦ █ ( 8 H X h x ł ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö * : J Z j z Ü + . K [ k { ï ø ℓ ╗ ╦ █ δ √ ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ▒ ┴ ╤ ß ± “ 2 B R b r é Æ ó ▓ ┬ ╥ └ . < L \ l | î £ ʼn ╝ ╠ ▄ ∞ n D ♀ = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ╜ ═ ▌ ф 2 E ♫  F   !! # 3 C S c s â ô ú │ ├ ╙ π ¶ $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ ┤ ─ ╘ ∑ ⌠ § % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ ╡ ┼ ╒ σ ⌡ ▬ & 6 F V f v å û õ ╢ ╞ ╓ µ ÷ ↨ ‘ 7 G W g w ç ù Õ ╖ ╟ ╫ Τ ≈ ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ ╕ ╚ ╪ ф ○ ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ã ╣ ╔ ┘ Θ ▪ * : J Z j z è Ü Ã ║ ╩ ┌ Ω ▪ + . > N ^ n ~ Ä Ŀ ³ ╛ ╬ ▐ є ■ / ? O _ o ⌂ Å ŀ ¤ ┐ ╧ ▀ ∩ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á ░ └ ð Ó ╸ 1  2  3 !! # 3 C S c s â ô ú │ ├ Ë ̌ 4 ¶ (PE) PC-852 Latin 2 Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A  B C ♂ ∟ . K [ k { ! 1 A Q a q ü í ▒ ┴ Ð ß “ “ 2 B R b r é ó ▓ ┬ Ô ͅ $ 4 D T d t ä ö ┤ ─ Á ┼ Ž Â Í Š ÷ . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ╬ / ? O _ o ⌂ » ┓ ¤ ▀ ´ ╝ ╠ ▄ ý ═ Ý  ˘ § 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 ¯ :: ℘ ┌ ┐ 1 2 3 4 (PI) PI Font Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F „ ˘ ̌ ‚ ̇ “  “  ‘  ‘  ™   ℠  « ℒ ∥ □ ■ § ℓ » ‹ ¶ › ▒ f ┼ ┬ ├ ┤ ─ ┴ ┃┃ │ └ ┘ ╭ ╯ ╰ ╯  ⊔  ╓ ╖ ╙ ╜ ◊  ⊓ Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 189 .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á ░ └ ╨ a ≡ 1  2  (PD) PC-8 D/N.

D E F G H I J K T U V W X Y Z [ d e f g h i j k t u v w x y z { ä à å ç ê ë è ï ö ò û ù ÿ Ö Ü ¢ ⌐ ñ Ñ ª ° ¬ ½ ¼ ┤ ╡ ╢ ╖ ╕ ╣ ║ ╗ ─ ┼ ╞ ╟ ╚ ╔ ╩ ╦ █ ╘ ╒ ╓ ╫ ╪ ┘ ┌ ∑ ⌠ σ ⌡ µ ÷ Τ ≈ ф ○ Θ ▪ Ω ▪ δ √ C D E  F   ‚ < L \ l | î £ ¡ ╝ ╠ ▄ ∞ n = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ╜ ═ ▌ ф 2 · > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ╛ ╬ ▐ є ■ / ? O _ o ⌂ Å ƒ » ┐ ╧ ▀ ∩ 190 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Code Page 437T Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B     ◘     — ¶ § $ % & ‘ ( ) * + 4 5 6 7 8 9 : . K [ k { ï ø ½ ‚ < L \ l | î £ ¼ D E  F   © ╚ Î Þ º ┑ ╣ ╔ ┘ Ù “ ║ ╩ ┐ Û .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á ░ └ ð Ó - 1  ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ▒ ┴ Ð ß ± (PM) PC-850 Multilingual Symbol Set (Default Symbol Set) 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C      ♂ ♀     ¶ § ▂ “ 2 B R b r é Æ ó ▓ # 3 C S c s â ô ú │ $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ ┤ % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á ┼ ı Õ § & 6 F V f v å û ª Â ã ĺ μ ÷ ‘ 7 G W g w ç ù ° À Ã  þ ¸ ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö * : J Z j z è Ü + . ¨ = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ═ ╎ Ý ² · > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ ╬ Ì ¯ ▪ / ? O _ o ⌂ Å ƒ » ┐ ¤ ╗ ╦ █ Ú ¹ ╝ ╠ ▄ ý ³ ┬ Ê Ô = ├ Ë Ò ¾ ─ È õ ¶ ▀ ´ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1  2 3 ♥ # 3 C S c s â ô ú │ ├ ╙ π 0 @ P ` p Ç É á ░ └ ╨ a ≡ ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ▒ ┴ ╤ ß ± 2 B R b r é Æ ó ▓ ┬ ╥ └ (PT) PC-8 TK.

K ¡ k º . K [ k { . < L \ l | = M ] m } . < L Ö l ö = M Å m å .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 4 (R8) Roman-8 Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . K Ä k ä . > N ^ n ~ / ? O o ▒ â Å Á Þ À Ý ê î Ã þ Â ý ô Ø ã · È º û Æ Ð µ Ê Ç á å ð ¶ Ë ç é Í Í ¾ Î Ñ ó ø Ì — Ï ñ ú æ Ó ¼ ΄ ¡ à Ä Ò ½ ` ¿ è ì Õ ª ˆ ¤ ò Ö õ “ £ ù Ü Š « ˜ ¥ ä É š  Ù § ë Ï Ú » Û ƒ ö ß Ÿ ± £ ¢ ü Ô ÿ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 2 3 (SP) ISO 17: Spanish Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 § P ` p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r £ 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ´ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . > N ^ n ~ / ? O _ o ▒ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 2 3 (SW) ISO 11: Swedish Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 É P é p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s ¤ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . < L Ñ l ñ = M ¿ m ç . > N Ü n ü / ? O _ o ▒ Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 191 .

> N ^ n ⎯ / ? O _ o ▒ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 2 3 4 (US) ISO 6: ASCII Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . K [ k { . K [ k { . < L \ l | = M ] m } . ¨ Ł ł ‘ „ “ “ ° Œ œ « » ¸ º ß ‹ … › ‰ “ fi ˛ fl ¿ ˇ Ø ø 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 1 2 3 (UK) ISO 4: United Kingdom Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r £ 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . > N ^ n ~ / ? O o ▒ 192 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . < L \ l | · = M ] m } . > N ^ n ~ / ? O _ o ¡ ` — Æ æ ¢ † ´ £ ‡ ˆ ª / · ˜ ¥ ¯ ƒ ¶ ˘ § • · ¤ . < L \ l | = M ] m } . K [ k { .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 4 (TS) PS Text Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + .

< L \ l |  = M ] m } ⊔ Ú § ë ï Ú » . > N ^ n ~ ■ / ? O _ o □ ¢ „ ‰ ™ “ “ º ¶ † ‡ — – … Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 193 . K [ k { . < L \ l | → = M ] m } ⊔ § .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 (VI) Ventura International Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . K [ k { . > N ^ n ~ ■ Û ƒ ö ß Ÿ / ? O _ o □ ¢ ü Ô ÿ … „ ‰ â Å Á Œ À “ ê î à œ  “ ô Ø ã ¶ È º û Æ † Ê Ç á å ‡ Ë ç é í Í — Î Ñ ó ø Ì – Ï ñ ú æ Ó ¡ à Ä Ò ¿ è ì Õ ª ™ ¤ ò Ö õ º ‹ › £ ù Ü Š « ¥ ä É š 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 4 (VU) Ventura US Symbol Set 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ‘ p ! 1 A Q a q “ 2 B R b r # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + .

> N ^ n ~ / ? O _ o ▒ Ÿ ¯ ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ ½ Í Ý í ý ® ¾ Î Þ î þ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 (WE) Windows 3. K [ k { ‹ › « » Ë ë . > N ^ n ~ Ž ž / ? O _ o ▒ ¬ Ü ü “ Í Ý í ý Î ß î 194 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 (W1) Windows 3.1 Latin 2 Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p € ! 1 A Q a q ‘ º Ð ˇ ± Á á “ 2 B R b r ‚ ‘ ˘ ˛  â # 3 C S c s “ Ł ł Ó ó $ 4 D T d t „ “ ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô % 5 E U e u … µ & 6 F V f v † – ¦ ¶ Ö ö ‘ 7 G W g w ‡ — § · Ç × ç ÷ ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y ‰ ™ * : J Z j z Š š ¨ ¸ É Ú é ú + . < L \ l | = M ] m } . K [ k { ‹ › « » Ë Û ë û . < L \ l | Œ œ ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü = M ] m } .1 Latin 1 Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p € ! 1 A Q a q ‘ ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ ° À Ð à ð “ 2 B R b r ‚ ‘ ¢ ² Â Ò â ò # 3 C S c s ƒ “ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó $ 4 D T d t „ “ ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô % 5 E U e u … • ¥ µ Å Õ å õ & 6 F V f v † – ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö ‘ 7 G W g w ‡ — § · Ç × ç ÷ ( 8 H X h x ˆ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø ) 9 I Y i y ‰ ™ © ¹ É Ù é ù * : J Z j z Š š ª º Ê Ú ê ú + .

< L \ l | = M ] m } .1 Latin 5 Symbol Set 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p € ! 1 A Q a q ‘ ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ ˜ 2 B R b r . K [ k { ‹ › « » Ë Û ë û ‚ < L \ l | Œ œ ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü = M ] m } . ‘ ¢ ° À à ² Â Ò â ò # 3 C S c s ƒ “ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó $ 4 D T d t „ “ ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô % 5 E U e u … ¥ µ Å Õ å õ & 6 F V f v † – ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö ‘ 7 G W g w ‡ — § · Ç × ç ÷ ( 8 H X h x ˆ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø ) 9 I Y i y ‰ ™ © ¹ É Ù é ù * : J Z j z Š š ª º Ê Ú ê ú + .Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 (WO) Windows 3. > N ^ n ~ / ? O _ o ▒ Ÿ ¯ ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ ½ Í í l ® ¾ Î î Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 195 .0 Latin 1 Symbol Set 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 @ P ` p ! 1 A Q a q ` ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ “ 2 B R b r ’ ¢ ² Â Ò â ò # 3 C S c s $ 4 D T d t % 5 E U e u & 6 F V f v ‘ 7 G W g w ( 8 H X h x ) 9 I Y i y * : J Z j z + . K [ k { . > N ^ n ˜ / ? O _ o ▒ ° À Ð à ð £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô ¥ µ Å Õ å õ ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö § · Ç × ç ÷ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø ¹ É Ù é ù ª º Ê Ú ê ú « » Ë Û ë û ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü ½ Í Ý í ý ¾ Î Þ î þ ¯ ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ 0 00 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 A0 B0 C0 D0 E0 F0 1 2 3 (WT) Windows 3.

Appendix E – Single Byte Symbol Sets 196 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

43. 45-57. Option V used in the 6th & 7th position 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only 32-127 48-57 Numeric only. The column labeled “Linear Scanner Supported” provides an indication that printers equipped with a Linear Scanner are capable of recognizing the associated symbology. Option V used in 7th & 8th position 48-57 Numeric only 32. 36-39. 45-57. below). 42. 65-68 Linear Scanner Supported          Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 197 . if supported. Uppercase alpha names will print bar codes with human-readable interpretations. Place the ID in field b of the Format Record header to cause the printer to encode the data field using the associated symbology. 65-90 36. Bar Code Characteristics Bar Code ID A/a B/b C/c D/d E/e F/f G/g H/h I/i (continued) Code 39 UPC-A UPC-E Interleaved 2 of 5 (I2 of 5) Code 128 EAN-13 EAN-8 HBIC Codabar Symbology Length Varies 11 6 Varies Varies 12 7 Varies Varies Checksum No Yes Yes No M-103 Yes Yes M-43 No Valid ASCII Characters. 45-58. 37. 36. decimal value representation 32. 65-90 48-57 Numeric only. 43. 43. See Table F-2 for default values. Lowercase alpha names will print bar codes only. see Appendix G for details. 42.Appendix F Bar Code Summary Data Bar code fonts have alpha names (left column.

65-90.Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data Bar Code ID J/j K/k L/l M/m N/n O/o p Q/q R/r S/s T/t U u v z Z W1c (continued) Symbology Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ a modulo 10 checksum Plessey Interleaved 2 of 5 w/ modulo 10 checksum & bearer bars 2 digit UPC addendum 5 digit UPC addendum Code 93 Postnet UCC/EAN 128 UCC/EAN 128 K-Mart non-EDI UCC/EAN 128 Random Weight Telepen UPS MaxiCode UPS MaxiCode w/ Byte Count FIM PDF417 PDF417 w/ Byte Count DataMatrix Length Varies Up to 14 13 2 5 Varies Varies 19 18 34 + Varies 84 Specified 1 Varies Specified Varies Checksum M-10 M-10 M-10 Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Valid ASCII Characters. decimal value representation 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only. 97-122 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only All ASCII characters Alphanumeric Alphanumeric A. 42-58. C. Option + is last character for 2nd M-11 chksum 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only 35-38. D All All All 8-bit values Linear Scanner Supported    [1] [1]     198 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . B.

Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data

Bar Code ID W1C W1d W1D W1f W1F W1G / W1g W1I W1J W1k W1L

Symbology DataMatrix w/ Byte Count QR Code – Auto format QR Code – Manual format Aztec Aztec w/ Byte Count USD-8 (Code 11) EAN 128 w/auto subset switching [2] Code 128 w/auto subset switching GS1 DataBar (six types) [2] Planet Code

Length Specified Varies Varies Varies Specified Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies 18 Varies Varies

Checksum Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes M-10 No Yes Yes M-10 Yes

Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value representation All 8-bit values Alphanumeric Single-byte or Kanji double-byte All 8-bit values All 8-bit values 45, 48-57 32-127 32-127 Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependent) 48-57 Numeric only Numeric / Alphanumeric (type dependent) 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only 32, 36, 37, 42, 43, 45-57, 65-90 / All ASCII characters (type dependent) 48-57 Numeric only 48-57 Numeric only Alphanumeric

Linear Scanner Supported

 

W1M / W1m Australia Post 4-State Bar Code W1N / W1n W1p W1q W1R W1S / W1s W1t (continued) Industrial 2 of 5 Intelligent Mail Barcode (IMB) CODABLOCK UCC/EAN Code 128 K-MART NON EDI Standard 2 of 5 TCIF Linked 3 of 9 (TLC39)

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

199

Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data

Bar Code ID W1Y / W1y Code 16K W1z W1Z
[1] [2]

Symbology

Length Varies Varies Specified

Checksum Yes Yes Yes

Valid ASCII Characters, decimal value representation All ASCII characters All 8-bit values All 8-bit values

Linear Scanner Supported

MicroPDF417 MicroPDF417 w/ Byte Count

Readable when using “Barcode Count” method (see <STX>KcSN for details). Available for display-equipped and EX2 models only. Table F-1: Bar Code Characteristics

Bar Code Default Widths and Heights
Bar Code Default Data 203 DPI Resolutions Font A B C D E F G H I J (continued) Height (inches) .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .40 Ratio/ Module Size 6:2 3 3 5:2 2 3 3 6:2 6:3 5:2 300 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .40 Ratio/ Module Size 9:4 4 4 9:4 4 4 4 9:4 9:4 9:4 400 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .40 Ratio/ Module Size 12:4 6 6 10:4 4 6 6 12:4 12:6 10:4 600 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .80 .80 .40 .40 .40 Ratio/ Module Size 18:6 9 9 15:6 6 9 9 18:6 18:6 15:6

200

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data

203 DPI Resolutions Font K L M N O p Q R S T U/u v z Z/z W1C/W1c W1D/W1d W1F/W1f W1G/W1g W1I W1J W1k W1L W1M/W1m W1N/ W1n (continued) Height (inches) .40 1.30 .90 .80 .40 .08 1.40 1.40 1.40 .80 1.00 .5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A .5 .40 .40 N/A 0.80 N/A 0.40 Ratio/ Module Size 5:2 5:2 3 3 6:3 N/A 2 2 2 1 N/A 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 5:2 2 2 2 N/A N/A 6:2

300 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) .40 1.30 .90 .80 .40 .08 1.40 1.40 1.40 .80 1.00 .5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A .5 .40 .40 N/A 0.80 N/A 0.40 Ratio/ Module Size 9:4 9:4 4 4 8:4 N/A 4 4 3 1 N/A 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7:3 4 4 3 N/A N/A 9:4

400 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) .40 1.30 .90 .80 .40 .08 1.40 1.40 1.40 .80 1.00 .5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A .5 .40 .40 N/A 0.80 N/A 0.40 Ratio/ Module Size 10:4 10:4 6 6 12:6 N/A 4 4 4 2 N/A 2 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 9:4 4 4 4 N/A N/A 12:4

600 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) .40 1.30 .90 .80 .40 .08 1.40 1.40 1.40 .80 1.00 .5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A .5 .40 .40 N/A 0.80 N/A 0.40 Ratio/ Module Size 15:6 15:6 9 9 18:9 N/A 6 6 6 3 N/A 3 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 14:6 6 6 6 N/A N/A 18:6

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

201

Appendix F – Bar Code Summary Data

203 DPI Resolutions Font W1p W1q W1R W1S/W1s W1t W1Y/ W1y W1Z/W1z Height (inches) N/A .40 1.40 0.40 .40 .40 N/A Ratio/ Module Size N/A 2 2 6:2 6:2 2 N/A

300 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) N/A .40 1.40 0.40 .40 .40 N/A Ratio/ Module Size N/A 4 4 9:4 9:4 4 N/A

400 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) N/A .40 1.40 0.40 .40 .40 N/A Ratio/ Module Size N/A 4 4 12:4 12:4 4 N/A

600 DPI Resolutions Height (inches) N/A .40 1.40 0.40 .40 .40 N/A Ratio/ Module Size N/A 6 6 18:6 18:6 6 N/A

Table F-2: Bar Code Default Data

Some bar codes will be sensitive to Label Command “D”; see Label Formatting Commands for details.

202

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G

Bar Code Details
Unless otherwise noted all bar codes depicted in this section were produced using the ratio/module values of 00 and height fields of 000 to cause the printer to produce symbols using default bar widths and height fields. See Appendix F for the default values.

A:

Code 3 of 9 Valid Characters: 0-9, A-Z, - . * $ / + % and the space character. Variable Length. Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. The following example prints a 3 of 9 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1: <STX>L D11<CR> 1A00000001501000123456789<CR> 121100000000100Barcode A<CR> E

B:

UPC-A Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 12 digits. If the user provides 11 digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected checksum. See Appendix O. Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). The following example prints a UPC-A bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1B000000015010001234567890<CR> 121100000000100Barcode B<CR> E

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

203

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

C:

UPC-E Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: Seven digits. If the user provides six digits, the printer will compute the checksum. If the user provides the checksum, the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. If it does not match, the printer will print out all zeros and the expected checksum. Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times, 3 times, and 4 times the narrow bar width). The following example prints a UPC-E bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1C0000000150100012345<CR> 121100000000100Barcode C<CR> E

D:

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5) Valid Characters: 0-9 Variable Length. Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1: <STX>L D11<CR> 1D000000015010001234567890<CR> 121100000000100Barcode D<CR> E

E:

Code 128 Valid Characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set. Variable Length Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width, 3 times the narrow bar width, and 4 times the narrow bar width).

204

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

HEX 26) followed by the ASCII “B” (DEC 66. If no start character is sent for the Code 128 font. These commands are placed in the data to be encoded at appropriate locations.Appendix G – Bar Code Details This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A. To access these values. Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters. otherwise. Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive. Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special characters. HEX 43) before the data to be encoded. HEX 41) before the data to be encoded. the first character (A. place an ASCII A (DEC 65. and C. Sample: ATEST&B123 ASCII 96 97 98 99 100 101 102  Encoded: TEST<FNC2>123 CODE A FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT CODEC CODEB FNC4 FNC1 CODE B FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT CODEC FNC4 CODEA FNC1 CODE C -NA-NA-NA-NACODEB CODEA FNC1 2 CHAR &A &B &C &D &E &F &G Table G-1: Special Character Handling Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 205 . a two-character reference table is built into the printer (see below). The default code subset is B. The printer can be selected to start on any code subset and switch to another within the data stream. B. place an ASCII C (DEC 67. send the ASCII “&” (DEC 38. B. To select Code 128 Subset B. HEX 41). When the data to be encoded includes an odd number of numeric characters. the last character causes the printer to automatically generate a “switch to subset B” and encode the last character appropriately in subset B. to encode FNC2 into a Code 128 Subset A bar code. To select Code 128 Subset C.  The use a B as the first character is recommended to prevent an A or C from changing the subset. Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control and special characters. HEX 42) before the data to be encoded. Code 128 Subset B will be selected by default. as well as special characters. For example. To select Code 128 Subset A. see Table G-1. Code 128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data. C) of the data field determines the subset. Subset switching is only performed in response to code switch command. place an ASCII B (DEC 66. Subset C can only encode an even number of numeric characters.

g. control characters can be encoded into a Code 128 Subset A bar code (e. See Appendix O. If the user provides 12 digits. and 4 times the narrow bar width).26 ESC FS GS RS US The following example prints a Code 128 bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1E000000015010001234567890<CR> 121100000000100Barcode E<CR> E F: EAN-13 Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 13 digits. If the user provides the checksum. 3 times.. the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times. The following example prints an EAN-13 bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1F0000000150100012345678901<CR> 121100000000100Barcode F<CR> E 206 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . the printer will print all zeros and the expected checksum. ABC{DE will be encoded as ABC<ESC>DE): Control Code in the Bar Code Data Stream ` a through z { | } ~ ASCII 127 Encoded Control Character Result NUL 1 . If it does not match.Appendix G – Bar Code Details Control Codes: By sending these control codes. the printer will compute the checksum.

the printer will check that it matches the expected checksum. -. The host must supply leading “+”’s The following example prints a HBIC bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1: <STX>L D11<CR> 1H0000000150050+0123456789<CR> 121100000000100Barcode H<CR> E I: Codabar Valid Characters: 0-9.Appendix G – Bar Code Details G: EAN-8 Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 8 digits. + (comma is not valid) Variable Length but requires at least three characters. Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. the printer will print all zeros and the expected checksum. -$ /. These characters should be placed in the data field along with other data to be included in the symbol. 3 times. :. The following example prints an EAN-8 bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1G00000001501000123456<CR> 121100000000100Barcode G<CR> E H: Health Industry Bar Code (HBIC) Valid Characters: 0-9.. Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. . If the user provides the checksum. /. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 207 . A-Z. A-D. the printer will compute the checksum. and 4 times the narrow bar width). All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times. Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. If it does not match. % Variable Length. If the user provides 7 digits. $. Valid Codabar symbols require start and stop characters (A–D).

If a + character is the last data character. Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. an additional MSI checksum will be added to the bar code in place of the + character. The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum added and with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1: <STX>L D11<CR> 1J000000015010001234567890<CR> 121100000000100Barcode J<CR> E K: Plessey Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 1 to 14 digits Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1.Appendix G – Bar Code Details The following example prints a Codabar bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1: <STX>L D11<CR> 1I63040001501000A1234567890D<CR> 121100000000100Barcode I<CR> E Barcode I J: Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum) Valid Characters: 0-9 Variable Length. The following example prints a Plessey bar code with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1: <STX>L D11<CR> 1K000000015010001234567890<CR> 121100000000100Barcode K<CR> E 208 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

3 times. 13 characters are required. Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol. Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 209 . and 4 times the narrow bar width). The following example prints a 2 digit UPC bar code addendum: <STX>L D11<CR> 1M000000015010042<CR> 121100000000100Barcode M<CR> E N: 5-Digit UPC Addendum Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 5 digits. The following example prints an Interleaved 2 of 5 bar code with a modulo 10 checksum with a wide to narrow bar ratio of 3:1 and bearer bars: <STX>L D11<CR> 1L00000001501000123456789012<CR> 121100000000100Barcode L<CR> E M: 2-Digit UPC Addendum Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 2 digits. Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.Appendix G – Bar Code Details L: Interleaved 2 of 5 (with a Modulo 10 Checksum and Bearer Bars) Valid Characters: 0-9 Variable Length: For the bearer bars to be printed. and 4 times the narrow bar width). 3 times. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times. Valid bar widths: The expected ratio of wide to narrow bars can range from 2:1 to 3:1. Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots.

Valid bar widths: The width multiplier is the width of the narrow bar in dots. -. Usage: The bar code height field is ignored since the symbol height is United States Postal Service specific.$/+% and the space character. and 4 times the narrow bar width). All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times. 9 or 11 digits Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier values of 00 will produce a valid Postnet symbol. This bar code is to display the zip code on a letter or package for the US Postal Service. Variable Length. The following example prints a Code 93 bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1O0000000150100Datamax42<CR> 121100000000100Barcode O<CR> E p: Postnet Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 5. The following example prints a Postnet bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1p000000015010032569<CR> 121100000000100Barcode p<CR> E 210 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .Appendix G – Bar Code Details The following example prints a 5 digit UPC bar code addendum: <STX>L D11<CR> 1N000000015010001234<CR> 121100000000100Barcode N<CR> E O: Code 93 Valid Characters: 0-9. 3 times. A-Z.

Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol.Appendix G – Bar Code Details Q: UCC/EAN Code 128 Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 19 digits. and 4 times the narrow bar width). Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. (See W1R for an alternate. The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1Q00000001501000123456789012345678<CR> 121100000000100Barcode Q<CR> E R: UCC/EAN Code128 K-MART NON EDI Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: 18 digits Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. 3 times. <STX>L D11<CR> 1R0000000150100012345678901234567<CR> 121100000000100Barcode R<CR> E Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 211 . and 4 times the narrow bar width). Human readable characters for this bar code symbology are printed above the symbol. The printer spreads a weighted module 103 check sum. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times.) This bar code is set up according to K-MART specifications. The following example prints a KMART bar code. 3 times. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times.

and 4 times the narrow bar width). All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times. This bar code is commonly used by the food and grocery industry. 3 times. The following example prints a Telepen bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1T0000000150100ABCDEF<CR> 121100000000100Barcode T<CR> E Barcode T 212 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . Variable Length Valid bar widths: The fourth character of the record is the width of the narrow bar in dots.Appendix G – Bar Code Details S: UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight Valid Characters: 0-9 Length: At least 34 digits. and 4 times the narrow bar width). 3 times. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times. Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. The following example prints a UCC/EAN Code 128 Random Weight bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1S000000015005001100736750292601193042032020018002110123456<CR> 121100000000100Barcode S<CR> E Barcode S T: Telepen Valid Characters: All ASCII characters.

the printer chooses the best mode.. as shown in the example below. in are encoded.. the Secondary Message. All characters. special formatting is used to denote special ASCII characters as shown: Symbol S G S E OT R Hexadecimal Value 1E 1D 04 (Printer message syntax allows for EOT to be substituted with <CR> or the use of both EOT and <CR>. respectively. In the following examples. . 1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS0 89GSGS1/1GS10.Appendix G – Bar Code Details u: UPS MaxiCode.0 protocol examples that follow. Modes 2 & 3 The printer supports MaxiCode as defined in the AIM Technical Specification. before the data..1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT 121100000000100Barcode u<CR> E Where: #3 Forces Mode 3 encoding [)>RS01GS96 Message Header 123456 Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII. If this is not specified. with the exception of the leading GS.) UPS Modes 2 & 3 Explicit The data stream can force Mode 2 or 3 encoding by placing #2 or #3. postal code 068 Country Code 001 Class G S1Z1.TRSEOT Primary Message Secondary Message Examples In the UPS 3.1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT This example will print encoding the MaxiCode symbol in Mode 3. Primary Message control characters GS will not be encoded in the MaxiCode symbol.. <STX>L D11<CR> 1u0000001200120#3[)>RS01GS96123456GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/ 1GS10. The following examples illustrate various label format record message syntaxes for encoding data as MaxiCode. Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 213 .

+4 Zip code (not required) Country Code Class Primary Message Secondary Message 214 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual ..1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT Where: [)>RS01GS96 841706672 840 001 G S1Z1.TRSEOT Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII.1 G G G G R E SY S S SUT S OT Where: V6C3E2 068 001 G S1Z1.1GSYGS R E G G S SUT S OT Where: 32707 3270 068 001 G S1Z1. international zip code Country Code Class Primary Message Secondary Message A UPS 3.. postal code Country Code Class Primary Message Secondary Message A UPS 3. . .TRSEOT Message Header Maximum 9 alphanumeric ASCII. . international zip code Country Code Class Primary Message Secondary Message A UPS 3...TRSEOT 5 digit ASCII.TRSEOT Message Header Maximum 6 alphanumeric ASCII..0 zip + 4 with Message data format and message header: 1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96841706672GS840GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/ 1GS10..Appendix G – Bar Code Details A UPS 3..1GSYGSGSGSUTRSEOT Where: [)>RS01GS96 V6C3E2 068 001 G S1Z1.... Zip code 4 digit ASCII.0 international postal “V6C3E2” with Message data format and message header: 1u0000001200120[)>RS01GS96V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS 10....0 international zip “V6C3E2” without Message data format and message header: 1u0000001200120V6C3E2GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10. .0 zip + 4 “32707-3270” without Message data format and message header: 1u0000001200120327073270GS068GS001GS1Z12345675GSUPSNGS12345EGS089GSGS1/1GS10....

The four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. 1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is going to Datamax includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold). where 0051 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. 0D. <STX>L D11<CR> 1U00000010001000051327895555840666this package<0x0D>is going to Datamax<CR> 121100000000100Barcode U<CR> E From the example above. or D Length: 1 character Valid bar widths: The width and height multiplier works the same as for fonts on this bar code. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field. and prints a line of text: Barcode U. FIM D: OCR readable mail without Postnet (typically for envelopes with a courtesy reply window). B. Field termination is set by the byte count. and 0D. FIM C: Business reply. penalty or franked mail without Postnet. but does not include itself. <STX>. Barcode U v: FIM Valid Characters: A. penalty or franked mail with Postnet. the bar code’s data stream. <CR>. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators.Appendix G – Bar Code Details U: UPS MaxiCode. respectively. The following example prints an FIM A bar code: Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 215 . Modes 2 & 3 with Byte Count Specifier Specified Length – The upper case U identifies a UPS MaxiCode bar code with a 4-digit string length specifier. C. The UPS MaxiCode bar code produced encodes “327895555840666this package<CR>is going to Datamax”. This bar code is used to display the Facing Identification Mark (FIM) that is carried on certain types of letter mail for the U S Postal Service: FIM A: Courtesy reply mail with Postnet. and <0x0D> all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02. FIM B: Business reply.

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

<STX>L D11<CR> 1v0000000150100A<CR> 121100000000100Barcode v<CR> E

z:

PDF-417 Valid Characters: All ASCII characters. Variable Length – This two dimensional bar code holds large amounts of data in a small area, while providing a high level of redundancy and error checking, if specified. <STX>L D11<CR> 1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR> 121100000000100Barcode z<CR> E

Barcode z

The example above prints a normal, security level one, PDF-417 bar code with a 1:2 aspect ratio and best-fit rows and columns. The (bolded) bar code’s data stream 1z0000000150100F1000000PDF417<CR> decodes as follows:
Example Data F 1 Explanation 1-character specifying a normal or truncated bar code (T to truncate, F for normal). 1-digit security level ranging from 0 to 8. 2-digit aspect ratio specified as a fraction, with the first digit being the numerator and the second digit the denominator. Use “00” for the default ratio of 1:2. Valid range is from “00” to “99.” 2-digit number specifying the number of rows requested. Use “00” to let the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “03” to “90”. Row values less than 3 are set to 3, while row values greater than 90 are set to 90. 2-digit number specifying the number of columns requested. Use “00” to let the printer find the best fit. Valid range is from “01” to “30”. Column values greater than 30 are set to 30. The data stream to be encoded. Terminates the data stream.

00

00

00

PDF417 <CR>


216

Format Record header fields c and d should both be zero.

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

Z:

PDF-417 with Byte Count Specifier Specified Length – The upper case Z identifies a PDF-417 bar code with a string 4-digit length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be used within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows the 4-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself. <STX>L D11<CR> 1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<0x0D>417<CR> 121100000000100Barcode Z<CR> E From the example above, the bar code’s data stream, 1Z00000001501000015F1000000pdf<CR>417 includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0015 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The PDF-417 bar code produced encodes “pdf<CR>417”, and prints a line of text: Barcode Z.

Barcode Z

W1c: DataMatrix Valid Characters: Any 8-bit byte data Variable Length DataMatrix is a two-dimensional matrix symbology, which is comprised of square modules arranged within a perimeter finder pattern. There are two basic types: ECC 000-140 and ECC 200. ECC 000 - 140 symbols: These square symbols can be any odd size from 9x9 to 49x49, which may be specified in fields jjj and kkk. If an ECC 000-140 symbol is specified with even numbers of rows or columns, the next largest odd value will be used. Input values greater than 49 or less than 9 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces. a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

217

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

Where:
Field a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg Valid Inputs 1,2,3, and 4 W c, 1c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z 000 to 999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 Rotation Fixed value, extended bar code set Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values have no other significance. Module size horizontal multiplier Module size vertical multiplier No effect; Must be numeric Label position, row Label position, column A 3-digit convolutional error correction level. 000, 050, 080, 100, 140 If any number other than one of these options is entered then the nearest lesser value from the valid entries is used. Example: Selecting an ECC value of 099 will cause the actual ECC value of 080 to be used. 1 digit format identification: 0 - Automatically choose the encodation scheme based on the characters to be encoded. 1 - Numeric data. 2 - Upper-case alphabetic. 3 - Upper-case alphanumeric and punctuation characters (period, comma, hyphen, and slash). 4 - Upper-case alphanumeric. 5 - ASCII, the full 128 ASCII character set. 6 - Any 8-bit byte. If a format identifier is selected which will not encode the input character stream then the bar code symbol will not be printed. Auto-encodation format identification is recommended since it will select the best possible encodation scheme for the input stream. 9, 11, 13 … 49. ECC 140 minimum is 15. A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of rows requested. 000 causes rows to be automatically determined. If the rows and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a square using the greater of the two values. A 3 digit odd number (or 000) of columns requested. 000 causes columns to be automatically determined. If the rows and columns do not match, the symbol will be sized to a square using the greater of the two values. Data to be encoded. Meaning

hhh

i

0-6

jjj

kkk

9, 11, 13 … 49. ECC 140 minimum is 15. 8-bit data, followed by a termination character.

ll…l

Table G-2: DataMatrix ECC 000 – 140 Record Structure

218

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

ECC 200 symbols: There are 24 square symbol sizes available, with both row and column dimensions, which may be specified in fields jjj and kkk, measured in modules as indicated in the following list - 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 120, 132, and 144. If an ECC 200 symbol is specified with odd numbers of rows or columns, the next largest even value will be used. Input values greater than 144 or less than 10 will cause the symbol to be automatically sized for the input character stream. The record format is shown here, expanded with spaces. a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i jjj kkk ll…l Where:
Field a W b[b] c d eee ffff gggg hhh i Valid Inputs 1,2,3, and 4 W c, 1c 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z 1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z 000 to 999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 200 0 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 120, 132, 144 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 32, 36, 40, 44, 48, 52, 64, 72, 80, 88, 96, 104, 120, 132, 144 8-bit data Rotation Fixed value, extended bar code set Selects the DataMatrix bar code - the two differing values have no other significance. Module size horizontal multiplier Module size vertical multiplier No effect; Must be numeric Label position, row Label position, column ECC 200 uses Reed-Solomon error correction. Fixed value, not used A 3 digit even number (or 000) of rows requested. 000 causes rows to be automatically determined. The symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do not match by taking the larger of the two values. A 3 digit even number (or 000) of columns requested. 000 causes columns to be automatically determined. The symbol will be sized to a square if the rows and columns do not match by taking the larger of the two values. Data to be encoded in the symbol Meaning

jjj

kkk

ll…l

Table G-3: DataMatrix ECC 200 Record Structure

Example: <STX>L D11<CR> 1W1c44000010001002000000000DATAMAX<CR> 121100000000100Barcode W1c<CR> E

Barcode W1c

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

219

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

W1C: DataMatrix with Byte Count Specifier Specified Length – The upper case C identifies a DataMatrix bar code with a string 4digit length specifier. This allows values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. The four-digit decimal data byte count immediately follows the four-digit column position field. This value includes all of the data following the byte count field, but does not include itself. <STX>L D11<CR> 1W1C440000100010000292000000000Datamax<0x0D>prints best<CR> 121100000000100Barcode W1C<CR> E From the example above, the bar code’s data stream, 1W1C440000100010000292000000000 Datamax<0x0D>prints best includes a Byte Count Specifier (the portion in bold), where 0029 equals the four-digit decimal data byte count and includes all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. Field termination is set by the byte count. <STX>, <CR>, and <0x0D> all represent single byte values of hexadecimal 02, 0D, and 0D, respectively. The DataMatrix bar code produced encodes “Datamax<CR>prints best,” and prints a line of text: Barcode W1C.

Barcode W1C

W1d / W1D:

QR Code

Valid Characters: Numeric Data, Alphanumeric Data, 8-bit byte data, and Kanji characters Variable Length: The two-dimensional bar code (as documented in AIM, Version 7.0). Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg hh…h Where:

220

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

Field a W1

Valid Inputs 1,2,3 and 4 W1 Rotation

Meaning

Fixed value, extended bar code set Selects the QR bar code formatting mode, where: D = Manual formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to be entered with a comma (,) as a field separator; fields are optional per QR Code specifications, and the first field indicates Model 1 or Model 2 QR Code (Model 2 is the default). d = Automatic formatting. Allows the data string (hh…h) to be data only. Module size horizontal multiplier Each cell in the bar code is square, therefore “c” and “d” must be equal. Depending on the conversion mode (<STX>n or <STX>m), each unit indicates a cell dimension of .01 inch or .1 mm. Module size vertical multiplier. (See explanation for “c”, above.) No effect; must be numeric Label position, row Label position, column (see Appendix J)

b

D and d

c

1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z

d eee ffff gggg

1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z 000 to 999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 Valid ASCII character string, followed by (a) termination character(s)

hh…h

QR Code data string (see Generation Structure, below).

Generation Structure The data input structure (hh…h) is as follows: Auto Format (W1d) With bar code identifier “d”, the data begins after the last character of the column position field, and does not include any command characters. The data string is terminated with a termination character, usually a 0x0d hex that occurs twice in succession. The bar code symbol will have the following characteristics: 1. 2. 3. 4. Model 2 Error Correction Code Level = “M” (Standard Reliability Level) Mask Selection = Automatic Data Input Mode = Automatic [1]

Example:

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

221

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

<STX>L D11<CR> 1W1d4400000100010This is the data portion<CR><CR> 121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR> E Manual Formatting (W1D)

[3]

(2 termination characters required.)

With bar code identifier “D”, minor changes allow flexibility for data entry. (Spaces have been added for readability.) [q,] [e [m] i,] Where:
Field q Valid Inputs 1, 2 Meaning QR Code Model number, optional. Model 2 is the default. Error Correction Level (Reed-Solomon) – Four levels allowing recovery of the symbol code words: H = Ultra Reliability Level (30%) Q = High Reliability Level (25%) M = Standard Reliability Level (15%) L = High Density Level (7%) Mask Number, optional: None = Automatic Selection 0-7 = Mask 0 to Mask 7 8 = No Mask Data A a M m Input Mode: = Automatic setting, ASCII = Automatic, hex-ASCII [1] = Manual Setting, ASCII[2] = manual, hex-ASCII[2]
[1]

cdata cdata cdata…cdata term

[2]

e

H, Q, M, L

m

0 – 8, none

I

A, a, M, m

cdata

N, A, B, K immediately followed by data

Character Mode: N = Numeric, N data A = Alphanumeric, A data B = Binary , Bnnnn data (where nnnn = data bytecount, 4 decimal digits; byte-count /2 for hexASCII K = Kanji, K data The data string is terminated with a termination character, generally a 0x0d hex, but can be changed by the operator. If the Data Input Mode is Automatic, the data string is terminated with two successive termination characters.

term
[1] [2]

<CR>, <CR><CR>

[3]

When Data Input Mode = Automatic, Kanji data cannot be used; Manual data input required. When using manual formatting, commas are required between format fields and data types. [3] <CR> represents the line termination character as defined by the current control code set or after use of Txx, line field terminator label format command.

222

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

If HEX/ASCII mode is selected in manual Data Input Mode, only the data for Kanji or Binary data types will be converted, therefore the other data types and all command characters must be entered in ASCII format. If HEX/ASCII is selected in automatic Data Input Mode, all of the data must be entered in HEX/ASCII format. Data Append Mode String Format, Manual Formatting – Bar Code W1D D aa tt pp I Where:
Field D aa tt pp e m i cdata H, Q, M, L 0 – 8, none A, a, M, m N, A, B, K immediately followed by data <CR>, <CR><CR> Valid Inputs D 00, 99 Meaning Data Append Mode String Format indicator QR Code Number in Append Series, 2 decimal digits The total number of QR Codes in series, 2 decimal digits Value of Parity, 2 digits, 8 LSBs of data parity As above As above As above As above

term

As above

Characteristics Models: Model A. B. C. D. Model A. B. C. D. 1 (original version), bar code versions 1 through 14 ECC Levels “H”, “M”, “Q”, and “L” Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8 Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual Data Append Mode 2 (enhanced version), bar code versions 1 through 40 ECC Levels “H”, “M”, “Q”, and “L” Mask Selection Automatic or 0 through 8 Data Input Modes Automatic and Manual Data Append Mode

Representation of data: Dark Cell = Binary 1 Light Cell = Binary 0 Symbol Size (not including quiet zone, 4 cells on each of the 4 sides):

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

223

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

Model 1: 21 X 21 cells to 73 X 73 cells (Versions 1 to 14, increase in steps of 4 cells per side) Model 2: 21 X 21 cells to 177 X 177 cells (Versions 1 to 40, increase in steps of 4 cells per side) Data Characters per symbol (maximum for symbol size): Numeric Data Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 1,167 characters Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 7,089 characters Alphanumeric Data Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 707 characters Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 4,296 characters Binary Data Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 486 characters Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 2,953 characters Kanji Data Model 1; Version 14; ECC = L: 299 characters Model 2; Version 40; ECC = L: 1,817 characters Code Type: Matrix Orientation Independence: Yes Example <STX>L D11<CR> 1W1D44000001000102HM,AThis is the data portion also with binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D> 121100000000100Barcode W1D<CR> E Where:
Barcode W1D

QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.1 inch square, positioned at X =. 1” and Y = .1”, ECC=H, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual. Other Examples: DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y = .1”, ECC = H, Mask = 3, Data Input Mode = Manual: 1W1D4400000100010H3M,AThis is the data portion also with binary,B0003<0xfe><0xca><0x83><0x0D>

224

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.08 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji: 1W1D88000001000102,LM,K<0x81><0x40><0x81><0x41><0x81><0x42><0x0D>

DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.04 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y = .1”, ECC = L, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Manual - Kanji (in Hex/ASCII format): 1W1D4400000100010L8m,K814081418142<0x0D>

DPL field record, QR Code bar code, Cell Size = 0.01 inch square, positioned at X = .1” and Y = .1”, ECC = M, Mask = Automatic, Data Input Mode = Automatic: 1W1d1100000100010Pallet 35FGA, Box 55367, Datamax Corp, Orlando, Florida 32707<0x0D><0x0D>

W1f / W1F: Aztec Valid Characters: All ASCII characters, depending upon the selected options. Variable Length (W1f): This two dimensional bar code holds a large amount of data in a small area and can provide a high level of error checking. Specified Length (W1F): With a string four-digit length specifier, values 0x00 through 0xFF to be included within the data strings without conflicting with the DPL format record terminators. Syntax (spaces added for readability): a W1 b c d eee ffff gggg [hhhh] i jjj kk…k Where:

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

225

Appendix G – Bar Code Details

Field a W1 b

Valid Inputs 1,2,3, and 4 W1 f and F Rotation

Meaning

Fixed value, extended bar code set Lowercase selects the Aztec bar code, variable length. Uppercase selects the Aztec bar code with a Byte Count Specifier Module size horizontal multiplier, 0 = default size. The c/d module size parameters should be equal to produce a square symbol. When the label command (Dwh) is used to generate larger text, then c and d may be used to compensate and ensure a square symbol. Module size vertical multiplier, 0 = default size (See explanation for “c”, above.) No Effect Label position, row Label position, column Optional string length specifier. Field termination is set by this byte count. This decimal value includes all of the data following this byte count field, but does not include itself. Extended Channel Interpretation (ECI) mode; 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled Error Correction (EC) / Amount (see table below), where: 000 001 101 201 300 – – – – – Default EC, approximately 23% 099 EC fixed value, expressed as a percent. 104 Compact core, 1 to 4 layers respectively. 232 Full size core, 1 to 32 layers respectively. Rune format, encodes three ASCII decimal digits 0256; scanner decode output is decimal number 0256

c

1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z

d eee ffff gggg [hhhh]

1 to 9, A to Z, and a to z 000 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 0, 1

i

jjj

000 to 300

kk…k

8-bit data, followed by a termination character

Data to be encoded.

The error correction or size selection determines the symbol size and other characteristics of the symbol, as shown in the following table. Attempting to encode more data that has been made available will result in no symbol printed.

226

Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual

Appendix G – Bar Code Details Error Correction (EC) / Size Implications jjj 000 001 to 099 101 102 102 103 104 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 [1] Symbol Size[1] variable variable 15 19 19 23 27 19 23 27 31 37 41 45 49 53 57 61 67 71 75 79 83 87 91 95 101 105 109 113 117 121 125 131 135 139 143 147 151 Symbol Format data dependent data and EC dependent compact compact compact compact compact full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full full size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size size Maximum[2] Binary Data Bytes 1914 1914 6 19 19 33 53 8 24 40 62 87 114 145 179 214 256 298 343 394 446 502 559 621 687 753 824 898 976 1056 1138 1224 1314 1407 1501 1600 1702 1806 1914 Maximum[2] Alphabetic Characters 3067 3067 12 33 33 57 89 15 40 68 104 144 187 236 291 348 414 482 554 636 718 808 900 998 1104 1210 1324 1442 1566 1694 1826 1963 2107 2256 2407 2565 2728 2894 3067 Maximum[2] Numeric Characters 3832 3832 13 40 40 70 110 18 49 84 128 178 232 294 362 433 516 601 691 793 896 1008 1123 1246 1378 1511 1653 1801 1956 2116 2281 2452 2632 2818 3007 3205 3409 3616 3832 1 300 11 Rune 1 1 Measured in module size x. [2] Maximum sizes are approximate and data dependent. assuming default module size (cd=00). and may be less than indicated. Table G-4: Aztec Characteristics Index Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 227 .

and interpreted as FNC1 or <GS> depending on its location in the data stream. and the alpha or numeric characters 228 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . using escape sequences in the datastream. which follows will be used to encode one RUNE symbol. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed. Size 201 to 232: Values 201 through 232 result in 1 through 32 layers (two modules thick) respectively. The valid values for escape sequences are of the form <ESC>n. around the center finder pattern. All available code word will be used for error correction. When <ESC>0 follows a single alphabetic or two numeric characters respectively. Symbols will be of the full-size form. range 0 through 6 These escape sequences are encoded as FLG(n) character pairs described in the International Symbology Specification – Aztec Code. and specifically for UCC/EAN 128 applications. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed. particularly when the volume of that data is small. The printer does not validate <ESC>0 locations in the data stream. For appropriately configured scanners this will be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C1 symbology identifier preamble. When <ESC>0 is the leading data in the stream. approximately 23%. then it also interpreted as a FNC1. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table above. Data streams longer than three digits or data that includes non-numeric characters may have unpredictable results. when used in with appropriately configured bar code readers. Size 101 to 104: Values 101 through 104 results in 1 through 4 layers (two modules thick) respectively. <ESC>0 – Is encoded as FLG(0). Size 300: Value 300 informs the printer that the data.Appendix G – Bar Code Details Error Correction Size 001 to 099: This value specifies the percent of symbol code words to be used for error correction. Symbols will be of the compact form. Data volume constraints apply as indicated in the table above. It the data capacity is exceeded no symbol is printed. Some minimum-security code word may be generated depending on the data sent for encoding. The printer does not validate UCC/EAN 128 data syntax. For appropriately configured scanners this would be interpreted/transmitted as a ]C2 symbology identifier preamble. around the center finder pattern. The data consists of one to three ASCII digits with value range of 0 to 256. Any other value may be selected to meet the user’s needs. 1997-11-05. where: <ESC> n – 1 byte with value 2710 = 1B16 – 1 ASCII digit. is recommended. Extended Channel Interpretation Mode: A value of 1 provides for extended channel codewords to be inserted into the bar code symbol. The default value. All available codewords will be used for error correction. The data may include leading zeros. it is interpreted as a FNC1 as used in the Code 128 symbology. and the meanings of the values for n are the same in both. AIM. This mode also provides for effective Code 128 and UCC/EAN 128 emulations. Actual error correction word percentage will vary depending on data.

Example 1: The variable length example encodes “AZTEC” with no ECI input. and is interpreted as signaling Extended Channel Interpretation. A line of text is also printed. The byte count is 17. Notice that a <CR> does not terminate the bar code format record. it signals that the following n digits comprise an extended channel identifier for use with ECI compliant bar code scanners. a <GS> replaces it in the bar code symbol. <ESC>n – Is encoded as FLG(n). In the context of a FLG(n).Appendix G – Bar Code Details preceding the FNC1 are Application Indicators assigned by AIM International. and prints the bar code. and 23% error correction. An erroneous bar code symbol may result from failing to follow <ESC>n with n digits. any backslash “\” (9210) will be interpreted by the scanner as two backslashes “\”. and prints the bar code. <STX>L D11<CR> 1W1f00000001501000000AZTEC<CR> 121100000000100Barcode W1f<CR> E Example 2: Barcode W1f The specified length example includes a byte count field for all bytes that follow until the end of the bar code data. <STX>L D11<CR> 1W1F000000015010000170000AZTEC<0x0D>barcode 121100000000100Barcode W1F<CR> E Barcode W1F Functions Not Supported • • • Structured Append Reader Initialization Symbol Generation Module shaving Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 229 . Any <ESC>0 following <ESC>n and not within the n digits will be encoded as FLG(0). The symbology encodes “AZTEC<CR>barcode”. A line of text is also printed. When the value of n is from 1 to 6. When <ESC>0 is anywhere else in the data stream. as with UCC/EAN 128 field separators. The printer does not check AI validity.

All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width. If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits. and. 230 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . DPL calculates two checksum characters. the medium is specified in DPL by the wide bar parameter and the wide bar is fixed at 2 times the medium bar minus the narrow bar. The narrow bar size is specified in DPL by the narrow bar parameter. and C. An additional character serves as the start and stop indicator. This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs. The next character after start is always FNC1. and 4 times the narrow bar width). minimum 4 characters Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. subset B will be inserted prior to the character. the character code C will be set prior to the digits. “9”. B. If the data begins with at least four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. and automatically places them prior to the stop character. typical max 41 characters Human Readable: W1G. two are of medium width and three are narrow. Variable length. 2.Appendix G – Bar Code Details W1g / W1G: USD-8 (Code 11) Valid Characters: 0-9. If there is a non-numeric in the first four characters then the default start code is subset B. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B. and “-“ characters. 3. Each character has three bars and two spaces for a total of five elements. subset B will be set prior to the last digit. except for the “0”. Non-Human Readable: W1g USD-8 (Code 11) is a bar code that encodes the ten digits and the dash (-) character. Subset switching between B and C is performed based on rules as below: 1. The following example prints a Code11 bar code: <STX>L D11 1W1G00000015001500123456789-<CR> 121100000000100Barcode W1G<CR> E Barcode W1G W1I: EAN128 (with Auto Subset Switching) Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set. 3 times the narrow bar width.Bar Code Data String Length: Variable. C and K. Of these five elements. which have only one wide element and four narrow elements.

To access these values.26 ESC FS GS RS US Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 231 . see table below. EAN128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data. ASCII 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 2 CHAR &A &B &C &D &E &F &G CODE A FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT CODEC CODEB FNC4 FNC1 CODE B FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT -NAFNC4 CODEA FNC1 CODE C -NA-NA-NA-NA-NACODEA FNC1 Table G-5: Special Character Handling Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes: ` a through z { | } ~ ASCII 127 = = = = = = = NUL 1 . Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control and special characters. Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special characters. as well as special characters. HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66. Standard switches are still used (see table below). Code FNC2 will be encoded. to encode FNC2 into an EAN128 Subset A bar code.Appendix G – Bar Code Details Note that there is no auto-switching from or to Subset A. Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive. a two-character reference table is built into the printer. send the ASCII & (DEC 38. HEX 41). Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters. As an example.

If there is a non-numeric in the first four characters or there are less than four then the default start code is subset B. If the data begins with at least four numeric characters the default start code is subset C. If four or more numeric digits appear consecutively while in subset B. and C. 2. subset A. 3. Variable length Valid bar widths: The fourth character of record is the width of the narrow bar in dots. the first numeric will be placed in B with the others in C. subset B will be inserted prior to the character. a two-character reference table is 232 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual . If in subset C and there are an odd number of numeric digits. Standard switches are still used. 3 times the narrow bar width. Subset A: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the control and special characters. See table below. the character code C will be set prior to the digits. To access these values. Note that there is no auto switching from. and 4 times the narrow bar width). If there is an odd number of numerics already in B. Subset B: Includes all of the standard uppercase alphanumeric keyboard characters plus the lowercase alphabetic and special characters. Special Character Handling: Characters with an ASCII value greater than 95 are considered special characters. subset B will be set prior to the last digit. Subset switching between B and C is based on the following rules: 1.Appendix G – Bar Code Details The following example prints an EAN128 bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1W1I000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR> 121100000000100Barcode W1I<CR> E Barcode W1I When scanned this bar code will decode as follows: [C][FNC1]1234[B]5[F1]10Z[C]213302[B]1AK(81) W1J: Code 128 (with Auto Subset Switching) Valid characters: The entire 128 ASCII character set. as well as special characters. B. Subset C: Includes the set of 100 digit pairs from 00 through 99 inclusive. This printer supports the Code 128 subsets A. Code128 Subset C is used for double density encoding of numeric data. When in subset C and a non-numeric occurs. or to. All other bars are a ratio of the narrow bar (2 times the narrow bar width.

to encode FNC2 into a Code128 Subset A bar code. ASCII 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 2 CHAR &A &B &C &D &E &F &G CODE A FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT CODEC CODEB FNC4 FNC1 CODE B FNC3 FNC2 SHIFT -NAFNC4 CODEA FNC1 CODE C -NA-NA-NA-NA-NACODEA FNC1 Table G-6: Special Character Handling Control Codes: Control character encoding into Code 128 Subset A by sending these control codes: ` a through z { | } ~ ASCII 127 = = = = = = = NUL 1 . HEX 41).26 ESC FS GS RS US The following example prints a Code128 Auto bar code: <STX>L D11<CR> 1W1J000000025002512345&G10Z2133021AK<CR> 121100000000100Barcode W1J<CR> E Barcode W1J When scanned this bar code will decode as follows: [C]1234[B]5[F1]10Z2 [C]133021[B]AK(95) Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 233 .Appendix G – Bar Code Details built into the printer. see table below. As an example. HEX 26) followed by an ASCII B (DEC 66. send the ASCII & (DEC 38. Code FNC2 will be encoded.

Appendix G – Bar Code Details W1k: GS1 DataBar (previously “Reduced Space Symbology RSS”) Valid Characters: Type dependent Bar Code Data String Length: Type dependent GS1 DataBar is a continuous. • The encodable character is a subset of ISO 646. GS1 DataBar Expanded consisting of upper and lower case letters. • Data must begin with indicator 0 or 1. • Error detection is mod 79 checksum.UCC item identification GS1 DataBar GS1 DataBar Truncated GS1 DataBar Stacked GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional within a linear symbol that can be scanned omnidirectionally. There are six different types: GS1 DataBar Type Overview* • Encodes a full 14-digit EAN. • Error detection is mod 89 checksum. digits and 20 selected punctuation characters. *Additional data can be encoded in a two-dimensional composite as per specification (see AIM Spec ITS/99-001 for more details). • Encodes EAN. 234 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .UCC item identification plus supplementary AI element strings. • The encodable character set is 0 through 9. linear symbology used for identification in EAN. GS1 DataBar Limited indicator digits of zero or one within a linear symbol. • The maximum numeric data capacity is 74 numeric or 41 alphanumeric. plus the special function character FNC1. Any higher number results in discarded data. (#). • The maximum numeric data capacity is the application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item identification. • The maximum numeric data capacity for is the application identifier plus 14-digit numeric item identification. • Error detection is mod 211 checksum. • Encodes a 14-digit EAN.UCC systems.UCC item identification with • The encodable character set is 0 through 9.

S. column GS1 Type: R. [2] The separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier. and a to z 000 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 Rotation Fixed value. length 13 [1] Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary 2-D data Additional 2-D data [2] The application identifier is not encoded in the symbol nor is the last check digit. D. L R T S D L = = = = = GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 GS1 DataBar DataBar DataBar DataBar DataBar Omnidirectional. the user should enter in a 13-digit value. T. Stacked Omni-Directional. row Label position.2. default = 2 Narrow bar ratio.3. Stacked. extended bar code set Selects GS1 bar code Wide bar ratio.Appendix G – Bar Code Details Syntax for GS1 DataBar (spaces added for readability): a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h Where: Field a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg Valid Inputs 1. The decoding system will display the application identifier and calculate the check digit. Truncated. and a to z 1 to 9. Limited Meaning i j m n…n | p…p h i j m n…n | p…p [1] 1-9 0 to (i-1) 0 to (i-1) 0 to 9 | (optional) 2-D data (optional) Pixel Multiplier X pixels to undercut Y pixels to undercut Numeric linear data. Table G-7: GS1 DataBar Record Structures Examples: The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code: <STX>L D11 1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890 121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR> E Barcode W1k Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 235 . and 4 W1 k 1 to 9. A to Z. A to Z. default = 2 No effect Label position.

Appendix G – Bar Code Details The following example prints an GS1 DataBar bar code with 2-D data: <STX>L D11 1W1k0000001500150R1002001234567890|123456-99/99/99 121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR> E Barcode W1k The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Truncated bar code: Barcode W1k <STX>L D11 1W1k0000001500150T1002001234567890 121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR> E The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked bar code: Barcode W1k <STX>L D11 1W1k0000001500150S1002001234567890 121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR> E The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Stacked Omni-Directional bar code: <STX>L D11 1W1k0000001500150D1002001234567890 121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR> E Barcode W1k The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Limited bar code: Barcode W1k <STX>L D11 1W1k0000001500150L1001501234567890 121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR> E Syntax for the GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code (spaces added for readability): a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h Where: i j m nn p…p | q…q 236 Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual .

and a to z 1 to 9. and a to z 000 0000 to 9999 0000 to 9999 E 1-9 0 to (i-1) 0 to (i-1) 2-22. When using additional 2-D composite data. A to Z. the sequence width must be at least 4.3. minimum one digit Example: The following example prints a Planet Code bar code: <STX>L D11 1W1L4405001000100123456789 E Barcode W1L Class Series 2 Programmer’s Manual 237 . even only 0 to 9 | (optional) 2-D data (optional) [2] Meaning Rotation Fixed value. default = 2 No effect Label position. including alphanumerics Vertical bar separates primary linear data from secondary 2-D data Additional 2-D data [1] Separator row height for two-dimensional composite is fixed at one times the pixel multiplier. extended bar code set Selects GS1 bar code Wide bar ratio. row Label position. Table G-8: GS1 DataBar Expanded Record Structure Example: The following example prints an GS1 DataBar Expanded bar code. column GS1 Type: E= GS1 DataBar Expanded Pixel Multiplier X pixels to undercut Y pixels to undercut Segments per row Subset of ISO646. <STX>L D11 1W1k0000001500150E100022001234567890 121100000000100Barcode W1k<CR> E Barcode W1k W1L: Planet Code Valid Characters: 0-9 Variable length. default = 2 Narrow bar ratio.Appendix G – Bar Code Details Field a W1 k c d eee ffff gggg h i j m nn p…p | q…q [1] [2] Valid Inputs 1.2. and 4 W1 k 1 to 9. A to Z.

52. #. Bar Code 2 or 3 (Bar Code 2 has a maximum of 8 digits or 5 alphanumeric characters. while Bar Code 3 has a maximum of 15 digits or 10 alphanumeric characters). 87. extended bar code set Lowercase selects the Australia Post bar code. and the height and ratios are fixed according to the specification (see “Customer Barcoding Technical Specifications” from Australia Post for more information). 45. Syntax for the Australia Post 4-State Bar Code (spaces added for readability): a W1 m c d eee ffff gggg hh iiiiiiii j…j Where: Field a W1 m c d eee ffff gggg Valid Inputs 1. row Label